This is a modern-English version of English Grammar in Familiar Lectures: Accompanied by a compendium, embracing a new systematic order of parsing, a new system of punctuation, exercises in false syntax, and a system of philosophical grammar, in notes, to which are added an appendix and a key to the exercises : designed for the use of schools and private learners, originally written by Kirkham, Samuel.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR,
IN
FAMILIAR LECTURES;
ACCOMPANIED BY A COMPENDIUM EMBRACING
A NEW SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING
A NEW SYSTEM OF PUNCTUATION,
EXERCISES IN FALSE SYNTAX,
AND
A SYSTEM OF PHILOSOPHICAL GRAMMAR, IN NOTES:
TO WHICH ARE ADDED,
AN APPENDIX AND A KEY TO THE EXERCISES DESIGNED FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE LEARNERS.
BY SAMUEL KIRKHAM.
STEREOTYPE EDITION
NEW YORK
ROBERT B. COLLINS,
254 PEARL STREET.
Southern District of New-York, ss.
Southern District of New York, ss.
BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the 22d day of August, A.D. 1829, in the L. S. 54th year of the Independence of the United States of America, Samuel Kirkham, of the said district, hath deposited in this office the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as author, in the words following, to wit:
BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the 22nd day of August, A.D. 1829, in the L. S. 54th year of the Independence of the United States of America, Samuel Kirkham, of the said district, has deposited in this office the title of a book, the rights of which he claims as the author, in the following words:
"English Grammar in familiar Lectures, accompanied by a Compendium, embracing a new systematic order of Parsing, a new system of Punctuation, exercises in false Syntax, and a System of Philosophical Grammar in notes: to which are added an Appendix, and a Key to the Exercises: designed for the use of Schools and Private Learners. By Samuel Kirkham. Eleventh Edition, enlarged and improved." In conformity to the act of Congress of the United States, entitled "an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the time therein mentioned." And also to an act entitled "an act supplementary to an act entitled an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned, and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical and other prints."
"English Grammar in familiar Lectures, along with a Compendium, featuring a new systematic approach to Parsing, a new system of Punctuation, exercises in incorrect Syntax, and a System of Philosophical Grammar in notes: along with an Appendix and a Key to the Exercises: created for Schools and Private Learners. By Samuel Kirkham. Eleventh Edition, expanded and improved." In accordance with the act of Congress of the United States, titled "an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and owners of such copies, during the specified time." And also in accordance with an act titled "an act supplementary to an act titled an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and owners of such copies, during the specified times, and extending the benefits to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical and other prints."
FRED. J. BETTS, Clerk of the Southern District of New-York.
FRED. J. BETTS, Clerk of the Southern District of New York.
AN ESSAY ON ELOCUTION,
DESIGNED FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE LEARNERS
BY SAMUEL KIRKHAM.
This work is mainly designed as a Reading-Book for Schools. In the first part of it, the principles of reading are developed and explained in a scientific and practical manner, and so familiarly illustrated in their application to practical examples as to enable even the juvenile mind very readily to comprehend their nature and character, their design and use, and thus to acquire that high degree of excellence, both, in reading and speaking, which all desire, but to which few attain.
This book is primarily intended as a reading resource for schools. In the first section, the principles of reading are discussed and explained in a scientific and practical way, presented with clear examples to help even younger readers easily understand their nature, purpose, and application. This approach aims to help everyone achieve a high level of skill in both reading and speaking, something that many aspire to but few actually reach.
The last part of the work, contains Selections from the greatest master-pieces of rhetorical and poetical composition, both ancient and modern. Many of these selections are taken from the most elegant and classical American authors—writers whose noble productions have already shed an unfading lustre, and stamped immortality upon the literature of our country.—In the select part of the work, rhetorical marks are also employed to point out the application of the principles laid down in the first part.—The very favorable reception of the work by the public, and its astonishingly rapid introduction into schools, since its first publication in 1833, excites in the author the most sanguine hopes in regard to its future success.
The last part of the work includes Selections from the greatest masterpieces of rhetorical and poetic writing, both ancient and modern. Many of these selections are drawn from the most elegant and classic American authors—writers whose remarkable works have already left a lasting impact and brought immortality to our country's literature. In the selected part of the work, rhetorical marks are also used to highlight the application of the principles outlined in the first part. The very positive reception of the work by the public, along with its incredibly quick adoption in schools since its first publication in 1833, fills the author with great hope for its future success.
NOTICES.
After a careful perusal of this work, we are decidedly of opinion, that it is the only successful attempt of the kind. The rules are copious, and the author's explanations and illustrations are happily adapted to the comprehension of learners. No school should be without this book, and it ought to find a place in the library of every gentleman who values the attainment of a just and forcible elocution.—Pittsburgh Mer. April, 1834.
After carefully reviewing this work, we strongly believe that it is the only successful attempt of its kind. The rules are extensive, and the author's explanations and illustrations are well-suited for learners. Every school should have this book, and it should be in the library of every person who values achieving clear and powerful speech.—Pittsburgh Mer. April, 1834.
Mr. Kirkham has given rules for inflections and emphasis, and has followed them by illustrative examples, and these by remarks upon the inflection which he has adopted, and the reasons for his preference of one inflection to another—a most admirable plan for such a work. Copious examples occur in which all the various inflections and the shades of emphasis are distinguished with great accuracy and clearness. The catechetical appendages of each chapter, give the work new value in a school, and the selections made for the exercise of scholars, evince good taste and judgment. U.S. Gazette, Philadelphia, Sept. 17, 1834.
Mr. Kirkham has provided guidelines for inflections and emphasis, and he has illustrated them with examples, followed by explanations of the inflections he chose and why he preferred one over another—a really excellent approach for this type of work. There are plenty of examples that show the different inflections and the nuances of emphasis with great precision and clarity. The question-and-answer sections at the end of each chapter add significant value for schools, and the selections made for student practice demonstrate good taste and judgment. U.S. Gazette, Philadelphia, Sept. 17, 1834.
The Essay now before us, needs not depend on any former work of its author for a borrowed reputation; it has intrinsic merits of its own. It lays down principles clearly and concisely. It presents the reader with many new and judicious selections, both in prose and poetry; and altogether evinces great industry combined with taste and ingenuity.—Courier of Upper Canada, York, Oct. 12, 1833.
The essay in front of us doesn't need to rely on any previous works by its author for recognition; it has its own inherent value. It outlines principles clearly and succinctly. It offers the reader a variety of new and thoughtful selections, both in prose and poetry; and overall, it shows a great deal of effort mixed with taste and creativity.—Courier of Upper Canada, York, Oct. 12, 1833.
Of the talent and judgment of Mr. Kirkham, we have already had occasion to speak in terms of honest praise. His work on Elocution raises him still higher in our estimation.—The book would be of great utility in schools—such a one as has long been wanted; and we are glad to see it forthcoming.—Baltimore Visitor, July, 1833.
Of Mr. Kirkham's talent and judgment, we've already had the chance to speak highly. His work on Elocution elevates our opinion of him even more. This book will be really useful in schools—it's exactly what we've needed for a long time, and we're happy to see it coming out. —Baltimore Visitor, July, 1833.
Every facility for teaching Elocution, which I have so often needed, but never before found, is exactly furnished in this work:—principles are clearly and concisely laid down, and are very happily adapted to the comprehension of the learner. Thoroughly convinced of its utility, I shall lose no time in introducing it into my school. Hartford, Conn. Aug.. 20, 1834. NATHANIEL WEBB.
Every resource for teaching Elocution that I've often needed but never found before is perfectly provided in this work:—the principles are clearly and concisely presented, and are very well suited to the learner's understanding. Fully convinced of its value, I will quickly introduce it into my school. Hartford, Conn. Aug.. 20, 1834. NATHANIEL WEBB.
RECOMMENDATIONS.
It is well known that the recommendations which generally accompany new books have very little weight with the public. This is as it should be, for that work which rests more on its written testimonials, than on its intrinsic merits for support, asserts no claims to permanent patronage. But recommendations which analyze the merits of a work, and which, by exhibiting its prominent features in a striking light, are calculated to carry conviction to the reader that the system recommended is meritorious, the author is proud to have it in his power to present in this volume. The following are some of the numerous testimonials which he has received, and for which he tenders his grateful acknowledgments to those literary gentlemen to whose liberality and politeness he is indebted for them. More than six hundred others presented to the author, and many of which are equally flattering with these, he has not room to insert.
It’s well known that the recommendations that usually come with new books don't carry much weight with the public. This is how it should be, as work that relies more on written endorsements than on its own merits doesn't deserve lasting support. However, recommendations that discuss a work's merits and highlight its key features in a compelling way can convince readers that the suggested system is worthwhile. The author is pleased to share some of these testimonials in this volume. Here are some of the many endorsements he has received, and he expresses his gratitude to the literary individuals who generously provided them. Due to space limitations, he cannot include more than six hundred others that are equally complimentary.
The following notice of this work is extracted from the "Western Review." This journal is ably conducted by the Rev. Timothy Flint, author of "Francis Berrian," "History and Geography of the Miss. Valley," and many other popular and valuable works.
The following notice of this work is taken from the "Western Review." This journal is expertly managed by Rev. Timothy Flint, the author of "Francis Berrian," "History and Geography of the Miss. Valley," and many other well-known and valuable works.
We had not, at that time, seen Mr. Kirkham's "Grammar in familiar Lectures," but have since given it a cursory perusal. If we comprehend the author's design, it is not so much to introduce new principles, as to render more easy and intelligible those which have been long established, and to furnish additional facilities to an accurate and thorough knowledge of our language. In this we think he has been successful.
We hadn't seen Mr. Kirkham's "Grammar in Familiar Lectures" at that time, but we've since skimmed through it. If we understand the author's intention, it's not so much to present new concepts, but to make the long-established ones easier to understand and provide more tools for gaining a clear and comprehensive understanding of our language. In this, we believe he has succeeded.
It is to be expected that a modest, unassuming writer, on presenting himself before the public tribunal as an author, will, as far as is consistent with his plan, avail himself of the authority of such as have written well on the subject before him. Mr. Kirkham has accordingly followed Mr. Murray in the old beaten track of English writers on grammar, in the general principles of his science; endeavoring, at the same time, to avoid whatever appeared to be erroneous or absurd in the writings of that author, and adopting an entirely new arrangement. The most useful matter contained in the treatise of Mr. Murray, is embraced in this; but in the definitions and rules, it is simplified, and rendered much more intelligible. Though our author follows Mr. Murray, in the general principles of his work, he has, in numerous instances, differed from him, pursuing a course that appears to be his own, and introducing some valuable improvements.
A modest, unassuming writer, when presenting himself to the public as an author, is expected to reference the authority of those who have previously written well on the subject, as much as it fits his plan. Mr. Kirkham has therefore followed Mr. Murray's traditional approach to English grammar, sticking to its general principles. At the same time, he has tried to eliminate anything that seemed incorrect or unreasonable in that author's work and has created a completely new organization for his material. The most useful content from Mr. Murray's treatise is included here, but it has been simplified and made much more understandable in the definitions and rules. While our author follows Mr. Murray’s overall principles, he often takes a different path, carving out his own approach and introducing some valuable improvements.
Among these may be mentioned some additional rules and explanatory notes in syntax, the arrangement of the parts of speech, the mode of explaining them, manner of parsing, manner of explaining some of the pronouns, and the use of a synopsis which presents the essentials of the science at one view, and is well calculated to afford assistance to learners.
Among these are some extra rules and explanations regarding syntax, the order of parts of speech, how to explain them, how to parse them, the way to explain certain pronouns, and the use of a summary that showcases the key points of the subject at a glance, making it very helpful for learners.
In his arrangement of the parts of speech, Mr. Kirkham seems to have endeavored to follow the order of nature; and we are not able to see how he could have done better. The noun and verb, as being the most important parts of speech, are first explained, and afterwards those which are considered in a secondary and subordinate character. By following this order, he has avoided the absurdity so common among authors, of defining the minor parts before their principals, of which they were designed to be the appendages, and has rationally prepared the way for conducting the learner by easy advances to a correct view of the science.
In his arrangement of the parts of speech, Mr. Kirkham seems to have tried to follow the order of nature; and we don't see how he could have done any better. The noun and verb, as the most important parts of speech, are explained first, followed by those that are considered secondary and subordinate. By following this order, he has avoided the common mistake among authors of defining the minor parts before the main ones, which they were meant to support, and has thoughtfully paved the way for the learner to gradually understand the subject correctly.
In his illustrations of the various subjects contained in his work, our author appears to have aimed, not at a flowery style, nor at the appearance of being learned, but at being understood. The clearness and perspicuity of his remarks, and their application to familiar objects, are well calculated to arrest the attention, and aid the understanding of the pupil, and thereby to lessen the labor of the instructor. The principles of the science are simplified, and rendered so perfectly easy of comprehension, we should think no ordinary mind, having such help, could find them difficult. It is in this particular that the work appears to possess its chief merit, and on this account it cannot fail of being preferred to many others.
In his illustrations of the various topics in his work, our author seems to have aimed for clarity rather than a flowery style or looking knowledgeable. The clarity and straightforwardness of his comments, along with their connection to everyday objects, are designed to grab the reader's attention and help students understand, which in turn makes it easier for the teacher. The principles of the science are simplified and made completely easy to understand, so we believe no typical person, with such assistance, should find them challenging. This focus is where the work really shines, making it a preferred choice over many others.
It gives us pleasure to remark, in reference to the success of the amiable and modest author whose work is before us, that we quote from the fifth edition.
It’s a pleasure to note, regarding the success of the kind and humble author whose work we have here, that we are quoting from the fifth edition.
Cincinnati, Aug. 24, 1827.
Cincinnati, Aug. 24, 1827.
The following is from the pen of a gentleman of the Bar, formerly a distinguished Classical teacher. [Extract from the "National Crisis."]
The following is from the writing of a lawyer who used to be a well-known Classical teacher. [Extract from the "National Crisis."]
As a friend to literature, and especially to genuine merit, it is with peculiar pleasure I allude to a notice in a late paper of this city, in which Mr. S. Kirkham proposes to deliver a course of Lectures on English Grammar. To such as feel interested in acquiring a general and practical knowledge of this useful science an opportunity is now presented which ought not to be neglected. Having myself witnessed, in several instances, within the last ten months, the practical results of Mr. Kirkham's plan, I am enabled to give a decisive opinion of its merits. The extensive knowledge acquired in one course by his class in Pittsburgh, and the great proficiency evinced by his classes elsewhere, are a demonstration of the utility and superiority of his method of teaching, and a higher encomium on him than I am able to bestow.
As someone who values literature, especially true quality, I'm pleased to mention a recent announcement in a local paper where Mr. S. Kirkham is planning to give a series of Lectures on English Grammar. For those interested in gaining a solid and practical understanding of this important subject, an opportunity has now arisen that shouldn't be missed. Having personally witnessed the successful results of Mr. Kirkham's approach in several cases over the past ten months, I can confidently speak to its effectiveness. The extensive knowledge gained by his class in Pittsburgh during one course and the impressive skills shown by his classes in other locations clearly demonstrate the value and excellence of his teaching method, which is a greater praise than I can express.
The principles on which Mr. Kirkham's "New system of Grammar" is predicated, are judiciously compiled, and happily and briefly expressed; but the great merit of his work consists in the lucid illustrations accompanying the principles, and the simple and gradual manner in which it conducts the learner along from step to step through the successive stages of the science. The explanations blended with the theory, are addressed to the understanding of the pupil in a manner so familiar, that they cannot fail to excite in him a deep interest; and whatever system is calculated to bring into requisition the mental powers, must, I conceive, be productive of good results. In my humble opinion, the system of teaching introduced into this work, will enable a diligent pupil to acquire, without any other aid, a practical knowledge of grammar, in less than one-fourth part of the time usually devoted.
The principles behind Mr. Kirkham's "New System of Grammar" are wisely compiled and expressed clearly and concisely. However, the real strength of his work lies in the clear examples that accompany these principles and the straightforward way it guides the learner from one step to the next through the different stages of the subject. The explanations integrated with the theory are presented in such a familiar way that they’re bound to spark a deep interest in the student. Any system designed to engage mental abilities should yield positive outcomes. In my opinion, the teaching approach introduced in this work will allow a dedicated student to gain a practical understanding of grammar in less than one-fourth of the usual time spent on it.
My views of Mr. Kirkham's system are thus publicly given, with the greater pleasure, on account of the literary empiricisms which have been so extensively practised in many parts of the western country.
My thoughts on Mr. Kirkham's system are now openly shared, with even more pleasure, due to the literary experiments that have been so widely used in various areas of the western region.
Cincinnati, April 26, 1826.
Cincinnati, April 26, 1826.
From Mr. Blood, Principal of the Chambersburgh Academy, Pa.
From Mr. Blood, Principal of the Chambersburgh Academy, PA.
Mr. Kirkham,—It is now almost twenty years since I became a teacher of youth, and, during this period, I have not only consulted all, but have used many of the different systems of English grammar that have fallen in my way; and, sir, I do assure you, without the least wish to flatter, that yours far exceeds any I have yet seen.
Mr. Kirkham,—It has been nearly twenty years since I started teaching young people, and during this time, I have looked into and utilized many different English grammar systems that I've come across. I can honestly say, without trying to flatter you, that yours is far better than any I have seen so far.
Your arrangement and systematic order of parsing are most excellent; and experience has convinced me, (having used it, and it only, for the last twelve or thirteen months), that a scholar will learn more of the nature and principles of our language in one quarter, from your system, than in a whole year from any other I had previously used. I do, therefore, most cheerfully and earnestly recommend it to the public at large, and especially to those who, anxious to acquire a knowledge of our language, are destitute of the advantages of an instructer.
Your organization and systematic approach to parsing are outstanding; and my experience, having used it exclusively for the past twelve or thirteen months, has shown me that a student will learn more about the nature and principles of our language in one quarter using your system than in a whole year with any other method I had used before. Therefore, I wholeheartedly and enthusiastically recommend it to the general public, especially to those who, eager to learn our language, lack the benefits of a teacher.
Yours, very respectfully, SAMUEL BLOOD.
Sincerely, SAMUEL BLOOD.
Chambersburgh Academy, Feb. 12, 1825.
Chambersburgh Academy, Feb 12, 1825.
From Mr. N.R. Smith, editor of a valuable literary journal, styled "The Hesperus."
From Mr. N.R. Smith, editor of a respected literary magazine called "The Hesperus."
Mr. Kirkham,
Mr. Kirkham,
Sir, I have examined your Lectures on English Grammar with that degree of minuteness which enables me to yield my unqualified approbation of the work as a grammatical system. The engaging manner in which you have explained the elements of grammar, and accommodated them to the capacities of youth, is an ample illustration of the utility of your plan. In addition to this, the critical attention you have paid to an analytical development of grammatical principles, while it is calculated to encourage the perseverance of young students in the march of improvement, is sufficient, also, to employ the researches of the literary connoisseur. I trust that your valuable compilation will be speedily introduced into schools and academies.
Sir, I have carefully reviewed your Lectures on English Grammar and can confidently say that I fully approve of the work as a solid grammatical system. The engaging way you've explained the basics of grammar and tailored them to young learners clearly shows how useful your approach is. Additionally, the detailed attention you've given to an analytical development of grammatical principles not only encourages young students to keep improving but also appeals to the interests of literary enthusiasts. I hope your valuable book will soon be used in schools and academies.
With respect, yours, N.R. SMITH, A.M.
With respect, yours, N.R. SMITH, A.M.
Pittsburgh, March 22, 1825.
Pittsburgh, March 22, 1825.
From Mr. Jungmann, Principal of the Frederick Lutheran Academy:—Extract.
From Mr. Jungmann, Principal of the Frederick Lutheran Academy:—Excerpt.
Having carefully examined Mr. S. Kirkham's new system of "English Grammar in familiar Lectures," I am satisfied that the pre-eminent advantages it possesses over our common systems, will soon convince the public, that it is not one of those feeble efforts of quackery which have so often obtruded upon our notice. Its decided superiority over all other systems, consists in adapting the subject-matter to the capacity of the young learner, and the happy mode adopted of communicating it to his mind in a manner so clear and simple, that he can easily comprehend the nature and the application of every principle that comes before him.
Having looked closely at Mr. S. Kirkham's new system of "English Grammar in Familiar Lectures," I'm convinced that its significant advantages over traditional systems will soon show the public that it's not just another weak attempt at quackery that we've often seen. Its clear superiority over all other systems lies in how it tailors the content to suit the understanding of young learners, along with the effective way it presents this information in such a clear and simple manner that they can easily grasp the nature and application of each principle presented to them.
In short, all the intricacies of the science are elucidated so clearly, I am confident that even a private learner, of common docility, can, by perusing this system attentively acquire a better practical knowledge of this important branch of literature in three months, than is ordinarily obtained in one year.
In short, all the details of the subject are explained so clearly that I'm sure anyone who is willing to learn can gain a better practical understanding of this important area of literature in three months by studying this system attentively than they would usually get in one year.
Frederick, Md. Sept 17, 1824. JOHN E. JUNGMANN.
Frederick, MD. Sept 17, 1824. JOHN E. JUNGMANN.
Extract: from De Witt Clinton, late Gov. of New-York.
Extract: from De Witt Clinton, former Governor of New York.
I consider the Compendium of English Grammar, by Samuel Kirkham, a work deserving encouragement, and well calculated to facilitate the acquisition of this useful science. DE WITT CLINTON.
I think the Compendium of English Grammar by Samuel Kirkham is a valuable work that deserves support and is great for helping people learn this important subject. DE WITT CLINTON.
Albany, Sept 25, 1824.
Albany, Sept 25, 1824.
S. Kirkham, Esq.—I have examined your Grammar with attention, and with a particular view to benefit the Institution under my charge. I am fully satisfied, that it is the best form in which Murray's principles have been given to the public. The lectures are ample, and given in so familiar and easy language, as to be readily understood, even by a tyro in grammar.
S. Kirkham, Esq.—I have looked over your Grammar carefully, specifically to benefit the Institution I oversee. I'm completely convinced that it is the best form in which Murray's principles have been presented to the public. The lectures are thorough and written in such simple and clear language that they can be easily understood, even by a beginner in grammar.
I feel it due to you to say, that I commenced the examination of your work, under a strong prejudice against it, in consequence of the numerous "improved systems" with which the public has been inundated, of late, most of which are by no means improvements on Murray, but the productions of individuals whom a "little grammar has rendered grammatically insane." My convictions, therefore, are the result of investigation. I wish you, Sir, success in your publication.
I think it's important to let you know that I started reviewing your work with some skepticism because of the many "improved systems" that have flooded the market recently. Most of these are not real improvements over Murray's work but are actually created by people who have become "grammatically confused" due to a "little grammar." So, my opinions are based on thorough research. I wish you success with your publication, Sir.
Respectfully, EBER. WHEATON,
Respectfully, Eber Wheaton.
Pr. of Mechanics' Society School
Pr. of Mechanics' Society School
With the opinion of Mr. Wheaton respecting Mr. Kirkham's English Grammar, we heartily concur.
We completely agree with Mr. Wheaton's opinion on Mr. Kirkham's English Grammar.
NATHAN STARK, Pr. Acad. | ||
(Rev.) JOHN JOHNSTON, | ||
Newburgh, Aug. 4, 1829. | (Rev.) WM. S. HEYER, |
From the Rev. C.P. McIlvaine, and others.
From Rev. C.P. McIlvaine and others.
So far as I have examined the plan of grammatical instruction by Samuel Kirkham I am well satisfied that it meets the wants of elementary schools in this branch, and deserves to be patronised. CHARLES P. McILVAINE.
So far as I have looked into Samuel Kirkham's grammatical instruction plan, I believe that it meets the needs of elementary schools in this subject and deserves support. CHARLES P. McILVAINE.
Brooklyn, L.I. July 9, 1829.
Brooklyn, NY, July 9, 1829.
We fully concur in the above, | ANDREW HAGEMAN, |
E.M. JOHNSON. |
EXTRACT.
EXTRACT.
From the partial examination which I have given Mr. S. Kirkham's English Grammar, I do not hesitate to recommend it to the public as the best of the class I have ever seen, and as filling up an important and almost impassable chasm in works on grammatical science. D.L. CARROLL.
From my brief review of Mr. S. Kirkham's English Grammar, I confidently recommend it to the public as the best of its kind I have ever come across, and it effectively addresses a significant and nearly unbridgeable gap in works on grammatical science. D.L. CARROLL.
Brooklyn, L.I. June 29, 1829.
Brooklyn, NY June 29, 1829.
We fully concur in the foregoing recommendation. | B.B. HALLOCK, |
E. KINGSLEY, | |
T.S. MAYBON. |
From A.W. Dodge, Esq.
From A.W. Dodge, Esq.
New-York, July 15, 1829.
New York, July 15, 1829.
The experience of every one at all acquainted with the business of instruction, must have taught him that the study of grammar, important as it is to every class of learners, is almost invariably a dry and uninteresting study to young beginners, and for the very obvious reason, that the systems in general use in the schools, are far beyond the comprehension of youth, and ill adapted to their years. Hence it is, that their lessons in this department of learning, are considered as tasks, and if committed at all, committed to the memory, without enlightening their understandings; so that many a pupil who has been through the English grammar, is totally unacquainted with the nature even of the simplest parts of speech.
The experience of anyone involved in teaching must have shown them that studying grammar, as important as it is for every group of learners, tends to be a dry and uninteresting subject for young beginners. This is obviously because the systems commonly used in schools are far beyond the understanding of youth and not suited to their age. As a result, their lessons in this area are seen as tasks, and if they are memorized at all, it's done without truly understanding the material. Many students who have gone through English grammar end up completely unaware of even the most basic parts of speech.
The work of Mr. Kirkham on grammar, is well calculated to remedy these evils, and supply a deficiency which has been so long and so seriously felt in the imperfect education of youth in the elementary knowledge of their own language. By a simple, familiar, and lucid method of treating the subject, he has rendered what was before irksome and unprofitable, pleasing and instructive. In one word, the grammar of Mr. Kirkham furnishes a clew by which the youthful mind is guided through the intricate labyrinth of verbs, nouns and pronouns; and the path which has been heretofore so difficult and uninviting, as to dampen the ardor of youth, and waste their energies in fruitless attempts to surmount its obstacles, is cleared of these obstructions by this pioneer to the youthful mind, and planted, at every turn, with friendly guide-boards to direct them in the right road. The slightest perusal of the work alluded to, will convince even the most skeptical of the truth of these remarks, and satisfy every one who is not wedded by prejudice to old rules and forms, that it will meet the wants of the community.
The work of Mr. Kirkham on grammar is well designed to address these issues and fill a gap that has been deeply felt in the inadequate education of young people in the basic knowledge of their own language. Through a simple, approachable, and clear method of presenting the topic, he has transformed what was once tedious and unhelpful into something enjoyable and educational. In short, Mr. Kirkham's grammar provides a clue that guides young minds through the complex maze of verbs, nouns, and pronouns; the path that was previously so challenging and uninviting, discouraging youth and draining their energy in futile efforts to overcome its hurdles, is now cleared by this pioneer for the young mind and marked at every turn with helpful signposts to steer them in the right direction. A quick read of the mentioned work will persuade even the most doubtful of the validity of these statements and assure anyone not bound by outdated rules and customs that it will fulfill the needs of the community.
ALLEN W. DODGE.
ALLEN W. DODGE.
Philadelphia, Aug. 10, 1829
Philadelphia, Aug. 10, 1829
Having, for several years, been engaged in lecturing on the science of grammar and, during this period, having thoroughly tested the merits of Mr. S. Kirkham's system of "English Grammar in Familiar Lectures" by using it as a text-book for my classes, I take pleasure in giving this testimonial of my cordial approbation of the work. Mr. Kirkham has attempted to improve upon this branch of science, chiefly by unfolding and explaining the principles of grammar in a manner so clear and simple, as to adapt them completely to the understanding of the young learner, and by adopting a new arrangement, which enables the pupil to commit the principles by a simultaneous application of them to practical examples. The public may rest assured, that he has been successful in his attempt in a pre-eminent degree. I make this assertion under a full conviction that it will be corroborated by every candid judge of the science who becomes acquainted with the practical advantages of this manual.
For several years, I’ve been teaching grammar, and during this time, I’ve thoroughly tested Mr. S. Kirkham's system, "English Grammar in Familiar Lectures," by using it as a textbook for my classes. I'm happy to give this testimonial, expressing my strong approval of the work. Mr. Kirkham has tried to improve this field of study by clearly and simply explaining the principles of grammar, making them easy to understand for young learners. He has also created a new arrangement that allows students to learn the principles by applying them to practical examples at the same time. The public can be confident that he has been exceptionally successful in this endeavor. I state this with the full belief that every fair judge of the subject will agree, once they see the practical benefits of this manual.
The explicit brevity and accuracy of the rules and definitions, the novel, the striking, the lucid, and critical illustrations accompanying them, the peculiar and advantageous arrangement of the various parts of the subject, the facilities proffered by the "systematic mode of parsing" adopted, the convenient and judicious introduction and adaptation of the exercises introduced, and the deep researches and critical investigations displayed in the "Philosophical Notes," render this system of grammar so decidedly superior to all others extant, that, to receive general patronage, it needs but to be known.
The clear and concise rules and definitions, the innovative and striking illustrations that go with them, the unique and beneficial organization of the different parts of the topic, the helpful approach of the "systematic mode of parsing" used, the sensible and well-thought-out inclusion of the exercises presented, and the thorough research and critical analysis found in the "Philosophical Notes" make this grammar system definitely better than any others available, and it just needs to be recognized to gain wide support.
My knowledge of this system from experience in teaching it, and witnessing its effects in the hands of private learners, warrants me in saying, that a learner will, by studying this book four months without a teacher, obtain a more clear conception of the nature and proper construction of words and phrases, than is ordinarily obtained in common schools and academies, in five times four months.
My experience teaching this system and seeing its effects on individual learners allows me to say that a student studying this book for four months without a teacher will gain a clearer understanding of the nature and proper construction of words and phrases than what is usually achieved in regular schools and academies, in twenty months.
It is highly gratifying to know, that wherever this system has been circulated, it is very rapidly supplanting those works of dulness which have so long paralyzed the energies of the youth of our country.
It is very satisfying to see that wherever this system has been shared, it is quickly replacing the boring works that have long held back the energy of our country’s youth.
I think the specimens of verbal criticism, additional corrections in orthography and ortheopy, the leading principles of rhetoric, and the improvements in the illustrations generally, which Mr. K. is about introducing into his ELEVENTH EDITION, will render it quite an improvement on the former editions of this work. H. WINCHESTER.
I believe the examples of verbal criticism, extra corrections in spelling and pronunciation, the main principles of rhetoric, and the overall enhancements in the illustrations that Mr. K. is planning to include in his ELEVENTH EDITION will make it a significant improvement over the previous editions of this work. H. WINCHESTER.
From the Rev. S. Center, Principal of a Classical Academy.
From Rev. S. Center, Head of a Classical Academy.
I have examined the last edition of Kirkham's Grammar with peculiar satisfaction. The improvements which appear in it, do, in my estimation, give it a decided preference to any other system now in use. To point out the peculiar qualities which secure to it claims of which no other system can boast, would be, if required, perfectly easy. At present it is sufficient to remark, that it imbodies all that is essentially excellent and useful in other systems, while it is entirely free from that tediousness of method and prolixity of definition which so much perplex and embarrass the learner.
I have looked over the latest edition of Kirkham's Grammar with great satisfaction. The improvements it includes, in my view, make it clearly better than any other system currently available. Highlighting the unique features that set it apart from all others would be quite simple if needed. For now, it's enough to say that it incorporates everything valuable and effective from other systems while avoiding the tedious methods and overly complicated definitions that often confuse and overwhelm learners.
The peculiar excellence of Mr. Kirkham's grammar is, the simplicity of its method, and the plainness of its illustrations. Being conducted by familiar lectures, the teacher and pupil are necessarily brought into agreeable contact by each lesson. Both are improved by the same task, without the slightest suspicion, on the part of the pupil, that there is anything hard, difficult, or obscure in the subject: a conviction, this, which must inevitably precede all efforts, or no proficiency will be made. In a word, the treatise I am recommending, is a practical one; and for that reason, if there were no others to be urged, it ought to be introduced into all our schools and academies. From actual experiment I can attest to the practicability of the plan which the author has adopted. Of this fact any one may be convinced who will take the pains to make the experiment. SAMUEL CENTER.
The unique quality of Mr. Kirkham's grammar is, the simplicity of its method, and the clarity of its examples. Since it's taught through straightforward lectures, the teacher and student naturally connect with each lesson. They both benefit from the same task, without the student ever feeling that the topic is hard, complicated, or unclear: this belief is essential before any real progress can happen. In short, the book I’m endorsing is practical; and for that reason alone, if for no other, it should be included in all our schools and academies. From hands-on experience, I can vouch for the effectiveness of the approach the author has taken. Anyone can verify this simply by trying it out. SAMUEL CENTER.
Albany, July 10, 1829.
Albany, July 10, 1829.
From a communication addressed to S. Kirkham, by the Rev. J. Stockton, author of the "Western Calculator" and "Western Spelling-Book."
From a message sent to S. Kirkham by Rev. J. Stockton, the author of the "Western Calculator" and "Western Spelling-Book."
Dear Sir,—I am much pleased with both the plan and execution of your "English Grammar in Familiar Lectures." In giving a systematic mode of parsing, calculated alike to exercise the understanding and memory of the pupil, and also free the teacher from the drudgery of continued interrogation, you have made your grammar what every elementary school book ought to be—plain, systematic, and easy to be understood.
Dear Sir, — I’m very pleased with both the plan and execution of your "English Grammar in Familiar Lectures." By providing a systematic way of parsing that both challenges the understanding and memory of the student and also relieves the teacher from the drudgery of constant questioning, you've made your grammar exactly what every elementary school book should be—clear, systematic, and easy to understand.
This, with the copious definitions in every part of the work, and other improvements so judiciously introduced, gives it a decisive superiority over the imperfect grammar of Murray, now so generally used. JOSEPH STOCKTON, A.M.
This, along with the extensive definitions throughout the work and other carefully introduced improvements, gives it a clear advantage over the flawed grammar of Murray, which is still widely used. JOSEPH STOCKTON, A.M.
Allegheny-Town, (near Pittsburgh,) March 18, 1825.
Allegheny-Town, (near Pittsburgh,) March 18, 1825.
TO THE ELEVENTH EDITION.
The author is free to acknowledge, that since this treatise first ventured on the wave of public opinion, the gales of patronage which have waited it along, have been far more favorable than he had reason to anticipate. Had any one, on its first appearance, predicted, that the demand for it would call forth twenty-two thousand copies during the past year, the author would have considered the prediction extravagant and chimerical. In gratitude, therefore, to that public which has smiled so propitiously on his humble efforts to advance the cause of learning, he has endeavored, by unremitting attention to the improvement of his work, to render it as useful and as unexceptionable as his time and talents would permit.
The author is happy to admit that since this work first entered the public spotlight, the support he's received has been much better than he expected. If someone had predicted that there would be a demand for twenty-two thousand copies in the last year, the author would have thought that prediction was unrealistic and fanciful. In gratitude to the public that has been so kind to his modest attempts to promote learning, he has worked hard to improve his work, making it as helpful and as reliable as his time and abilities allow.
It is believed that the tenth and eleventh editions have been greatly improved; but the author is apprehensive that his work is not yet as accurate and as much simplified as it may be. If, however, the disadvantages of lingering under a broken constitution, and of being able to devote to this subject only a small portion of his time, snatched from the active pursuits of a business life, (active as far as his imperfect health permits him to be,) are any apology for its defects, he hopes that the candid will set down the apology to his credit. This personal allusion is hazarded with the additional hope, that it will ward off some of the arrows of criticism which may be aimed at him, and render less pointed and poisonous those that may fall upon him. Not that he would beg a truce with the gentlemen critics and reviewers. Any compromise with them would betray a want of self-confidence and moral courage which he would, by no means, be willing to avow. It would, moreover, be prejudicial to his interest; for he is determined, if his life be preserved, to avail himself of the advantages of any judicious and candid criticisms on his production, that may appear, and, two or three years hence, revise his work, and present to the public another and a better edition.
It’s believed that the tenth and eleventh editions have been significantly improved; however, the author fears that his work isn’t quite as accurate or as simplified as it could be. If the challenges of dealing with a weak constitution and only being able to dedicate a small amount of his time to this topic—time taken from his busy working life, as active as his health allows—serve as an explanation for its shortcomings, he hopes that fair-minded readers will consider this as a valid excuse. This personal note is made in the hope that it will deflect some of the criticism aimed at him and make the others less harsh and damaging. Not that he seeks a truce with critics and reviewers. Any compromise with them would show a lack of self-confidence and moral courage that he is not willing to admit. Furthermore, it would be against his interests; he is determined, if he stays healthy, to take advantage of any thoughtful and honest critiques of his work that come up and, in two or three years, revise it, presenting the public with another, improved edition.
The improvements in the tenth edition, consisted mainly in the addition of many important principles; in rendering the illustrations more critical, extensive, accurate, and lucid; in connecting more closely with the genius and philosophy of our language, the general principles adopted; and in adding a brief view of philosophical grammar interspersed in notes. The introduction into the ELEVENTH EDITION, of many verbal criticisms, of additional corrections in orthography and orthoepy, of the leading principles of rhetoric, and of general additions and improvements in various parts of the work, render this edition, it is believed, far preferable to any of the former editions of the work.
The updates in the tenth edition mainly included the addition of many important principles; enhancing the illustrations to be more critical, extensive, accurate, and clear; more closely linking the general principles adopted with the essence and philosophy of our language; and adding a brief overview of philosophical grammar throughout the notes. The introduction of many verbal critiques in the ELEVENTH EDITION, additional corrections in spelling and pronunciation, the key principles of rhetoric, and various additions and improvements throughout the work make this edition, it is believed, far superior to any of the previous editions of the work.
Perhaps some will regard the philosophical notes as a useless exhibition of pedantry. If so, the author's only apology is, that some investigations of this nature seemed to be called for by a portion of the community whose minds, of late, appear to be under the influence of a kind of philosophical mania; and to such these notes are respectfully submitted for just what they may deem their real value. The author's own opinion on this point, is, that they proffer no material advantages to common learners; but that they may profitably engage the attention of the curious, and perhaps impart a degree of interest to the literary connoisseur.
Some might see the philosophical notes as a pointless show of pretentiousness. If that's the case, the author's only excuse is that some investigations like these seemed necessary for a segment of society whose thoughts lately seem to be influenced by a sort of philosophical mania; and these notes are respectfully presented to them for whatever value they may find in them. The author believes that they don't offer any real benefits to everyday learners, but they might engage the interest of the curious and maybe spark some interest for literary enthusiasts.
New-York, August 22, 1820.
New York, August 22, 1820.
CONTENTS.
- Address to the learner
- A, an, one: i, ii
- And
- Adjectives: i, ii
- Adverbs
- Agreement of words
- Anomalies
- Articles
- Because
- But, than, as: i, ii, iii
- Case
- Nominative: i, ii
- Possessive
- Objective: i, ii
- Nominative case independent: i, ii, iii, iv
- Nominative case absolute: i, ii
- Apposition of cases: i, ii
- Nominative and objective after the verb to be
- Active, passive, and neuter nominatives
- Conjunctions
- Conjugation of regular verbs
- Derivation (all the philosophical notes treat of derivation): i, ii, iii
- Etymology
- Exercises in false syntax
- Figures of speech
- Gender
- Government
- Grammar, general division of
- Have: i, ii
- Idioms
- Interjections
- It
- If
- Key to the exercises
- Letters, sounds of
- Like
- Manner of meaning of words: i, ii
- Nouns
- Orthography: i, ii
- Parsing
- Participles
- Poetry transposed
- Prepositions
- Pronouns
- Pronunciation
- Prosody
- Provincialisms
- Punctuation
- Rhetoric
- Rules of syntax
- Sentences, definitions of simple and compound
- Standard of grammatical accuracy: i, ii
- Syntax
- To
- Tenses: i, ii
- The: i, ii
- That: i, ii
- Terminations: i, ii, iii, iv, v
- Verbs: i, ii
- Versification
- Worth: i, ii
- What, which, who: i, ii, iii
- You
PREFACE
There appears to be something assuming in the act of writing, and thrusting into public notice, a new work on a subject which has already employed many able pens; for who would presume to do this, unless he believed his production to be, in some respects, superior to every one of the kind which had preceded it? Hence, in presenting to the public this system of English Grammar, the author is aware that an apology will be looked for, and that the arguments on which that apology is grounded, must inevitably undergo a rigid scrutiny. Apprehensive, however, that no explanatory effort, on his part, would shield him from the imputation of arrogance by such as are blinded by self-interest, or by those who are wedded to the doctrines mid opinions of his predecessors, with them he will not attempt a compromise, being, in a great measure, indifferent either to their praise or their censure. But with the candid, he is willing to negotiate an amicable treaty, knowing that they are always ready to enter into it on honorable terms. In this negotiation he asks nothing more than merely to rest the merits of his work on its practical utility, believing that, if it prove uncommonly successful in facilitating the progress of youth in the march of mental improvement, that will be its best apology.
There seems to be a certain arrogance in writing and publicly presenting a new work on a topic that has already been covered by many skilled writers. Who would take this on unless they believed their work is, in some ways, better than all the previous ones? So, as the author presents this English Grammar system to the public, he knows that an apology will be expected and that the reasons for this apology will be closely examined. However, he is concerned that no explanation he provides will protect him from being labeled arrogant by those who are driven by self-interest or by those who cling to the beliefs and opinions of his predecessors. He won't seek a compromise with them, as he is largely indifferent to their praise or criticism. But for those who are fair-minded, he is open to a friendly discussion, recognizing that they are always willing to engage on fair terms. In this discussion, he only wants to argue that the value of his work lies in its practical usefulness, believing that if it significantly helps young people improve their thinking skills, that will be the best justification for it.
When we bring into consideration the numerous productions of those learned philologists who have labored so long, and, as many suppose, so successfully, in establishing the principles of our language; and, more especially, when we view the labors of some of our modern compilers, who have displayed so much ingenuity and acuteness in attempting to arrange those principles in such a manner as to form a correct and an easy medium of mental conference; it does, indeed, appear a little like presumption for a young man to enter upon a subject which has so frequently engaged the attention and talents of men distinguished for their erudition. The author ventures forward, however, under the conviction, that most of his predecessors are very deficient, at least, in manner, if not in matter; and this conviction, he believes, will be corroborated by a majority of the best judges in community. It is admitted, that many valuable improvements have been made by some of our late writers, who have endeavored to simplify and render this subject intelligible to the young learner, but they have all overlooked what the author considers a very important object, namely, a systematic order of parsing; and nearly all have neglected to develop and explain the principles in such a manner as to enable the learner, without great difficulty, to comprehend their nature and use.
When we think about the many works created by those knowledgeable linguists who have spent so much time, and as many believe, achieved a lot in defining the principles of our language; and especially when we look at the efforts of some of our modern writers, who have shown great creativity and insight in trying to organize these principles into a clear and easy way for communication; it does seem a bit presumptuous for a young person to tackle a topic that has often occupied the attention and skills of highly educated individuals. However, the author steps forward, convinced that many of his predecessors lack sufficient depth, at least in style, if not in content; and he believes that most of the community's best judges will agree. It's acknowledged that some recent writers have made valuable improvements by trying to simplify and clarify this subject for young learners, but they have all missed what the author sees as a key goal, namely, a systematic order of parsing; and nearly all have failed to develop and explain the principles in a way that allows learners to easily understand their nature and use.
By some this system will, no doubt, be discarded on account of its simplicity; while to others its simplicity will prove its principal recommendation. Its design is an humble one. It proffers no great advantages to the recondite grammarian; it professes not to instruct the literary connoisseur; it presents no attractive graces of style to charm, no daring flights to astonish, no deep researches to gratify him; but in the humblest simplicity of diction, it attempts to accelerate the march of the juvenile mind in its advances in the path of science, by dispersing those clouds that so often bewilder it, and removing those obstacles that generally retard its progress. In this way it endeavors to render interesting and delightful a study which has hitherto been considered tedious, dry, and irksome. Its leading object is to adopt a correct and an easy method, in which pleasure is blended with the labors of the learner, and which is calculated to excite in him a spirit of inquiry, that shall call forth into vigorous and useful exercise, every latent energy of his mind; and thus enable him soon to become thoroughly acquainted with the nature of the principles, and with their practical utility and application.
Some people will likely dismiss this system because of its simplicity; while for others, that same simplicity will be its main selling point. Its design is pretty modest. It doesn't offer much to the expert grammarian; it doesn't aim to teach the literary enthusiast; it lacks any attractive stylistic elements to captivate, bold ideas to impress, or deep research to satisfy him; but in its humble use of language, it seeks to speed up the learning process for young minds as they explore the world of science, by clearing away the confusion that often confuses them and removing the barriers that typically slow their progress. In doing so, it tries to make a subject that has usually been seen as tedious, dry, and annoying more interesting and enjoyable. Its main goal is to use an easy and correct approach that blends fun with the hard work of learning, one that encourages curiosity and brings to life all the hidden potential of the learner's mind; this way, he can quickly become well-versed in the principles and their practical applications.
Content to be useful, instead of being brilliant, the writer of these pages has endeavored to shun the path of those whose aim appears to have been to dazzle, rather than to instruct. As he has aimed not so much at originality as utility, he has adopted the thoughts of his predecessors whose labors have become public stock, whenever he could not, in his opinion, furnish better and brighter of his own. Aware that there is, in the public mind, a strong predilection for the doctrines contained in Mr. Murray's grammar, he has thought proper, not merely from motives of policy, but from choice, to select his principles chiefly from that work; and, moreover, to adopt, as far as consistent with his own views, the language of that eminent philologist. In no instance has he varied from him, unless he conceived that, in so doing, some practical advantage would be gained. He hopes, therefore, to escape the censure so frequently and so justly awarded to those unfortunate innovators who have not scrupled to alter, mutilate, and torture the text of that able writer, merely to gratify an itching propensity to figure in the world as authors, and gain an ephemeral popularity by arrogating to themselves the credit due to another.
Content to be helpful instead of brilliant, the writer of these pages has tried to avoid the path of those whose goal seems to have been to impress rather than to teach. Since he focused more on usefulness than originality, he has incorporated the thoughts of his predecessors, whose work has become common knowledge, whenever he felt he couldn’t provide better and clearer ideas of his own. Knowing that there is a strong preference among the public for the ideas in Mr. Murray's grammar, he has decided, not just for strategic reasons but also by choice, to base his principles mainly on that work; furthermore, he has adopted, as much as compatible with his own views, the language of that distinguished linguist. He has not deviated from him in any instance unless he believed that doing so would provide some practical benefit. Therefore, he hopes to avoid the criticism that is often justly directed at those unfortunate innovators who have shamelessly altered, distorted, and misrepresented that capable writer's text simply to satisfy a desire to be seen as authors, gaining fleeting popularity by taking credit that rightfully belongs to someone else.
The author is not disposed, however, to disclaim all pretensions to originality; for, although his principles are chiefly selected, (and who would presume to make new ones?) the manner of arranging, illustrating, and applying them, is principally his own. Let no one, therefore, if he happen to find in other works, ideas and illustrations similar to some contained in the following lectures, too hastily accuse him of plagiarism. It is well known that similar investigations and pursuits often elicit corresponding ideas in different minds: and hence it is not uncommon for the same thought to be strictly original with many writers. The author is not here attempting to manufacture a garment to shield him from rebuke, should he unjustly claim the property of another; but he wishes it to be understood, that a long course of teaching and investigation, has often produced in his mind ideas and arguments on the subject of grammar, exactly or nearly corresponding with those which he afterwards found, had, under similar circumstances, been produced in the minds of others. He hopes, therefore, to be pardoned by the critic, even though he should not be willing to reject a good idea of his own, merely because some one else has, at some time or other, been blessed with the same thought.
The author is not inclined to deny any claims to originality; although his principles are mostly chosen from elsewhere, (and who would assume they could create new ones?) the way he organizes, illustrates, and applies them is mainly his own. So, if someone happens to find similar ideas and illustrations in other works to those in the lectures that follow, they shouldn't quickly accuse him of plagiarism. It's common knowledge that similar research and pursuits can lead to similar ideas in different minds, which is why the same thought can be completely original to multiple writers. The author isn't trying to create an excuse to avoid criticism if he improperly claims someone else's work; he just wants it to be clear that years of teaching and research have often led him to ideas and arguments about grammar that closely match those developed by others under similar conditions. He hopes, then, that critics will be forgiving, even if they aren't willing to dismiss a good idea of his own just because someone else has happened to have the same thought at some point.
As the plan of this treatise is far more comprehensive than those of ordinary grammars, the writer could not, without making his work unreasonably voluminous, treat some topics as extensively as was desirable. Its design is to embrace, not only all the most important principles of the science, but also exercises in parsing, false syntax, and punctuation, sufficiently extensive for all ordinary, practical purposes, and a key to the exercises, and, moreover, a series of illustrations so full and intelligible, as completely to adapt the principles to the capacities of common learners. Whether this design has been successfully or unsuccessfully executed, is left for the public to decide. The general adoption of the work into schools, wherever it has become known, and the ready sale of forty thousand copies, (though without hitherto affording the author any pecuniary profit,) are favorable omens.
As the plan of this treatise is much more comprehensive than those of standard grammars, the author couldn’t cover some topics as thoroughly as desired without making the work unnecessarily bulky. Its goal is to cover not only all the key principles of the subject but also exercises in parsing, incorrect syntax, and punctuation, extensive enough for all typical practical needs, along with an answer key for the exercises. Furthermore, it includes a series of illustrations that are detailed and clear enough to fully adapt the principles to the understanding of average learners. Whether this goal has been achieved successfully or not is up to the public to determine. The widespread use of this book in schools where it has been introduced, along with the quick sale of forty thousand copies, (even though it has yet to provide the author any financial gain,) are promising signs.
In the selection and arrangement of principles for his work, the author has endeavored to pursue a course between the extremes, of taking blindly on trust whatever has been sanctioned by prejudice and the authority of venerable names, and of that arrogant, innovating spirit, which sets at defiance all authority, and attempts to overthrow all former systems, and convince the world that all true knowledge and science are wrapped up in a crude system of vagaries of its own invention. Notwithstanding the author is aware that public prejudice is powerful, and that he who ventures much by way of innovation, will be liable to defeat his own purpose by falling into neglect; yet he has taken the liberty to think for himself, to investigate the subject critically and dispassionately, and to adopt such principles only as he deemed the least objectionable, and best calculated to effect the object he had in view. But what his system claims as improvements on others, consists not so much in bettering the principles themselves, as in the method adopted of communicating a knowledge of them to the mind of the learner. That the work is defective, the author is fully sensible: and he is free to acknowledge, that its defects arise, in part, from his own want of judgment and skill. But there is another and a more serious cause of them, namely, the anomalies and imperfections with which the language abounds. This latter circumstance is also the cause of the existence of so widely different opinions on many important points; and, moreover, the reason that the grammatical principles of our language can never be indisputably settled. But principles ought not to be rejected because they admit of exceptions.—He who is thoroughly acquainted with the genius and structure of our language, can duly appreciate the truth of these remarks.
In choosing and organizing the principles for his work, the author has tried to find a balance between two extremes: blindly accepting what tradition and respected figures endorse, and the bold, innovative mindset that disregards all authority, aiming to replace existing systems and assert that all genuine knowledge and science are contained in a haphazard collection of its own ideas. The author recognizes that public opinion is strong, and someone who experiments too much with innovation might risk being overlooked, yet he has allowed himself to think independently, to examine the topic critically and without bias, and to adopt only those principles he believes are the least problematic and best suited to achieve his goals. However, what his system claims as improvements over others doesn’t so much enhance the principles themselves but focuses on the method used to share that knowledge with the learner. The author is well aware that the work has flaws, and he admits that these flaws partly stem from his own lack of judgment and skill. But there’s also a more serious reason for them: the inconsistencies and shortcomings inherent in the language. This issue also explains why there are so many differing opinions on many important matters and why the grammatical principles of our language can never be definitively established. Still, principles shouldn’t be discarded just because they have exceptions.—Anyone who thoroughly understands the nature and structure of our language can appreciate the validity of these observations.
Should parents object to the Compendium, fearing it will soon be destroyed by their children, they are informed that the pupil will not have occasion to use it one-tenth part as much as he will the book which it accompanies: and besides, if it be destroyed, he will find all the definitions and rules which it contains, recapitulated in the series of Lectures.
If parents are worried about the Compendium getting destroyed by their kids, they should know that the student will use it way less than the main book it goes with. Plus, if it does get ruined, all the definitions and rules in it will be covered again in the series of Lectures.
HINTS TO TEACHERS AND PRIVATE LEARNERS.
As this work proposes a new mode of parsing, and pursues an arrangement essentially different from that generally adopted, it may not be deemed improper for the author to give some directions to those who may be disposed to use it. Perhaps they who take only a slight view of the order of parsing, will not consider it new, but blend it with those long since adopted. Some writers have, indeed, attempted plans somewhat similar; but in no instance have they reduced them to what the author considers a regular systematic order.
As this work suggests a new way of parsing and follows a structure that's quite different from what is commonly used, it seems appropriate for the author to provide some guidance for those who might want to use it. Those who only take a quick glance at the order of parsing may not see it as new but might mix it with methods that have been around for a long time. Some writers have tried similar approaches, but none have organized them into what the author considers a regular systematic order.
The methods which they have generally suggested, require the teacher to interrogate the pupil as he proceeds; or else he is permitted to parse without giving any explanations at all. Others hint that the learner ought to apply definitions in a general way, but they lay down no systematic arrangement of questions as his guide. The systematic order laid down in this work, if pursued by the pupil, compels him to apply every definition and every rule that appertains to each word he parses, without having a question put to him by the teacher; and, in so doing, he explains every word fully as he goes along. This course enables the learner to proceed independently; and proves, at the same time, a great relief to the instructer. The convenience and advantage of this method, are far greater than can be easily conceived by one who is unacquainted with it. The author is, therefore, anxious to have the absurd practice, wherever it has been established, of causing learners to commit and recite definitions and rules without any simultaneous application of them to practical examples, immediately abolished. This system obviates the necessity of pursuing such a stupid course of drudgery; for the young beginner who pursues it, will have, in a few weeks, all the most important definitions and rules perfectly committed, simply by applying them in parsing.
The methods that have typically been suggested require the teacher to question the student as they go along; otherwise, the student can parse without providing any explanations at all. Some suggest that the learner should apply definitions generally, but they don't provide any organized set of questions to guide them. The systematic approach outlined in this work, if followed by the student, requires them to apply every definition and every rule related to each word they parse, without needing questions from the teacher; and in doing so, they explain each word thoroughly as they progress. This method allows the learner to work independently and also significantly eases the teacher's workload. The convenience and benefits of this approach are far greater than what someone unfamiliar with it could easily understand. Therefore, the author is eager to eliminate the ridiculous practice, wherever it has been adopted, of making learners memorize and recite definitions and rules without simultaneously applying them to real examples. This system eliminates the need for such a tedious method; because the young beginner who follows it will, in just a few weeks, have all the essential definitions and rules memorized simply by applying them in parsing.
If this plan be once adopted, it is confidently believed that every teacher who is desirous to consult, either his own convenience, or the advantage of his pupils, will readily pursue it in preference to any former method. This belief is founded on the advantages which the author himself has experienced from it in the course of several years, devoted to the instruction of youth and adults. By pursuing this system, he can, with less labor, advance a pupil farther in a practical knowledge of this abstruse science, in two months, than he could in one year when he taught in the "old way." It is presumed that no instructor, who once gives this system a fair trial, will doubt the truth of this assertion.
If this plan is adopted, it’s confidently believed that every teacher who wants to consider either their own convenience or the benefits for their students will choose it over any previous method. This belief is based on the advantages the author has experienced over several years dedicated to teaching both youth and adults. By using this system, he can advance a student’s practical understanding of this complex subject in two months more than he could in one year using the "old way." It is assumed that no teacher who genuinely tries this system will doubt the validity of this claim.
Perhaps some will, on a first view of the work, disapprove of the transposition of many parts; but whoever examines it attentively, will find that, although the author has not followed the common "artificial and unnatural arrangement adopted by most of his predecessors," yet he has endeavored to pursue a more judicious one, namely, "the order of the understanding."
Perhaps some will, upon first viewing the work, disapprove of the rearrangement of many parts; but anyone who examines it closely will find that, even though the author hasn’t followed the typical “artificial and unnatural arrangement used by most of his predecessors,” he has aimed for a more sensible one, namely, “the order of understanding.”
The learner should commence, not by committing and rehearsing, but by reading attentively the first two lectures several times over. He ought then to parse, according to the systematic order, the examples given for that purpose; in doing which, as previously stated, he has an opportunity of committing all the definitions and rules belonging to the parts of speech included in the examples.
The learner should start, not by memorizing and practicing, but by carefully reading the first two lectures multiple times. Then, they should analyze, following the systematic order, the examples provided for that purpose; by doing this, as mentioned before, they have a chance to memorize all the definitions and rules related to the parts of speech included in the examples.
The COMPENDIUM, as it presents to the eye of the learner a condensed but comprehensive view of the whole science, may be properly considered an "Ocular Analysis of the English language." By referring to it, the young student is enabled to apply all his definitions and rules from the very commencement of his parsing. To some, this mode of procedure may seem rather tedious; but it must appear obvious to every person of discernment, that a pupil will learn more by parsing five words critically, and explaining them fully, than he would by parsing fifty words superficially, and without understanding their various properties. The teacher who pursues this plan, is not under the necessity of hearing his pupils recite a single lesson of definitions committed to memory, for he has a fair opportunity of discovering their knowledge of these as they evince it in parsing. All other directions necessary for the learner in school, as well as for the private learner, will be given in the succeeding pages of the work. Should these feeble efforts prove a saving of much time and expense to those young persons who may be disposed to pursue this science with avidity, by enabling them easily to acquire a critical knowledge of a branch of education so important and desirable, the author's fondest anticipations will be fully realized; but should his work fall into the hands of any who are expecting, by the acquisition, to become grammarians, and yet, have not sufficient ambition and perseverance to make themselves acquainted with its contents, it is hoped that the blame for their nonimprovement, will not be thrown upon him.
The COMPENDIUM provides learners with a condensed yet comprehensive overview of the entire subject, making it appropriately regarded as an "Ocular Analysis of the English language." By using it, young students can apply all their definitions and rules right from the start of their parsing. Some may find this approach a bit tedious; however, it should be clear to anyone with good judgment that a student will learn more by critically parsing five words and fully explaining them than by superficially parsing fifty words without understanding their different properties. A teacher who follows this method doesn’t need to hear students recite a single lesson of definitions from memory, as they have a clear opportunity to assess their understanding as it's demonstrated in parsing. All other necessary instructions for students in school, as well as for the private learner, will be provided in the following pages of this work. If these modest efforts help save time and money for those eager to study this subject by enabling them to easily gain a deep understanding of such an important and desirable area of education, the author's hopes will have been fulfilled; however, if his work ends up with those who expect to become grammarians without the ambition and determination to engage with its content, it is hoped that the blame for their lack of progress will not be placed on him.
FAMILIAR LECTURES
ON
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
LECTURE I
DIVISIONS OF GRAMMAR.—ORTHOGRAPHY.
You are about to enter upon one of the most useful, and, when rightly pursued, one of the most interesting studies in the whole circle of science. If, however, you, like many a misguided youth, are under the impression that the study of grammar is dry and irksome, and a matter of little consequence, I trust I shall succeed in removing from your mind, all such false notions and ungrounded prejudices; for I will endeavor to convince you, before I close these lectures, that this is not only a pleasing study, but one of real and substantial utility; a study that directly tends to adorn and dignify human nature, and meliorate the condition of man. Grammar is a leading branch of that learning which alone is capable of unfolding and maturing the mental powers, and of elevating man to his proper rank in the scale of intellectual existence;—of that learning which lifts the soul from earth, and enables it to hold converse with a thousand worlds. In pursuing any and every other path of science, you will discover the truth of these remarks, and feel its force; for you will find, that, as grammar opens the door to every department of learning, a knowledge of it is indispensable: and should you not aspire at distinction in the republic of letters, this knowledge cannot fail of being serviceable to you, even if you are destined to pass through the humblest walks of life. I think it is clear, that, in one point of view, grammatical knowledge possesses a decisive advantage over every other branch of learning. Penmanship, arithmetic, geography, astronomy, botany, chemistry, and so on, are highly useful in their respective places; but not one of them is so universally applicable to practical purposes, as this. In every situation, under all circumstances, on all occasions;—when you speak, read, write, or think, a knowledge of grammar is of essential utility.
You are about to dive into one of the most useful and, when approached correctly, one of the most interesting fields of study in all of science. However, if you are like many young people who mistakenly believe that studying grammar is boring and unimportant, I hope to change your mind and dispel these misconceptions. By the end of these lectures, I want to show you that grammar is not only an enjoyable subject but also truly valuable; it enhances and elevates human nature and improves the condition of society. Grammar is a key part of education that can develop and refine your mental abilities and elevate you to your rightful place in the realm of intellect—knowledge that lifts the spirit from the mundane and allows it to engage with countless worlds. As you explore any other area of science, you will recognize the truth in these statements and feel their impact; you will see that grammar is the key that unlocks every field of study, making it essential to understand. Even if you don't aim for distinction in the literary world, this knowledge will still be helpful, no matter what path you take in life. It’s clear that, in one respect, understanding grammar has a unique advantage over other subjects. While skills like handwriting, math, geography, astronomy, botany, and chemistry are all valuable in their own right, none is as broadly applicable to everyday situations as grammar. In every context, under any circumstance, at all times—whether you're speaking, reading, writing, or thinking—a solid understanding of grammar is crucial.
Doubtless you have heard some persons assert, that they could detect and correct any error in language by the ear, and speak and write accurately without a knowledge of grammar. Now your own observation will soon convince you, that this assertion is incorrect. A man of refined taste, may, by perusing good authors, and conversing with the learned, acquire that knowledge of language which will enable him to avoid those glaring errors that offend the ear; but there are other errors equally gross, which have not a harsh sound, and, consequently, which cannot be detected without a knowledge of the rules that are violated. Believe me, therefore, when I say, that without the knowledge and application of grammar rules, it is impossible for any one to think, speak, read, or write with accuracy. From a want of such knowledge, many often express their ideas in a manner so improper and obscure as to render it impossible for any one to understand them: their language frequently amounts, not only to bad sense, but non-sense. In other instances several different meanings may be affixed to the words they employ; and what is still worse, is, that not unfrequently their sentences are so constructed, as to convey a meaning quite the reverse of that which they intended. Nothing of a secular nature can be more worthy of your attention, then, than the acquisition of grammatical knowledge.
Surely you've heard some people claim that they can catch and fix any language mistake just by listening, and that they can speak and write correctly without knowing anything about grammar. However, you'll soon realize from your own experience that this claim is false. A person with refined taste can, by reading good authors and talking with knowledgeable people, gain enough understanding of language to avoid obvious mistakes that sound wrong; but there are other serious errors that aren't harsh to the ear and, therefore, can't be detected without knowing the rules that are being broken. So believe me when I say that without knowledge and use of grammar rules, no one can think, speak, read, or write accurately. Because of this lack of knowledge, many people often express their thoughts in ways that are so improper and unclear that no one can truly understand them: their language often results not only in bad sense but also non-sense. In other cases, multiple meanings can be attached to the words they choose; and even worse, their sentences are sometimes structured in such a way that they convey the opposite meaning of what they intended. Nothing of a worldly nature is more deserving of your attention than the learning of grammar.
The path which leads to grammatical excellence, is not all the way smooth and flowery, but in it you will find some thorns interspersed, and some obstacles to be surmounted; or, in simple language, you will find, in the pursuit of this science, many intricacies which it is rather difficult for the juvenile mind completely to unravel. I shall, therefore, as I proceed, address you in plain language, and endeavor to illustrate every principle in a manner so clear and simple, that you will be able, if you exercise your mind, to understand its nature, and apply it to practice as you go along; for I would rather give you one useful idea, than fifty high-sounding words, the meaning of which you would probably be unable to comprehend.
The path to mastering grammar isn’t all smooth and easy; instead, you’ll encounter some bumps and challenges along the way. In other words, as you dive into this topic, you’ll find plenty of complexities that might be tough for a young mind to completely figure out. So, I’ll use straightforward language as I go, and I’ll try to explain every principle clearly and simply, so you can understand it and put it into practice as we move forward. I’d rather give you one useful idea than fifty fancy words that you probably wouldn’t understand.
Should you ever have any doubts concerning the meaning of a word, or the sense of a sentence, you must not be discouraged, but persevere, either by studying my explanations, or by asking some person competent to inform you, till you obtain a clear conception of it, and till all doubts are removed. By carefully examining, and frequently reviewing, the following lectures, you will soon be able to discern the grammatical construction of our language, and fix in your mind the principles by which it is governed. Nothing delights youth so much, as a clear and distinct knowledge of any branch of science which they are pursuing; and, on the other hand, I know they are apt to be discouraged with any branch of learning which requires much time and attention to be understood. It is the evidence of a weak mind, however, to be discouraged by the obstacles with which the young learner must expect to meet; and the best means that you can adopt, in order to enable you to overcome the difficulties that arise in the incipient stage of your studies, is to cultivate the habit of thinking methodically and soundly on all subjects of importance which may engage your attention. Nothing will be more effectual in enabling you to think, as well as to speak and write, correctly, than the study of English grammar, according to the method of pursuing it as prescribed in the following pages. This system is designed, and, I trust, well calculated, to expand and strengthen the intellectual faculties, in as much as it involves a process by which the mind is addressed, and a knowledge of grammar communicated in an interesting and familiar manner.
If you ever have doubts about the meaning of a word or the sense of a sentence, don’t get discouraged. Keep pushing through, whether by studying my explanations or asking someone knowledgeable until you have a clear understanding and all your doubts are cleared up. By carefully reviewing and frequently going over the following lectures, you’ll soon be able to understand the grammatical structure of our language and remember the rules that govern it. Nothing makes young people happier than having a clear and distinct understanding of any subject they’re studying; however, I know they can easily become frustrated with topics that require a lot of time and effort to grasp. It shows a weak mind to be put off by the challenges that young learners will inevitably face. The best way to overcome the difficulties that come up early in your studies is to develop the habit of thinking clearly and logically about all significant topics that catch your interest. Nothing will help you think, as well as speak and write correctly, more than studying English grammar using the method outlined in the following pages. This system is designed, and I hope effectively, to develop and strengthen your thinking skills, as it includes a process that engages the mind and teaches grammar in an interesting and approachable way.
You are aware, my young friend, that you live in an age of light and knowledge;—an age in which science and the arts are marching onward with gigantic strides. You live, too, in a land of liberty;—a land on which the smiles of Heaven beam with uncommon refulgence. The trump of the warrior and the clangor of arms no longer echo on our mountains, or in our valleys; "the garments dyed in blood have passed away;" the mighty struggle for independence is over; and you live to enjoy the rich boon of freedom and prosperity which was purchased with the blood of our fathers. These considerations forbid that you should ever be so unmindful of your duty to your country, to your Creator, to yourself, and to succeeding generations, as to be content to grovel in ignorance. Remember that "knowledge is power;" that an enlightened and a virtuous people can never be enslaved; and that, on the intelligence of our youth, rest the future liberty, the prosperity, the happiness, the grandeur, and the glory of our beloved country. Go on then, with a laudable ambition, and an unyielding perseverance, in the path which leads to honor and renown. Press forward. Go, and gather laurels on the hill of science; linger among her unfading beauties; "drink deep" of her crystal fountain; and then join in "the march of fame." Become learned and virtuous, and you will be great. Love God and serve him, and you will be happy.
You know, my young friend, that you live in a time of enlightenment and knowledge— a time when science and the arts are advancing rapidly. You also live in a land of freedom— a land where the blessings of Heaven shine with remarkable brightness. The sounds of war and conflict no longer resonate in our mountains or valleys; "the bloodstained garments have faded away;" the monumental fight for independence is finished; and you enjoy the great gift of freedom and prosperity that was won through the sacrifices of our ancestors. These facts should remind you to never neglect your duties to your country, your Creator, yourself, and future generations by settling for ignorance. Remember that "knowledge is power;" that an informed and virtuous people can never be enslaved; and that the future liberty, prosperity, happiness, grandeur, and glory of our beloved country depend on the intelligence of our youth. So, move forward with a worthy ambition and a determined persistence along the path to honor and recognition. Keep pushing ahead. Go and earn accolades on the mountain of knowledge; immerse yourself in its timeless wonders; "drink deeply" from its clear fountain; and then join "the march of fame." Strive to be learned and virtuous, and you will achieve greatness. Love God and serve Him, and you will find happiness.
LANGUAGE.
Language, in its most extensive sense, implies those signs by which men and brutes communicate to each other their thoughts, affections, and desires.
Language, in its broadest sense, refers to the signs that humans and animals use to express their thoughts, feelings, and desires to one another.
Language may be divided, 1. into natural and artificial; 2. into spoken and written.
Language can be categorized into 1. natural and artificial; 2. spoken and written.
NATURAL LANGUAGE, consists in the use of those natural signs which different animals employ in communicating their feelings one to another. The meaning of these signs all perfectly understand by the principles of their nature. This language is common both to man and brute. The elements of natural language in man, may be reduced to three kinds; modulations of the voice, gestures, and features. By means of these, two savages who have no common, artificial language, can communicate their thoughts in a manner quite intelligible: they can ask and refuse, affirm and deny, threaten and supplicate; they can traffick, enter into contracts, and plight their faith. The language of brutes consists in the use of those inarticulate sounds by which they express their thoughts and affections. Thus, the chirping of a bird, the bleating of a lamb, the neighing of a horse, and the growling, whining, and barking of a dog, are the language of those animals, respectively.
NATURAL LANGUAGE consists of the natural signs that different animals use to communicate their feelings to each other. The meaning of these signs is understood by all, based on their natural instincts. This language is shared by both humans and animals. For humans, natural language can be broken down into three types: vocal modulations, gestures, and facial expressions. With these, two people who don’t share a common, formal language can communicate their thoughts in a clear way: they can ask for things, refuse, agree, disagree, threaten, and plead; they can negotiate, make deals, and swear their loyalty. The language of animals is made up of those inarticulate sounds they use to express their thoughts and emotions. For example, the chirping of a bird, the bleating of a lamb, the neighing of a horse, and the growling, whining, and barking of a dog represent the language of those animals, respectively.
ARTIFICIAL LANGUAGE consists in the use of words, by means of which mankind are enabled to communicate their thoughts to one another.—In order to assist you in comprehending what is meant by the term word, I will endeavor to illustrate the meaning of the term.
ARTIFICIAL LANGUAGE is the use of words that allow people to share their thoughts with each other. To help you understand what is meant by the term word, I will try to illustrate its meaning.
Idea. The notices which we gain by sensation and perception, and which are treasured up in the mind to be the materials of thinking and knowledge, are denominated ideas. For example, when you place your hand upon a piece of ice, a sensation is excited which we call coldness. That faculty which notices this sensation or change produced in the mind, is called perception; and the abstract notice itself, or notion you form of this sensation, is denominated an idea. This being premised, we will now proceed to the consideration of words.
Idea. The notices we gather through our senses, which we store in our minds as the basis for thinking and knowledge, are called ideas. For instance, when you touch a piece of ice, you feel a sensation we refer to as coldness. The ability that recognizes this sensation or change in the mind is called perception; and the actual notice or concept you form of this sensation is referred to as an idea. With this established, let's move on to discussing words.
Words are articulate sounds, used by common consent, not as natural, but as artificial, signs of our ideas. Words have no meaning in themselves. They are merely the artificial representatives of those ideas affixed to them by compact or agreement among those who use them. In English, for instance, to a particular kind of metal we assign the name gold; not because there is, in that sound, any peculiar aptness which suggests the idea we wish to convey, but the application of that sound to the idea signified, is an act altogether arbitrary. Were there any natural connexion between the sound and the thing signified, the word gold would convey the same idea to the people of other countries as it does to ourselves. But such is not the fact. Other nations make use of different sounds to signify the same thing. Thus, aurum denotes the same idea in Latin, and or in French. Hence it follows, that it is by custom only we learn to annex particular ideas to particular sounds.
Words are articulated sounds that we all agree to use, not as something natural, but as artificial signs of our ideas. Words themselves have no inherent meaning. They are simply the artificial symbols that represent the ideas we attach to them through common agreement among users. For example, in English, we call a certain type of metal gold; not because that sound has any special connection to the idea we want to express, but because using that sound for the idea is completely arbitrary. If there were a natural link between the sound and the thing it represents, the word gold would mean the same to people in other countries as it does to us. But that’s not the case. Other cultures use different sounds to refer to the same thing. So, aurum represents the same idea in Latin, and or in French. Therefore, it’s only through custom that we learn to associate specific ideas with specific sounds.
SPOKEN LANGUAGE or speech is made up of articulate sounds uttered by the human voice.
SPOKEN LANGUAGE or speech consists of clear sounds produced by the human voice.
The voice is formed by air which, after it passes through the glottis, (a small aperture in the upper part of the wind-pipe,) is modulated by the action of the throat, palate, teeth, tongue, lips, and nostrils.
The voice is created by air that, after passing through the glottis, (a small opening in the upper part of the windpipe,) is shaped by the movements of the throat, palate, teeth, tongue, lips, and nostrils.
WRITTEN LANGUAGE. The elements of written language consist of letters or characters, which, by common consent and general usage, are combined into words, and thus made the ocular representatives of the articulate sounds uttered by the voice.
WRITTEN LANGUAGE. The elements of written language include letters or characters, which, by common agreement and general usage, are put together into words, making them the visual representations of the spoken sounds produced by the voice.
GRAMMAR.
Grammar may be divided into two species, universal and particular.
Grammar can be divided into two types: universal and particular.
UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR explains the principles which are common to all languages.
UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR describes the principles that are shared by all languages.
PARTICULAR GRAMMAR applies those general principles to a particular language, modifying them according to its genius, and the established practice of the best speakers and writers by whom it is used. Hence,
PARTICULAR GRAMMAR applies those general principles to a specific language, adjusting them based on its unique characteristics and the accepted practices of the best speakers and writers who use it. Hence,
The established practice of the best speakers and writers of any language, is the standard of grammatical accuracy in the use of that language.
The established practice of the best speakers and writers of any language is the standard for grammatical accuracy in that language.
By the phrase, established practice, is implied reputable, national, and present usage. A usage becomes good and legal, when it has been long and generally adopted.
By the phrase, established practice, it is meant reputable, national, and current usage. A usage becomes good and legal when it has been widely and consistently adopted over time.
The best speakers and writers, or such as may be considered good authority in the use of language, are those who are deservedly in high estimation; speakers, distinguished for their elocution and other literary attainments, and writers, eminent for correct taste, solid matter, and refined manner.
The best speakers and writers, or those who can be seen as good authority in using language, are the ones who are rightfully held in high regard; speakers known for their eloquence and other literary skills, and writers recognized for their good taste, substantial content, and polished style.
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR adopts the most convenient classification of the words of a language, lays down a system of definitions and rules, founded on scientific principles and good usage, illustrates their nature and design, and enforces their application.
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR uses the easiest way to categorize the words of a language, establishes a system of definitions and rules based on scientific principles and effective usage, demonstrates their nature and purpose, and reinforces their application.
PRINCIPLE. A principle in grammar is a peculiar construction of the language, sanctioned by good usage.
PRINCIPLE. A principle in grammar is a specific way of using the language that is accepted by standard practice.
DEFINITION. A definition in grammar is a principle of language expressed in a definite form.
DEFINITION. A definition in grammar is a rule of language stated in a clear way.
RULE. A rule describes the peculiar construction or circumstantial relation of words, which custom has established for our observance.
RULE. A rule describes the specific arrangement or contextual relationship of words that tradition has set for us to follow.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
GRAMMAR teaches us how to use words in a proper manner. The most important use of that faculty called speech, is, to convey our thoughts to others. If, therefore, we have a store of words, and even know what they signify, they will be of no real use to us unless we can also apply them to practice, and make them answer the purposes for which they were invented. Grammar, well understood, enables us to express our thoughts fully and clearly; and, consequently, in a manner which will defy the ingenuity of man to give our words any other meaning than that which we ourselves intend them to express. To be able to speak and write our vernacular tongue with accuracy and elegance, is, certainly, a consideration of the highest moment.
GRAMMAR teaches us how to use words correctly. The main purpose of speech is to share our thoughts with others. So, even if we have a lot of words and know what they mean, they won’t be truly useful unless we can use them effectively to achieve their intended purpose. Grammar, when properly understood, allows us to express our thoughts completely and clearly, making it impossible for others to interpret our words in any way other than what we mean. Being able to speak and write our native language accurately and elegantly is definitely very important.
- ORTHOGRAPHY,
- ETYMOLOGY,
- SYNTAX,
- PROSODY.
ORTHOGRAPHY means word-making, or spelling. It teaches us the different kinds and sounds of letters, how to combine them into syllables, and syllables into words.
ORTHOGRAPHY means word-making, or spelling. It teaches us the different types and sounds of letters, how to combine them into syllables, and syllables into words.
As this is one of the first steps in the path of literature, I presume you already understand the nature and use of letters, and the just method of spelling words. If you do, it is unnecessary for you to dwell long on this part of grammar, which, though very important, is rather dry and uninteresting, for it has nothing to do with parsing and analyzing language. And, therefore, if you can spell correctly, you may omit Orthography, and commence with Etymology and Syntax.
As this is one of the first steps on your literature journey, I assume you already understand what letters are and how to spell words correctly. If you do, there's no need to spend too much time on this part of grammar, which, while important, is pretty dry and unexciting since it doesn’t involve parsing and analyzing language. So, if you can spell correctly, you can skip Orthography and move on to Etymology and Syntax.
OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS.
A.—A has four sounds; the long; as in name, basin; the broad; as in ball, wall; the short; as in fagot, glass; and the flat, Italian sound; as in bar, farther. The improper diphthong, aa, has the short sound of a in Balaam, Canaan, Isaac; and the long sound of a in Baal, Gaal, Aaron.
A.—A has four sounds: the long, as in name, basin; the broad, as in ball, wall; the short, as in fagot, glass; and the flat, Italian sound, as in bar, farther. The improper diphthong aa has the short sound of a in Balaam, Canaan, Isaac; and the long sound of a in Baal, Gaal, Aaron.
The Latin diphthong, ae, has the long sound of e in aenigma, Caesar, and some other words. But many authors reject this useless excrescence of antiquity, and write, enigma, Cesar.
The Latin diphthong, ae, has the long sound of e in aenigma, Caesar, and some other words. But many writers dismiss this unnecessary leftover from the past and write enigma, Cesar.
The diphthong, ai, has the long sound of a; as in pail, sail; except in plaid, said, again, raillery, fountain, Britain, and some others.
The diphthong, ai, has the long sound of a; as in pail, sail; except in plaid, said, again, raillery, fountain, Britain, and a few others.
Au is sounded like broad a in taught, like flat a in aunt, like long o in hautboy, and like short o in laurel.
Au is pronounced like the broad a in taught, like the flat a in aunt, like the long o in hautboy, and like the short o in laurel.
Aw has always the sound of broad a; as in bawl, crawl.
Aw always has the sound of broad a; as in bawl, crawl.
Ay has the long sound of a; as in pay, delay.
Ay has the long sound of a; as in pay, delay.
B.—B has only one sound; as in baker, number, chub.
B.—B has just one sound; like in baker, number, chub.
B is silent when it follows m in the same syllable; as in lamb, &c. except in accumb, rhomb, and succumb. It is also silent before t in the same syllable; as in doubt, debtor, subtle, &c.
B is silent when it comes after m in the same syllable, like in lamb, etc., except in accumb, rhomb, and succumb. It is also silent before t in the same syllable, as in doubt, debtor, subtle, etc.
C.—C sounds like k before a, o, u, r, l, t, and at the end of syllables; as in cart, cottage, curious, craft, tract, cloth; victim, flaccid. It has the sound of s before e, i, and y; as in centre, cigar, mercy. C has the sound of sh when followed by a diphthong, and is preceded by the accent, either primary or secondary; as in social, pronunciation, &c.; and of z in discern, sacrifice, sice, suffice. It is mute in arbuscle, czar, czarina, endict, victuals, muscle.
C.—C sounds like k before a, o, u, r, l, t, and at the end of syllables; as in cart, cottage, curious, craft, tract, cloth; victim, flaccid. It has the sound of s before e, i, and y; as in center, cigar, mercy. C has the sound of sh when followed by a diphthong and is preceded by the accent, either primary or secondary; as in social, pronunciation, &c.; and sounds like z in discern, sacrifice, sice, suffice. It is silent in arbuscle, czar, czarina, indict, victuals, muscle.
Ch is commonly sounded like tsh; as in church, chin; but in words derived from the ancient languages, it has the sound of k; as in chemist, chorus; and likewise in foreign names; as in Achish, Enoch. In words from the French, ch sounds like sh; as in chaise, chevalier; and also like sh when preceded by l or n; as in milch, bench, clinch, &c.
Ch is usually pronounced like tsh; as in church, chin; but in words from ancient languages, it sounds like k; as in chemist, chorus; and also in foreign names; as in Achish, Enoch. In words borrowed from French, ch is pronounced like sh; as in chaise, chevalier; and also like sh when it comes before l or n; as in milch, bench, clinch, etc.
Ch in arch, before a vowel, sounds like k; as in arch-angel, except in arched, archery, archer; archenemy; but before a consonant, it sounds like tsh; as in archbishop. Ch is silent in schedule, schism, yacht, drachm.
Ch in arch, when followed by a vowel, sounds like k; as in archangel, except in arched, archery, archer, archenemy; but before a consonant, it sounds like tsh; as in archbishop. Ch is silent in schedule, schism, yacht, drachm.
D.—D has one uniform sound; as in death, bandage. It sounds like dj or j when followed by long u preceded by the accent; as in educate, verdure. It also sounds like j in grandeur, soldier.
D.—D has one consistent sound; as in death, bandage. It sounds like dj or j when followed by a long u that has the accent; as in educate, verdure. It also sounds like j in grandeur, soldier.
The termination, ed, in adjectives and participial adjectives, retains its distinct sound; as, a wick-ed man, a learn-ed man, bless-ed are the meek; but in verbs the e is generally dropped; as, passed, walked, flashed, aimed, rolled, &c. which are pronounced, past, walkt, flasht, aimd, rold.
The ending, ed, in adjectives and participial adjectives keeps its unique sound; for example, a wick-ed person, a learn-ed individual, bless-ed are the humble; but in verbs, the e is usually dropped; for instance, passed, walked, flashed, aimed, rolled, etc., which are pronounced as past, walkt, flasht, aimd, rold.
E.—E has a long sound; as in scheme, severe; a short sound; as in men, tent; and sometimes the sound of flat a; as in sergeant; and of short i; as in yes, pretty, England, and generally in the unaccented terminations, es, et, en.
E.—E has a long sound, like in scheme, severe; a short sound, like in men, tent; and sometimes it sounds like flat a, as in sergeant; and like short i, as in yes, pretty, England, and generally in unaccented endings, es, et, en.
F.—F has one unvaried sound; as in fancy, muffin; except in of, which, when uncompounded, is pronounced ov. A wive's portion, a calve's head, are improper. They should be, wife's portion, calf's head.
F.—F has one consistent sound, like in fancy, muffin; except in of, which, when not combined with other words, is pronounced ov. A wife's portion, a calf's head, are incorrect. They should be wife's portion, calf's head.
G.—G has two sounds. It is hard before a, o, u, l, and r, and at the end of a word; as in gay, go, gun, glory; bag, snug. It is soft before e, i, and y; as in genius, ginger, Egypt. Exceptions; get, gewgaw, gimlet, and some others. G is silent before n, as in gnash.
G.—G has two sounds. It's hard before a, o, u, l, and r, and at the end of a word; like in gay, go, gun, glory; bag, snug. It's soft before e, i, and y; as in genius, ginger, Egypt. There are exceptions: get, gewgaw, gimlet, and a few others. G is silent before n, as in gnash.
H.—H has an articulate sound; as in hat, horse, hull. It is silent after r; as in rhetoric, rhubarb.
H.—H has a clear sound; like in hat, horse, hull. It is silent after r; as in rhetoric, rhubarb.
I.—I has a long sound; as in fine; and a short one; as in fin. Before r it is often sounded like u short; as in first, third; and in other words, like short e; as in birth, virtue. In some words it has the sound of long e; as in machine, profile.
I.—I has a long sound, like in fine, and a short sound, like in fin. Before r, it often sounds like a short u, as in first, third; and in other words, it sounds like a short e, as in birth, virtue. In some words, it has the sound of a long e, like in machine, profile.
J.—J has the sound of soft g; except in hallelujah, in which it is pronounced like y.
J.—J sounds like a soft g; except in hallelujah, where it’s pronounced like y.
K.—K has the sound of c hard, and is used before e, i, and y, where c would be soft; as kept, skirt, murky. It is silent before n; as in knife, knell, knocker.
K.—K sounds like a hard c and is used before e, i, and y, where c would be soft; like in kept, skirt, murky. It is silent before n; for example, in knife, knell, knocker.
L.—L has always a soft liquid sound; as in love, billow. It is often silent; as in half, talk, almond.
L.—L always has a smooth, flowing sound, like in love, billow. It’s often silent, as in half, talk, almond.
M.—M has always the same sound; as in murmur, monumental; except in comptroller, which is pronounced controller.
M.—M always sounds the same; as in murmur, monumental; except in comptroller, which is pronounced controller.
N.—N has two sounds; the one pure; as in man, net, noble; the other a compound sound; as in ankle, banquet, distinct, &c., pronounced angkl, bangkwet. N final is silent when preceded by m; as in hymn, autumn.
N.—N has two sounds; one is pure, as in man, net, noble; the other is a compound sound, as in ankle, banquet, distinct, etc., pronounced angkl, bangkwet. The final N is silent when it's preceded by m; as in hymn, autumn.
O.—O has a long sound; as in note, over; and a short one; as in not, got. It has the sound of u short; as in son, attorney, doth, does; and generally in the terminations, op, ot, or, on, om, ol, od, &c.
O.—O has a long sound, like in note, over; and a short sound, like in not, got. It also has the short sound of u, as in son, attorney, doth, does; and typically in the endings op, ot, or, on, om, ol, od, etc.
P.—P has but one uniform sound; as in pin, slipper; except in cupboard, clapboard, where it has the sound of b. It is mute in psalm, Ptolemy, tempt, empty, corps, raspberry, and receipt.
P.—P has only one consistent sound, like in pin, slipper; except in cupboard, clapboard, where it sounds like b. It is silent in psalm, Ptolemy, tempt, empty, corps, raspberry, and receipt.
Ph has the sound of f in philosophy, Philip; and of v in nephew, Stephen.
Ph sounds like f in philosophy, Philip; and like v in nephew, Stephen.
Q.—Q is sounded like k, and is always followed by u pronounced like w; as in quadrant, queen, conquest.
Q.—Q is pronounced like k, and is always followed by u which sounds like w; as in quadrant, queen, conquest.
R.—R has a rough sound; as in Rome, river, rage; and a smooth one; as in bard, card, regard. In the unaccented termination re, the r is sounded after the e; as in fibre, centre.
R.—R has a harsh sound, like in Rome, river, rage; and a softer one, as in bard, card, regard. In the unaccented ending re, the r is pronounced after the e, as in fibre, centre.
S.—S has a flat sound like z; as in besom, nasal; and, at the beginning of words, a sharp, hissing sound; as in saint, sister, sample. It has the sound of sh when preceded by the accent and another s or a liquid, and followed by a diphthong or long u; as in expulsion, censure. S sounds like zh when preceded by the accent and a vowel, and followed by a diphthong or long u as in brasier, usual. It is mute in isle, corps, demesne, viscount.
S.—S has a flat sound like z; as in besom, nasal; and, at the beginning of words, a sharp, hissing sound; as in saint, sister, sample. It sounds like sh when it’s preceded by the accent and another s or a liquid, and followed by a diphthong or long u; as in expulsion, censure. S sounds like zh when preceded by the accent and a vowel, and followed by a diphthong or long u as in brasier, usual. It is silent in isle, corps, demesne, viscount.
T.—T is sounded in take, temper. T before u, when the accent precedes, and generally before eou, sounds like tsh; as, nature, virtue, righteous, are pronounced natshure, virtshue, richeus. Ti before a vowel, preceded by the accent, has the sound of sh; as in salvation, negotiation; except in such words as tierce, tiara, &c. and unless an s goes before; as, question; and excepting also derivatives from words ending in ty; as in mighty, mightier.
T.—T is pronounced in take, temper. T before u, when the stress comes first, and generally before eou, sounds like tsh; as in nature, virtue, righteous, which are pronounced natshure, virtshue, richeus. Ti before a vowel, with the stress on it, has the sound of sh; as in salvation, negotiation; except in words like tierce, tiara, etc., and unless an s comes before; as in question; and also excluding derivatives from words that end in ty; as in mighty, mightier.
Th, at the beginning, middle, and end of words, is sharp; as in thick, panther, breath. Exceptions; then, booth, worthy, &c.
Th at the beginning, middle, and end of words is sharp; as in thick, panther, breath. Exceptions: then, booth, worthy, etc.
U.—U has three sounds; a long; as in mule, cubic; a short; as in dull, custard; and an obtuse sound; as in full, bushel. It is pronounced like short e in bury; and like short i in busy, business.
U.—U has three sounds: a long sound, as in mule, cubic; a short sound, as in dull, custard; and a rounded sound, as in full, bushel. It is pronounced like the short e in bury; and like the short i in busy, business.
V.—V has uniformly the sound of flat f; as in vanity, love.
V.—V always sounds like a flat f; as in vanity, love.
W.—W, when a consonant, has its sound, which is heard in wo, beware. W is silent before r; as in wry, wrap, wrinkle; and also in answer, sword, &c. Before h it is pronounced as if written after the h; as in why, when, what;—hwy, hwen, hwat. When heard as a vowel, it takes the sound of u; as in draw, crew, now.
W.—W, when it's a consonant, is pronounced like it is in wo, beware. W is silent before r; for example, in wry, wrap, wrinkle; and also in answer, sword, etc. When it comes before h, it sounds like it's written after the h; as in why, when, what;—hwy, hwen, hwat. When it sounds like a vowel, it takes on the sound of u; as in draw, crew, now.
X.—X has a sharp sound, like ks, when it ends a syllable with the accent on it; as, exit, exercise; or when it precedes an accented syllable which begins with any consonant except h; as, excuse, extent; but when the following accented syllable begins with a vowel or h, it has, generally, a flat sound, like gz; as in exert, exhort. X has the sound of Z at the beginning of proper names of Greek original; as in Xanthus, Xenophon, Xerxes.
X.—X has a sharp sound, like ks, when it ends a syllable with the emphasis on it; for example, exit, exercise; or when it comes before an accented syllable that starts with any consonant except h; for instance, excuse, extent; but when the next accented syllable begins with a vowel or h, it usually has a flat sound, like gz; as in exert, exhort. X sounds like Z at the beginning of proper names of Greek origin; for example, Xanthus, Xenophon, Xerxes.
Y.—Y, when a consonant, has its proper sound; as in youth, York, yes, new-year. When y is employed as a vowel, it has exactly the sound that i would have in the same situation; as in rhyme, system, party, pyramid.
Y.—Y, when used as a consonant, has its usual sound; as in youth, York, yes, new year. When y is used as a vowel, it sounds exactly like i would in the same context; as in rhyme, system, party, pyramid.
Z.—Z has the sound of flat s; as in freeze, brazen.
Z.—Z sounds like a flat s; as in freeze, brazen.
RULES FOR SPELLING.
The following rules are deemed important in practice, although they assist us in spelling only a small portion of the words of our language. This useful art is to be chiefly acquired by studying the spelling-book and dictionary, and by strict attention in reading.
The following rules are considered important in practice, even though they help us spell only a small part of the words in our language. This useful skill is mainly gained by studying the spelling book and dictionary, and by paying close attention while reading.
RULE I. Monosyllables ending in f, l, or s, double the final or ending consonant when it is preceded by a single vowel; as staff, mill, pass. Exceptions; of, if, is, as, lids, was, yes, his, this, us, and thus.
RULE I. Monosyllables ending in f, l, or s double the final consonant when there's a single vowel before it; for example, staff, mill, pass. Exceptions include of, if, is, as, lids, was, yes, his, this, us, and thus.
RULE II. Monosyllables ending in any consonant but f, l, or s, never double the final consonant when it is preceded by a single vowel; as, man, hat. Exceptions; add, ebb, butt, egg, odd, err, inn, bunn, purr, and buzz.
RULE II. Monosyllables ending in any consonant except f, l, or s never double the final consonant when it's preceded by a single vowel; for example, man, hat. Exceptions include add, ebb, butt, egg, odd, err, inn, bunn, purr, and buzz.
RULE III. Words ending in y, form the plural of nouns, the persons of verbs, participial nouns, past participles, comparatives, and superlatives, by changing y into i, when the y is preceded by a consonant; as, spy, spies; I carry, thou carriest, he carries; carrier, carried; happy, happier, happiest.
RULE III. Words that end in y form the plural of nouns, the different forms of verbs, participial nouns, past participles, comparatives, and superlatives by changing y to i when the y comes after a consonant; for example, spy, spies; I carry, you carry, he carries; carrier, carried; happy, happier, happiest.
The present participle in ing, retains the y that i may not be doubled; as, carry, carrying.
The present participle in ing keeps the y that i doesn't need to be doubled; for example, carry, carrying.
But when y is preceded by a vowel, in such instances as the above, it is not changed into i; as, boy, boys; I cloy, he cloys; except in the words lay, pay, and say I from which are formed laid, paid, and said; and their compounds, unpaid, unsaid, &c.
But when y comes before a vowel, like in the examples above, it doesn’t change into i; for instance, boy, boys; I cloy, he cloys; except in the words lay, pay, and say I from which we get laid, paid, and said; along with their compounds, unpaid, unsaid, etc.
Ere fresh morning streak the east, we must be risen to reform yonder allies green.
RULE IV. When words ending in y, assume an additional syllable beginning with a consonant, the y, if it is preceded by a consonant, is commonly changed to i; as, happy, happily, happiness.
RULE IV. When words ending in y take on an extra syllable starting with a consonant, the y, if it comes after a consonant, is usually changed to i; for example, happy, happily, happiness.
But when y is preceded by a vowel, in such instances, it is very rarely changed to i; as, coy, coyless; boy, boyish; boyhood; joy, joyless, joyful.
But when y comes before a vowel, it's very rarely changed to i; for example, coy, coyless; boy, boyish; boyhood; joy, joyless, joyful.
RULE V. Monosyllables, and words accented on the last syllable, ending with a single consonant that is preceded by a single vowel, double that consonant when they assume another syllable that begins with a vowel; as, wit, witty; thin, thinnish; to abet, an abetter.
RULE V. Monosyllables, and words that are stressed on the last syllable, ending with a single consonant preceded by a single vowel, double that consonant when they take on another syllable that starts with a vowel; for example, wit, witty; thin, thinnish; to abet, an abetter.
But if a diphthong precedes, or the accent is not on the last syllable, the consonant remains single; as, to toil, toiling; to offer, an offering; maid, maiden.
But if a diphthong comes before, or the stress isn’t on the last syllable, the consonant stays single; like, to toil, toiling; to offer, an offering; maid, maiden.
RULE VI. Words ending in double l, in taking ness, less, ly, or ful, after them, generally omit one l; as, fulness, skilless, fully skilful.
RULE VI. Words ending in double l, when adding ness, less, ly, or ful, usually drop one l; for example, fulness, skilless, fully skilful.
But words ending in any double letter but l, and taking ness, less, ly, or ful, after them, preserve the letter double; as, harmlessness, carelessness, carelessly, stiffly, successful.
But words that end in any double letter except for l, and that take ness, less, ly, or ful after them, keep the letter doubled; for example, harmlessness, carelessness, carelessly, stiffly, successful.
RULE VII. Ness, less, ly, or ful, added to words ending in silent e, does not cut it off; as, paleness, guileless, closely, peaceful; except in a few words; as, duly, truly, awful.
RULE VII. Ness, less, ly, or ful, added to words ending in silent e, does not cut it off; as, paleness, guileless, closely, peaceful; except in a few words; as, duly, truly, awful.
RULE VIII. When words ending in silent e, assume the termination, ment, the e should not be cut off; as, abatement, chastisement.
RULE VIII. When words ending in silent e take the ending ment, the e should remain; for example, abatement, chastisement.
Ment, like other terminations, changes y into i when the y is preceded by a consonant; as, accompany, accompaniment; merry, merriment.
Ment, like other endings, changes y into i when the y is preceded by a consonant; for example, accompany, accompaniment; merry, merriment.
RULE IX. When words ending in silent e, assume the termination, able or ible, the e should generally be cut off; as, blame, blamable; cure, curable; sense, sensible. But if c or g soft comes before e in the original word, the e is preserved in words compounded with able; as, peace, peaceable; change, changeable.
RULE IX. When words end in a silent e and take the endings able or ible, you usually drop the e; for example, blame, blamable; cure, curable; sense, sensible. However, if a soft c or g comes before the e in the original word, the e is kept in words with able; for instance, peace, peaceable; change, changeable.
RULE X. When ing or ish is added to words ending in silent e, the e is almost always omitted; as, place, placing; lodge, lodging; slave, slavish; prude, prudish.
RULE X. When ing or ish is added to words that end in a silent e, the e is usually dropped; for example, place, placing; lodge, lodging; slave, slavish; prude, prudish.
RULE XI. Compound words are generally spelled in the same manner as the simple words of which they are compounded; as, glasshouse, skylight, thereby, hereafter. Many words ending in double l, are exceptions to this rule; as, already, welfare, wilful, fulfil; and also the words, wherever, christmas, lammas, &c.
RULE XI. Compound words are usually spelled the same way as the simple words they are made from; for example, glasshouse, skylight, thereby, hereafter. Many words that end in double l are exceptions to this rule; for instance, already, welfare, wilful, fulfil; as well as the words wherever, christmas, lammas, &c.
You may now answer the following
You can now answer the following
QUESTIONS.
What is language?—How is language divided?—What is natural language?—What are the elements of natural language in man?—Wherein consists the language of brutes?—What is artificial language?—What is an idea?—What are words?—What is grammar?—What does Universal grammar explain?—Wherein does Particular grammar differ from universal?—What is the standard of grammatical accuracy?—What is Philosophical grammar?—What is Practical grammar?—What is a principle of grammar?—A definition?—A rule?—What is English grammar?—Into how many parts is grammar divided?—What does Orthography teach?
What is language? — How is language categorized? — What is natural language? — What are the components of natural language in humans? — What is the language of animals? — What is artificial language? — What is an idea? — What are words? — What is grammar? — What does Universal grammar explain? — How does Particular grammar differ from universal? — What is the standard for grammatical accuracy? — What is Philosophical grammar? — What is Practical grammar? — What is a grammar principle? — What is a definition? — What is a rule? — What is English grammar? — How many parts is grammar divided into? — What does Orthography teach?
ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX
LECTURE II
OF NOUNS AND VERBS.
The rules of syntax, which direct to the proper choice of words, and their judicious arrangement in a sentence, and thereby enable us to correct and avoid errors in speech, are chiefly based on principles unfolded and explained by Etymology. Etymological knowledge, then, is a prerequisite to the study of Syntax; but, in parsing, under the head of Etymology, you are required to apply the rules of Syntax. It becomes necessary, therefore, in a practical work of this sort, to treat these two parts of grammar in connexion.
The rules of syntax guide us in choosing the right words and arranging them properly in a sentence, helping us correct and avoid mistakes in our speech. These rules are mainly based on principles explained by Etymology. So, understanding Etymology is essential before studying Syntax; however, in parsing under Etymology, you'll need to use the rules of Syntax. Therefore, it's important in a practical work like this to discuss these two areas of grammar together.
Conducted on scientific principles, Etymology would comprehend the exposition of the origin and meaning of words, and, in short, their whole history, including their application to things in accordance with the laws of nature and of thought, and the caprice of those who apply them; but to follow up the current of language to its various sources, and analyze the springs from which it flows, would involve a process altogether too arduous and extensive for an elementary work. It would lead to the study of all those languages from which ours is immediately derived, and even compel us to trace many words through those languages to others more ancient, and so on, until the chain of research would become, if not endless, at least, too extensive to be traced out by one man. I shall, therefore, confine myself to the following, limited views of this part of grammar.
Conducted based on scientific principles, Etymology would cover the explanation of the origin and meaning of words, and essentially their entire history, including how they're applied according to the laws of nature and thought, as well as the whims of those who use them. However, following the path of language to its various sources and analyzing the origins from which it flows would require a process that's far too complicated and extensive for a basic work. It would entail studying all the languages from which ours is directly derived, and even force us to trace many words through those languages to even older ones, and so on, until the research chain becomes, if not endless, at least too vast for one person to track. Therefore, I will limit myself to the following, more focused views on this aspect of grammar.
1. Etymology treats of the classification of words.
1. Etymology deals with the classification of words.
2. Etymology explains the accidents or properties peculiar to each class or sort of words, and their present modifications. By modifications, I mean the changes produced on their endings, in consequence of their assuming different relations in respect to one another. These changes, such as fruit, fruits, fruit's; he, his, him; write, writest, writeth, writes, wrote, written, writing, writer; a, an; ample, amply, and the like, will be explained in their appropriate places.
2. Etymology explains the accidents or properties unique to each class or type of words, and their current modifications. By modifications, I mean the changes that happen to their endings as they take on different relationships with one another. These changes, such as fruit, fruits, fruit's; he, his, him; write, writest, writeth, writes, wrote, written, writing, writer; a, an; ample, amply, and so on, will be explained in their appropriate places.
3. Etymology treats of the derivation of words; that is, it teaches you how one word comes from, or grows out of another. For example, from the word speak, come the words speakest, speaketh, speaks, speaking, spoke, spoken, speaker, speaker's, speakers. These, you perceive, are all one and the same word, and all, except the last three, express the same kind of action. They differ from each other only in the termination. These changes in termination are produced on the word in order to make it correspond with the various persons who speak, the number of persons, or the time of speaking; as, I speak, thou speakest, the man speaketh, or speaks, the men speak, I spoke; The speaker speaks another speaker's speech.
3. Etymology is about the derivation of words; it explains how one word comes from or develops from another. For example, from the word speak, you get the words speakest, speaketh, speaks, speaking, spoke, spoken, speaker, speaker's, speakers. You can see that these are all variations of the same word, and all, except the last three, indicate the same type of action. They differ only in their endings. These changes in endings are made to match the different persons who speak, the number of people, or the time of speaking; for example, I speak, thou speakest, the man speaketh or speaks, the men speak, I spoke; The speaker speaks another speaker's speech.
The third part of Etymology, which is intimately connected with the second, will be more amply expanded in Lecture XIV, and in the Philosophical notes; but I shall not treat largely of that branch of derivation which consists in tracing words to foreign languages. This is the province of the lexicographer, rather than of the philologist. It is not the business of him who writes a practical, English grammar, to trace words to the Saxon, nor to the Celtic, the Greek, the Dutch, the Mexican, nor the Persian; nor is it his province to explain their meaning in Latin, French, or Hebrew, Italian, Mohegan, or Sanscrit; but it is his duty to explain their properties, their powers, their connexions, relations, dependancies, and, bearings, not at the period in which the Danes made an irruption into the island of Great Britain, nor in the year in which Lamech paid his addresses to Adah and Zillah, but at the particular period in which he writes. His words are already derived, formed, established, and furnished to his hand, and he is bound to take them and explain them as he finds them in his day, without any regard to their ancient construction and application.
The third part of Etymology, which is closely related to the second, will be discussed in more detail in Lecture XIV and the Philosophical notes; however, I won't focus much on the branch of derivation that involves tracing words back to foreign languages. That's more the job of a lexicographer than a philologist. It’s not the role of someone writing a practical English grammar to trace words to their Saxon, Celtic, Greek, Dutch, Mexican, or Persian roots; nor is it his responsibility to explain their meanings in Latin, French, Hebrew, Italian, Mohegan, or Sanskrit. Instead, he should focus on explaining their properties, powers, connections, relationships, dependencies, and implications, not at the time when the Danes invaded Great Britain or in the year when Lamech courted Adah and Zillah, but at the specific time he is writing. His words are already derived, formed, established, and available to him, and he must take them and explain them as they are in his day, without considering their ancient structure and usage.
CLASSIFICATION.
In arranging the parts of speech, I conceive it to be the legitimate object of the practical grammarian, to consult practical convenience. The true principle of classification seems to be, not a reference to essential differences in the primitive meaning of words, nor to their original combinations, but to the manner in which they are at present employed. In the early and rude state of society, mankind are quite limited in their knowledge, and having but few ideas to communicate, a small number of words answers their purpose in the transmission of thought. This leads them to express their ideas in short, detached sentences, requiring few or none of those connectives, or words of transition, which are afterwards introduced into language by refinement, and which contribute so largely to its perspicuity and elegance. The argument appears to be conclusive, then, that every language must necessarily have more parts of speech in its refined, than in its barbarous state.
In organizing parts of speech, I believe the main goal of a practical grammarian should be to consider practical convenience. The best way to classify them doesn't seem to focus on the essential differences in the basic meaning of words or their original combinations, but rather on the way they are currently used. In the early and simple state of society, people have very limited knowledge and, with only a few ideas to share, a small number of words is enough to communicate their thoughts. This leads them to express their ideas in short, separate sentences, needing few or no connectives or transition words, which are later added to language as it becomes more refined and enhances its clarity and elegance. Therefore, it seems clear that every language must have more parts of speech in its refined state than in its primitive state.
The part of speech to which any word belongs, is ascertained, not by the original signification of that word, but by its present manner of meaning, or, rather, the office which it performs in a sentence.
The part of speech that a word belongs to is determined, not by its original meaning, but by its current usage, or more specifically, the role it plays in a sentence.
The various ways in which a word is applied to the idea which it represents, are called its manner of meaning. Thus, The painter dips his paint brush in paint, to paint the carriage. Here, the word paint, is first employed to describe the brush which the painter uses; in this situation it is, therefore, an adjective; secondly, to name the mixture employed; for which reason it is a noun; and, lastly, to express the action performed; it therefore, becomes a verb; and yet, the meaning of the word is the same in all these applications. This meaning, however, is applied in different ways; and thus the same word becomes different parts of speech. Richard took water from the water pot, to water the plants.
The different ways a word can represent the idea it stands for are called its manner of meaning. For example, the painter dips his paint brush in paint to paint the carriage. Here, the word paint is first used to describe the brush the painter uses, making it an adjective; next, it names the mixture used, so it is a noun; and finally, it expresses the action being carried out, making it a verb. Yet, the meaning of the word remains the same in all these uses. However, this meaning is applied in different ways, meaning the same word can act as different parts of speech. Richard took water from the water pot to water the plants.
ETYMOLOGY.
Etymology treats, first, of the classification of words.
Etymology first focuses on the classification of words.
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE is derived chiefly from the Saxon, Danish, Celtic, and Gothic; but in the progressive stages of its refinement, it has been greatly enriched by accessions from the Greek, Latin, French, Spanish, Italian, and German languages.
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE primarily comes from Saxon, Danish, Celtic, and Gothic roots; however, as it has evolved, it has been significantly enhanced by contributions from Greek, Latin, French, Spanish, Italian, and German languages.
The number of words in our language, after deducting proper names, and words formed by the inflections of our verbs, nouns, and adjectives, may be estimated at about forty thousand.
The number of words in our language, after subtracting proper names and words created by the inflections of our verbs, nouns, and adjectives, can be estimated at about forty thousand.
Thus you perceive, that all the words in the English language are included in these ten classes: and what you have to do in acquiring a knowledge of English Grammar, is merely to become acquainted with these ten parts of speech, and the rules of Syntax that apply to them. The Noun and Verb are the most important and leading parts of speech; therefore they are first presented: all the rest (except the interjection) are either appendages or connectives of these two. As you proceed, you will find that it will require more time, and cost you more labor, to get a knowledge of the noun and verb, than it will to become familiar with all the minor parts of speech.
So, you see, all the words in the English language fit into these ten categories. What you need to do to learn English Grammar is simply to get to know these ten parts of speech and the rules of syntax that go with them. The Noun and Verb are the most crucial and primary parts of speech; that's why they come first. All the other parts (except for the interjection) are either additions or connectors to these two. As you continue, you'll find that it takes more time and effort to understand the noun and verb than it does to get comfortable with all the minor parts of speech.
The principal use of words is, to name things, compare them with each other, and express their actions.
The main purpose of words is to name things, compare them to one another, and express their actions.
Nouns, which are the names of entities or things, adjectives which denote the comparisons and relations of things by describing them, and expressing their qualities, and verbs, which express the actions and being of things, are the only classes of words necessarily recognised in a philosophical view of grammar. But in a treatise which consults, mainly, the practical advantages of the learner, it is believed, that no classification will be found more convenient or accurate than the foregoing, which divides words into ten sorts. To attempt to prove, in this place, that nothing would be gained by adopting either a less or a greater number of the parts of speech, would be anticipating the subject. I shall, therefore, give my reasons for adopting this arrangement in preference to any other, as the different sorts of words are respectively presented to you, for then you will be better prepared to appreciate my arguments.
Nouns, which are names of entities or things, adjectives, which describe and compare things by expressing their qualities, and verbs, which convey the actions and existence of things, are the only categories of words that are fundamentally recognized in a philosophical view of grammar. However, in a guide that focuses mainly on the practical benefits for the learner, it is believed that no classification is more convenient or accurate than the one mentioned above, which categorizes words into ten types. To argue that there would be no advantage in adopting either fewer or more parts of speech would be to jump ahead in the discussion. Therefore, I will explain my reasons for choosing this arrangement over others as we look at the different types of words, so that you will be better equipped to understand my points.
OF NOUNS.
Nouns are often improperly called substantives. A substantive is the name of a substance only; but a noun is the name either of a substance or a quality.
Nouns are often incorrectly referred to as substantives. A substantive is the name of a substance only; however, a noun can name either a substance or a quality.
Noun, derived from the Latin word nomen, signifies name. The name of any thing[1] that exists, whether animate or inanimate, or which we can see, hear, feel, taste, smell, or think of, is a noun. Animal, bird, creature, paper, pen, apple, fold, house, modesty, virtue, danger, are all nouns. In order that you may easily distinguish this part of speech from others, I will give you a sign, which will be useful to you when you cannot tell it by the sense. Any word that will make sense with the before it, is a noun. Try the following words by this sign, and see if they are nouns: tree, mountain, soul, mind, conscience, understanding. The tree, the mountain, the soul, and so on. You perceive, that they will make sense with the prefixed; therefore you know they are nouns. There are, however, exceptions to this rule, for some nouns will not make sense with the prefixed. These you will be able to distinguish, if you exercise your mind, by their making sense of themselves; as, goodness, sobriety, hope, immortality.
Noun, coming from the Latin word nomen, means name. The name of anything[1] that exists, whether alive or not, or that we can see, hear, feel, taste, smell, or think about, is a noun. Animal, bird, creature, paper, pen, apple, fold, house, modesty, virtue, danger are all nouns. To help you easily recognize this part of speech from others, I’ll provide you with a sign that will be useful when you can’t identify it by sense. Any word that makes sense with the in front of it is a noun. Try using this sign with the following words to see if they’re nouns: tree, mountain, soul, mind, conscience, understanding. The tree, the mountain, the soul, and so on. You’ll see they make sense with the added; so you know they are nouns. However, there are exceptions to this rule, as some nouns won’t make sense with the in front. You can identify these by thinking about them, as they make sense on their own; for example, goodness, sobriety, hope, immortality.
Nouns are used to denote the nonentity or absence of a thing, as well as its reality; as, nothing, naught, vacancy, non-existence, invisibility.
Nouns are used to refer to the absence of something, in addition to its existence; for example, nothing, naught, vacancy, non-existence, invisibility.
Nouns are sometimes used as verbs, and verbs, as nouns, according to their manner of meaning; and nouns are sometimes used as adjectives, and adjectives, as nouns. This matter will be explained in the concluding part of this lecture, where you will be better prepared to comprehend it.
Nouns are sometimes used as verbs, and verbs as nouns, based on their meaning; and nouns can also function as adjectives, while adjectives can act as nouns. This topic will be clarified in the final part of this lecture, where you will be better equipped to understand it.
The distinction between a common and a proper noun, is very obvious. For example: boy is a common noun, because it is a name applied to all boys; but Charles is a proper noun, because it is the name of an individual boy. Although many boys may have the same name, yet you know it is not a common noun, for the name Charles is not given to all boys. Mississippi is a proper noun, because it is the name of an individual river; but river is a common noun, because it is the name of a species of things, and the name river is common to all rivers.
The difference between a common noun and a proper noun is very clear. For example: boy is a common noun because it refers to all boys; but Charles is a proper noun because it is the name of a specific individual boy. Even though many boys might have the same name, it’s not a common noun since the name Charles is not used for all boys. Mississippi is a proper noun because it’s the name of a specific river; but river is a common noun because it’s a name for a type of thing, and the name river applies to all rivers.
Nouns which denote the genus, species, or variety of beings or things, are always common; as, tree, the genus; oak, ash, chestnut, poplar, different species; and red oak, white oak, black oak, varieties. The word earth, when it signifies a kind or quantity of dirt, is a common noun; but when it denotes the planet we inhabit, it is a proper noun. The words person, place, river, mountain, lake, &c. are common nouns, because they are the names of whole species, or classes of things containing many sorts; but the names of persons, places, rivers, mountains, lakes, &c. are proper nouns, because they denote individuals; as, Augustus, Baltimore, Alps, Huron.
Nouns that refer to a type, category, or variety of people or things are always common. For example, tree represents the type; oak, ash, chestnut, and poplar are different types; and red oak, white oak, and black oak are varieties. The word earth, when it means a kind or amount of dirt, is a common noun; but when it refers to the planet we live on, it becomes a proper noun. The words person, place, river, mountain, lake, etc., are common nouns because they name entire categories or classes of things that include many kinds; however, the names of specific people, places, rivers, mountains, lakes, etc., are proper nouns because they refer to individuals, like Augustus, Baltimore, Alps, and Huron.
Physician, lawyer, merchant, and shoemaker, are common nouns, because these names are common to classes of men. God and Lord, when applied to Jehovah or Jesus Christ, are proper; but when employed to denote heathen or false gods, or temporal lords, they are common. The Notes and remarks throughout the work, though of minor importance, demand your attentive and careful perusal.
Physician, lawyer, merchant, and shoemaker are common nouns because these names refer to general categories of people. God and Lord, when referring to Jehovah or Jesus Christ, are proper nouns; however, when used to describe pagan or false gods or earthly lords, they are common nouns. The notes and comments throughout the work, while not of major significance, require your thoughtful and thorough reading.
NOTES.
GENDER.
Neuter means neither: therefore neuter gender signifies neither gender; that is, neither masculine nor feminine. Hence, neuter gender means no gender. Strictly speaking, then, as there are but two sexes, nouns have but two genders; but for the sake of practical convenience, we apply to them three genders, by calling that a gender which is no gender. The English and the pure Persian, appear to be the only languages which observe, in the distinction of sex, the natural division of nouns.—The genders of nouns are so easily known, that a farther explanation of them is unnecessary, except what is given in the following
Neuter means neither: so neuter gender means neither gender; that is, neither masculine nor feminine. Therefore, neuter gender means no gender. Strictly speaking, there are only two sexes, so nouns have only two genders; but for practicality, we refer to three genders, calling that a gender which is no gender. English and pure Persian seem to be the only languages that recognize, in the distinction of sex, the natural division of nouns. The genders of nouns are so easily identified that further explanation isn't necessary, except for what is provided in the following.
NOTES.
Masculine. | Feminine. |
Bachelor | maid |
Boar | sow |
Boy | girl |
Brother | sister |
Buck | doe |
Bull | cow |
Cock | hen |
Dog | bitch |
Drake | duck |
Earl | countess |
Father | mother |
Friar | nun |
Gander | goose |
Hart | roe |
Horse | mare |
Husband | wife |
King | queen |
Lad | lass |
Lord | lady |
Man | woman |
Master | mistress |
Milter | spawner |
Nephew | niece |
Ram | ewe |
Singer | songstress or singer |
Sloven | slut |
Son | daughter |
Stag | hind |
Uncle | aunt |
Wizard | witch |
Sir | madam |
Actor | actress |
Administrator | administratrix |
Adulterer | adulteress |
Ambassador | ambassadress |
Arbiter | arbitress |
Auditor | auditress |
Author | authoress |
Baron | baroness |
Benefactor | benefactress |
Bridegroom | bride |
Canon | canoness |
Caterer | cateress |
Chanter | chantress |
Conductor | conductress |
Count | countess |
Czar | czarina |
Deacon | deaconess |
Detracter | detractress |
Director | directress |
Duke | dutchess |
Elector | electress |
Embassador | embassadress |
Emperor | emperess |
Enchanter | enchantress |
Executor | executrix |
Fornicator | fornicatress |
God | goddess |
Governor | governess |
Heir | heiress |
Hero | heroine |
Host | hostess |
Hunter | huntress |
Inheritor | inheritress or inheritrix |
Instructor | instructress |
Jew | Jewess |
Lion | lioness |
Marquis | marchioness |
Mayor | mayoress |
Patron | patroness |
Peer | peeress |
Poet | poetess |
Priest | priestess |
Prince | princess |
Prior | prioress |
Prophet | prophetess |
Proprietor | proprietress |
Protector | protectress |
Shepherd | shepherdess |
Songster | songstress |
Sorcerer | sorceress |
Suiter | suitress |
Sultan | sultaness or sultana |
Tiger | tigress |
Testator | testatrix |
Traitor | traitress |
Tutor | tutoress |
Tyrant | tyranness |
Victor | victress |
Viscount | viscountess |
Votary | votaress |
Widower | widow |
A cock-sparrow | A hen-sparrow |
A man-servant | A maid-servant |
A he-goat | A she-goat |
A he-bear | A she-bear |
A male-child | A female-child |
Male-descendants | Female-descendants |
PERSON.
Nouns have but two persons, the second and third. When a man speaks, the pronoun I or we is always used; therefore nouns can never be in the first person. In examples like the following, some philologists suppose the noun to be in the first person:—"This may certify, that I, Jonas Taylor, do hereby give and grant," &c. But it is evident, that the speaker or writer, in introducing his own name, speaks of himself; consequently the noun is of the third person.
Nouns have only two persons, the second and third. When someone speaks, they always use the pronoun I or we; therefore, nouns can never be in the first person. In examples like the following, some linguists think the noun is in the first person:—"This may certify, that I, Jonas Taylor, do hereby give and grant," &c. But it’s clear that the speaker or writer, by mentioning their own name, is talking about themselves; thus, the noun is in the third person.
If you wish to understand the persons of nouns, a little sober thought is requisite; and, by exercising it, all difficulties will be removed. If I say, my son, have you seen the young man? you perceive that the noun son is of the second person, because I address myself to him; that is, he is spoken to; but the noun man is of the third person, because he is spoken of. Again, if I say, young man, have you seen my son? man is of the second person, and son is of the third.
If you want to understand the different forms of nouns, you need to think about it a bit; doing so will clear up any confusion. If I say, my son, have you seen the young man? you can see that the noun son is in the second person, because I’m addressing him directly; that is, he is being spoken to; but the noun man is in the third person, because he is being spoken of. Similarly, if I say, young man, have you seen my son? then man is in the second person, and son is in the third.
"Hast thou left thy blue course in the heavens, golden-haired sun of the sky?"
"Have you left your blue path in the sky, golden-haired sun of the heavens?"
"Father, may the Great Spirit so brighten the chain of friendship between us, that a child may find it, when the sun is asleep in his wig-wam behind the western waters."
"Father, may the Great Spirit brighten the bond of friendship between us, so much that a child can find it when the sun is down in his lodge behind the western waters."
In these examples, the nouns, sun, father, mountains, valleys, and hope, are of the second person, and, as you will hereafter learn, in the nominative case independent. Course, heavens, sky, Spirit, chain, friendship, child, sun, wig-wam, waters, earth, skies, wings, earth, bounds, ocean, and shore, are all of the third person.
In these examples, the nouns sun, father, mountains, valleys, and hope are in the second person and, as you will learn later, are in the nominative case independent. Course, heavens, sky, Spirit, chain, friendship, child, sun, wigwam, waters, earth, skies, wings, earth, bounds, ocean, and shore are all in the third person.
NUMBER.
NOTES.
Singular | Plural. |
Antithesis | antitheses |
Apex | apices |
Appendix | {appendixes or |
{appendices | |
Arcanum | arcana |
Automaton | automata |
Axis | axes |
Basis | bases |
Beau | {beaux or |
{beaus | |
Calx | {calces or |
{calxes | |
Cherub | {cherubim or |
{cherubs | |
Crisis | crises |
Criterion | criteria |
Datum | data |
Diæresis | diæreses |
Desideratum | desiderata |
Effluvium | effluvia |
Ellipsis | ellipses |
Emphasis | emphases |
Encomium | {encomia or |
{encomiums | |
Erratum | errata |
Genius | genii [2] |
Genus | genera |
Hypothesis | hypotheses |
Ignis fatuus | ignes fatui |
Index | {indices or |
{indexes[3] | |
Lamina | laminae |
Magus | magi |
Memorandum | {memoranda or |
{memorandums | |
Metamorphosis | metamorphoses |
Parenthesis | parentheses |
Phenomenon | phenomena |
Radius | {radii or |
{radiuses | |
Stamen | stamina |
Seraph | {seraphim or |
{seraphs | |
Stimulus | stimuli |
Stratum | strata |
Thesis | theses |
Vertex | vertices |
Vortex | {vortices or |
{vortexes |
CASE.
I deem the essential qualities of case, in English, to consist, not in the changes or inflections produced on nouns and pronouns, but in the various offices which they perform in a sentence, by assuming different positions in regard to other words. In accordance with this definition, these cases can be easily explained on reasoning principles, founded in the nature of things.
I believe the fundamental qualities of case in English lie not in the changes or inflections made to nouns and pronouns, but in the different roles they play in a sentence by taking up various positions in relation to other words. Based on this definition, these cases can be easily explained through reasoning principles grounded in the nature of things.
Now, five grains of common sense will enable any one to comprehend what is meant by case. Its real character is extremely simple; but in the different grammars it assumes as many meanings as Proteus had shapes. The most that has been written on it, however, is mere verbiage. What, then, is meant by case? In speaking of a horse, for instance, we say he is in a good case, when he is fat, and in a bad case, when he is lean, and needs more oats; and in this sense we apply the term case to denote the state or condition of the horse. So, when we place a noun before a verb as actor or subject, we say it is in the nominative case; but when it follows a transitive verb or preposition, we say it has another case; that is, it assumes a new position or situation in the sentence: and this we call the objective case. Thus, the boy gathers fruit. Here the boy is represented as acting. He is, therefore, in the nominative case. But when I say, Jane struck the boy, I do not represent the boy as the actor, but as the object of the action. He is, therefore, in a new case or condition. And when I say, This is the boy's hat, I do not speak of the boy either as acting or as acted upon; but as possessing something: for which reason he is in the possessive case. Hence, it is clear, that nouns have three cases or positions.
Now, just a little common sense will help anyone understand what is meant by case. Its true nature is really straightforward; however, in different grammars, it takes on as many meanings as Proteus had shapes. Most of what has been written about it is just talk. So, what does case mean? When we talk about a horse, for example, we say he is in good case when he is fat and in bad case when he is lean and needs more oats; in this sense, we use the term case to indicate the state or condition of the horse. When we put a noun before a verb as the actor or subject, we call it the nominative case; but when it comes after a transitive verb or preposition, we say it has another case; that is, it takes on a new position or situation in the sentence: and this we call the objective case. For example, in the sentence, the boy gathers fruit, the boy is shown as acting, so he is in the nominative case. However, when I say, Jane struck the boy, I’m not showing the boy as the actor, but rather as the object of the action. Hence, he is in a new case or condition. And when I say, This is the boy's hat, I’m not describing the boy as acting or as acted upon; instead, I’m saying he has something, which is why he is in the possessive case. Therefore, it’s clear that nouns have three cases or positions.
As the nominative and objective cases of the noun are inseparably connected with the verb, it is impossible for you to understand them until you shall have acquired some knowledge of this part of speech. I will, therefore, now give you a partial description of the verb in connexion with the noun; which will enable me to illustrate the cases of the noun so clearly, that you may easily comprehend their nature.
As the subject and object forms of a noun are closely linked with the verb, you can't fully understand them until you have some knowledge of this part of speech. So, I will now provide you with a brief description of the verb in relation to the noun; this will help me explain the noun cases clearly, making it easier for you to grasp their nature.
In the formation of language, mankind, in order to hold converse with each other, found it necessary, in the first place, to give names to the various objects by which they were surrounded. Hence the origin of the first part of speech, which we denominate the noun. But merely to name the objects which they beheld or thought of, was not sufficient for their purpose. They perceived that these objects existed, moved, acted, or caused some action to be done. In looking at a man, for instance, they perceived that he lived, walked, ate, smiled, talked, ran, and so on. They perceived that plants grow, flowers bloom, and rivers flow. Hence the necessity of another part of speech, whose office it should be to express these existences and actions. This second class of words we call
In the development of language, humans realized that to communicate with each other, they first needed to give names to the different objects around them. This led to the creation of the first type of word, which we call the noun. However, simply naming the things they saw or thought about wasn’t enough. They noticed that these objects existed, moved, acted, or caused actions to happen. When observing a man, for example, they recognized that he lived, walked, ate, smiled, talked, ran, and so on. They observed that plants grow, flowers bloom, and rivers flow. This created the need for another type of word to express these existences and actions. This second category of words we call
VERBS.
The term verb is derived from the Latin word verbum, which signifies a word. This part of speech is called a verb or word, because it is deemed the most important word in every sentence: and without a verb and nominative, either expressed or implied, no sentence can exist. The noun is the original and leading part of speech; the verb comes next in order, and is far more complex than the noun. These two are the most useful in the language, and form the basis of the science of grammar. The other eight parts of speech are subordinate to these two, and, as you will hereafter learn, of minor importance.
The term verb comes from the Latin word verbum, which means a word. This part of speech is called a verb or word because it’s considered the most important word in every sentence: without a verb and a subject, either stated or implied, no sentence can exist. The noun is the original and primary part of speech; the verb follows in order and is much more complex than the noun. These two are the most useful in the language and form the foundation of grammar. The other eight parts of speech are subordinate to these two and, as you will learn later, are of lesser importance.
For all practical purposes, the foregoing definition and division of the verb, though, perhaps, not philosophically correct, will be found as convenient as any other. I adopt them, therefore, to be consistent with the principle, that, in arranging the materials of this treatise, I shall not alter or reject any established definition, rule, or principle of grammar, unless, in my humble judgment, some practical advantage to the learner is thereby gained. The following, some consider a good definition.
For all practical purposes, the definition and breakdown of the verb provided above, while maybe not philosophically correct, is as convenient as any other. I choose to use them to stay consistent with the principle that, in organizing the content of this guide, I won’t change or disregard any established definition, rule, or principle of grammar unless, in my humble opinion, it offers some practical advantage to the learner. Some people view the following as a good definition.
The nominative case is the actor, or subject of the verb; as, John writes.
In this example, which is the verb? You know it is the word writes, because this word signifies to do; that is, it expresses action, therefore, according to the definition, it is an active verb. And you know, too, that the noun John is the actor, therefore John is in the nominative case to the verb writes. In the expressions, The man walks—The boy plays—Thunders roll—- Warriors fight—you perceive that the words walks, plays, roll, and fight, are active verbs; and you cannot be at a loss to know, that the nouns man, boy, thunders, and warriors, are in the nominative case.
In this example, which is the verb? You know it is the word writes, because this word means to do; that is, it shows action, so according to the definition, it is an active verb. And you also know that the noun John is the actor, so John is in the nominative case related to the verb writes. In the phrases, The man walks—The boy plays—Thunders roll—Warriors fight—you see that the words walks, plays, roll, and fight are active verbs; and you cannot miss that the nouns man, boy, thunders, and warriors are in the nominative case.
As no action can be produced without some agent or moving cause, it follows, that every active verb must have some actor or agent. This actor, doer, or producer of the action, is the nominative. Nominative, from the Latin nomino, literally signifies to name; but in the technical sense in which it is used in grammar, it means the noun or pronoun which is the subject of affirmation. This subject or nominative may be active, passive, or neuter, as hereafter exemplified.
As no action can take place without some agent or moving cause, it follows that every active verb must have an actor or agent. This actor, doer, or producer of the action is the nominative. Nominative, from the Latin nomino, literally means to name; but in the specific way it is used in grammar, it refers to the noun or pronoun that is the subject of a statement. This subject or nominative can be active, passive, or neuter, as will be shown later.
Now, in this example, John is not represented as an actor, but, as the subject of the verb sits, therefore John is in the nominative case to the verb. And you know that the word sits does not express apparent action, but a condition of being; that is, it represents John in a particular state of existence; therefore sits is a neuter verb. In speaking of the neuter gender of nouns, I informed you, that neuter means neither; from which it follows, that neuter gender implies neither gender; that is, neither masculine nor feminine. Hence, by an easy transition of thought, you learn, that neuter, when applied to verbs, means neither of the other two classes; that is, a neuter verb is one which is neither active nor passive. In these examples, The man stands—The lady lives—The child sleeps—The world exists—the words stands, lives, sleeps, and exists, are neuter verbs; and the nouns, man, lady, child, and world, are all in the nominative case, because each is the subject of a verb. Thus you perceive, that when a noun is in the nominative case to an active verb, it is the actor; and when it is nominative to a neuter verb, it is not an actor, but the subject of the verb.
In this example, John is not shown as an actor, but as the subject of the verb sits, which means John is in the nominative case with respect to the verb. And you know that the word sits doesn't show obvious action, but a state of being; that is, it represents John in a specific condition of existence; so sits is a neuter verb. When talking about the neuter gender of nouns, I told you that neuter means neither; which means that neuter gender indicates no gender; that is, neither masculine nor feminine. Thus, you can easily understand that neuter, when applied to verbs, means none of the other two categories; that is, a neuter verb is one that is neither active nor passive. In these examples, The man stands—The lady lives—The child sleeps—The world exists—the words stands, lives, sleeps, and exists are neuter verbs; and the nouns, man, lady, child, and world, are all in the nominative case, because each is the subject of a verb. So you can see that when a noun is in the nominative case with an active verb, it is the actor; and when it is nominative to a neuter verb, it is not an actor, but the subject of the verb.
Some neuter verbs express being in general; as, The man is; Kingdoms exist. Others express being in some particular state; as, The man stands, sits, lies, or hangs.
Some neuter verbs express being in general; for example, The man is; Kingdoms exist. Others express being in a specific state; for instance, The man stands, sits, lies, or hangs.
I will now give you two signs, which will enable you to distinguish the verb from other parts of speech, when you cannot tell it by its signification. Any word that will make sense with to before it, is a verb. Thus, to run, to write, to smile, to sing, to hear, to ponder, to live, to breathe, are verbs. Or, any word that will conjugate, is a verb. Thus, I run, thou runnest, he runs; I write, thou writest, he writes; I smile, &c. But the words, boy, lady, child, and world, will not make sense with to prefixed—to boy, to lady, to world, is nonsense. Neither will they conjugate—I lady, thou ladiest, &c. is worse than nonsense. Hence you perceive, that these words are not verbs. There are some exceptions to these rules, for verbs are sometimes used as nouns. This will be explained by and by.
I’m going to give you two signs that will help you tell verbs apart from other parts of speech when their meaning doesn't make it clear. Any word that makes sense with to in front of it is a verb. For example, to run, to write, to smile, to sing, to hear, to ponder, to live, and to breathe are all verbs. Also, any word that can conjugate is a verb. For instance, I run, you run, he runs; I write, you write, he writes; I smile, etc. But words like boy, lady, child, and world don’t make sense with to in front—to boy, to lady, to world are just nonsense. They also can’t conjugate—I lady, you ladiest, etc., is even more absurd. So, you see that these words are not verbs. There are some exceptions to these rules since verbs can sometimes be used as nouns. This will be explained later.
At present I shall speak only of the number and person of verbs; but hereafter I will give you a full explanation of all their properties. And permit me to inform you, that I shall not lead you into the intricacies of the science, until, by gradual and easy progressions, you are enabled to comprehend the principles involved in them. Only such principles will be elucidated, as you are prepared to understand at the time they are unfolded before you. You must not be too anxious to get along rapidly; but endeavor to become thoroughly acquainted with one principle, before you undertake another. This lecture will qualify you for the next.
Right now, I'm only going to talk about the number and person of verbs, but later, I’ll give you a complete explanation of all their properties. And let me tell you that I won’t get into the complexities of the subject until you’re ready to understand the principles behind them, step by step. I will only explain the principles that you’re ready to grasp when they are presented to you. Don’t rush to progress quickly; instead, focus on fully understanding one principle before moving on to the next. This lecture will prepare you for the next one.
NUMBER AND PERSON OF VERBS. You recollect, that the nominative is the actor or subject, and the active verb is the action performed by the nominative. By this you perceive, that a very intimate connexion or relation exists between the nominative case and the verb. If, therefore, only one creature or thing acts, only one action, at the same instant, can be done; as, The girl writes. The nominative girl is here of the singular number, because it signifies but one person; and the verb writes denotes but one action, which the girl performs; therefore the verb writes is of the singular number, agreeing with its nominative girl. When the nominative case is plural, the verb must be plural; as, girls write. Take notice, the singular verb ends in s, but the noun is generally plural when it ends in s; thus, The girl writes—the girls write.
NUMBER AND PERSON OF VERBS. Remember that the nominative is the actor or subject, and the active verb is the action carried out by the nominative. This shows you that a very close connection exists between the nominative case and the verb. So, if only one creature or thing is acting, only one action can happen at that moment; for example, The girl writes. The nominative girl is singular because it represents just one person, and the verb writes indicates just one action performed by the girl; therefore, the verb writes is in the singular form, matching its nominative girl. When the nominative case is plural, the verb must be plural too; for instance, girls write. Note that the singular verb ends in s, but the noun is usually plural when it ends in s; thus, The girl writes—the girls write.
Person, strictly speaking, is a quality that belongs not to verbs, but to nouns and pronouns. We say, however, that the verb must agree with its nominative in person, as well as in number; that is, the verb must be spelled and spoken in such a manner as to correspond with the first, second, or third person of the noun or pronoun which is its nominative.
Person refers to a quality that applies not to verbs, but to nouns and pronouns. We say, however, that the verb must match its subject in person, just like it must in number; meaning, the verb needs to be written and pronounced in a way that aligns with the first, second, or third person of the noun or pronoun that serves as its subject.
I will now show you how the verb is varied in order to agree with its nominative in number and person. I, Thou, He, She, It; We, Ye or You, They, are personal pronouns. I is of the first person, and singular number; Thou is second person, sing.; He, She, or It, is third per. sing.; We is first per. plural; Ye or You is second per. plural; They is third per. plural. These pronouns are the representatives of nouns, and perform the same office that the nouns would for which they stand. When placed before the verb, they are, therefore, the nominatives to the verb.
I’m going to show you how verbs change to agree with their subjects in number and person. I, you, he, she, it; we, you, they are personal pronouns. I is the first person and singular; you is second person, singular; he, she, or it is third person, singular; we is first person, plural; you is second person, plural; they is third person, plural. These pronouns represent nouns and serve the same purpose as the nouns they replace. When placed before the verb, they are the nominatives to the verb.
Notice particularly, the different variations or endings of the verb, as it is thus conjugated in the
Notice particularly the different variations or endings of the verb, as it is conjugated in the
INDICATIVE MOOD, PRESENT TENSE.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. Per. I walk, | 1. Per. We Walk, |
2. Per. Thou walkest, | 2. Per. Ye or you walk, |
3. Per. He walks, or the boy walks, or walketh. | 3. Per. They walk, or the boys walk. |
This display of the verb shows you, that whenever it ends in est, it is of the second person singular; but when the verb ends in s, or eth, it is of the third person singular. Walkest, ridest, standest, are of the second person singular; and walks or walketh, rides or rideth, stands or standeth, are of the third person singular.
This display of the verb shows you that whenever it ends in est, it is the second person singular; but when the verb ends in s or eth, it is the third person singular. Walkest, ridest, standest are the second person singular; and walks or walketh, rides or rideth, stands or standeth are the third person singular.
I have told you, that when the nominative is singular number, the verb must be; when the nominative is plural, the verb must be; and when the nominative is first, second, or third person, the verb must be of the same person. If you look again at the foregoing conjugation of walk, you will notice that the verb varies if its endings in the singular, in order to agree in form with the first, second, and third person of its nominative; but in the plural it does not vary its endings from the first person singular. The verb, however, agrees in sense with its nominative in the plural, as well as in the singular. Exercise a little mind, and you will perceive that agreement and government in language do not consist merely in the form of words. Now, is it not clear, that when I say, I walk, the verb walk is singular, because it expresses but one action? And when I say, Two men walk, is it not equally apparent, that walk is plural, because it expresses two actions? In the sentence, Ten men walk, the verb walk denotes ten actions, for there are ten actors. Common sense teaches you, that there must be as many actions as there are actors; and that the verb, when it has no form or ending to show it, is as strictly plural, as when it has.—So, in the phrase, We walk, the verb walk is first person, because it expresses the actions performed by the speakers: Ye or you walk, the verb is second person, denoting the actions of the persons spoken to; third person, They walk. The verb, then, when correctly written, always agrees, in sense, with its nominative in number and person.
I’ve told you that when the subject is singular, the verb must be singular; when the subject is plural, the verb must be plural; and when the subject is in the first, second, or third person, the verb must match that person. If you look again at the conjugation of walk, you’ll see that the verb changes in the singular to align with the first, second, and third person of its subject; but in the plural, it doesn’t change from the first person singular. The verb, however, aligns in sense with its subject in both plural and singular forms. Think about it for a moment, and you’ll realize that agreement and government in language aren’t just about the form of words. Now, isn’t it obvious that when I say, I walk, the verb walk is singular, because it describes only one action? And when I say, Two men walk, isn’t it just as clear that walk is plural, because it describes two actions? In the sentence, Ten men walk, the verb walk indicates ten actions since there are ten doers. Common sense tells you that there must be as many actions as there are actors; and that the verb, when it has no form or ending to show it, is just as clearly plural as when it does. So, in the phrase, We walk, the verb walk is first person because it expresses the action done by the speakers: Ye or you walk, the verb is second person, referring to the actions of the people being spoken to; and in the third person, They walk. The verb, when used correctly, always agrees in sense with its subject in number and person.
At present you are learning two parts of speech, neither of which can be understood without a knowledge of the other. It therefore becomes necessary to explain them both, in the same lecture. You have been already informed, that nouns have three cases; the nominative, the possessive, and the objective.
At this time, you are learning two parts of speech, and you can't fully understand one without knowing the other. So, it's essential to explain both in the same lecture. You've already been told that nouns have three cases: the nominative, the possessive, and the objective.
When I say, These are the men's, and those, the boys' hats, the two words, "boys' hats," plainly convey the idea, if they have any meaning at all, that the boys own or possess the hats. "Samuel Badger sells boys' hats." Who owns the hats? Mr. Badger. How is that fact ascertained? Not by the words, "boys' hats," which, taken by themselves, imply, not that they are Mr. Badger's hats, nor that they are for boys, but that they are hats of, or belonging to, or possessed by boys. But we infer from the words connected with the phrase, "boys' hats," that the boys are not yet, as the phrase literally denotes, in the actual possession of the hats. The possession is anticipated.
When I say, These are the men's hats, and those are the boys' hats, the two words "boys' hats" clearly suggest, if they mean anything at all, that the boys own or have the hats. "Samuel Badger sells boys' hats." Who owns the hats? Mr. Badger. How do we know that? Not from the words "boys' hats," which, on their own, imply not that they are Mr. Badger's hats, nor that they are for boys, but that they are hats of, or belonging to, or owned by boys. But we infer from the context of the phrase "boys' hats" that the boys are not actually in possession of the hats yet, but that the ownership is expected.
In the phrases, fine hats, coarse hats, high-crowned hats, broad-brimmed hats, woollen, new, ten, some, these, many hats, the words in italics, are adjectives, because they restrict, qualify, or define the term hats; but the term boys' does not describe or limit the meaning of hats. Boys', therefore, is not, as some suppose, an adjective.
In the phrases, fine hats, coarse hats, high-crowned hats, broad-brimmed hats, woollen, new, ten, some, these, many hats, the words in italics are adjectives because they restrict, qualify, or define the term hats; however, the term boys' does not describe or limit the meaning of hats. Therefore, boys' is not, as some might think, an adjective.
"The slave's master." Does the slave possess the master? Yes. The slave has a master. If he has him, then, he possesses him;—he sustains that relation to him which we call possession.
"The slave's master." Does the slave own the master? Yes. The slave has a master. If he has him, then he possesses him;—he maintains that relationship with him that we refer to as possession.
A noun in the possessive case, is always known by its having an apostrophe, and generally an s after it; thus, John's, hat; the boy's coat. When a plural noun in the possessive case, ends in s, the apostrophe is added, but no additional s; as, "Boys' hats; Eagles' wings." When a singular noun ends in ss, the apostrophe only is added; as, "For goodness' sake; for righteousness' sake;" except the word witness; as, "The witness's testimony." When a noun in the possessive case ends in ence, the s is omitted, but the apostrophe is retained; as, "For conscience' sake."
A noun in the possessive case is always recognized by its apostrophe, usually followed by an s; for example, John's hat or the boy's coat. When a plural noun in the possessive case ends with an s, you just add the apostrophe, without adding another s; for instance, "Boys' hats" or "Eagles' wings." When a singular noun ends in ss, you add just the apostrophe; as in, "For goodness' sake" or "for righteousness' sake," except for the word witness; for example, "The witness's testimony." When a noun in the possessive case ends in ence, you drop the s but keep the apostrophe; like, "For conscience' sake."
Now please to turn back, and read over this and the preceding lecture three times, and endeavor, not only to understand, but, also, to remember, what you read. In reading, proceed thus: read one sentence over slowly, and then look off the book, and repeat it two or three times over in your mind. After that, take another sentence and proceed in the same manner, and so on through the whole lecture. Do not presume to think, that these directions are of no real consequence to you; for, unless you follow them strictly, you need not expect to make rapid progress. On the other hand, if you proceed according to my instructions, you will be sure to acquire a practical knowledge of grammar in a short time.—When you shall have complied with this requisition, you may commit the following order of parsing a noun, and the order of parsing a verb; and then you will be prepared to parse or analyze the following examples.
Now please turn back and read this and the previous lecture three times, and try not only to understand but also to remember what you read. When you read, do it like this: read one sentence slowly, then look away from the book and repeat it two or three times in your mind. After that, take another sentence and do the same thing, and continue through the entire lecture. Don’t think that these directions don’t matter; if you don’t follow them closely, you shouldn’t expect to make quick progress. On the flip side, if you follow my instructions, you will definitely gain a practical understanding of grammar in no time. Once you’ve done this, you can memorize the following order of parsing a noun and the order of parsing a verb; then you’ll be ready to parse or analyze the following examples.
ANALYSIS, OR PARSING.
Do you recollect the meaning of the word analysis? If you do not, I will explain if: and first, I wish you to remember, that analysis is the reverse of synthesis. Synthesis is the act of combining simples so as to form a whole or compound. Thus, in putting together letters so as to form syllables, syllables so as to form words, words so as to form sentences, and sentences so as to form a discourse, the process is called synthetic. Analysis, on the contrary, is the act of decomposition; that is, the act of separating any thing compounded into its simple parts, and thereby exhibiting its elementary principles. Etymology treats of the analysis of language. To analyze a sentence, is to separate from one another and classify the different words of which it is composed; and to analyze or parse a word, means to enumerate and describe all its various properties, and its grammatical relations with respect to other words in a sentence, and trace it through all its inflections or changes. Perhaps, to you, this will, at first, appear to be of little importance; but, if you persevere, you will hereafter find it of great utility, for parsing will enable you to detect, and correct, errors in composition.
Do you remember what the word analysis means? If you don't, I'll explain it: first, I want you to note that analysis is the opposite of synthesis. Synthesis is the process of combining simple elements to create a whole or a compound. For example, by putting letters together to form syllables, syllables to create words, words to form sentences, and sentences to compose a discourse, the process is called synthetic. On the other hand, analysis is the act of breaking down; that is, separating something that's compounded into its simpler parts to reveal its basic principles. Etymology involves the analysis of language. To analyze a sentence means to break apart and classify the different words that make it up; to analyze or parse a word means to list and describe all its various properties and its grammatical relationships with other words in a sentence, tracing it through all its inflections or changes. At first, this may seem unimportant to you, but if you stick with it, you'll find it to be very useful later on, as parsing will help you spot and correct mistakes in your writing.
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
I will now parse two nouns according to the order, and, in so doing, by applying the definitions and rules, I shall answer all those questions given in the order. If you have perfectly committed the order of parsing a noun and verb, you may proceed with me; but, recollect, you cannot parse a verb in full, until you shall have had a more complete explanation of it.
I will now break down two nouns according to the order, and by doing that, I will use the definitions and rules to answer all the questions provided in the order. If you have fully memorized the process of parsing a noun and a verb, you can follow along with me; but remember, you cannot parse a verb completely until you've had a more thorough explanation of it.
John's hand trembles.
John's hand shakes.
John's is a noun, [because it is] the name of a person—proper, the name of an individual—masculine gender, it denotes a male—third person, spoken of—singular number, it implies but one—and in the possessive case, it denotes possession—it is governed by the noun "hand," according to
John's is a noun because it's the name of a person—it's a proper noun, referring to an individual—it's masculine, indicating a male—it's in the third person, meaning it's about someone else—it's singular, implying just one—and in the possessive case, it shows ownership—it relates to the noun "hand," according to
RULE 12. A noun or pronoun in the possessive case, is governed by the noun it possesses.
RULE 12. A noun or pronoun in the possessive case is governed by the noun it owns.
Declined—Sing. nom. John, poss. John's, obj. John. Plural—nom. Johns, poss. Johns', obj. Johns.
Declined—Sing. nom. John, poss. John's, obj. John. Plural—nom. Johns, poss. Johns', obj. Johns.
Hand is a noun, the name of a thing—common, the name of a sort or species of things—neuter gender, it denotes a thing without sex—third person, spoken of—sing. number, it implies but one—and in the nominative case, it is the actor and subject of the verb "trembles," and governs it agreeably to
Hand is a noun, the name of a thing—common, the name of a type or category of things—neuter gender, it refers to something without sex—third person, referred to—singular number, it indicates just one—and in the nominative case, it is the actor and subject of the verb "trembles," and governs it in accordance with
RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb:—that is, the nominative determines the number and person of the verb.
RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb:—that means the nominative decides the number and person of the verb.
Declined—Sing. nom. hand, poss. hand's, obj. hand. Plur. nom. hands, poss. hands', obj. hands.
Declined—Sing. nom. hand, poss. hand's, obj. hand. Plur. nom. hands, poss. hands', obj. hands.
Trembles is a verb, a word which signifies to do—active, it expresses action—third person, singular number, because the nominative "hand" is with which it agrees, according to
Trembles is a verb, a word that means to shake—it's active and shows action—third person, singular, because it agrees with the nominative "hand."
RULE 4. The verb must agree with its nominative in number and person.
RULE 4. The verb must match its subject in number and person.
You must not say that the verb is of the third person because it is spoken of. The verb is never spoken of; but it is of the third person, and singular or plural number, because its nominative is.
You shouldn't say that the verb is in the third person just because it's being talked about. The verb isn't talked about; instead, it is in the third person, and singular or plural, because that's what its subject is.
Conjugated—First pers. sing. I tremble, 2 pers. thou tremblest, 3 pers. he trembles, or, the hand trembles. Plural, 1 pers. we tremble, 2 pers. ye or you tremble, 3 pers. they or the hands tremble.
Conjugated—1st person sing. I tremble, 2nd person you tremble, 3rd person he trembles, or, the hand trembles. Plural, 1st person we tremble, 2nd person you tremble, 3rd person they or the hands tremble.
ILLUSTRATION.
IMAGE.
RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb.
RULE 3. The subject case controls the verb.
If you employ the pronoun I, which is of the first person, singular number, as the nominative to a verb, the verb must be of the first pers. sing, thus, I smile; and when your nominative is second pers. sing, your verb must be; as, thou smilest. Why, in the latter instance, does the ending of the verb change to est? Because the nominative changes. And if your nominative is third person, the verb will vary again; thus, he smiles, the man smiles. How clear it is, then, that the nominative governs the verb; that is, the nominative has power to change the form and meaning of the verb, in respect to num. and person. Government, thus far, is evinced in the form of the words, as well as in the sense.
If you use the pronoun I, which is first person, singular, as the subject of a verb, the verb must also be in the first person singular, like this: I smile; and when your subject is in the second person singular, your verb must be as well, such as, thou smilest. Why does the ending of the verb change to est in this case? Because the subject changes. If your subject is in the third person, the verb will change again; for example, he smiles, the man smiles. It's clear, then, that the subject governs the verb; that is, the subject has the ability to change the form and meaning of the verb, in terms of number and person. This governance is evident in the form of the words, as well as in their meaning.
RULE 4. The verb must agree with its nominative in number and person.
RULE 4. The verb must match its subject in number and person.
It is improper to say, thou hear, the men hears. Why improper? Because hear is first pers. and the nominative thou is second pers. Hears is singular, and the nom. men is plural. Rule 4th says, The verb must agree with its nominative. The expressions should, therefore, be, thou hearest, the men hear; and then the verb would agree with its nominatives. But why must the verb agree with its nominative? Why must we say, thou talkest, the man talks, men talk? Because the genius of our language, and the common consent of those who speak it, require such a construction: and this requisition amounts to a law or rule. This rule, then, is founded in the nature of things, and sanctioned by good usage.
It's wrong to say, you hear, the men hears. Why is it wrong? Because hear is first person and the nominative you is second person. Hears is singular, and the nominative men is plural. Rule 4 says, The verb must agree with its nominative. So, it should be, you hearest, the men hear; then the verb would agree with its nominatives. But why must the verb agree with its nominative? Why do we say, you talkest, the man talks, men talk? Because the structure of our language, and the general agreement of those who speak it, require this kind of construction: and this requirement becomes a law or rule. This rule is based on the nature of things and reinforced by good usage.
RULE 12. A noun or pronoun in the possessive case, is governed by the noun which it possesses.
RULE 12. A noun or pronoun in the possessive case is governed by the noun it possesses.
It is correct to say, The man eats, he eats; but we cannot say, the man dog eats, he dog eats. Why not? Because the man is here represented as the possessor, and dog, the property, or thing possessed; and the genius of our language requires, that when we add to the possessor, the thing which he is represented as possessing, the possessor shall take a particular form to show its case, or relation to the property; thus, The man's dog eats, his dog eats. You perceive, then, that the added noun, denoting the thing possessed, has power to change the form of the noun or pronoun denoting the possessor, according to RULE 12. thus, by adding dog in the preceding examples, man is changed to man's, and he, to his.
It’s correct to say, The man eats, he eats; but we can’t say, the man dog eats, he dog eats. Why not? Because the man is shown as the owner, and dog, the property, or thing owned; and the structure of our language requires that when we add to the owner, the thing he’s represented as owning, the owner must take a specific form to show its case, or relation to the property; so, The man's dog eats, his dog eats. You see, then, that the added noun, indicating the thing owned, has the power to change the form of the noun or pronoun indicating the owner, according to RULE 12. Thus, by adding dog in the previous examples, man changes to man's, and he to his.
Now parse the sentence which I have parsed, until the manner is quite familiar to you; and then you will be prepared to analyze correctly and systematically, the following exercises. When you parse, you may spread the Compendium before you; and, if you have not already committed the definitions and rules, you may read them on that, as you apply them. This mode of procedure will enable you to learn all the definitions and rules by applying them to practice.
Now break down the sentence I’ve analyzed until the process feels completely familiar to you; then you’ll be ready to analyze the following exercises accurately and systematically. When you break it down, you can have the Compendium in front of you, and if you haven't memorized the definitions and rules yet, you can refer to them as you use them. This approach will help you learn all the definitions and rules through practical application.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Rain descends—Rains descend—Snow falls—Snows fall—Thunder rolls—Thunders roll—Man's works decay—Men's labors cease—John's dog barks—Eliza's voice trembles—Julia's sister's child improves—Peter's cousin's horse limps.
Rain falls—Snow falls—Thunder rumbles—Man's work decays—People's efforts stop—John's dog barks—Eliza's voice shakes—Julia's sister's child gets better—Peter's cousin's horse limps.
In the next place, I will parse a noun and a neuter verb, which verb, you will notice, differs from an active only in one respect.
In the next place, I'll analyze a noun and a neuter verb, which you’ll see differs from an active verb in just one way.
"Birds repose on the branches of trees."
"Birds rest on the branches of trees."
Birds is a noun, the name of a thing or creature—common, the name of a genus or class—masculine and feminine gender, it denotes both males and females—third person, spoken of—plural number, it implies more than one—and in the nominative case, it is the subject of the verb "repose," and governs it according to RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb. Declined—Sing. nom. bird, poss. bird's, obj. bird. Plural, nom. birds, poss. birds', obj. birds.
Birds is a noun, the name of a thing or creature—common, the name of a genus or class—masculine and feminine gender, it refers to both males and females—third person, it is spoken of—plural number, it indicates more than one—and in the nominative case, it is the subject of the verb "repose," and it governs it according to RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb. Declined—Sing. nom. bird, poss. bird's, obj. bird. Plural, nom. birds, poss. birds', obj. birds.
Repose is a verb, a word that signifies to be—neuter, it expresses neither action nor passion, but a state of being—third person, plural number, because the nominative "birds" is with which it agrees, agreeably to RULE 4. The verb must agree with its nominative in number and person.
Repose is a verb, a word that means to be—it’s neutral, expressing neither action nor emotion, but a state of existence—third person, plural because it agrees with the nominative "birds," according to RULE 4. The verb must agree with its nominative in number and person.
Declined—1. pers. sing. I repose, 2. pers. thou reposest, 3. pers. he reposes, or the bird reposes. Plur. 1. pers. we repose, 2. pers. ye or you repose, 3. pers. they repose, or birds repose.
Declined—1st person sing. I rest, 2nd person you rest, 3rd person he rests, or the bird rests. Plural 1st person we rest, 2nd person you all or you rest, 3rd person they rest, or birds rest.
Now parse those nouns and neuter verbs that are distinguished by italics, in the following
Now analyze those nouns and neuter verbs that are highlighted in italics, in the following
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
The book lies on the desk—The cloak hangs on the wall—Man's days are few—Cathmor's warriors sleep in death—Caltho reposes in the narrow house—Jocund day stands tiptoe on the misty mountain tops. The sunbeams rest on the grave where her beauty sleeps.
The book is resting on the desk—The cloak is hanging on the wall—Man's days are limited—Cathmor's warriors are in eternal sleep—Caltho is lying in the small grave—Joyful day is standing on the misty mountain tops. The sunbeams rest on the grave where her beauty lies.
You may parse these and the preceding exercises, and all that follow, five or six times over, if you please.
You can go through these and the earlier exercises, as well as all the ones that come next, five or six times, if you want.
OBJECTIVE CASE.—ACTIVE-TRANSITIVE VERBS.
A noun is in the objective case when it is the object of something. At present I shall explain this case only as the object of an action; but when we shall have advanced as far as to the preposition, I will also illustrate it as the object of a relation.
A noun is in the objective case when it is the object of something. Right now, I will explain this case only as the object of an action; but when we get to the preposition, I will also show how it works as the object of a relation.
Transitive means passing. In this sentence the action of the verb strikes is transitive, because it passes over from the nominative Richard to the object John; and you know that the noun John is in the objective case, because it is the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive verb strikes. This matter is very plain. For example: Gallileo invented the telescope. Now it is evident, that Gallileo did not exert his powers of invention, without some object in view. In order to ascertain that object, put the question, Gallileo invented what? The telescope. Telescope, then, is the real object of the action, denoted by the transitive verb invented; and, therefore, telescope is in the objective case. If I say, The horse kicks the servant—Carpenters build houses—Ossian wrote poems—Columbus discovered America—you readily perceive, that the verbs kick, build, wrote, and discovered, express transitive actions; and you cannot be at a loss to tell which nouns are in the objective case:—they are servant, houses, poems, and America.
Transitive means passing. In this sentence, the action of the verb strikes is transitive because it passes over from the subject Richard to the object John; and you know that the noun John is in the objective case because it is the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive verb strikes. This concept is quite clear. For example: Galileo invented the telescope. It's clear that Galileo didn’t use his inventing skills without a specific goal in mind. To find out that goal, ask the question, Galileo invented what? The telescope. Telescope, then, is the actual object of the action indicated by the transitive verb invented; and thus, telescope is in the objective case. If I say, The horse kicks the servant—Carpenters build houses—Ossian wrote poems—Columbus discovered America—you can easily see that the verbs kick, build, wrote, and discovered express transitive actions; and you won’t have any trouble identifying which nouns are in the objective case:—they are servant, houses, poems, and America.
The nominative and objective cases of nouns are generally known by the following rule: the nominative does something; the objective has something done to it. The nominative generally comes before the verb; and the objective, after it. When I say, George struck the servant, George is in the nominative, and servant is in the objective case; but, when I say, The servant struck George, servant is in the nominative case, and George is in the objective. Thus you perceive, that Case means the different state or situation of nouns with regard to other words.
The nominative and objective cases of nouns are usually understood by the following rule: the nominative does something; the objective has something done to it. The nominative generally comes before the verb, while the objective comes after it. For example, in the sentence, George struck the servant, George is in the nominative case, and servant is in the objective case. But if I say, The servant struck George, servant is in the nominative case, and George is in the objective. So you can see that Case refers to the different state or situation of nouns in relation to other words.
It is sometimes very difficult to tell the case of a noun. I shall, therefore, take up this subject again, when I come to give you an explanation of the participle and preposition.
It can be quite challenging to identify the case of a noun. So, I will revisit this topic when I explain the participle and preposition.
Besides the three cases already explained, nouns are sometimes in the nominative case independent, sometimes in the nominative case absolute, sometimes in apposition in the same case, and sometimes in the nominative or objective case after the neuter to be, or after an active-intransitive or passive verb. These cases are illustrated in Lecture X. and in the 21 and 22 rules of Syntax.
Besides the three cases already explained, nouns can sometimes be in the nominative case independent, sometimes in the nominative case absolute, sometimes in apposition in the same case, and sometimes in the nominative or objective case after the neuter form of be, or after an active-intransitive or passive verb. These cases are illustrated in Lecture X. and in the 21 and 22 rules of Syntax.
ACTIVE-INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
You perceive that the verb walks, in this example, is intransitive, because the action does not pass over to an object; that is, the action is confined to the agent John. The following sign will generally enable you to distinguish a transitive verb from an intransitive. Any verb that will make sense with the words a thing or a person, after it, is transitive. Try these verbs by the sign, love, help, conquer, reach, subdue, overcome. Thus, you can say, I love a person or thing—I can help a person or thing—and so on. Hence you know that these verbs are transitive. But an intransitive verb will not make sense with this sign, which fact will be shown by the following examples: smile, go, come, play, bark, walk, fly. We cannot say, if we mean to speak English, I smile a person or thing—I go a person or thing:—hence you perceive that these verbs are not transitive, but intransitive.
You understand that the verb walks, in this example, is intransitive because the action doesn’t transfer to an object; the action is limited to the subject John. The following sign will usually help you tell apart a transitive verb from an intransitive. Any verb that makes sense with the phrases a thing or a person following it is transitive. Try these verbs with the sign: love, help, conquer, reach, subdue, overcome. For example, you can say, I love a person or thing—I can help a person or thing—and so on. Therefore, you know that these verbs are transitive. However, an intransitive verb won’t make sense with this sign, which is clear from the following examples: smile, go, come, play, bark, walk, fly. We can't say, if we mean to speak English, I smile a person or thing—I go a person or thing: hence you see that these verbs are not transitive, but intransitive.
If you reflect upon these examples for a few moments, you will have a clear conception of the nature of transitive and intransitive verbs. Before I close this subject, however, it is necessary farther to remark, that some transitive and intransitive verbs express what is called a mental or moral action; and others, a corporeal or physical action. Verbs expressing the different affections or operations of the mind, denote moral actions; as, Brutus loved his country; James hates vice; We believe the tale:—to repent, to relent, to think, to reflect, to mourn, to muse. Those expressing the actions produced by matter, denote physical actions; as, The dog hears the bell; Virgil wrote the Aenead; Columbus discovered America;—to see, to feel, to taste, to smell, to run, to talk, to fly, to strike. In the sentence, Charles resembles his father, the verb resembles does not appear to express any action at all; yet the construction of the sentence, and the office which the verb performs, are such, that we are obliged to parse it as an active-transitive verb, governing the noun father in the objective case. This you may easily reconcile in your mind, by reflecting, that the verb has a direct reference to its object. The following verbs are of this character: Have, own, retain; as, I have a book.
If you think about these examples for a moment, you'll have a clear understanding of the difference between transitive and intransitive verbs. Before I finish this topic, it's important to point out that some transitive and intransitive verbs indicate what are called mental or moral actions, while others indicate corporeal or physical actions. Verbs that express different feelings or activities of the mind indicate moral actions, such as Brutus loved his country; James hates vice; We believe the story:—to repent, to relent, to think, to reflect, to mourn, to muse. Verbs that indicate actions caused by the physical world indicate physical actions, such as The dog hears the bell; Virgil wrote the Aeneid; Columbus discovered America;—to see, to feel, to taste, to smell, to run, to talk, to fly, to strike. In the sentence, Charles resembles his father, the verb resembles doesn’t seem to express any action at all; yet the structure of the sentence and the role the verb plays are such that we have to analyze it as an active-transitive verb, governing the noun father in the objective case. You can easily understand this by realizing that the verb has a direct reference to its object. The following verbs are of this type: Have, own, retain; as in, I have a book.
Active intransitive verbs are frequently made transitive. When I say, The birds fly, the verb fly is intransitive; but when I say, The boy flies the kite, the verb fly is transitive, and governs the noun kite in the objective case. Almost any active intransitive verb, and sometimes even neuter verbs, are used as transitive. The horse walks rapidly; The boy runs swiftly; My friend lives well; The man died of a fever. In all these examples the verbs are intransitive; in the following they are transitive: The man walks his horse; The boy ran a race; My friend lives a holy life; Let me die the death of the righteous.
Active intransitive verbs are often turned into transitive verbs. When I say, The birds fly, the verb fly is intransitive; but when I say, The boy flies the kite, the verb fly is transitive and governs the noun kite in the objective case. Almost any active intransitive verb, and sometimes even neuter verbs, can be used as transitive. The horse walks quickly; The boy runs fast; My friend lives well; The man died of a fever. In all these examples, the verbs are intransitive; in the following they are transitive: The man walks his horse; The boy ran a race; My friend lives a holy life; Let me die the death of the righteous.
The foregoing development of the character of verbs, is deemed sufficiently critical for practical purposes; but if we dip a little deeper into the verbal fountain, we shall discover qualities which do not appear on its surface. If we throw aside the veil which art has drawn over the real structure of speech, we shall find, that almost every verb has either a personal or a verbal object, expressed or implied. Verbal objects, which are the effects or productions resulting from the actions, being necessarily implied, are seldom expressed.
The previous discussion about how verbs work is considered important for practical purposes; however, if we dig a little deeper into the nature of verbs, we'll uncover qualities that aren't immediately visible. If we lift the curtain that art has placed over the true structure of language, we'll see that almost every verb has either a personal or a verbal object, whether it's stated or implied. Verbal objects, which are the effects or results of the actions, are usually implied and rarely stated directly.
The fire burns. If the fire burns, it must burn wood, coal, tallow, or some other combustible substance. The man laughs. Laughs what? Laughs laughter or laugh. They walk; that is, They walk or take walks. Rivers flow (move or roll them-selves or their waters) into the ocean.
The fire burns. If the fire burns, it must be burning wood, coal, tallow, or some other flammable material. The guy laughs. What does he laugh at? He laughs with laughter or just laughs. They walk; in other words, they walk or take strolls. Rivers flow (move or roll themselves or their waters) into the ocean.
"I sing the shady regions of the west."
"I sing the shady spots of the west."
"And smile the wrinkles from the brow of age."
"And smile away the wrinkles of aging."
The child wept itself sick; and then, by taking (or sleeping) a short nap, it slept itself quiet and well again. "He will soon sleep his everlasting sleep"; that is, "He will sleep the sleep of death."
The child cried itself sick; and then, by taking (or napping) a short nap, it slept peacefully and comfortably again. "He will soon fall asleep for good"; that is, "He will sleep the sleep of death."
Thinkers think thoughts; Talkers talk or employ words, talk, or speeches; The rain rains rain. "Upon Sodom and Gomorrah the Lord rained fire and brimstone." "I must go the whole length." "I shall soon go the way of all the earth."
Thinkers have thoughts; Talkers use words, talk, or speeches; The rain falls as rain. "The Lord sent down fire and brimstone on Sodom and Gomorrah." "I have to go all the way." "I will soon follow the path of everyone else."
Now please to turn back again, and peruse this lecture attentively; after which you may parse, systematically, the following exercises containing nouns in the three cases, and active-transitive verbs.
Now please turn back again and read this lecture carefully; after that, you can analyze, step by step, the following exercises that include nouns in the three cases and active-transitive verbs.
The printer prints books.
The printer prints books.
Prints is a verb, a word that signifies to do—active, it expresses action—transitive, the action passes over from the nominative "printer" to the object "books"—third pers. sing. numb. because the nominative printer is with which it agrees.
Prints is a verb, a word that means to do—it's active, expressing action—transitive, meaning the action moves from the subject "printer" to the object "books"—third person singular because the subject printer agrees with it.
RULE 4. The verb must agree with its nominative case in number and person.
RULE 4. The verb must match its subject in number and person.
Declined—1. pers. sing. I print, 2. pers. thou printest, 3. pers. he prints, or the printer prints, and so on.
Declined—1. pers. sing. I print, 2. pers. you print, 3. pers. he prints, or the printer prints, and so on.
Books is a noun, the name of a thing—common, the name of a sort of things,—neut. gend. it denotes a thing without sex—third pers. spoken of—plur. num. it implies more than one—and in the objective case, it is the object of the action, expressed by the active-transitive verb "prints," and is governed by it according to
Books is a noun, referring to a thing—common, indicating a category of things,—neutral gender, meaning it represents an object without a specific sex—third person, used for discussion—plural, indicating more than one—and in the objective case, it serves as the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive verb "prints," and is regulated by it according to
RULE 20. Active-transitive verbs govern the objective case.
RULE 20. Active-transitive verbs take the objective case.
The noun books is thus declined—Sing. nom. book, poss. book's, obj. book—Plur. nom. books, poss. books', obj. books.
The noun books is thus declined—Sing. nom. book, poss. book's, obj. book—Plur. nom. books, poss. books', obj. books.
RULE 20. Transitive verbs govern the objective case; that is, they require the noun or pronoun following them to be in that case; and this requisition is government. Pronouns have a particular form to suit each case; but nouns have not. We cannot say, She struck he; I gave the book to they. Why not? Because the genius of our language requires the pronoun following a transitive verb or preposition (to is a preposition) to assume that form which we call the objective form or case. Accordingly, the construction should be, She struck him; I gave the book to them.—Read, again, the illustration of "government" on page 52.
RULE 20. Transitive verbs govern the objective case; that is, they require the noun or pronoun that follows them to be in that case; and this requirement is called government. Pronouns have a specific form for each case; however, nouns do not. We cannot say, She struck he; I gave the book to they. Why not? Because the structure of our language demands that the pronoun following a transitive verb or preposition (to is a preposition) takes the form we refer to as the objective form or case. Therefore, the correct constructions should be, She struck him; I gave the book to them.—Read again the illustration of "government" on page 52.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Nom. case. | Trans. verb | Poss. case | Obj. case. |
Julius | prints | childrens' | primers. |
Harriet | makes | ladies' | bonnets. |
The servant | beats | the man's | horse. |
The horse | kicks | the servant's | master. |
The boy | struck | that man's | child. |
The child | lost | those boys' | ball. |
The tempest | sunk | those merchants' | vessels. |
Pope | translated | Homer's | Illiad. |
Cicero | procured | Milo's | release. |
Alexander | conquered | Darius' | army. |
Perry | met | the enemy's | fleet. |
Washington | obtained | his country's | freedom. |
As you have been analyzing nouns in their three cases, it becomes necessary to present, in the next place, the declension of nouns, for you must decline every noun you parse. Declension means putting a noun through the different cases: and you will notice, that the possessive case varies from the nominative in its termination, or ending, but the objective case ends like the nominative. The nominative and objective cases of nouns, must, therefore, be ascertained by their situation in the sentence, or by considering the office they perform.
As you have been studying nouns in their three cases, it's now important to discuss how to decline nouns since you need to decline every noun you analyze. Declension refers to changing a noun to fit different cases. You will notice that the possessive case has a different ending from the nominative, while the objective case has the same ending as the nominative. Therefore, you can determine the nominative and objective cases of nouns based on their placement in the sentence or by looking at the role they play.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
SING. | PLUR. | SING. | PLUR. | ||
Nom. | king | kings | Nom. | man | men |
Poss. | king's | kings' | Poss. | man's | men's |
Obj. | king. | kings. | Obj. | man. | men. |
Now, if you have parsed every word in the preceding examples, (except the, that, those, and his) you may proceed with me and parse the examples in the following exercises, in which are presented nouns and active-intransitive verbs.
Now, if you have analyzed every word in the previous examples, (except the, that, those, and his) you can move on with me and analyze the examples in the following exercises, which present nouns and active-intransitive verbs.
"My flock increases yearly."
"My flock grows each year."
Flock is a noun, a name denoting animals—a noun of multitude, it signifies many in one collective body—masculine and feminine gender, denoting both sexes—third person, spoken of—singular number, it denotes but one flock—and in the nominative case, it is the active agent of the verb "increases," and governs it, according to RULE 3, The nominative case governs the verb. (Decline it.)
Flock is a noun that refers to animals—a collective term that represents many as one group—it includes both male and female, referring to both genders—it's in third person, speaking about it—singular, meaning it refers to just one flock—and in the nominative case, it acts as the subject of the verb "increases," controlling it, following RULE 3, The nominative case governs the verb. (Decline it.)
Increases is a verb, a word that signifies to do—active, it expresses action—intransitive, the action does not pass over to an object—of the third person, singular number, because its nominative "flock" conveys unity of idea, and it agrees with "flock" agreeably to
Increases is a verb that means to do—it's active and shows action—it's intransitive, meaning the action doesn't transfer to an object—it's in the third person, singular form, because its subject "flock" represents unity of thought, and it agrees with "flock."
RULE 10. A noun of multitude conveying unity of idea, must have a verb or pronoun agreeing with it in the singular.
RULE 10. A collective noun representing a single idea must use a verb or pronoun that agrees with it in the singular.
"The divided multitude hastily disperse."
"The divided crowd hurriedly dispersed."
Multitude is a noun, a name that denotes persons—a collective noun, or noun of multitude, it signifies many—masculine and feminine gender, it implies both sexes—third person, spoken of—singular number, it represents but one multitude, or collective body; (but in another sense, it is plural, as it conveys plurality of idea, and, also, implies more individuals than one;)—and in the nominative case, it is the actor and subject of the verb "disperse," which it governs, according to RULE 3. The nom. case governs the verb.—Declined.—Sing. nom. multitude, poss. multitude's, obj. multitude—Plur. nom. multitudes, poss. multitudes', obj. multitudes.
Multitude is a noun that refers to people—a collective noun, or a noun of multitude, it means many—applying to both men and women, it includes both genders—third person, referred to—singular, it represents just one multitude or collective group; (but in another sense, it is plural, as it expresses the idea of many and also suggests more than one individual;)—and in the nominative case, it acts as the subject of the verb "disperse," which it governs, according to RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb.—Declined.—Sing. nom. multitude, poss. multitude's, obj. multitude—Plur. nom. multitudes, poss. multitudes', obj. multitudes.
Disperse is a verb, a word that signifies to do—active, it expresses action—intransitive, the action does not terminate on an object—third person, plural number, because its nominative "multitude" conveys plurality of idea; and it agrees with "multitude" agreeably to RULE 11. A noun of multitude conveying plurality of idea, must have a verb or pronoun agreeing with it in the plural.
Disperse is a verb that means to do something—it's active, showing action—it's intransitive, meaning the action doesn't stop at an object—and it's third person, plural, because the subject "multitude" expresses a plural concept; and it matches with "multitude" according to RULE 11. A noun of multitude that conveys a plural idea must have a verb or pronoun that agrees with it in the plural.
Rules 10, and 11, rest on a sandy foundation. They appear not to be based on the principles of the language; and, therefore, it might, perhaps, be better to reject than to retain them. Their application is quite limited. In many instances, they will not apply to nouns of multitude. The existence of such a thing as "unity or plurality of idea," as applicable to nouns of this class, is doubtful. It is just as correct to say, "The meeting was divided in its sentiments," as to say, "The meeting were divided in their sentiments." Both are equally supported by the genius of the language, and by the power of custom. It is correct to say, either that, "The fleet were dispersed;" "The council were unanimous;" "The council were divided;" or that, "The fleet was dispersed;" "The council was unanimous;" "The council was divided." But, perhaps for the sake of euphony, in some instances, custom has decided in favor of a singular, and in others, of a plural construction, connected with words of this class. For example; custom gives a preference to the constructions, "My people do not consider;" "The peasantry go barefoot;" "The flock is his object;" instead of, "My people doth not consider;" "The peasantry goes barefoot;" "The flock are his object." In instances like these, the application of the foregoing rules may be of some use; but the constructions in which they do not apply, are probably more numerous than those in which they do.
Rules 10 and 11 are built on a shaky foundation. They don’t seem to be grounded in the principles of the language, so it might be better to discard them rather than keep them. Their use is quite limited. In many cases, they don’t apply to nouns that refer to a group. The idea of "unity or plurality of concept" for these nouns is doubtful. It’s perfectly fine to say, "The meeting was divided in its sentiments," just as it is to say, "The meeting were divided in their sentiments." Both are equally valid in terms of the language’s structure and convention. You can correctly say, "The fleet were dispersed;" "The council were unanimous;" "The council were divided," or "The fleet was dispersed;" "The council was unanimous;" "The council was divided." However, for the sake of flow, custom has favored singular forms in some cases and plural ones in others connected to these types of words. For instance, custom prefers "My people do not consider;" "The peasantry go barefoot;" "The flock is his object," over "My people doth not consider;" "The peasantry goes barefoot;" "The flock are his object." In these situations, the rules mentioned earlier may be useful, but there are likely more cases where they don’t apply than where they do.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Nom. case. | Intran. verb. | Nom. case. | Intran. verb. |
Men | labor. | The sun | sets. |
Armies | march. | The moon | rises. |
Vessels | sail. | The stars | twinkle. |
Birds | fly. | The rain | descends. |
Clouds | move. | The river | flows. |
Multitudes | perish. | The nation | mourns. |
Your improvement in grammar depends, not on the number of words which you parse, but on the attention which you give the subject. You may parse the same exercises several times over.
Your improvement in grammar doesn't rely on how many words you analyze, but on the attention you pay to the subject. You can work through the same exercises multiple times.
For the gratification of those who prefer it, I here present another
For the enjoyment of those who like it, I present another
DIVISION OF VERBS.
Verbs are of two kinds, transitive and intransitive.
Verbs are divided into two types: transitive and intransitive.
A verb is transitive when the action affects an object; as, "Earthquakes rock kingdoms; thrones and palaces are shaken down; and potentates, princes, and subjects, are buried in one common grave."
A verb is transitive when it impacts an object; for example, "Earthquakes rock kingdoms; thrones and palaces are shaken down; and rulers, princes, and subjects are buried in one common grave."
A verb is intransitive when it has no object; as, "The waters came upon me;" "I am he who was, and is, and is to come."
A verb is intransitive when it doesn't have an object; for example, "The waters came upon me;" "I am the one who was, and is, and is to come."
As an exercise on what you have been studying, I will now put to you a few questions, all of which you ought to be able to answer before you proceed any farther.
As a review of what you've been studying, I'm going to ask you a few questions, all of which you should be able to answer before moving on.
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
With what two general divisions of grammar does the second lecture begin?—Of what does Etymology treat?—Of what does Syntax treat?—On what is based the true principle of classification?—How do you ascertain the part of speech to which a word belongs?—What is meant by its manner of meaning?—Name the ten parts of speech.—Which of these are considered the most important?—By what sign may a noun be distinguished?—How many kinds of nouns are there?—What belong to nouns?—What is gender?—How many genders have nouns?—What is person?—How many persons have nouns?—What is number?—How many numbers have nouns?—What is case?—How many cases have nouns?—Does case consist in the inflections of a noun?—How many kinds of verbs are there?—By what sign may a verb be known?—What belong to verbs?—What is synthesis?—What is analysis?—What is parsing?—Repeat the order of parsing the noun.—Repeat the order of parsing the verb.—What rule do you apply in parsing a noun in the possessive case?—What rule, in parsing a noun in the nominative case?—What rule applies in parsing a verb?—What is meant by government?—Explain rules 3, 4, and 12.—By what rule are the nominative and objective cases of nouns known?—By what sign can you distinguish a transitive from an intransitive verb?—Do transitive verbs ever express a moral action?—Are intransitive and neuter verbs ever used as transitive?—Give some examples of transitive verbs with personal and verbal objects.—What rule do you apply in parsing a noun in the objective case?—Explain rule 20.—In parsing a verb agreeing with a noun of multitude conveying plurality of idea, what rule do you apply?
With what two main branches of grammar does the second lecture start?—What does Etymology cover?—What does Syntax cover?—What is the foundation of the true principle of classification?—How do you determine the part of speech that a word belongs to?—What does its manner of meaning refer to?—List the ten parts of speech.—Which of these are considered the most important?—How can you identify a noun?—How many types of nouns are there?—What are the characteristics of nouns?—What is gender?—How many genders do nouns have?—What is person?—How many persons do nouns have?—What is number?—How many numbers do nouns have?—What is case?—How many cases do nouns have?—Does case depend on the inflections of a noun?—How many kinds of verbs are there?—How can you recognize a verb?—What are the characteristics of verbs?—What is synthesis?—What is analysis?—What is parsing?—Repeat the order of parsing the noun.—Repeat the order of parsing the verb.—What rule do you use when parsing a noun in the possessive case?—What rule applies when parsing a noun in the nominative case?—What rule applies when parsing a verb?—What does government mean?—Explain rules 3, 4, and 12.—How are the nominative and objective cases of nouns identified?—What sign can you use to distinguish a transitive verb from an intransitive verb?—Do transitive verbs ever express a moral action?—Can intransitive and neuter verbs ever function as transitive?—Provide examples of transitive verbs with personal and verbal objects.—What rule do you apply when parsing a noun in the objective case?—Explain rule 20.—When parsing a verb that agrees with a noun of multitude indicating plurality of idea, what rule do you apply?
QUESTIONS ON THE NOTES.
NOTES ON PHILOSOPHICAL GRAMMAR.
OF THE PHILOSOPHICAL CLASSIFICATION OF WORDS.
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
OF THE VERB.
QUESTIONS ON THE PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
REMARKS ON VERBS AND NOUNS.
Thus you see, it is impossible for you to become a grammarian without exercising your judgment. If you have sufficient resolution to do this, you will, in a short time, perfectly understand the nature and office of the different parts of speech, their various properties and relations, and the rules of syntax that apply to them; and, in a few weeks, be able to speak and write accurately. But you must not take things for granted, without examining their propriety and correctness. No. You are not a mere automaton, or boy-machine; but a rational being. You ought, therefore, to think methodically, to reason soundly, and to investigate every principle critically. Don't be afraid to think for yourself. You know not the high destiny that awaits you. You know not the height to which you may soar in the scale of intellectual existence. Go on, then, boldly, and with unyielding perseverance; and if you do not gain admittance into the temple of fame, strive, at all hazards, to drink of the fountain which gurgles from its base.
So, you see, you can't become a grammarian without using your judgment. If you have enough determination to do this, you'll soon fully grasp the nature and function of the different parts of speech, their various properties and relationships, and the syntax rules that apply to them; and in just a few weeks, you'll be able to speak and write accurately. But don't take things at face value without examining their appropriateness and correctness. No. You are not just an automaton or a boy-machine; you are a rational being. Therefore, you should think methodically, reason soundly, and critically investigate every principle. Don't be afraid to think for yourself. You have no idea of the great future that awaits you. You have no idea how far you can rise in the realm of intellectual existence. So go on, boldly, and with unwavering persistence; and if you don't make it into the hall of fame, strive, at all costs, to drink from the fountain that bubbles at its base.
EXERCISES IN FALSE SYNTAX.
NOTE 1, TO RULE 12. A noun in the possessive case, should always be distinguished by the apostrophe, or mark of elision; as, The nation's glory.
NOTE 1, TO RULE 12. A noun in the possessive case should always be marked with an apostrophe, like this: The nation's glory.
That girls book is cleaner than those boys books.
That girl's book is cleaner than those boys' books.
Thy ancestors virtue is not thine.
Your ancestors' virtue is not yours.
A mothers tenderness and a fathers care, are natures gift's for mans advantage. Wisdoms precept's form the good mans interest and happiness. They suffer for conscience's sake. He is reading Cowpers poems. James bought Johnsons Dictionary.
A mother's tenderness and a father's care are nature's gifts for man's benefit. The principles of wisdom shape a good man's interests and happiness. They endure for the sake of their conscience. He is reading Cowper's poems. James bought Johnson's Dictionary.
RULE 4. A verb must agree with its nominative in number and person.
RULE 4. A verb must match its subject in number and person.
Those boys improves rapidly. The men labors in the field. Nothing delight some persons. Thou shuns the light. He dare not do it. They reads well.
Those boys are improving quickly. The men work in the field. Nothing makes some people happy. You avoid the light. He doesn’t dare to do it. They read well.
FALSE SYNTAX.
A variety of pleasing objects charm the eye. The number of inhabitants of the United States exceed nine millions. Nothing but vain and foolish pursuits delight some persons.
A variety of beautiful things catch the eye. The population of the United States exceeds nine million. Some people find joy only in shallow and pointless activities.
LECTURE III.
OF ARTICLES.
The small claims of the article to a separate rank as a distinct part of speech, ought not to be admitted in a scientific classification of words. A and the, this and that, ten, few, and fourth, and many other words, are used to restrict, vary, or define the signification of the nouns to which they are joined. They might, therefore, with propriety, be ranked under the general head of Restrictives, Indexes, or Defining Adjectives. But, as there is a marked distinction in their particular meaning and application, each class requires a separate explanation. Hence, no practical advantage would be gained, by rejecting their established classification, as articles, numerals, and demonstratives, and by giving them new names. The character and application of a and the can be learned as soon when they are styled articles, as when they are denominated specifying or defining adjectives.
The minor claims of the article to be considered a separate category as a distinct part of speech shouldn't be accepted in a scientific classification of words. A and the, this and that, ten, few, fourth, and many other words are used to limit, change, or clarify the meaning of the nouns they are paired with. They could, therefore, appropriately be categorized under the general heading of Restrictives, Indexes, or Defining Adjectives. However, since there's a clear difference in their specific meanings and uses, each category needs a separate explanation. Thus, no practical benefit would come from dismissing their recognized classification as articles, numerals, and demonstratives, and giving them new names. The nature and use of a and the can be understood just as clearly when they are referred to as articles as when they are called specifying or defining adjectives.
The history of this part of speech is very brief. As there are but two articles, a or an and the, you will know them wherever they occur.
The history of this part of speech is quite short. Since there are only two articles, a or an and the, you'll recognize them wherever they appear.
A noun used without an article, or any other restrictive, is taken in its general sense; as, "Fruit is abundant;" "Gold is heavy;" "Man is born to trouble" Here we mean, fruit and gold in general; and all men, or mankind.
A noun used without an article or any other limiting factor is understood in its general sense; for example, "Fruit is abundant;" "Gold is heavy;" "Man is born to trouble." Here, we are referring to fruit and gold in general; and all men, or mankind.
When we wish to limit the meaning of the noun to one object, but to no particular one, we employ a or an. If I say, "Give me a pen;" "Bring me an apple;" you are at liberty to fetch any pen or any apple you please. A or an, then, is indefinite, because it leaves the meaning of the noun to which it is applied, as far as regards the person spoken to, vague, or indeterminate; that is, not definite. But when reference is made to a particular object, we employ the, as, "Give me the pen;" "Bring me the apple, or the apple." When such a requisition is made, you are not at liberty to bring any pen or apple you please, but you must fetch the particular pen or apple to which you know me to refer. The is, therefore, called the definite article.
When we want to limit the meaning of a noun to one object, but not to any specific one, we use a or an. If I say, "Give me a pen;" "Bring me an apple;" you can get any pen or any apple you want. A or an is indefinite because it keeps the meaning of the noun it describes, from the perspective of the person being spoken to, vague or indeterminate; that is, not definite. But when we refer to a specific object, we use the, as in, "Give me the pen;" "Bring me the apple, or the apple." When such a request is made, you can’t just bring any pen or apple you want, but you have to get the specific pen or apple that you know I’m talking about. The is, therefore, called the definite article.
"A star appears." Here, the star referred to, may be known as a particular star, definite, and distinguished from all others, in the mind of the speaker; but to the hearer, it is left, among the thousands that bedeck the vault of heaven, undistinguished and indefinite. But when the star has previously been made the subject of discourse, it becomes, in the minds of both speaker and hearer a definite object, and he says, "The star appears;" that is, that particular star about which we were discoursing.
"A star appears." The star in question may be recognized as a specific star, clear, and set apart from all others in the mind of the speaker; however, to the listener, it remains one of the thousands that adorn the night sky, unclear and vague. But once the star has been discussed earlier, it becomes a clear object in the minds of both the speaker and listener, and they say, "The star appears;" meaning that specific star we were just talking about.
"Solomon built a temple." Did he build any temple, undetermined which? No; it was a particular temple, pre-eminently distinguished from all others. But how does it become a definite object in the mind of the hearer? Certainly, not by the phrase, "a temple," which indicates any temple, leaving it altogether undetermined which; but supposing the person addressed was totally unacquainted with the fact asserted, and it becomes to him, in one respect only, a definite and particular temple, by means of the associated words, "Solomon built;" that is, by the use of these words in connexion with the others, the hearer gets the idea of a temple distinguished as the one erected by Solomon. If the speaker were addressing one whom he supposed to be unacquainted with the fact related, he might make the temple referred to a still more definite object in the mind of the hearer by a farther explanation of it; thus, "Solomon built a temple on mount Zion; and that was the temple to which the Jews resorted to worship."
"Solomon built a temple." Did he build any temple, which is unknown? No; it was a specific temple, clearly set apart from all others. But how does it become a clear concept in the mind of the listener? Certainly, not with the phrase, "a temple," which suggests any temple, leaving it completely unspecified; but if we assume the person being addressed was completely unaware of the fact stated, it becomes, in one way only, a clear and specific temple through the associated words, "Solomon built;" that is, by using these words alongside the others, the listener gets the idea of a temple identified as the one constructed by Solomon. If the speaker were talking to someone he thought was unaware of the related fact, he could clarify the temple in the listener's mind even more by further explaining it; for example, "Solomon built a temple on mount Zion; and that was the temple where the Jews came to worship."
"The lunatic, the poet, and the lover,
"Are of imagination all compact."
"The lunatic, the poet, and the lover,
"Are all created from imagination."
"The horse is a noble animal;" "The dog is a faithful creature;" "The wind blows;" "The wolves were howling in the woods." In these examples, we do not refer to any particular lunatics, poets, lovers, horses, dogs, winds, wolves, and woods, but we refer to these particular classes of things, in contradistinction to other objects or classes. The phrase, "Neither the one nor the other," is an idiom of the language.
"The horse is a noble animal;" "The dog is a loyal creature;" "The wind blows;" "The wolves were howling in the woods." In these examples, we aren’t talking about any specific lunatics, poets, lovers, horses, dogs, winds, wolves, or woods, but rather about these particular classes of things, as opposed to other objects or classes. The phrase, "Neither the one nor the other," is an idiom of the language.
NOTES.
You may proceed and parse the following articles, when you shall have committed this
You can go ahead and review the following articles once you have done this.
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING
"He is the son of a king."
"He's the king's son."
The is an article, a word prefixed to a noun to limit its signification—definite, it limits the noun to a particular object—it belongs to the noun "son," according to
The is an article, a word added to a noun to narrow its meaning—definite, it restricts the noun to a specific object—it is used with the noun "son," according to
RULE 2. The definite article the belongs to nouns in the singular or plural number.
RULE 2. The definite article the is used with nouns in both singular and plural forms.
A is an article, a word placed before a noun to limit its signification—indefinite, it limits the noun to one of a kind, but to no particular one—it agrees with "king," agreeably to
A is an article, a word placed before a noun to limit its meaning—indefinite, it restricts the noun to one of a kind, but not to any specific one—it agrees with "king," in accordance with
RULE 1. The article a or an agrees with nouns in the singular number only.
RULE 1. The article a or an agrees with nouns in the singular form only.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
A bird sings. An eagle flies. Mountains stand. The multitude pursue pleasure. The reaper reaps the farmer's grain. Farmers mow the grass. Farmers' boys spread the hay. The clerk sells the merchant's goods. An ostrich outruns an Arab's horse. Cecrops founded Athens. Gallileo invented the telescope. James Macpherson translated Ossian's poems. Sir Francis Drake circumnavigated the globe. Doctor Benjamin Franklin invented the lightning-rod. Washington Irving wrote the Sketch-Book.
A bird sings. An eagle soars. Mountains stand tall. People chase after pleasure. The reaper gathers the farmer's grain. Farmers cut the grass. Farmers' sons spread the hay. The clerk sells the merchant's products. An ostrich runs faster than an Arab's horse. Cecrops established Athens. Galileo invented the telescope. James Macpherson translated Ossian's poems. Sir Francis Drake sailed around the globe. Dr. Benjamin Franklin created the lightning rod. Washington Irving wrote the Sketch-Book.
I will now offer a few remarks on the misapplication of the articles, which, with the exercise of your own discriminating powers, will enable you to use them with propriety. But, before you proceed, please to answer the following
I will now share a few thoughts on the incorrect use of the articles, which, with your own judgment, will help you use them correctly. But before you continue, please answer the following
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
How many articles are there?—In what sense is a noun taken, when it has no article to limit it?—Repeat the order of parsing an article.—What rule applies in parsing the definite article?—What rule in parsing the indefinite?
How many articles are there?—In what way is a noun understood when there’s no article to clarify it?—Go over the order of parsing an article again.—What rule is used for parsing the definite article?—What rule is used for parsing the indefinite?
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
A, AN, THE.
QUESTIONS ON THE NOTES.
EXERCISES IN FALSE SYNTAX.
NOTE TO RULE 1. An is used before a vowel or silent h, and a before a consonant or u long, and also before the word one.
NOTE TO RULE 1. An is used before a vowel or silent h, and a before a consonant or long u, and also before the word one.
EXAMPLES.
A enemy, a inkstand, a hour, an horse, an herald, an heart, an heathen, an union, a umbrella, an useful book, many an one. This is an hard saying. They met with an heavy loss. He would not give an hat for an horse.
A enemy, a inkstand, a hour, a horse, a herald, a heart, a heathen, a union, an umbrella, a useful book, many of them. This is a tough saying. They faced a heavy loss. He wouldn't give a hat for a horse.
NOTE 1, TO RULE 2. The articles are often properly omitted: when used they should be justly applied, according to their distinct character; as, "Gold is corrupting; The sea is green; A lion is bold." It would be improper to say, The gold is corrupting; Sea is green; Lion is bold.
NOTE 1, TO RULE 2. The articles are often properly left out: when used, they should be applied correctly based on their specific purpose; for example, "Gold is corrupting; The sea is green; A lion is bold." It would be incorrect to say, The gold is corrupting; Sea is green; Lion is bold.
The grass is good for horses, and the wheat for men. Grass is good for the horses, and wheat for the men. Grass looks well. Wheat is blighted.
The grass is good for horses, and the wheat for people. Grass is good for the horses, and wheat for the people. The grass looks good. The wheat is damaged.
NOTE 2. When a noun is used in its general sense, the article should be omitted; as, "Poetry is a pleasing art;" "Oranges grow in New Orleans."
NOTE 2. When a noun is used in its general sense, you should leave out the article; for example, "Poetry is a pleasing art;" "Oranges grow in New Orleans."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Corn in the garden, grows well; but corn in the field, does not. How does the tobacco sell? The tobacco is dear. How do you like the study of the grammar? The grammar is a pleasing study. A candid temper is proper for the man. World is wide. The man is mortal. And I persecuted this way unto the death. The earth, the air, the fire, and the water, are the four elements of the old philosophers.
Corn in the garden thrives, but corn in the field doesn’t do well. How is the tobacco selling? The tobacco is expensive. How do you feel about studying grammar? Grammar is an enjoyable subject. A straightforward attitude is suitable for a man. The world is vast. Man is mortal. And I pursued this path to the death. The earth, air, fire, and water are the four elements according to the ancient philosophers.
LECTURE IV.
OF ADJECTIVES.
In the phrases, a good apple, a bad apple, a large apple, a small apple, a red apple, a white apple, a green apple, a sweet apple, a sour apple, a bitter apple, a round apple, a hard apple, a soft apple, a mellow apple, a fair apple, a May apple, an early apple, a late apple, a winter apple, a crab apple, a thorn apple, a well-tasted apple, an ill-looking apple, a water-cored apple, you perceive that all those words in italics are adjectives, because each expresses some quality or property of the noun apple, or it shows what kind of an apple it is of which we are speaking.
In the phrases, a good apple, a bad apple, a large apple, a small apple, a red apple, a white apple, a green apple, a sweet apple, a sour apple, a bitter apple, a round apple, a hard apple, a soft apple, a mellow apple, a fair apple, a May apple, an early apple, a late apple, a winter apple, a crab apple, a thorn apple, a well-tasted apple, an ill-looking apple, a water-cored apple, you can see that all those words in italics are adjectives, because each one describes some quality or characteristic of the noun apple, or indicates what kind of apple we’re talking about.
The distinction between a noun and an adjective is very clear. A noun is the name of a thing; but an adjective denotes simply the quality or property of a thing. This is fine cloth. In this example, the difference between the word denoting the thing, and that denoting the quality of it, is easily perceived. You certainly cannot be at a loss to know, that the word cloth expresses the name, and fine, the quality, of the thing; consequently fine must be an adjective. If I say, He is a wise man, a prudent man, a wicked man, or an ungrateful man, the words in italics are adjectives, because each expresses a quality of the noun man. And, if I say, He is a tall man, a short man, a white man, a black man, or a persecuted man, the words, tall, short, white, black, and persecuted, are also adjectives, because they tell what kind of a man he is of whom I am speaking, or they attribute to him some particular property.
The difference between a noun and an adjective is very clear. A noun is the name of a thing, while an adjective simply describes the quality or property of that thing. For example, this is fine cloth. In this case, the difference between the word that refers to the thing and the one that refers to its quality is easy to see. You definitely won't have trouble understanding that the word cloth represents the name, and fine represents the quality of the thing; so, fine must be an adjective. If I say, He is a wise man, a prudent man, a wicked man, or an ungrateful man, the words in italics are adjectives because each one expresses a quality of the noun man. And if I say, He is a tall man, a short man, a white man, a black man, or a persecuted man, the words tall, short, white, black, and persecuted are also adjectives because they describe what kind of man he is or attribute some specific property to him.
Some adjectives restrict or limit the signification of the nouns to which they are joined, and are, therefore, sometimes called definitives; as, one era, seven ages, the first man, the whole mass, no trouble, those men, that book, all regions.
Some adjectives restrict or limit the meaning of the nouns they are attached to and are therefore sometimes called definitives; for example, one era, seven ages, the first man, the whole mass, no trouble, those men, that book, all regions.
Other adjectives define or describe nouns, or do both; as, fine silk, blue paper, a heavy shower, pure water, green mountains, bland breezes, gurgling rills, glass window, window glass, beaver hats, chip bonnets, blackberry ridge, Monroe garden, Juniata iron, Cincinnati steam-mill.
Other adjectives define or describe nouns, or do both; for example, fine silk, blue paper, a heavy shower, pure water, green mountains, bland breezes, gurgling streams, glass window, window glass, beaver hats, chip bonnets, blackberry ridge, Monroe garden, Juniata iron, Cincinnati steam-mill.
Some adjectives are secondary, and qualify other adjectives; as, pale red lining, dark blue silk, deep sea green sash, soft iron blooms, red hot iron plate.
Some adjectives are secondary, and modify other adjectives; for example, pale red lining, dark blue silk, deep sea green sash, soft iron blooms, red hot iron plate.
You will frequently find the adjective placed after the noun; as, "Those men are tall; A lion is bold; The weather is calm; The tree is three feet thick."
You will often see the adjective placed after the noun, like, "Those men are tall; A lion is bold; The weather is calm; The tree is three feet thick."
Should you ever be at a loss to distinguish an adjective from the other parts of speech, the following sign will enable you to tell it. Any word that will make sense with the word thing added, or with any other noun following it, is an adjective; as, a high thing, a low thing, a hot thing, a cold thing, an unfinished thing, a new-fashioned thing:—or, a pleasant prospect, a long-deserted dwelling, an American soldier, a Greek Testament. Are these words adjectives, distant, yonder, peaceful, long-sided, double-headed? A distant object or thing, yonder hill, &c. They are. They will make sense with a noun after them. Adjectives sometimes become adverbs. This matter will be explained in Lecture VI. In parsing, you may generally know an adjective by its qualifying a noun or pronoun.
If you ever have trouble telling an adjective apart from other parts of speech, here's a simple trick: any word that makes sense with the word thing added, or any other noun after it, is an adjective. For example, a high thing, a low thing, a hot thing, a cold thing, an unfinished thing, a new-fashioned thing; or, a pleasant prospect, a long-deserted dwelling, an American soldier, a Greek Testament. Are these words adjectives: distant, yonder, peaceful, long-sided, double-headed? Yes, they are. They will make sense with a noun following them, like a distant object or thing, yonder hill, etc. Adjectives can also function as adverbs. We'll cover that in Lecture VI. In parsing, you can usually identify an adjective by its qualifying a noun or pronoun.
Most words ending in ing are present participles. These are frequently used as adjectives; therefore, most participles will make sense with the addition of the word thing, or any other noun, after them; as, a pleasing thing, a moving spectacle, mouldering ruins.
Most words that end in ing are present participles. They are often used as adjectives, so most participles will make sense when you add the word thing or any other noun after them; for example, a pleasing thing, a moving spectacle, mouldering ruins.
In the Latin language, and many others, adjectives, like nouns, have gender, number, and case; but in the English language, they have neither gender, person, number, nor case. These properties belong to creatures and things, and not to their qualities; therefore gender, person, number, and case, are the properties of nouns, and not of adjectives.
In Latin and many other languages, adjectives, like nouns, have gender, number, and case; but in English, they don’t have gender, person, number, or case. These characteristics belong to creatures and things, not to their qualities; therefore, gender, person, number, and case are properties of nouns, and not of adjectives.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
More and most form the comparative and superlative degrees by increasing the positive; and less and least, by diminishing it.
More and most create the comparative and superlative forms by adding to the positive; while less and least do so by reducing it.
Comparison by increasing the positive
Comparison by amplifying the positive
Pos. | Comp. | Sup. |
great, | greater, | greatest. |
wise, | wiser, | wisest. |
holy, | more holy | most holy. |
frugal, | more frugal | most frugal. |
Comparison by diminishing the positive.
Comparison by downplaying the positive.
Pos. | Comp. | Sup. |
wise, | less wise | least wise. |
holy, | less holy, | least holy. |
frugal, | less frugal, | least frugal. |
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
Words used in counting, are called numeral adjectives of the cardinal kind; as, one, two, three, four, twenty, fifty, &c.
Words used for counting are called numeral adjectives of the cardinal type; for example, one, two, three, four, twenty, fifty, etc.
Words used in numbering, are called numeral adjectives of the ordinal kind; as, first, second, third, fourth, twentieth, fiftieth, &c.
Words used for counting are called numeral adjectives of the ordinal type; for example, first, second, third, fourth, twentieth, fiftieth, etc.
NOTE. The words many, few, and several, as they always refer to an indefinite number, may be properly called numeral adjectives of the indefinite kind.
NOTE. The words many, few, and several, since they always refer to an indefinite number, can be appropriately called numeral adjectives of the indefinite kind.
NOTES.
1. The simple word, or Positive, becomes the Comparative by adding r, or er; and the Positive becomes the Superlative, by adding st, or est, to the end of it; as, Pos. wise, Com. wiser, Sup. wisest; rich, richer, richest; bold, bolder, boldest. The adverbs, more and most, less and least, when placed before the adjective, have the same effect; as, Pos. wise, Com. more wise, Sup. most wise; Pos. wise, Com. less wise, Sup. least wise.
1. The simple word, or Positive, becomes the Comparative by adding r or er; and the Positive becomes the Superlative by adding st or est to the end of it; for example, Pos. wise, Com. wiser, Sup. wisest; rich, richer, richest; bold, bolder, boldest. The adverbs more and most, less and least, when placed before the adjective, have the same effect; for instance, Pos. wise, Com. more wise, Sup. most wise; Pos. wise, Com. less wise, Sup. least wise.
2. Monosyllables are generally compared by adding er and est; dissyllables, trisyllables, &c. by more and most; as, mild, milder, mildest; frugal, more frugal, most frugal; virtuous, more virtuous, most virtuous. Dissyllables ending in y; as, happy, lovely; and in le after a mute; as, able, ample; and dissyllables accented on the last syllable; as, discreet, polite; easily admit of er and est; as, happier, happiest; politer, politest. Words of more than two syllables very seldom admit of these terminations.
2. Monosyllables are usually compared by adding er and est; dissyllables, trisyllables, etc., are compared using more and most; for example, mild, milder, mildest; frugal, more frugal, most frugal; virtuous, more virtuous, most virtuous. Dissyllables that end in y, like happy and lovely; those that end in le after a mute, such as able and ample; and dissyllables stressed on the last syllable, like discreet and polite; can easily take er and est; for example, happier, happiest; politer, politest. Words with more than two syllables rarely take these endings.
3. When the positive ends in d, or t, preceded by a single vowel, the consonant is doubled in forming the comparative and superlative degrees; as red, redder, reddest; hot, hotter, hottest.
3. When the positive ends in d or t, and is preceded by a single vowel, the consonant is doubled when creating the comparative and superlative forms; for example, red, redder, reddest; hot, hotter, hottest.
4. In some words the superlative is formed by adding most to the end of them; as, nethermost, uttermost or utmost, undermost, uppermost, foremost.
4. In some words, the superlative is created by adding most to the end of them, like nethermost, uttermost or utmost, undermost, uppermost, foremost.
5. In English, as in most languages, there are some words of very common use, (in which the caprice of custom is apt to get the better of analogy,) that are irregular in forming the degrees of comparison; as, "Good, better, best; bad, worse, worst; little, less, least; much or many, more, most; near, nearer, nearest or next; late, later, latest or last; old, older or elder, oldest or eldest;" and a few others.
5. In English, like in most languages, there are some words that are very commonly used, (where the whims of custom tend to override rules of analogy,) that form their comparative degrees irregularly; for example, "good, better, best; bad, worse, worst; little, less, least; much or many, more, most; near, nearer, nearest or next; late, later, latest or last; old, older or elder, oldest or eldest;" and a few others.
6. The following adjectives, and many others, are always in the superlative degree, because, by expressing a quality in the highest degree, they carry in themselves a superlative signification: chief, extreme, perfect, right, wrong, honest, just, true, correct, sincere, vast, immense, ceaseless, infinite, endless, unparalleled, universal, supreme, unlimited, omnipotent, all-wise, eternal.
6. The following adjectives, along with many others, are always in the superlative degree, because they express a quality at its highest level, inherently carrying a superlative meaning: chief, extreme, perfect, right, wrong, honest, just, true, correct, sincere, vast, immense, ceaseless, infinite, endless, unparalleled, universal, supreme, unlimited, omnipotent, all-wise, eternal.
7. Compound adjectives, and adjectives denoting qualities arising from the figure of bodies, do not admit of comparison; such as, well-formed, frost-bitten, round, square, oblong, circular, quadrangular, conical, &c.
7. Compound adjectives, and adjectives that describe qualities based on the shape of objects, cannot be compared; for example, well-formed, frost-bitten, round, square, oblong, circular, quadrangular, conical, etc.
8. The termination ish added to adjectives, expresses a slight degree of quality below the comparative; as, black, blackish; salt, saltish. Very, prefixed to the comparative, expresses a degree of quality, but not always a superlative degree.
8. The suffix ish added to adjectives indicates a slight degree of quality that is less than the comparative; for example, black, blackish; salt, saltish. The word very placed before the comparative indicates a degree of quality, but not always the highest degree.
Read this Lecture carefully, particularly the NOTES; after which you may parse the following adjectives and neuter verb, and, likewise, the examples that follow. If you cannot repeat all the definitions and rules, spread the Compendium when you parse. But before you proceed, please to commit the
Read this lecture carefully, especially the notes; afterward, you can analyze the following adjectives and neuter verbs, as well as the examples that follow. If you can’t recall all the definitions and rules, refer to the compendium when you analyze. But before you move on, please commit the
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing an ADJECTIVE, is—an adjective, and why?—compare it—degree of comparison, and why?—to what noun does it belong?—RULE.
The order of parsing an ADJECTIVE is—an adjective, and why?—compare it—degree of comparison, and why?—to which noun does it belong?—RULE.
That great nation was once powerful; but now it is feeble.
That great nation was once strong; but now it is weak.
Great is an adjective, a word added to a noun to express its quality—pos. great, com. greater, sup. greatest—it is in the positive degree, it expresses the quality of an object without any increase or diminution, and belongs to the noun "nation," according to
Great is an adjective, a word added to a noun to express its quality—pos. great, com. greater, sup. greatest—it is in the positive degree, it expresses the quality of an object without any increase or decrease, and belongs to the noun "nation," according to
RULE 18. Adjectives belong to, and qualify, nouns expressed or understood.
RULE 18. Adjectives are related to, and describe, nouns that are stated or implied.
Was is a verb, a word that signifies to be—neuter, it expresses neither action nor passion, but being or a state of being—third person singular, because its nominative "nation" is a noun of multitude conveying unity of idea—it agrees with "nation," agreeably to RULE 10. A noun of multitude conveying unity of idea, may have a verb or pronoun agreeing with it in the singular.
Was is a verb that means to exist—it doesn’t show action or emotion but refers to existence or a state of being. It’s third person singular because its subject "nation" is a collective noun representing unity of thought—it aligns with "nation," following RULE 10. A collective noun representing unity of thought can have a verb or pronoun that matches it in singular.
Powerful is an adjective belonging to "nation," according to Rule 18. Feeble belongs to "it," according to Note 1, under Rule 18. Is is a neuter verb agreeing with "it," agreeably to Rule 4.
Powerful is an adjective that describes "nation," according to Rule 18. Feeble describes "it," according to Note 1 under Rule 18. Is is a neuter verb that agrees with "it," following Rule 4.
"Bonaparte entered Russia with 400,000 men."
"Bonaparte entered Russia with 400,000 soldiers."
Four-hundred-thousand is a numeral adjective of the cardinal kind, it is a word used in counting, and belongs to the noun "men," according to Note 2, under Rule 18. Numeral adjectives belong to nouns, which nouns must agree in number with their adjectives.
Four-hundred-thousand is a number used for counting, and it describes the noun "men," according to Note 2, under Rule 18. Number words must match the nouns they modify in terms of singular or plural.
If, in parsing the following examples, you find any words about which you are at a loss, you will please to turn back, and parse all the foregoing examples again. This course will enable you to proceed without any difficulty.
If, while going through the following examples, you come across any words you're unsure about, please go back and review all the previous examples again. This approach will help you move forward without any problems.
More is an adverb. Of and to are prepositions, governing the nouns that follow them in the objective case.
More is an adverb. Of and to are prepositions that govern the nouns that follow them in the objective case.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
A benevolent man helps indigent beggars. Studious scholars learn many long lessons. Wealthy merchants own large ships. The heavy ships bear large burdens; the lighter ships carry less burdens. Just poets use figurative language. Ungrammatical expressions offend a true critic's ear. Weak critics magnify trifling errors. No composition is perfect. The rabble was tumultuous. The late-washed grass looks green. Shady trees form a delightful arbor. The setting sun makes a beautiful appearance; the variegated rainbow appears more beautiful. Epaminondas was the greatest of the Theban generals; Pelopidas was next to Epaminondas.
A kind man helps poor beggars. Diligent students learn many lengthy lessons. Wealthy merchants own large ships. The heavy ships carry big loads; the lighter ships carry smaller loads. Thoughtful poets use figurative language. Poor grammar annoys a true critic's ear. Weak critics blow small mistakes out of proportion. No piece of writing is perfect. The crowd was noisy. The freshly mowed grass looks green. Shady trees create a lovely shelter. The setting sun is a beautiful sight; the colorful rainbow looks even more stunning. Epaminondas was the greatest of the Theban generals; Pelopidas was second to Epaminondas.
The first fleet contained three hundred men; the second contained four thousand. The earth contains one thousand million inhabitants. Many a cheering ray brightens the good man's pathway.
The first fleet had three hundred men; the second had four thousand. The world has one billion people. Many a bright ray cheers the good person's journey.
The noun worth has altogether dropped its associated words. "The cloth is worth ten dollars a yard;" that is, The cloth is of the worth of ten dollars by the yard, or for a, one, or every yard.
The noun worth has completely lost its related terms. "The cloth is worth ten dollars a yard;" meaning, the cloth has a value of ten dollars per yard, or for one, or each yard.
Some eminent philologists do not admit the propriety of supplying an ellipsis after like, worth, ere, but, except, and than, but consider them prepositions. See Anomalies, in the latter part of this work.
Some well-known language experts don’t agree with adding words to fill in the gaps after like, worth, ere, but, except, and than, and view them as prepositions. See Anomalies, in the latter part of this work.
REMARKS ON ADJECTIVES AND NOUNS.
A critical analysis requires that the adjective when used without its noun, should be parsed as an adjective belonging to its noun understood; as, "The virtuous [persons] and the sincere [persons] are always respected;" "Providence rewards the good [people,] and punishes the bad [people.]"
A critical analysis needs that when an adjective is used without its noun, it should be seen as an adjective related to its understood noun; for example, "The virtuous [persons] and the sincere [persons] are always respected;" "Providence rewards the good [people,] and punishes the bad [people.]"
But sometimes the adjective, by its manner of meaning, becomes a noun, and has another adjective joined to it; as, "the chief good;" "The vast immense [immensity] of space."
But sometimes the adjective, by its manner of meaning, becomes a noun, and has another adjective added to it; like, "the main good;" "The huge immense [immensity] of space."
Various nouns placed before other nouns, assume the character of adjectives, according to their manner of meaning; as, "Sea fish, iron mortar, wine vessel, gold watch, corn field, meadow ground, mountain height."
Various nouns placed before other nouns take on the role of adjectives based on their meaning; for example, "sea fish, iron mortar, wine vessel, gold watch, corn field, meadow ground, mountain height."
The principle which recognises custom as the standard of grammatical accuracy, might rest for its support on the usage of only six words, and defy all the subtleties of innovating skeptics to gainsay it. If the genius and analogy of our language were the standard, it would be correct to observe this analogy, and say, "Good, gooder, goodest; bad, badder, baddest; little, littler, littlest; much, mucher; muchest." "By this mean;" "What are the news." But such a criterion betrays only the weakness of those who attempt to establish it. Regardless of the dogmas and edicts of the philosophical umpire, the good sense of the people will cause them, in this instance, as well as in a thousand others, to yield to custom, and say, "Good, better, best; bad, worse, worst; little, less, least; much, more, most;" "By this means;" "What is the news?"
The principle that recognizes custom as the standard of grammatical accuracy could rely solely on the usage of just six words and still stand strong against all the arguments from skeptical innovators. If the essence and pattern of our language were the measure, it would be right to follow that pattern and say, "Good, gooder, goodest; bad, badder, baddest; little, littler, littlest; much, mucher; muchest." "By this mean;" "What are the news?" But such a standard only reveals the weaknesses of those trying to impose it. No matter the doctrines and rules set by philosophical authorities, the common sense of the people will lead them, in this case as in a thousand others, to accept custom and say, "Good, better, best; bad, worse, worst; little, less, least; much, more, most;" "By this means;" "What is the news?"
With regard to the using of adjectives and other qualifying words, care must be taken, or your language will frequently amount to absurdity or nonsense. Let the following general remark, which is better than a dozen rules, put you on your guard. Whenever you utter a sentence, or put your pen on paper to write, weigh well in your mind the meaning of the words which you are about to employ. See that they convey precisely the ideas which you wish to express by them, and thus you will avoid innumerable errors. In speaking of a man, we may say, with propriety, he is very wicked, or exceedingly lavish, because the terms wicked and lavish are adjectives that admit of comparison; but, if we take the words in their literal acceptation, there is a solecism in calling a man very honest, or exceedingly just, for the words honest and just, literally admit of no comparison. In point of fact, a man is honest or dishonest, just or unjust: there can be no medium or excess in this respect. Very correct, very incorrect, very right, very wrong, are common expressions; but they are not literally proper. What is not correct, must be incorrect; and that which is not incorrect, must be correct: what is not right, must be wrong; and that which is not wrong, must be right. To avoid that circumlocution which must otherwise take place, our best speakers and writers, however, frequently compare adjectives which do not literally admit of comparison: "The most established practice;" "The most uncertain method;" "Irving, as a writer, is far more accurate than Addison;" "The metaphysical investigations of our philosophical grammars, are still more incomprehensible to the learner." Comparisons like these, should generally be avoided; but sometimes they are so convenient in practice, as to render them admissible. Such expressions can be reconciled with the principles of grammar, only by considering them as figurative.
When it comes to using adjectives and other qualifying words, you need to be careful, or your language can often become ridiculous or nonsensical. Keep this simple advice in mind, which is more helpful than a dozen rules: Whenever you speak a sentence or write something down, really think about the meaning of the words you're about to use. Make sure they clearly convey the ideas you want to express, and this will help you avoid countless mistakes. When talking about a person, we can properly say he is very wicked or exceedingly extravagant, because the words wicked and extravagant are adjectives that can be compared. However, if we take the words literally, it doesn’t make sense to say a man is very honest or exceedingly just, because honest and just don’t allow for comparison. In reality, a man is either honest or dishonest, just or unjust: there’s no middle ground or degree here. Phrases like very correct, very incorrect, very right, and very wrong are common; however, they’re not literally correct. What isn’t correct must be incorrect; and what isn’t incorrect must be correct: what isn’t right must be wrong; and what isn’t wrong must be right. To avoid unnecessarily wordy phrases, our best speakers and writers often compare adjectives that technically shouldn’t be compared: "The most established practice;" "The most uncertain method;" "Irving, as a writer, is far more accurate than Addison;" "The metaphysical investigations of our philosophical grammars are still more incomprehensible to the learner." While these types of comparisons should generally be avoided, sometimes they are so useful that they become acceptable. Such expressions can only be justified in grammar by viewing them as figurative.
Comparative members of sentences, should be set in direct opposition to each other; as, "Pope was rich, but Goldsmith was poor." The following sentences are inaccurate: "Solomon was wiser than Cicero was eloquent." "The principles of the reformation were deeper in the prince's mind than to be easily eradicated." This latter sentence contains no comparison at all; neither does it literally convey any meaning. Again, if the Psalmist had said, "I am the wisest of my teachers," he would have spoken absurdly, because the phrase would imply, that he was one of his teachers. But in saying, "I am wiser than my teachers," he does not consider himself one of them, but places himself in contradistinction to them.
Comparative elements in sentences should be placed in direct opposition to one another; for example, "Pope was rich, but Goldsmith was poor." The following sentences are incorrect: "Solomon was wiser than Cicero was eloquent." "The principles of the reformation were deeper in the prince's mind than to be easily eradicated." The latter sentence contains no comparison at all; it also fails to communicate any meaning. Additionally, if the Psalmist had said, "I am the wisest of my teachers," he would have spoken absurdly, as the phrase would imply that he was one of his teachers. However, by stating, "I am wiser than my teachers," he does not see himself as one of them, but rather positions himself in contrast to them.
Before you proceed any farther, you may answer the following
Before you go any further, you can answer the following
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
What is the distinction between a noun and an adjective?—By what sign may an adjective be known?—Are participles ever used as adjectives?—Does gender, person, number, or case, belong to adjectives?—How are they varied?—Name the three degrees of comparison.—What effect have less and least in comparing adjectives?—Repeat the order of parsing an adjective.—What rule applies in parsing an adjective?—What rule in parsing a verb agreeing with a noun of multitude conveying unity of idea?—What Note should be applied in parsing an adjective which belongs to a pronoun?—What Note in parsing numeral adjectives?
What’s the difference between a noun and an adjective? How can you identify an adjective? Are participles ever used as adjectives? Do adjectives have gender, person, number, or case? How do you change them? Name the three degrees of comparison. What roles do less and least play when comparing adjectives? Repeat the steps for parsing an adjective. What rule applies when parsing an adjective? What rule applies when parsing a verb that agrees with a collective noun conveying a sense of unity? What note should you consider when parsing an adjective that belongs to a pronoun? What note should you keep in mind when parsing numeral adjectives?
QUESTIONS ON THE NOTES.
Repeat all the various ways of forming the degrees of comparison, mentioned in the first five NOTES.—Compare these adjectives; ripe, frugal, mischievous, happy, able, good, little, much or many, near, late, old.—Name some adjectives that are always in the superlative, and never compared.—Are compound adjectives compared?—What is said of the termination ish, and of the adverb very?—When does an adjective become a noun?—What character does a noun assume when placed before another noun?—How can you prove that custom is the standard of grammatical accuracy?
Repeat all the different ways to form the degrees of comparison mentioned in the first five NOTES. — Compare these adjectives: ripe, frugal, mischievous, happy, able, good, little, much or many, near, late, old. — Name some adjectives that are always in the superlative and never compared. — Are compound adjectives compared? — What is said about the ending ish, and about the adverb very? — When does an adjective turn into a noun? — What role does a noun take when it comes before another noun? — How can you demonstrate that custom is the standard of grammatical accuracy?
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
ADNOUNS.
Adnoun or Adjective, comes from the Latin, ad and jicio, to add to.
Adnoun or Adjective comes from the Latin ad and jicio, which means to add to.
Adnouns are a class of words added to nouns to vary their comprehension, or to determine their extension. Those which effect the former object, are called adjectives, or attributes; and those which effect the latter, restrictives. It is not, in all cases, easy to determine to which of these classes an adnoun should be referred. Words which express simply the qualities of nouns, are adjectives; and such as denote their situation or number, are restrictives.
Adnouns are a category of words added to nouns to change their meaning or to specify their range. Those that change the meaning are called adjectives or attributes; and those that specify the range are called restrictives. It's not always easy to determine which of these categories an adnoun belongs to. Words that simply describe the qualities of nouns are adjectives, while those that indicate their situation or number are restrictives.
Adjectives were originally nouns or verbs.
Adjectives used to be nouns or verbs.
Some consider the adjective, in its present application, exactly equivalent to a noun connected to another noun by means of juxtaposition, of a preposition, or of a corresponding flexion. "A golden cup," say they, "is the same as a gold cup, or a cup of gold." But this principle appears to be exceptionable. "A cup of gold," may mean either a cup-full of gold, or a cup made of gold. "An oaken cask," signifies an oak cask, or a cask of oak; i.e. a cask made of oak; but a beer cask, and a cask of beer, are two different things. A virtuous son; a son of virtue.
Some people think that the adjective, in its current use, is exactly the same as a noun linked to another noun through juxtaposition, a preposition, or a related form. "A golden cup," they say, "is the same as a gold cup, or a cup of gold." However, this idea seems to have exceptions. "A cup of gold" could mean either a cup full of gold or a cup made of gold. "An oaken cask" means either an oak cask or a cask of oak; that is, a cask made of oak. But a beer cask and a cask of beer are two different things. A virtuous son; a son of virtue.
The distinguishing characteristic of the adjective, appears to consist in its both naming a quality, and attributing that quality to some object.
The main feature of the adjective seems to be that it both names a quality and attributes that quality to some object.
The terminations en, ed, and ig (our modern y,) signifying give, add, join, denote that the names of qualities to which they are postfixed, are to be attributed to other nouns possessing such qualities: wood-en, wood-y. See page 37.
The endings en, ed, and ig (our modern y), which mean give, add, join, indicate that the quality names they’re attached to should be attributed to other nouns that have those qualities: wood-en, wood-y. See page 37.
Left is the past participle of the verb leave. Horne Tooke defines right to be that which is ordered or directed. The right hand is that which your parents and custom direct you to use in preference to the other. And when you employ that in preference, the other is the leaved, leav'd, or left hand; i.e. the one leaved or left. "The one shall be taken, and the other (leaved) left."
Left is the past participle of the verb leave. Horne Tooke defines right as what is ordered or directed. The right hand is the one that your parents and society tell you to use instead of the other. And when you choose to use that one, the other is the leaved, leav'd, or left hand; that is, the one that has been leaved or left. "The one shall be taken, and the other (leaved) left."
Own. Formerly a man's own was what he worked for, own being a past participle of a verb signifying to work.
Own. Previously, a man's own referred to what he worked for, with own being a past participle of a verb meaning to work.
Restrictive. Some restrictives, in modern times, are applied only to singular nouns; such as a or an, another, one, this, that, each, every, either. Others, only to plural nouns; as, these, those, two, three, few, several, all. But most restrictives, like adjectives, are applied to both singular and plural nouns: first, second, last, the, former, latter, any, such, same, some, which, what.
Restrictive. Some restrictives today are used only with singular nouns, such as a or an, another, one, this, that, each, every, either. Others are used only with plural nouns, like these, those, two, three, few, several, all. However, most restrictives, similar to adjectives, apply to both singular and plural nouns: first, second, last, the, former, latter, any, such, same, some, which, what.
Numerals. All numeration was, doubtless, originally performed by the fingers; for the number of the fingers is still the utmost extent of its signification. Ten is the past participle of tynan, to close, to shut in. The hands tyned, tened, closed, or shut in, signified ten; for there numeration closed. To denote a number greater than ten, we must begin again, ten and one, ten and two, &c.
Numerals. Counting was likely first done using our fingers; the number of fingers still represents its highest value. Ten comes from the past participle of tynan, which means to close or shut in. The hands tyned, tened, closed, or shut in, represented ten; this is where counting closed. To express a number greater than ten, we start over with ten and one, ten and two, etc.
Twain, twa-in, twa-ain, twa-ane, is a compound of two (twa, twae, twee, twi, two or dwo or duo) and one (ane, ain, an.) It signifies two units joined, united, aned, or oned. Twenty (twa-ane-ten) signifies two tens aned, oned, or united. Things separated into parcels of twenty each, are called scores. Score is the past participle of shear, to separate.
Twain, twa-in, twa-ain, twa-ane, is a combination of two (twa, twae, twee, twi, two or dwo or duo) and one (ane, ain, an.) It means two units joined, united, aned, or one. Twenty (twa-ane-ten) means two tens aned, oned, or united. Items separated into groups of twenty each are called scores. Score is the past participle of shear, to separate.
The Ordinals are formed like abstract nouns in eth. Fifth, sixth, or tenth is the number which fiv-eth, six-eth, ten-eth, or mak-eth up the number five, six, or ten.
The Ordinals are created like abstract nouns in eth. Fifth, sixth, or tenth is the number that makes up the numbers five, six, or ten.
Philosophical writers who limit our acceptation of words to that in which they were originally employed, and suppose that all the complicated, yet often definable, associations which the gradual progress of language and intellect has connected with words, are to be reduced to the standard of our forefathers; appear not to have sufficiently attended to the changes which this principle of association actually produces. As language is transmitted from generation to generation, many words become the representatives of ideas with which they were not originally associated; and thus they undergo a change, not only in the mode of their application, but also in their meaning. Words being the signs of things, their meaning must necessarily change as much, at least, as things themselves change; but this variation in their import more frequently depends on accidental circumstances. Among the ideas connected with a word that which was once of primary, becomes only of secondary importance; and sometimes, by degrees, it loses altogether its connexion with the word, giving place to others with which, from some accidental causes, it has been associated.
Philosophical writers who limit our understanding of words to their original meanings and think that all the complex, yet often definable, associations developed over time through language and intellect should be reduced to the standards of our ancestors; seem to overlook the changes that this principle of association actually brings about. As language is passed down through generations, many words come to represent ideas that they were not originally linked to; thus, they experience a change not only in how they are used but also in their meaning. Since words are signs of things, their meanings must naturally change as much, at least, as the things themselves change; however, this variation in meaning often depends on random circumstances. Among the ideas associated with a word, those that were once primary can become merely secondary; and sometimes, gradually, they lose their connection to the word entirely, making way for new associations that arise from some random reasons.
Two or three instances will illustrate the truth of these remarks. In an ancient English version of the New Testament, we find the following language: "I, Paul, a rascal of Jesus Christ, unto you Gentiles," &c. But who, in the present acceptation of the word, would dare to call "the great apostle of the Gentiles" a rascal? Rascal formerly meant a servant: one devoted to the interest of another; but now it is nearly synonymous with villain. Villain once had none of the odium which is now associated with the term; but it signified one who, under the feudal system, rented or held lands of another. Thus, Henry the VIII. says to a vassal or tenant, "As you are an accomplished villain, I order that you receive £700 out of the public treasury." The word villain, then, has given up its original idea, and become the representative of a new one, the word tenant having supplanted it. To prove that the meaning of words changes, a thousand examples could be adduced; but with the intelligent reader, proof is unnecessary.
Two or three examples will show the truth of these comments. In an old English translation of the New Testament, we find the following language: "I, Paul, a rascal of Jesus Christ, to you Gentiles," etc. But who, in today's understanding of the word, would dare to call "the great apostle of the Gentiles" a rascal? Rascal used to mean a servant: someone committed to the interests of others; but now it's nearly synonymous with villain. Villain once didn’t carry the negative connotation it has today; it referred to someone who, under the feudal system, rented or held lands from another. Thus, Henry VIII says to a vassal or tenant, "As you are an accomplished villain, I order that you receive £700 from the public treasury." The word villain has lost its original meaning and become associated with a new one, with the term tenant taking its place. To demonstrate that the meaning of words changes, countless examples could be provided; but for the intelligent reader, proof is unnecessary.
QUESTIONS ON THE PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
How are adnouns divided?—What constitutes the true character of an adjective?—What are the signification and denotement of the terminations, en, ed, and ig?—What do left and own signify?—Name the three ways in which restrictives are applied.—How was numeration originally performed?—What is said of twain, twenty, score, and the ordinal numbers?—What is said of the changes produced in the meaning of words, by the principle of association?
How are adjectives divided? What defines the true nature of an adjective? What do the endings en, ed, and ig signify? What do left and own mean? Name the three ways restrictives are used. How was counting originally done? What is noted about twain, twenty, score, and the ordinal numbers? What is said about the changes in word meanings due to the principle of association?
EXERCISES IN FALSE SYNTAX.
NOTE 9, under RULE 18. Double Comparatives and Superlatives should be avoided; such as, worser, lesser, more deeper, more wickeder, &c.: chiefest, supremest, perfectest, rightest; or more perfect, most perfect, most supreme, &c.
NOTE 9, under RULE 18. Double Comparatives and Superlatives should be avoided, such as worser, lesser, more deeper, more wicked, etc.: chiefest, supremest, perfectest, rightest; or more perfect, most perfect, most supreme, etc.
Virtue confers the most supreme dignity on man, and it should be his chiefest desire.
Virtue gives the highest honor to a person, and it should be their greatest aspiration.
He made the greater light to rule the day, and the lesser light to rule the night.
He created the sun to shine during the day and the moon to shine at night.
The phrases "most supreme," and "chiefest," in the first sentence, are incorrect, because supreme and chief are in the superlative degree without having the superlative form superadded, which addition makes them double superlatives. They should be written, "confers supreme dignity," and, "his chief desire."
The terms "most supreme" and "chiefest" in the first sentence are incorrect because supreme and chief are already in the superlative form without needing an extra superlative added, which would make them double superlatives. They should be written as "confers supreme dignity" and "his chief desire."
We can say, one thing is less than another, or smaller than another, because the adjectives less and smaller are in the comparative degree; but the phrase "lesser light," in the second sentence, is inaccurate. Lesser is a double comparative, which, according to the preceding Note, should be avoided. Lesser is as incorrect as badder, gooder, worser. "The smaller light," would be less exceptionable. You can correct the following without my assistance. Correct them four times over.
We can say that one thing is less than another, or smaller than another, because the adjectives less and smaller are in the comparative degree; but the phrase "lesser light," in the second sentence, is inaccurate. Lesser is a double comparative, which, according to the previous Note, should be avoided. Lesser is just as incorrect as badder, gooder, worser. "The smaller light" would be less objectionable. You can correct the following without my help. Correct them four times over.
The pleasures of the understanding are more preferable than those of imagination or sense. The tongue is like a race-horse, which runs the faster the lesser weight it carries. The nightingale's voice is the most sweetest in the grove. The Most Highest hath created us for his glory, He was admitted to the chiefest offices. The first witness gave a strong proof of the fact; the next more stronger still; but the last witness, the most stronger of all. He gave the fullest and the most sincere proof of the truer friendship.
The pleasures of understanding are better than those of imagination or sensory experiences. The tongue is like a racehorse; it runs faster the less weight it carries. The nightingale's song is the sweetest in the grove. The Most High created us for His glory, and He was given the highest positions. The first witness provided strong evidence; the next one provided even stronger evidence; but the last witness gave the strongest of all. He provided the clearest and most sincere proof of true friendship.
LECTURE V.
OF PARTICIPLES.
A PARTICIPLE is a word derived from a verb, and partakes of the nature of a verb, and also of an adjective.
A PARTICIPLE is a word that comes from a verb and has qualities of both a verb and an adjective.
Verbs have three participles, the present or imperfect, the perfect, and the compound.
Verbs have three participles: the present (or imperfect), the perfect, and the compound.
The present or imperfect participle denotes action or being continued, but not perfected. It always ends in ing; as, ruling, being: "I am writing a letter."
The present or imperfect participle indicates ongoing action or existence, but not completion. It always ends in ing; for example, ruling, being: "I am writing a letter."
The perfect participle denotes action or being perfected or finished. When derived from a regular verb, it ends in ed, and corresponds with the imperfect tense; as, ruled, smiled: "The letter is written."
The perfect participle indicates that an action has been completed or finished. When it comes from a regular verb, it ends in ed and matches the imperfect tense; for example, ruled, smiled: "The letter is written."
The compound participle implies action or being completed before the time referred to. It is formed by placing having before the perfect participle; as, having ruled, having been ruled: "Having written the letter, he mailed it."
The compound participle indicates that an action or state is completed before the referenced time. It is created by putting having in front of the perfect participle; for example, having ruled, having been ruled: "Having written the letter, he mailed it."
The term Participle comes from the Latin word participio, which signifies to partake: and this name is given to this part of speech, because it partakes of the nature of the verb and of the adjective.
The term Participle comes from the Latin word participio, which means to partake: and this name is used for this part of speech because it partakes of the characteristics of both the verb and the adjective.
By many writers, the participle is classed with the verb, and treated as a part of it; but, as it has no nominative, partakes of the nature of an adjective, requires many syntactical rules which apply not to the verb, and, in some other respects, has properties peculiar to itself, it is believed that its character is sufficiently distinct from the verb, to entitle it to the rank of a separate part of speech. It is, in fact, the connecting link between, not only the adjective and the verb, but also the noun and the verb.
Many writers categorize the participle with the verb and treat it as part of the verb; however, since it lacks a nominative, has qualities of an adjective, requires various syntactical rules that don’t apply to verbs, and possesses some unique properties, it's believed that its nature is distinct enough from the verb to qualify as its own part of speech. In fact, it serves as the connecting link not only between adjectives and verbs but also between nouns and verbs.
All participles are compound in their meaning and office. Like verbs, they express action and being, and denote time; and, like adjectives, they describe the nouns of which they denote the action or being. In the sentences, The boatman is crossing the river; I see a man laboring in the field; Charles is standing; you perceive that the participles crossing and laboring express the actions of the boatman and the man, and standing the state of being of Charles. In these respects, then, they partake of the nature of verbs. You also notice, that they describe the several nouns associated with them, like describing adjectives; and that, in this respect, they participate the properties of adjectives. And, furthermore, you observe they denote actions which are still going on; that is, incomplete or unfinished actions; for which reason we call them imperfect participles.
All participles have a complex meaning and function. Like verbs, they express action and existence, indicating time; and, like adjectives, they describe the nouns they relate to in terms of action or existence. In the sentences, The boatman is crossing the river; I see a man laboring in the field; Charles is standing; you see that the participles crossing and laboring represent the actions of the boatman and the man, while standing represents Charles's state of being. In these ways, they share characteristics with verbs. You also notice that they describe the various nouns they are associated with, similar to describing adjectives; and in this regard, they share properties with adjectives. Furthermore, you observe that they indicate actions that are still ongoing; that is, incomplete or unfinished actions; which is why we refer to them as imperfect participles.
Perhaps I can illustrate their character more clearly. When the imperfect or present and perfect participles are placed before nouns, they become defining or describing adjectives, and are denominated participial adjectives; as, A loving companion; The rippling stream; Roaring winds; A wilted leaf; An accomplished scholar. Here the words loving, rippling, roaring, wilted, and accomplished, describe or define the nouns with which they are associated. And where the participles are placed after their nouns, they have, also, this descriptive quality. If I say, I see the moon rising; The horse is running a race; The dog is beaten; I describe the several objects, as a rising moon, a running horse, and a beaten dog, as well as when I place these participles before the nouns. The same word is a participle or a participial adjective, according to its manner of meaning. The preceding illustration, however, shows that this distinction is founded on a very slight shade of difference in the meaning of the two. The following examples will enable you to distinguish the one from the other.
Maybe I can make their character clearer. When present or perfect participles are placed before nouns, they become defining or describing adjectives, known as participial adjectives; for example, A loving companion; The rippling stream; Roaring winds; A wilted leaf; An accomplished scholar. Here, the words loving, rippling, roaring, wilted, and accomplished describe or define the nouns they’re attached to. When participles are placed after their nouns, they still carry this descriptive quality. If I say, I see the moon rising; The horse is running a race; The dog is beaten; I’m describing those objects as a rising moon, a running horse, and a beaten dog, just like when I place these participles before the nouns. The same word can be a participle or a participial adjective depending on how it’s used. However, the previous illustration shows that this distinction is based on a very slight difference in meaning between the two. The following examples will help you distinguish one from the other.
Participles. | Participial adjectives. |
See the sun setting. | See the setting sun. |
See the moon rising. | See the rising moon. |
The wind is roaring. | Hear the roaring wind. |
The twig is broken. | The broken twig fell. |
The vessel anchored in the bay, lost her mast. | The anchored vessel spreads her sail. |
The present or imperfect participle is known by its ending in ing; as, floating, riding, hearing, seeing. These are derived from the verbs, float, ride, hear, and see. But some words ending in ing are not participles; such as evening, morning, hireling, sapling, uninteresting, unbelieving, uncontrolling. When you parse a word ending in ing, you should always consider whether it comes from a verb or not. There is such a verb as interest, hence you know that the word interesting is a participle; but there is no such verb as uninterest, consequently, uninteresting can not be a participle: but it is an adjective; as, an uninteresting story. You will be able very easily to distinguish the participle from the other parts of speech, when you shall have acquired a more extensive knowledge of the verb.
The present or imperfect participle is recognized by its ending in ing; for example, floating, riding, hearing, seeing. These come from the verbs float, ride, hear, and see. However, some words that end in ing are not participles, such as evening, morning, hireling, sapling, uninteresting, unbelieving, uncontrolling. When you analyze a word ending in ing, you should always determine whether it comes from a verb. There is a verb interest, so interesting is a participle; but there is no verb uninterest, which means uninteresting cannot be a participle: instead, it is an adjective, as in an uninteresting story. You will find it easy to distinguish the participle from other parts of speech once you gain a broader understanding of verbs.
Speak the participles from each of these verbs, learn, walk, shun, smile, sail, conquer, manage, reduce, relate, discover, overrate, disengage. Thus, Pres. learning, Perf. learned, Comp. having learned. Pres. walking, Perf. walked, Compound, having walked, and so on.
Speak the participles from each of these verbs: learn, walk, shun, smile, sail, conquer, manage, reduce, relate, discover, overrate, disengage. So, Present learning, Perfect learned, Compound having learned. Present walking, Perfect walked, Compound having walked, and so on.
You may now commit the order of parsing a participle, and then proceed with me.
You can now go ahead and parse a participle, and then continue with me.
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing a PARTICIPLE, is—a participle, and why?—from what verb is it derived?—speak the three—present, perfect, or compound, and why?—to what does it refer or belong?—RULE.
The order of parsing a participle is—a participle, and why?—from what verb is it derived?—speak the three—present, perfect, or compound, and why?—to what does it refer or belong?—RULE.
"I saw a vessel sailing"
"I saw a ship sailing."
Sailing is a participle, a word derived from a verb, and partakes of the nature of a verb, and also of an adjective—it comes from the verb to sail—pres. sailing, perf. sailed, comp. having sailed—it is a present or imperfect participle, because it denotes the continuance of an unfinished action—and refers to the noun "vessel" for its subject, according to
Sailing is a participle, a word derived from a verb, and has qualities of both a verb and an adjective—it comes from the verb to sail—present sailing, perfect sailed, and having sailed—it is a present or imperfect participle because it indicates the ongoing nature of an unfinished action—and refers to the noun "vessel" for its subject, according to
RULE 27. The present participle refers to some noun or pronoun denoting the subject or actor.
RULE 27. The present participle refers to a noun or pronoun that indicates the subject or performer.
"Not a breath disturbs the sleeping billow."
"Not a breath disturbs the sleeping wave."
Sleeping is a participial adjective, a word added to a noun to express its quality—it cannot, with propriety, be compared—- it belongs to the noun "billow," agreeably to
Sleeping is a participial adjective, a word added to a noun to express its quality—it cannot, with propriety, be compared—it belongs to the noun "billow," agreeably to
RULE 18. Adjectives belong to, and qualify, nouns expressed or understood.
RULE 18. Adjectives are linked to and describe nouns that are stated or implied.
You will please to parse these two words several times over, and, by a little reflection, you will perfectly understand the 27th RULE. Recollect, the participle never varies its termination to agree with a noun or pronoun, for, as it has no nominative, it has no agreement; but it simply refers to an actor. Examples: I see a vessel sailing; or, I see three vessels sailing. You perceive that the participle sailing refers to a singular noun in the first example, and to a plural noun in the second; and yet the participle is in the same form in both examples. The noun vessel is in the objective case, and governed by the transitive verb see. But when a verb follows a noun, the ending of the verb generally varies in order to agree with the noun which is its nominative; as, the vessel sails; the vessels sail.
Please consider these two words multiple times, and with a bit of thought, you'll fully understand the 27th RULE. Remember, the participle never changes its ending to agree with a noun or pronoun because it has no nominative, and therefore no agreement; it simply refers to an actor. Examples: I see a vessel sailing; or, I see three vessels sailing. You can see that the participle sailing refers to a singular noun in the first example and to a plural noun in the second; yet the participle remains the same in both. The noun vessel is in the objective case and is governed by the transitive verb see. However, when a verb follows a noun, the ending of the verb usually changes to match the noun that is its nominative; as in: the vessel sails; the vessels sail.
In this place it may not be improper to notice another Rule that relates to the participle. In the sentence, "The man is beating his horse," the noun horse is in the objective case, because it is the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive participle "beating," and it is governed by the participle beating, according to
In this context, it’s worth mentioning another rule regarding the participle. In the sentence, "The man is beating his horse," the noun horse is in the objective case because it is the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive participle "beating," and it is influenced by the participle beating, according to
RULE 26. Participles have the same government as the verbs have from which they are derived.
RULE 26. Participles follow the same rules as the verbs they come from.
The principle upon which this rule is founded, is quite apparent. As a participle derived from a transitive verb, expresses the same kind of action as its verb, it necessarily follows, that the participle must govern the same case as the verb from which it is derived.
The principle behind this rule is pretty clear. Since a participle derived from a transitive verb expresses the same kind of action as its verb, it naturally follows that the participle must govern the same case as the verb it comes from.
When you shall have studied this lecture attentively, you may proceed and parse the following exercises, containing five parts of speech. If, in analyzing these examples, you find any words which you cannot parse correctly and systematically by referring to your Compend for definitions and rules, you will please to turn back and read over again the whole five lectures. You must exercise a little patience; and, for your encouragement, permit me to remind you, that when you shall have acquired a thorough knowledge of these five parts of speech, only five more will remain for you to learn. Be ambitious to excel. Be thorough in your investigations. Give your reasoning powers free scope. By studying these lectures with attention, you will acquire more grammatical knowledge in three months, than is commonly obtained in two years.
Once you've carefully studied this lecture, you can go ahead and analyze the following exercises that cover five parts of speech. If, while going through these examples, you come across any words that you can't parse accurately and systematically by checking your Compend for definitions and rules, please go back and re-read all five lectures. You need to be a bit patient; and to encourage you, let me remind you that once you've mastered these five parts of speech, only five more will be left for you to learn. Aim high. Be thorough in your research. Let your reasoning abilities flow freely. By studying these lectures attentively, you'll gain more grammatical knowledge in three months than most people do in two years.
In the following examples, the words purling, crusted, slumbering, and twinkling, are participial adjectives. There and its you may omit.
In the following examples, the words purling, crusted, slumbering, and twinkling are participial adjectives. You can skip there and its.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Orlando left the herd grazing. The hunters heard the young dog barking. The old fox heard the sportsman's horn sounding. Deep rivers float long rafts. Purling streams moisten the earth's surface. The sun approaching, melts the crusted snow. The slumbering seas calmed the grave old hermit's mind. Pale Cynthia declining, clips the horizon. Man beholds the twinkling stars adorning night's blue arch. The stranger saw the desert thistle bending there its lowly head.
Orlando left the herd to graze. The hunters heard the young dog barking. The old fox heard the sound of the sportsman's horn. Deep rivers carry long rafts. Bubbling streams wet the earth’s surface. The sun is coming up, melting the hardened snow. The calm seas soothed the troubled old hermit’s mind. Pale Cynthia is setting, touching the horizon. Man looks at the twinkling stars decorating the blue night sky. The stranger saw the desert thistle bowing its humble head.
REMARKS ON PARTICIPLES.
Participles frequently become nouns; as, "A good understanding; Excellent writing; He made a good beginning, but a bad ending."
Participles often turn into nouns, like "A good understanding; Excellent writing; He made a good beginning, but a bad ending."
Constructions like the following, have long been sanctioned by the best authorities: "The goods are selling;" "The house is building;" "The work is now publishing." A modern innovation, however, is likely to supersede this mode of expression: thus, "The goods are being sold;" "The house is being built;" "The work is now being published."
Constructions like the following have long been accepted by top authorities: "The goods are selling;" "The house is building;" "The work is now publishing." However, a modern change is likely to replace this way of speaking: "The goods are being sold;" "The house is being built;" "The work is now being published."
You may now answer these
Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
How many kinds of participles are there?—What is the ending of a present participle?—What does a perfect participle denote?—With what does the perfect participle of a regular verb correspond?—What is a compound participle?—From what word is the term participle derived?—Why is this part of speech thus named?—Wherein does this part of speech partake of the nature of a verb?—Do all participles participate the properties of adjectives?—In what respect?—When are participles called participial adjectives?—Give examples.—How may a present participle be known?—Repeat the order of parsing a participle.—What rule applies in parsing a present participle?—What Rule in parsing a participial adjective?—Do participles vary in their terminations in order to agree with their subject or actor?—What Rule applies in parsing a noun in the objective case, governed by a participle?—Do participles ever become nouns?—Give examples.
How many kinds of participles are there?—What is the ending of a present participle?—What does a perfect participle signify?—What does the perfect participle of a regular verb correspond to?—What is a compound participle?—From what word is the term participle derived?—Why is this part of speech named this way?—In what way does this part of speech share characteristics with a verb?—Do all participles have the properties of adjectives?—In what way?—When are participles called participial adjectives?—Give examples.—How can you recognize a present participle?—Repeat the order for parsing a participle.—What rule applies when parsing a present participle?—What rule applies when parsing a participial adjective?—Do participles change their endings in order to agree with their subject or doer?—What rule applies when parsing a noun in the objective case, governed by a participle?—Can participles ever function as nouns?—Give examples.
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
Participles are formed by adding to the verb the termination ing, ed, or en. Ing signifies the same as the noun being. When postfixed to the noun-state of the verb, the compound word thus formed, expresses a continued state of the verbal denotement. It implies that what is meant by the verb, is being continued. En is an alteration of an, the Saxon verbalizing adjunct; ed is a contraction of dede; and the terminations d and t, are a contraction of ed. Participles ending in ed or en, usually denote the dodo, dede, doed, did, done, or finished state of what is meant by the verb. The book is printed. It is a print-ed or print-done book, or such a one as the done act of printing has made it. The book is written; i.e. it has received the done or finish-ed act of writ-ing it.
Participles are formed by adding the endings ing, ed, or en to the verb. Ing means the same as the noun being. When added to the noun form of the verb, the resulting compound word expresses a continuous state related to the verb's meaning. It suggests that the action denoted by the verb is still happening. En is a variation of an, the Saxon verbal suffix; ed comes from dede; and the endings d and t are shortened forms of ed. Participles that end in ed or en usually indicate the dodo, dede, doed, did, done, or finished state of the verb's meaning. The book is printed. It is a print-ed or print-done book, which means it has been made by the done act of printing. The book is written; that is, it has undergone the done or finish-ed act of writ-ing it.
Participles bear the same relation to verbs, that adnouns do to nouns. They might, therefore, be styled verbal adjectives. But that theory which ranks them with adnouns, appears to rest on a sandy foundation. In classifying words, we ought to be guided more by their manner of meaning, and their inferential meaning, than by their primitive, essential signification. "I have a broken plate;" i.e. I have a plate—broken; "I have broken a plate." If there is no difference in the essential meaning of the word broken, in these two constructions, it cannot be denied, that there is a wide difference in the meaning—inferred by custom; which difference depends on the manner in which the term is applied. The former construction denotes, that I possess a plate which was broken, (whether with or without my agency, is not intimated,) perhaps, one hundred or one thousand years ago; whereas, the meaning of the latter is, that I performed the act of reducing the plate from a whole to a broken state; and it is not intimated whether I possess it, or some one else. It appears reasonable, that, in a practical grammar, at least, any word which occurs in constructions differing so widely, may properly be classed with different parts of speech. This illustration likewise establishes the propriety of retaining what we call the perfect tense of the verb.
Participles have a similar relationship to verbs as adjectives do to nouns. They could, therefore, be called verbal adjectives. However, the theory that places them alongside adjectives seems to be built on a shaky foundation. When classifying words, we should be guided more by their usage and their implied meaning, rather than by their original, specific definition. "I have a broken plate;" meaning I have a plate that is broken; "I have broken a plate." Even if there is no difference in the basic meaning of the word broken in these two sentences, it’s clear that there is a significant difference in the meaning—implied by context; this difference relies on the way in which the term is used. The first sentence indicates that I own a plate that was broken (whether I was involved or not isn’t specified), possibly a hundred or a thousand years ago; while the second suggests that I did the action of breaking the plate, and it is not specified whether I own it or if someone else does. It seems reasonable that, in a practical grammar, at least, any word that appears in sentences with such different meanings can be correctly classified with different parts of speech. This example also supports the importance of keeping what we refer to as the perfect tense of the verb.
QUESTIONS ON THE PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
How are participles formed?—What does the imperfect part express?— What do perfect participles denote?
How are participles created?—What does the imperfect aspect convey?—What do perfect participles indicate?
LECTURE VI.
OF ADVERBS.
An ADVERB is a word used to modify the sense of a verb, aparticiple, an adjective, or another adverb.
An ADVERB is a word used to change the meaning of a verb, a participle, an adjective, or another adverb.
Recollect, an adverb never qualifies a noun. It qualifies any of the four parts of speech abovenamed, and none others.
Recollect, an adverb never modifies a noun. It modifies any of the four parts of speech mentioned above, and none others.
To modify or qualify, you know, means to produce some change. The adverb modifies. If I say, Wirt's style excels Irving's, the proposition is affirmative, and the verb excels expresses the affirmation. But when I say, Wirt's style excels not Irving's, the assertion is changed to a negative. What is it that thus modifies or changes the meaning of the verb excels? You perceive that it is the little word not. This word has power to reverse the meaning of the sentence. Not, then, is a modifier, qualifier, or negative adverb.
To modify or qualify means to create some change. The adverb modifies. If I say, Wirt's style excels Irving's, the statement is positive, and the verb excels shows that positivity. But when I say, Wirt's style excels not Irving's, the claim shifts to a negative. What is it that changes or alters the meaning of the verb excels? You see that it's the small word not. This word can turn the meaning of the sentence around. Not, then, is a modifier, qualifier, or negative adverb.
When an adverb is used to modify the sense of a verb or participle, it generally expresses the manner, time, or place, in which the action is performed, or some accidental circumstance respecting it. In the phrases, The man rides gracefully, awkwardly, badly, swiftly, slowly, &c.; or, I saw the man riding swiftly, slowly, leisurely, very fast, &c., you perceive that the words gracefully, awkwardly, very fast, &c., are adverbs, qualifying the verb rides, or the participle riding, because they express the manner in which the action denoted by the verb and participle, is done.
When an adverb modifies a verb or participle, it usually describes how, when, or where the action takes place, or some additional circumstance related to it. In the phrases "The man rides gracefully, awkwardly, badly, swiftly, slowly, etc.," or "I saw the man riding swiftly, slowly, leisurely, very fast, etc.," you can see that the words gracefully, awkwardly, very fast, etc., are adverbs that modify the verb rides or the participle riding, because they indicate the manner in which the action described by the verb and participle is performed.
In the phrases, The man rides daily, weekly, seldom, frequently, often, sometimes, never; or, The man rode yesterday, heretofore, long since, long ago, recently, lately, just now or, The man will ride soon, presently, directly, immediately, by and by, to-day, hereafter, you perceive that all these words in italics, are adverbs, qualifying the meaning of the verb, rides, because they express the time of the action denoted by the verb.
In the phrases, The man rides daily, weekly, seldom, frequently, often, sometimes, never; or, The man rode yesterday, before, a long time ago, recently, lately, just now or, The man will ride soon, shortly, right away, immediately, eventually, today, in the future, you can see that all these words in italics are adverbs that modify the verb, rides, by indicating the time of the action represented by the verb.
Again, if I say, The man lives here, near by, yonder, remote, far off, somewhere, nowhere, everywhere, &c., the words in italics are adverbs of place, because they tell where he lives.
Again, if I say, The man lives here, nearby, over there, far away, somewhere, nowhere, everywhere, &c., the words in italics are adverbs of place, because they indicate where he lives.
Adverbs likewise qualify adjectives, and sometimes other adverbs; as, more wise, most wise; or more wisely, most wisely. When an adverb is joined to an adjective or adverb, it generally expresses the degree of comparison; for adverbs, like adjectives, have degrees of comparison. Thus, in the phrase, A skilful artist, you know the adjective skilful is in the positive degree; but, by placing the adverb more before the adjective, we increase the degree of quality denoted by the adjective to the comparative; as, A more skilful artist: and most renders it superlative; as, A most skilful artist. And if we place more and most before other adverbs, the effect is the same; as, skilfully, more skilfully, most skilfully.
Adverbs also modify adjectives and sometimes other adverbs; for example, more wise, most wise; or more wisely, most wisely. When an adverb is added to an adjective or another adverb, it usually indicates the degree of comparison; because adverbs, like adjectives, have degrees of comparison. So, in the phrase, A skilled artist, the adjective skilled is in the positive degree; but by placing the adverb more before the adjective, we increase the degree of quality represented by the adjective to the comparative; for example, A more skilled artist: and most makes it superlative; as in, A most skilled artist. Similarly, if we place more and most before other adverbs, the effect is the same; for instance, skillfully, more skillfully, most skillfully.
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
Positive. | Comparative. | Superlative. |
soon, | sooner, | soonest. |
often, | oftener, | oftenest. |
much, | more, | most. |
well, | better, | best. |
far, | farther, | farthest. |
wisely, | more wisely, | most wisely. |
justly, | more justly, | most justly. |
justly, | less justly, | least justly. |
You will generally know an adverb at sight; but sometimes you will find it more difficult to be distinguished, than any other part of speech in the English language. I will, therefore, give you some signs which will assist you a little.
You can usually recognize an adverb at a glance; however, sometimes it can be harder to distinguish than any other part of speech in the English language. So, I will provide you with some signs that will help you a bit.
Most words ending in ly are adverbs; such as, politely, gracefully, judiciously. Any word or short phrase that will answer to any one of the questions, how? how much? when? or where? is an adverb; as, The river flows rapidly; He walks very fast; He has gone far away; but he will soon return; She sings sweetly; They learn none at all. How, or in what manner does the river flow? Rapidly. How does he walk? Very fast. Where has he gone? Far away. When will he return? Soon. How does she sing? Sweetly. How much do they learn? None at all. From this illustration, you perceive, that, if you could not tell these adverbs by the sense, you would know them by their answering to the questions. However, your better way will be to distinguish adverbs by considering the office they perform in the sentence; or by noticing their grammatical relation, or their situation, with respect to other words. To gain a thorough knowledge of their real character, is highly important. Rapidly, fast, far away, soon, sweetly, &c. are known to be adverbs by their qualifying the sense of verbs. "A very good pen writes extremely well." Well, in this sentence, is known to be an adverb by its qualifying the sense of the verb writes; extremely, by its ending in ly, or by its being joined to the adverb well to qualify it; and very is known as an adverb by its joining the adjective good.
Most words that end in ly are adverbs, like politely, gracefully, judiciously. Any word or short phrase that answers the questions how? how much? when? or where? is an adverb. For example, the river flows rapidly; he walks very fast; he has gone far away, but he will soon return; she sings sweetly; they learn none at all. How does the river flow? Rapidly. How does he walk? Very fast. Where has he gone? Far away. When will he return? Soon. How does she sing? Sweetly. How much do they learn? None at all. From this example, you can see that if you can't identify the adverbs by their meaning, you can recognize them by the questions they answer. However, a better approach is to distinguish adverbs by looking at their role in the sentence or their grammatical relationship with other words. Understanding their real character is very important. Rapidly, fast, far away, soon, sweetly, etc. are recognized as adverbs because they modify the meaning of verbs. In the sentence, "A very good pen writes extremely well," well is identified as an adverb because it modifies the verb writes; extremely is recognized by its ly ending or by its function to modify the adverb well, and very is identified as an adverb because it modifies the adjective good.
Expressions like these, none at all, a great deal, a few days ago, long since, at length, in vain, when they are used to denote the manner or time of the action of verbs or participles, are generally termed adverbial phrases.
Expressions like these, none at all, a great deal, a few days ago, long since, at length, in vain, when used to indicate the manner or time of the action of verbs or participles, are usually called adverbial phrases.
Adverbs, though very numerous, may, for the sake of practical convenience, be reduced to particular classes.
Adverbs, although quite numerous, can be grouped into specific categories for practical ease.
1. Of Number; as, Once, twice, thrice, &c.
1. Of Number; for example, once, twice, three times, etc.
2. Of Order; as, First, secondly, lastly, finally, &c.
2. Of Order; such as first, second, last, finally, etc.
3. Of Place; as, Here, there, where, elsewhere, anywhere, somewhere, nowhere, herein, whither, hither, thither, upward, downward, forward, backward, whence, thence, whithersoever, &c.
3. Of Place; as in here, there, where, elsewhere, anywhere, somewhere, nowhere, in here, to where, to here, to there, up, down, forward, backward, from where, from there, to wherever, &c.
4. Of Time. Present; as, Now, to-day, &c. Past; as, Already, before, lately, yesterday, heretofore, hitherto, long since, long ago, &c. Future; as, To-morrow, not yet, hereafter, henceforth, henceforward, by and by, instantly, presently, immediately, ere long, straightways, &c. Time indefinite; as, Oft, often, oft-times, often-times, sometimes, soon, seldom, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, always, when, then, ever, never, again, &c.
4. Of Time. Present; as, Now, today, etc. Past; as, Already, before, recently, yesterday, in the past, up to now, a long time ago, etc. Future; as, Tomorrow, not yet, in the future, from now on, going forward, shortly, right away, right now, soon, directly, etc. Indefinite Time; as, Often, frequently, sometimes, soon, rarely, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, always, when, then, ever, never, again, etc.
5. Of Quantity; as, Much, little, sufficiently, how much, how great, enough, abundantly, &c.
5. Of Quantity; such as, a lot, a little, enough, how much, how great, plenty, abundantly, & etc.
6. Of Manner or quality; as, Wisely, foolishly, justly, unjustly, quickly, slowly, &c. Adverbs of quality are the most numerous kind; and they are generally formed by adding the termination ly to an adjective or a participle, or by changing le into ly; as, Bad, badly; cheerful, cheerfully; able, ably; admirable, admirably.
6. Manner or quality; for example, wisely, foolishly, justly, unjustly, quickly, slowly, etc. Adverbs of quality are the largest group of adverbs; they are usually created by adding the suffix ly to an adjective or a participle, or by changing le into ly; for instance, bad, badly; cheerful, cheerfully; able, ably; admirable, admirably.
7. Of Doubt; as, Haply, perhaps, peradventure, possibly, perchance.
7. Of Doubt; as, maybe, perhaps, possibly.
8. Of Affirmation; as, Verily, truly, undoubtedly, doubtless, certainly, yea, yes, surely, indeed, really, &c.
8. Of Affirmation; as in, Truly, definitely, undoubtedly, for sure, absolutely, yes, certainly, indeed, really, &c.
9. Of Negation; as, Nay, no, not, by no means, not at all, in no wise, &c.
9. Of Negation; like, No, nope, not, definitely not, not at all, in any way, &c.
10. Of Interrogation; as, How, why, wherefore, whither, &c., and sometimes when, whence, where.
10. Of Interrogation; like, how, why, for what reason, where, &c., and sometimes when, from where, where.
11. Of Comparison; as, More, most, better, best, worse, worst, less, least, very, almost, little, alike, &c.
11. Of Comparison; such as more, most, better, best, worse, worst, less, least, very, almost, little, alike, etc.
NOTES.
1. This catalogue contains but a small portion of the adverbs in our language. Many adverbs are formed by a combination of prepositions with the adverbs of place, here, there, where; as, Hereof, thereof, whereof; hereto, thereto, whereto; hereby, thereby, whereby; herewith, therewith, wherewith; herein, therein, wherein; therefore, (i.e. there-for,) wherefore, (i.e. where-for,) hereupon, hereon, thereupon, thereon, whereupon, whereon, &c.
1. This catalog includes only a small fraction of the adverbs in our language. Many adverbs are created by combining prepositions with the adverbs of place, here, there, where; for example, Hereof, thereof, whereof; hereto, thereto, whereto; hereby, thereby, whereby; herewith, therewith, wherewith; herein, therein, wherein; therefore, (i.e. there-for,) wherefore, (i.e. where-for,) hereupon, hereon, thereupon, thereon, whereupon, whereon, etc.
2. Some adverbs are composed of nouns or verbs and the letter a, used instead of at, an, &c.; as, Aside, athirst, afoot, asleep, aboard, ashore, abed, aground, afloat, adrift, aghast, ago, askance, away, asunder, astray, &c.
2. Some adverbs are made up of nouns or verbs with the letter a, used instead of at, an, etc.; for example, Aside, athirst, afoot, asleep, aboard, ashore, abed, aground, afloat, adrift, aghast, ago, askance, away, asunder, astray, etc.
You will now please to read this lecture four times over, and read slowly and carefully, for unless you understand well the nature and character of this part of speech, you will be frequently at a loss to distinguish it from others in composition. Now do you notice, that, in this sentence which you have just read, the words slowly, carefully, well, and frequently, are adverbs? And do you again observe, that, in the question I have just put to you, the words now and just are adverbs? Exercise a little sober thought. Fifteen minutes spent in reflection, are worth whole days occupied in careless reading.
You are now asked to read this lecture four times, and do so slowly and carefully. Unless you fully understand the nature and characteristics of this part of speech, you'll often struggle to differentiate it from others in writing. Now, do you notice that in this sentence you just read, the words slowly, carefully, well, and frequently are adverbs? And do you also see that in the question I just asked you, the words now and just are adverbs? Take a moment to think deeply. Fifteen minutes of thoughtful reflection are worth entire days spent in careless reading.
In the following exercises six parts of speech are presented, namely, Nouns, Verbs, Articles, Adjectives, Participles, and Adverbs; and I believe you are now prepared to parse them all agreeably to the systematic order, four times over. Those words in italics are adverbs.
In the following exercises, six parts of speech are presented: Nouns, Verbs, Articles, Adjectives, Participles, and Adverbs. I believe you are now ready to analyze them all in the correct order, four times over. The words in italics are adverbs.
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing an ADVERB, is—an adverb, and why?—what sort?—what does it qualify?—RULE.
The way to analyze an ADVERB is—what type of adverb is it, and why?—what does it modify?—RULE.
"My friend has returned again; but his health is not very good."
"My friend is back again; but his health isn't very good."
Again, is an adverb, a word used to modify the sense of a verb—of time indefinite, it expresses a period of time not precisely defined—it qualifies the verb "has returned," according to
Again is an adverb, a word used to modify the meaning of a verb—of indefinite time, it indicates a time period that's not precisely defined—it qualifies the verb "has returned," according to
Rule 29. Adverbs qualify verbs, participles, adjectives, and other adverbs.
Rule 29. Adverbs modify verbs, participles, adjectives, and other adverbs.
Not is an adverb, a word used to modify the sense of an adverb—of negation, it makes the assertion negative; that is, it changes the proposition from an affirmative to a negative—and it qualifies the adverb "very," agreeably to Rule 29. Adverbs qualify verbs, &c.
Not is an adverb, a word used to change the meaning of another adverb—it's a word of negation that makes the statement negative; in other words, it shifts the proposition from positive to negative—and it modifies the adverb "very," in accordance with Rule 29. Adverbs modify verbs, etc.
Very is an adverb, a word used to qualify the sense of an adjective—of comparison, it compares the adjective "good," and qualifies it according to Rule 29. Adverbs qualify adjectives, &c.
Very is an adverb, which is a word used to modify the meaning of an adjective—when comparing, it enhances the adjective "good" and refines it according to Rule 29. Adverbs modify adjectives, etc.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
The traveller described a lofty castle decaying gradually. Very few literary men ever became distinguished poets. The great Milton excels not Homer. The Roman women, once voluntarily contributed their most precious jewels to save the city.
The traveler described a tall castle that was gradually falling apart. Very few writers ever became famous poets. The great Milton does not surpass Homer. The Roman women once willingly contributed their most precious jewels to save the city.
Many small streams uniting, form very large rivers. The river Funza falling perpendicularly forms a vast cataract. Attentive servants always drive horses very carefully; negligent servants often drive horses very carelessly. Assiduous scholars improve very fast; idle scholars learn none at all. Friendship often ends in love; but love in friendship, never.
Many small streams come together to form very large rivers. The Funza River, dropping perpendicularly, creates a huge waterfall. Attentive servants always drive horses very carefully; negligent servants often drive horses very carelessly. Dedicated students improve very quickly; lazy students learn none at all. Friendship often leads to love, but love never leads to friendship.
NOTE. Several adverbs frequently qualify one verb. Have you walked? Not yet quite far enough, perhaps. Not, yet, far, and enough, qualify "have walked" understood; perhaps qualifies not; and quite qualifies far. The adverbs always and carefully both qualify the verb "drive:" the former expresses time, and the latter, manner. Once and voluntarily qualify the verb "contributed;" the former expresses number, and the latter, manner. The word their you need not parse. The active verb to save has no nominative. The nouns love and friendship, following in, are in the objective case, and governed by that preposition.
NOTE. Several adverbs often modify one verb. Have you walked? Not yet quite far enough, perhaps. Here, not, yet, far, and enough all modify "have walked" as understood; perhaps modifies not; and quite modifies far. The adverbs always and carefully both modify the verb "drive": the first indicates time, and the second indicates manner. Once and voluntarily modify the verb "contributed"; the first indicates number, and the second indicates manner. You don't need to analyze the word their. The active verb to save has no subject. The nouns love and friendship, which follow in, are in the objective case and governed by that preposition.
REMARKS ON ADVERBS.
When the words therefore, consequently, accordingly, and the like, are used in connexion with other conjunctions, they are adverbs; but when they appear single, they are commonly considered conjunctions.
When the words therefore, consequently, accordingly, and similar ones are used with other conjunctions, they function as adverbs; however, when they stand alone, they're usually seen as conjunctions.
The words when and where, and all others of the same nature, such as whence, whither, whenever, wherever, till, until, before, otherwise, while, wherefore, &c. may be properly called adverbial conjunctions, because they participate the nature both of adverbs and conjunctions; of adverbs, as they denote the attributes either of time or place; of conjunctions, as they conjoin sentences.
The words when and where, along with others like whence, whither, whenever, wherever, till, until, before, otherwise, while, wherefore, etc., can be accurately called adverbial conjunctions, because they share qualities of both adverbs and conjunctions. They act as adverbs by indicating time or place, and as conjunctions because they connect sentences.
There are many words that are sometimes used as adjectives, and, sometimes as adverbs; as, "More men than women were there; I am more diligent than he." In the former sentence more is evidently an adjective, for it is joined to a noun to qualify it; in the latter it is an adverb, because it qualifies an adjective. There are others that are sometimes used as nouns, and sometimes as adverbs; as, "to-day's lesson is longer than yesterday's." In this example, to-day and yesterday are nouns in the possessive case; but in phrases like the following, they are generally considered adverbs of time; "He came [to his] home yesterday, and will set out again to-day." Here they are nouns, if we supply on before them.
There are many words that can be used as adjectives sometimes and as adverbs at other times; for example, "More men than women were there; I am more diligent than he." In the first sentence, more is clearly an adjective because it describes a noun; in the second, it is an adverb since it describes an adjective. There are others that can be used as nouns or as adverbs; for example, "to-day's lesson is longer than yesterday's." In this case, to-day and yesterday are nouns in the possessive form, but in phrases like "He came [to his] home yesterday, and will set out again to-day," they are generally seen as adverbs of time. Here they are nouns if we add on before them.
"Where much [wealth, talent, or something else] is given, much [increase, improvement] will be required; Much money has been expended; It is much better to write than starve." In the first two of these examples, much is an adjective, because it qualifies a noun; in the last, an adverb, because it qualifies the adjective better. In short, you must determine to what part of speech a word belongs, by its sense, or by considering the manner in which it is associated with other words.
"Where much [wealth, talent, or something else] is given, much [increase, improvement] will be needed; Much money has been spent; It is much better to write than to starve." In the first two of these examples, much is an adjective because it modifies a noun; in the last, it’s an adverb because it modifies the adjective better. In short, you need to figure out which part of speech a word belongs to by its sense, or by looking at the way it connects with other words.
An adjective may, in general, be distinguished from an adverb by this rule: when a word qualifies a noun or pronoun, it is an adjective, but when it qualifies a verb, participle, adjective, or adverb, it is an adverb.
An adjective can generally be identified from an adverb by this rule: when a word describes a noun or pronoun, it's an adjective, but when it describes a verb, participle, adjective, or adverb, it's an adverb.
Prepositions are sometimes erroneously called adverbs, when their nouns are understood. "He rides about;" that is, about the town, country, or some-thing else. "She was near [the act or misfortune of] falling;" "But do not after [that time or event] lay the blame on me." "He came down [the ascent] from the hill;" "They lifted him up [the ascent] out of the pit." "The angels above;"—above us—"Above these lower heavens, to us invisible, or dimly seen."
Prepositions are sometimes mistakenly called adverbs when their nouns are implied. "He rides about;" meaning about the town, country, or something else. "She was near [the act or misfortune of] falling;" "But don’t after [that time or event] blame me." "He came down [the ascent] from the hill;" "They lifted him up [the ascent] out of the pit." "The angels above;"—above us—"Above these lower heavens, which are invisible to us or barely seen."
Before you proceed to correct the following exercises in false Syntax, you may answer these
Before you move on to correct the following exercises in incorrect Syntax, you can answer these
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
Does an adverb ever qualify a noun?—What parts of speech does it qualify?—When an adverb qualifies a verb or participle, what does it express?—When an adverb qualifies an adjective or adverb, what does it generally express?—Compare some adverbs.—By what signs may an adverb be known?—Give examples.—Repeat some adverbial phrases.—Name the different classes of adverbs.—Repeat some of each class.—Repeat the order of parsing an adverb.—What rule do you apply in parsing an adverb?
Does an adverb ever modify a noun?—What parts of speech does it modify?—When an adverb modifies a verb or participle, what does it convey?—When an adverb modifies an adjective or another adverb, what does it usually convey?—Compare some adverbs.—What indicators can identify an adverb?—Provide examples.—Repeat some adverbial phrases.—List the different types of adverbs.—Provide examples of each type.—Restate the order of analyzing an adverb.—What rule do you follow when analyzing an adverb?
QUESTIONS ON THE NOTES.
Repeat some adverbs that are formed by combining prepositions with adverbs of place.—Repeat some that are composed of the article a and nouns.—What part of speech are the words, therefore, consequently, &c.?—What words are styled adverbial conjunctions?—Why are they so called?—Is the same word sometimes used as an adjective, and sometimes as an adverb?—Give examples.—What is said of much?—By what rule can you distinguish an adjective from an adverb?—Do prepositions ever become adverbs?
Repeat some adverbs that are formed by combining prepositions with adverbs of place. — Repeat some that are made up of the article a and nouns. — What part of speech are the words, therefore, consequently, etc.? — What words are called adverbial conjunctions? — Why are they referred to that way? — Can the same word be used as an adjective at times and as an adverb at other times? — Provide examples. — What is said about much? — What rule can you use to tell an adjective apart from an adverb? — Can prepositions ever function as adverbs?
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
As the happiness and increasing prosperity of a people essentially depend on their advancement in science and the arts, and as language, in all its sublime purposes and legitimate bearings, is strictly identified with these, it may naturally be supposed, that that nation which continues, through successive generations, steadily to progress in the former, will not be neglectful of the cultivation and refinement of the latter. The truth of this remark is illustrated by those who have, for many ages, employed the English language as their medium for the transmission of thought. Among its refinements may be ranked those procedures by which verbs and nouns have been so modified and contracted as to form what we call adverbs, distributives, conjunctions, and prepositions; for I presume it will be readily conceded, that conciseness, as well as copiousness and perspicuity in language, is the offspring of refinement. That an immense amount of time and breath is saved by the use of adverbs, the following development will clearly demonstrate. He who is successful in contracting one mode of expression that is daily used by thirty millions, doubtless does much for their benefit.
Since the happiness and growing prosperity of a society largely depend on their progress in science and the arts, and since language, with all its important functions and rightful connections, is closely tied to these, it’s reasonable to assume that a nation that continually advances in these areas through generations will also prioritize the cultivation and refinement of language. This observation is evident among those who have used the English language for many ages to express their thoughts. Among its improvements are the modifications and contractions of verbs and nouns that create what we now call adverbs, distributives, conjunctions, and prepositions; I believe it’s clear that both conciseness and richness in language are products of refinement. The significant amount of time and effort saved by using adverbs will be clearly shown. Someone who successfully streamlines a commonly used expression for thirty million people surely contributes greatly to their advantage.
Most adverbs express in one word what would otherwise require two or more words; as, "He did it here," for, He did it in this place; there, for, in that place; where, for, in what place; now, for, at this time. Why means for what reason; how—in what mind, mood, mode, or manner; exceedingly—to a great degree; very—in an eminent degree; often and seldom signify many times, few times.
Most adverbs express in one word what would otherwise need two or more words; for example, "He did it here" means, "He did it in this place"; "there" means "in that place"; "where" means "in what place"; "now" means "at this time". "Why" means "for what reason"; "how" means "in what mind, mood, mode, or manner"; "exceedingly" means "to a great degree"; "very" means "in an eminent degree"; and "often" and "seldom" mean "many times" and "few times", respectively.
The procedures by which words have been contracted, modified and combined, to form this class of words, have been various. The most prolific family of this illegitimate race, are those in ly, a contraction of like. Gentleman-ly, means gentleman-like, like a gentleman. We do not yet say, ladily, but lady-like. The north Britons still say, wiselike, manlike, instead of, wisely, manly.
The ways in which words have been shortened, changed, and combined to create this group of words have been diverse. The largest group of this unofficial category are those ending in ly, which is a contraction of like. For example, gentleman-ly means gentleman-like, like a gentleman. We don’t use ladily yet, but we do say lady-like. People in the north of Britain still say wiselike, manlike instead of wisely, manly.
Quick comes from gwick, the past part. of the Anglo-Saxon verb gwiccian, to vivify, give life. Quick-ly or live-ly, means, in a quick-like or life-like manner; in the manner of a creature that has life. Rapid-ly—rapid-like, like a rapid; a quick-ly or swift-ly running place in a stream.
Quick comes from gwick, the past participle of the Anglo-Saxon verb gwiccian, which means to bring to life or vivify. Quick-ly or live-ly means in a quick-like or life-like manner; similar to a creature that has life. Rapid-ly—rapid-like, like something quick; a quick-ly or swift-ly running spot in a stream.
Al-ways, contraction of in all ways. By a slight transition, it means in or at all times. Al-one, contraction of all-one. On-ly—one-like. Al-so—all the same (thing.) Ever—an age. For ever and ever—for ages and ages. Ever is not synonymous with always. Never—ne ever. It signifies no age, no period of time. No, contraction of not. Not, a modification of no-thing, noth-ing, naught. "He is not greater"—is greater in naught—in no thing.
Always, short for in all ways. It also means in or at all times. Alone, short for all one. Only—like one. Also—the same (thing). Ever—a long time. Forever and ever—for a very long time and a very long time. Ever is not the same as always. Never—not ever. It means no time, no period. No, short for not. Not is a variation of nothing, naught. "He is not greater"—is greater in nothing—in no thing.
Adrift is the past part. adrifed, adrif'd, adrift; from the Saxon drifan, or adrifan, to drive. Ago, formerly written ygo, gon, agon, gone, agone, is the past part. of the verb to go. It refers to time gone by. Asunder, the Saxon past part. asundren, from the verb sondrian or asondrian, to separate. Aloft—on the loft, on luft, on lyft; lyft being the Anglo-Saxon word for air or clouds. Astray, the part. of straegan, to stray. Awry, part. of wry than, to writhe.
Adrift is the past participle. adrifed, adrif'd, adrift; from the Saxon drifan, or adrifan, meaning to drive. Ago, previously written as ygo, gon, agon, gone, agone, is the past participle of the verb to go. It refers to time that has gone by. Asunder, the Saxon past participle asundren, comes from the verb sondrian or asondrian, meaning to separate. Aloft—in the loft, on luft, on lyft; with lyft being the Anglo-Saxon word for air or clouds. Astray, the participle of straegan, means to stray. Awry, the participle of wry than, means to writhe.
Needs—need-is; anciently, nedes, nede is. To-wit, the infinitive of witan, to know. It means, to be known. Ay or yea signifies have it, enjoy it. Yes is ay-es, have, possess, enjoy that. Our corrupt o-yes of the crier, is the French imperative, oyez, hear, listen. Straight way—by a straight way. While—wheel; period in which some thing whiles or wheels itself round. Till—to while. Per, Latin,—the English by. Perhaps—per haps, per chance.
Needs—need-is; long ago, nedes, need is. To-wit, the infinitive of witan, to know. It means, to be known. Aye or yeah means have it, enjoy it. Yes is ay-es, have, possess, enjoy that. Our corrupted o-yes from the crier is the French imperative, oyez, hear, listen. Straight way—by a straight path. While—wheel; a period in which something whiles or wheels itself around. Till—to while. Per, Latin,—the English by. Perhaps—per haps, per chance.
These examples of derivation are given with the view to invite the attention of the intelligent pupil to the "Diversions of Purley, by John Horne Tooke."
These examples of derivation are provided to draw the interest of the insightful student to "Diversions of Purley" by John Horne Tooke.
QUESTIONS ON THE PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
How does the use of adverbs contribute to the conciseness of language?—Illustrate the fact.—What is said of ly, like, and quick?—How are the following words composed, always, alone, only, also?—What is the meaning of ever, never, not, adrift, ago, asunder, aloft, astray, awry?—Give the signification of needs, to-wit, ye, yes, o-yes, straightway, while, till, and per.
How do adverbs help make language more concise? — Show an example. — What can be said about ly, like, and quick? — How are the following words formed: always, alone, only, also? — What do ever, never, not, adrift, ago, asunder, aloft, astray, awry mean? — What do needs, to-wit, ye, yes, o-yes, straightway, while, till, and per signify?
NOTE. Learners need not answer the questions on the Philosophical Notes, in this or any other Lecture, unless the teacher deem it expedient.
NOTE. Students do not need to answer the questions in the Philosophical Notes, in this or any other Lecture, unless the teacher thinks it's necessary.
EXERCISES IN FALSE SYNTAX.
NOTE 3, TO RULE 29, Adjectives are sometimes improperly applied as adverbs; as, indifferent honest; excellent well; miserable poor:—She writes elegant; He is walking slow.
NOTE 3, TO RULE 29, Adjectives are sometimes incorrectly used as adverbs; for example, indifferent honest; excellent well; miserable poor:—She writes elegantly; He is walking slowly.
The adjectives indifferent, excellent, and miserable, are here improperly used, because adjectives do not express the degree of adjectives or adverbs, but such modifications are denoted by adverbs. The phrases should, therefore, be, "indifferently honest, excellently well, miserably poor." Elegant and slow are also inaccurate, for it is not the office of the adjective to express the manner, time, or place of the action of verbs and participles, but it is the office of the adverb. The constructions should be, "She writes elegantly; He is walking slowly."
The adjectives indifferent, excellent, and miserable are used incorrectly here because adjectives do not convey the degree of adjectives or adverbs; those nuances should be indicated by adverbs. The phrases should therefore be "indifferently honest, excellently well, miserably poor." Elegant and slow are also incorrect, as adjectives shouldn't express how, when, or where the actions of verbs and participles occur; that's the role of the adverb. The correct constructions should be, "She writes elegantly; He is walking slowly."
You may correct the following examples several times over, and explain the principles that are violated.
You can correct the following examples multiple times and explain the principles that were broken.
FALSE SYNTAX.
He speaks fluent, and reasons coherent.
He speaks fluently and thinks coherently.
She reads proper, and writes very neat.
She reads well and writes very neatly.
They once lived tolerable well, but now they are miserable poor.
They used to live pretty well, but now they are really miserable and poor.
The lowering clouds are moving slow.
The dark clouds are moving slowly.
He behaved himself submissive, and was exceeding careful not to give offence.
He acted submissively and was extremely careful not to offend anyone.
NOTE 4, TO RULE 29. Adverbs are sometimes improperly used instead of adjectives; as, "The tutor addressed him in terms rather warm, but suitably to his offence."
NOTE 4, TO RULE 29. Adverbs are sometimes incorrectly used instead of adjectives; for example, "The tutor addressed him in terms quite warm, but suitably to his offense."
The adverb suitably is incorrect. It does not express the manner of the action of the verb "addressed," but it denotes the quality of the noun terms understood; for which reason it should be an adjective, suitable.
The adverb suitably is incorrect. It doesn’t describe how the action of the verb "addressed" is performed, but instead indicates the quality of the noun terms understood; for this reason, it should be an adjective, suitable.
FALSE SYNTAX.
The man was slowly wandering about, solitarily and distressed.
The man was slowly wandering around, alone and upset.
He lived in a manner agreeably to his condition.
He lived in a way that suited his situation.
The study of Syntax should be previously to that of Punctuation.
The study of Syntax should come before that of Punctuation.
He introduced himself in a manner very abruptly.
He introduced himself in a very blunt manner.
Conformably to their vehemence of thought, was their vehemence of gesture.
Consistent with their intensity of thought, was their intensity of gesture.
I saw him previously to his arrival.
I saw him before his arrival.
LECTURE VII
OF PREPOSITIONS.
A PREPOSITION is a word which serves to connect words, and show the relation between them.
A PREPOSITION is a word that connects words and shows the relationship between them.
The term preposition is derived from the two Latin words, pre, which signifies before, and pono, to place. Prepositions are so called, because they are mostly placed before the nouns and pronouns which they govern in the objective case.
The term preposition comes from two Latin words, pre, meaning before, and pono, meaning to place. They're called prepositions because they are usually placed before the nouns and pronouns that they govern in the objective case.
The principal prepositions are presented in the following list, which you may now commit to memory, and thus you will be enabled to distinguish them from other parts of speech whenever you see them in composition.
The main prepositions are listed below, and you can memorize them so you'll be able to identify them from other parts of speech whenever you see them in writing.
A LIST OF THE PREPOSITIONS.
of | over | at | after | betwixt |
to | under | near | about | beside |
for | through | up | against | athwart |
by | above | down | unto | towards |
with | below | before | across | notwithstanding |
in | between | behind | around | out of |
into | beneath | off | amidst | instead of |
within | from | on upon | throughout | over against |
without | beyond | among | underneath | according to. |
This list contains many words that are sometimes used as conjunctions, and sometimes as adverbs; but when you shall have become acquainted with the nature of the preposition, and of the conjunction and adverb too, you will find no difficulty in ascertaining to which of these classes any word belongs.
This list includes many words that can be used as conjunctions or as adverbs. However, once you get to know the nature of prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs, you won’t have any trouble figuring out which category each word belongs to.
By looking at the definition of a preposition, you will notice, that it performs a double office in a sentence, namely, it connects words, and also shows a relation between them. I will first show you the use and importance of this part of speech as a connective. When corn is ripe—October, it is gathered—the field—men—who go—hill—hill—baskets,—which they put the ears. You perceive, that in this sentence there is a total want of connexion and meaning; but let us fill up each vacancy with a preposition, and the sense will be clear. "When corn is ripe, in October, it is gathered in the field by men, who go from hill to hill with baskets, into which they put the ears."
By looking at the definition of a preposition, you'll see that it serves a dual purpose in a sentence: it connects words and also indicates a relationship between them. I’ll first explain the function and significance of this part of speech as a connector. When corn is ripe—October, it is gathered—the field—men—who go—hill—hill—baskets,—which they put the ears. You can see that in this sentence there is a complete lack of connection and meaning; but let’s fill in each gap with a preposition, and the meaning will be clear. "When corn is ripe, in October, it is gathered in the field by men, who go from hill to hill with baskets, into which they put the ears."
From this illustration you are convinced, no doubt, that our language would be very deficient without prepositions to connect the various words of which it is composed. It would, in fact, amount to nothing but nonsense. There is, however, another part of speech that performs this office, namely, the conjunction. This will be explained in Lecture IX.; in which lecture you will learn, that the nature of a preposition, as a connective particle, is nearly allied to that of a conjunction. In the next place I will show you how prepositions express a relation between words.
From this illustration, you're surely convinced that our language would be very lacking without prepositions to connect the various words it's made up of. It would essentially be nothing but nonsense. However, there's another part of speech that performs this function, namely the conjunction. This will be explained in Lecture IX., where you'll learn that the role of a preposition as a connecting word is closely related to that of a conjunction. Next, I'll show you how prepositions express a relation between words.
The boy's hat is under his arm. In this expression, what relation does the preposition under show? You know that hat and arm are words used as signs of two objects, or ideas; but under is not the sign of a thing you can think of: it is merely the sign of the relation existing between the two objects. Hence you may perceive, that since the word under is the sign of the relation existing between particular ideas, it also expresses a relation existing between the words hat and arm, which words are the representatives of those ideas.
The boy's hat is under his arm. In this phrase, what relationship does the preposition under indicate? You know that hat and arm are words that refer to two objects or ideas; however, under does not represent a specific thing you can visualize: it simply signifies the relationship between the two objects. Therefore, you can see that since the word under indicates the relationship between particular ideas, it also describes a relationship between the words hat and arm, which represent those ideas.
The boy holds his hat in his hand. In this sentence the preposition in shows the relation existing between hat and hand, or the situation, or relative position, each has in regard to the other. And, if I say, The boy's hat is on his head, you perceive that on shows the relation between hat and head. Again, in the expressions, The boy threw his hat up stairs—under the bed—behind the table—through the window—over the house—across the street—into the water—and so on, you perceive that the several prepositions express the different relations existing between the hat and the other nouns, stairs, bed, table, window, house, street, and water.
The boy holds his hat in his hand. In this sentence, the preposition in shows the relationship between the hat and the hand, or their position relative to each other. And if I say, The boy's hat is on his head, you can see that on indicates the relationship between the hat and head. Similarly, in the phrases, The boy threw his hat upstairs—under the bed—behind the table—through the window—over the house—across the street—into the water—and so on, you notice that the different prepositions express the various relationships between the hat and the other nouns, stairs, bed, table, window, house, street, and water.
A preposition tells where a thing is: thus, "The pear is on the ground, under the tree."
A preposition tells where something is: for example, "The pear is on the ground, under the tree."
Prepositions govern the objective case, but they do not express an action done to some object, as an active-transitive verb or participle does. When a noun or pronoun follows a preposition, it is in the objective case, because it is the object of the relation expressed by the preposition, and not the object of an action.
Prepositions require the objective case, but they do not indicate an action performed on an object, like an active-transitive verb or participle does. When a noun or pronoun comes after a preposition, it is in the objective case because it serves as the object of the relation indicated by the preposition, and not as the object of an action.
I can now give you a more extensive explanation of the objective case, than that which was given in a former lecture. I have already informed you, that the objective case expresses the object of an action or of a relation; and, also, that there are three parts of speech which govern nouns and pronouns in the objective case, namely, active-transitive verbs, participles derived from transitive verbs, and prepositions. A noun or pronoun in the objective case, cannot be, at the same time, the object of an action and of a relation. It must be either the object of an action or of a relation. And I wish you particularly to remember, that whenever a noun or pronoun is governed by a transitive verb or participle, it is the object of an action; as, The tutor instructs his pupils; or, The tutor is instructing his pupils; but whenever a noun or pronoun is governed by a preposition, it is the object of a relation; as, The tutor gives good instruction to his pupils.
I can now give you a more detailed explanation of the objective case than what I provided in a previous lecture. I’ve already told you that the objective case shows the object of an action or a relation. Also, there are three parts of speech that govern nouns and pronouns in the objective case: active-transitive verbs, participles derived from transitive verbs, and prepositions. A noun or pronoun in the objective case cannot be both the object of an action and of a relation at the same time. It must be either the object of an action or of a relation. I want you to particularly remember that whenever a noun or pronoun is governed by a transitive verb or participle, it is the object of an action; for example, The tutor instructs his pupils; or, The tutor is instructing his pupils. But whenever a noun or pronoun is governed by a preposition, it is the object of a relation; like in, The tutor gives good instruction to his pupils.
Before you proceed to parse the following examples, please to review this lecture, and then the whole seven in the manner previously recommended, namely, read one or two sentences, and then look off your book and repeat them two or three times over in your mind. This course will enable you to retain the most important ideas advanced. If you wish to proceed with ease and advantage, you must have the subject-matter of the preceding lectures stored in your mind. Do not consider it an unpleasant task to comply with my requisitions, for when you shall have learned thus far, you will understand seven parts of speech; and only three more will remain to be learned.
Before you start going through the examples, please review this lecture and then all seven as previously suggested. Specifically, read one or two sentences, then look away from your book and repeat them in your mind two or three times. This approach will help you remember the key ideas presented. If you want to move forward smoothly and beneficially, you need to have the content from the earlier lectures in your memory. Don’t think of it as a chore to follow my instructions because once you’ve learned this much, you will understand seven parts of speech, and only three more will be left to learn.
If you have complied with the foregoing request, you may commit the following order, and then proceed in parsing.
If you have followed the previous request, you may carry out the following order, and then continue with parsing.
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing a PREPOSITION, is—a preposition, and why?—what does it connect?—what relation does it show?
The order of parsing a PREPOSITION is—a preposition, and why?—what does it connect?—what relationship does it show?
"He saw an antelope in the wilderness."
"He saw an antelope in the wild."
In is a preposition, a word which serves to connect words, and show the relation between them—it connects the words "antelope" and "wilderness"—and shows the relation between them.
In is a preposition, a word that connects words and shows the relationship between them—it links the words "antelope" and "wilderness"—and reveals how they relate to each other.
Wilderness is a noun, the name of a place—com. the name of a sort or species—neut. gend. it denotes a thing without sex—third pers. spoken of—sing. num. it implies but one—and in the objective case, it is the object of a relation expressed by the preposition "in," and governed by it, according to
Wilderness is a noun, the name of a place—common. The name of a type or category—neutral gender. It refers to something without gender—third person, spoken about—it implies only one—and in the objective case, it is the object of a relation expressed by the preposition "in," and governed by it, according to
RULE 31. Prepositions govern the objective case.
RULE 31. Prepositions take the objective case.
The genius of our language will not allow us to say, Stand before he; Hand the paper to they. Prepositions require the pronoun following them to be in the objective form, position, or case; and this requisition amounts to government. Hence we say, "Stand before him;" "Hand the paper to them." Every preposition expresses a relation, and every relation must have an object: consequently, every preposition must be followed by a noun or pronoun in the objective case.
The brilliance of our language doesn’t allow us to say, "Stand before he;" or "Hand the paper to they." Prepositions require the pronoun that follows them to be in the objective form, position, or case; and this requirement is a form of government. That’s why we say, "Stand before him;" "Hand the paper to them." Every preposition expresses a relationship, and every relationship needs an object: therefore, every preposition must be followed by a noun or pronoun in the objective case.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
The all-wise Creator bestowed the power of speech upon man, for the most excellent uses. Augustus heard the orator pleading the client's cause, in a flow of most powerful eloquence. Fair Cynthia smiles serenely over nature's soft repose. Life's varying schemes no more distract the laboring mind of man. Septimius stabbed Pompey standing on the shore of Egypt.
The all-knowing Creator gave humans the ability to speak for the best purposes. Augustus listened to the speaker passionately arguing for their client with incredible eloquence. Beautiful Cynthia smiles gently over nature's peaceful calm. The ups and downs of life no longer disturb the hard-working mind of man. Septimius stabbed Pompey while he was standing on the shore of Egypt.
A beam of tranquillity often plays round the heart of the truly pious man. The thoughts of former years glide over my soul, like swift-shooting meteors over Ardven's gloomy vales.
A sense of peace often surrounds the heart of the truly devout person. Memories of the past flow through my mind like shooting stars racing across Ardven's dark valleys.
At the approach of day, night's swift dragons cut the clouds full fast; and ghosts, wandering here and there, troop home to church-yards.
At daybreak, the night’s fast dragons raced through the clouds; and spirits, wandering around, make their way back to the graveyards.
NOTE.—The words my and and you need not parse. The noun "meteors," following the adverb "like," is in the objective case, and governed by unto understood, according to NOTE 2, under Rule 32. The noun "home" is governed by to understood, according to Rule 32.
NOTE.—You don't need to analyze the words my and and. The noun "meteors," which comes after the adverb "like," is in the objective case and is understood to be governed by unto, as explained in NOTE 2, under Rule 32. The noun "home" is understood to be governed by to, according to Rule 32.
REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS AND VERBS.
A noun or pronoun in the objective case, is often governed by a preposition understood; as, "Give him that book;" that is, "Give that book to him;" "Ortugrul was one day wandering," &c. that is, on one day. "Mercy gives affliction a grace;" that is, Mercy gives a grace to affliction. See Note 1, under Rule 32.
A noun or pronoun in the objective case is often influenced by an implied preposition; for example, "Give him that book;" meaning "Give that book to him;" "Ortugrul was one day wandering," which means on one day. "Mercy gives affliction a grace;" meaning Mercy gives a grace to affliction. See Note 1, under Rule 32.
To be able to make a proper use of prepositions, particular attention is requisite. There is a peculiar propriety to be observed in the use of by and with; as, "He walks with a staff by moonlight;" "He was taken by stratagem, and killed with a sword." Put the one preposition for the other, and say, "He walks by a staff with moonlight;" "He was taken with stratagem, and killed by a sword;" and it will appear, that the latter expressions differ from the former in signification, more than one, at first view, would be apt to imagine.
To use prepositions correctly, you need to pay close attention. There's a specific way to use by and with; for example, "He walks with a staff by moonlight;" "He was taken by stratagem and killed with a sword." If you swap the prepositions, saying, "He walks by a staff with moonlight;" "He was taken with stratagem and killed by a sword;" you'll see that these new phrases have meanings that differ from the original more than one might first realize.
Verbs are often compounded of a verb and a preposition; as, to uphold, to withstand, to overlook; and this composition gives a new meaning to the verb; as, to understand, to withdraw, to forgive. But the preposition is more frequently placed after the verb, and separately from it, like an adverb; in which situation it does not less affect the sense of the verb, and give it a new meaning; and in all instances, whether the preposition is placed either before or after the verb, if it gives a new meaning to the verb, it may be considered as a part of the verb. Thus, to cast means to throw; but to cast up an account, signifies to compute it; therefore up is a part of the verb. The phrases, to fall on, to bear out, to give over, convey very different meanings from what they would if the prepositions on, out and over, were not used. Verbs of this kind are called compound verbs.
Verbs are often made up of a verb and a preposition; for example, to uphold, to withstand, to overlook; and this combination gives a new meaning to the verb, such as in to understand, to withdraw, to forgive. However, the preposition is often placed after the verb, acting separately like an adverb; in this case, it still influences the meaning of the verb and gives it a new meaning. In all situations, whether the preposition is placed before or after the verb, if it creates a new meaning for the verb, it can be considered as a part of the verb. For instance, to cast means to throw; but to cast up an account means to calculate it; thus up is part of the verb. The phrases to fall on, to bear out, to give over have very different meanings compared to if the prepositions on, out and over were not used. Verbs of this kind are called compound verbs.
You may now answer the following
You can now respond to the following
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
From what words is the term preposition derived?—Why is it thus named?—Repeat the list of prepositions.—Name the three parts of speech that govern nouns and pronouns in the objective case.—When is a noun or pronoun in the objective case, the object of an action?—When is it the object of a relation?—Repeat the order of parsing a preposition.—What rule do you apply in parsing a noun or pronoun governed by a preposition?—Does every preposition require an objective case after it?—Is a noun or pronoun ever governed by a preposition understood?—Give examples.—What is said of verbs compounded of a verb and preposition?—Give the origin and meaning of the prepositions explained in the Philosophical Notes.
From what words does the term preposition come?—Why is it called that?—Recite the list of prepositions.—Name the three parts of speech that govern nouns and pronouns in the objective case.—When is a noun or pronoun in the objective case, the object of an action?—When is it the object of a relation?—Recap the order of parsing a preposition.—What rule do you use when parsing a noun or pronoun governed by a preposition?—Does every preposition need an objective case after it?—Can a noun or pronoun ever be governed by an understood preposition?—Give examples.—What is said about verbs made up of a verb and a preposition?—Provide the origin and meaning of the prepositions explained in the Philosophical Notes.
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
From, according to H. Tooke, is the Anglo-Saxon and Gothic noun frum, beginning, source, author. "He came from (beginning) Rochester." Of, he supposes to be a fragment of the Gothic and Saxon noun afora, consequence, offspring, follower. "Solomon, the son of (offspring) David." Of or off, in its modern acceptation, signifies disjoined, sundered: A piece of (off) the loaf, is, a piece disjoined, or separated from the loaf. The fragrance of or off the rose.
From, according to H. Tooke, is the Anglo-Saxon and Gothic noun frum, meaning beginning, source, or author. "He came from (the beginning) Rochester." Of, he believes, is a fragment of the Gothic and Saxon noun afora, meaning consequence, offspring, or follower. "Solomon, the son of (offspring) David." Of or off, in its modern usage, means disjoined, separated: A piece of (off) the loaf is a piece disjoined or separated from the loaf. The fragrance of or off the rose.
For signifies cause. "I write for your satisfaction;" i.e. your satisfaction being the cause. By or be is the imperative byth, of the Saxon beon, to be. With, the imperative of withan, to join; or, when equivalent to by, of wyr-than, to be. "I will go with him." "I, join him, will go." In comes from the Gothic noun inna, the interior of the body; a cave or cell. About, from boda, the first outward boundary. Among is the past part. of gamaengan, to mingle. Through or thorough is the Gothic substantive dauro, or the Teutonic thuruh. It means passage, gate, door.
For means cause. "I write for your satisfaction;" that is, your satisfaction is the cause. By or be is the imperative byth, from the Saxon beon, which means to be. With, the imperative of withan, means to join; or, when equivalent to by, from wyr-than, which also means to be. "I will go with him." "I, join him, will go." In comes from the Gothic noun inna, meaning the interior of the body; a cave or cell. About comes from boda, the first outward boundary. Among is the past participle of gamaengan, meaning to mingle. Through or thorough comes from the Gothic noun dauro, or the Teutonic thuruh. It means passage, gate, door.
Before—be-fore, be-hind, be-low, be-side, be-sides, be-neath are formed by combining the imperative, be, with the nouns fore, hind, low, side, neath. Neath—Saxon neothan, neothe, has the same signification as nadir. Be-tween, be-twixt—be and twain. A dual preposition. Be-yond—be-passed. Beyond a place, means, be passed that place. Notwithstanding—not-stand-ing-with, not-withstanding. "Any order to the contrary not-withstanding," (this order;) i.e. not effectually withstanding or opposing it.
Before—be-fore, be-hind, be-low, be-side, be-sides, be-neath are created by combining the imperative, be, with the nouns fore, hind, low, side, neath. Neath—Saxon neothan, neothe, has the same meaning as nadir. Be-tween, be-twixt—be and twain. A dual preposition. Be-yond—be-passed. Beyond a place means be passed that place. Notwithstanding—not-stand-ing-with, not-withstanding. "Any order to the contrary not-withstanding," (this order); meaning not effectively withstanding or opposing it.
LECTURE VIII.
OF PRONOUNS.
A PRONOUN is a word used instead of a noun, and generally to avoid the too frequent repetition of the same word. A pronoun is, likewise, sometimes a substitute for a sentence, or member of a sentence.
A PRONOUN is a word that replaces a noun, usually to prevent the overuse of the same word. A pronoun can also stand in for a sentence or part of a sentence.
The word pronoun comes from the two Latin words, pro, which means for, or instead of, and nomen, a name, or noun. Hence you perceive, that pronoun means for a noun, or instead of a noun.
The word pronoun comes from the two Latin words, pro, which means for or instead of, and nomen, which means name or noun. So, you see that pronoun means for a noun or instead of a noun.
In the sentence, "The man is happy; he is benevolent; he is useful;" you perceive, that the word he is used instead of the noun man; consequently he must be a pronoun. You observe, too, that, by making use of the pronoun he in this sentence, we avoid the repetition of the noun man, for without the pronoun, the sentence would be rendered thus, "The man is happy; the man is benevolent; the man is useful."
In the sentence, "The man is happy; he is kind; he is helpful;" you notice that the word he is used instead of the noun man; therefore, he must be a pronoun. You also see that by using the pronoun he in this sentence, we avoid the repetition of the noun man, because without the pronoun, the sentence would be "The man is happy; the man is kind; the man is helpful."
By looking again at the definition, you will notice, that pronouns always stand for nouns, but they do not always avoid the repetition of nouns. Repetition means repeating or mentioning the same thing again. In the sentence, "I come to die for my country," the pronouns, I and my, stand for the name of the person who speaks; but they do not avoid the repetition of that name, because the name or noun for which the pronouns are used, is not mentioned at all. Pronouns of the third person, generally avoid the repetition of the nouns for which they stand; but pronouns of the first and second person, sometimes avoid the repetition of nouns, and sometimes they do not.
By looking at the definition again, you’ll notice that pronouns always represent nouns, but they don't always prevent the repetition of nouns. Repetition means repeating or mentioning the same thing again. In the sentence, "I come to die for my country," the pronouns I and my represent the name of the person speaking; however, they don’t prevent the repetition of that name, because the name or noun that those pronouns refer to isn’t mentioned at all. Pronouns in the third person usually prevent the repetition of the nouns they represent, but pronouns in the first and second person sometimes prevent the repetition of nouns and sometimes they don’t.
A little farther illustration of the pronoun will show you its importance, and, also, that its nature is very easily comprehended. If we had no pronouns in our language, we should be obliged to express ourselves in this manner: "A woman went to a man, and told the man that the man was in danger of being murdered by a gang of robbers; as a gang of robbers had made preparations for attacking the man. The man thanked the woman for the woman's kindness, and, as the man was unable to defend the man's self, the man left the man's house, and went to a neighbor's."
A little further illustration of the pronoun will show you its importance and that it's very easy to understand. If we didn't have pronouns in our language, we would have to express ourselves like this: "A woman went to a man and told the man that he was in danger of being murdered by a gang of robbers, since a gang of robbers had prepared to attack him. The man thanked the woman for her kindness, and since he was unable to defend himself, he left his house and went to a neighbor's."
This would be a laborious style indeed; but, by the help of pronouns, we can express the same ideas with far greater ease and conciseness: "A woman went to a man, and told him, that he was in great danger of being murdered by a gang of robbers, who had made preparations for attacking him. He thanked her for her kindness, and, as he was unable to defend himself, he left his house and went to a neighbor's."
This would definitely be a tedious way to write; however, with the use of pronouns, we can convey the same ideas much more easily and concisely: "A woman went to a man and told him that he was in great danger of being murdered by a gang of robbers, who had made preparations to attack him. He thanked her for her kindness, and since he was unable to defend himself, he left his house and went to a neighbor's."
If you look at these examples a few moments, you cannot be at a loss to tell which words are pronouns; and you will observe too, that they all stand for nouns.
If you take a moment to look at these examples, you won't have any trouble identifying which words are pronouns; and you'll also notice that they all represent nouns.
Pronouns are generally divided into three kinds, the Personal, the Adjective, and the Relative pronouns. They are all known by the lists.
Pronouns are usually categorized into three types: Personal, Adjective, and Relative pronouns. You can identify them by their lists.
1. OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Personal Pronouns are distinguished from the relative, by their denoting the person of the nouns for which they stand. There are five of them; I, thou, he, she, it; with their plurals, We, ye or you, they.
Personal pronouns are different from relative pronouns because they indicate the person of the nouns they replace. There are five of them: I, you, he, she, and it; along with their plurals, we, you, and they.
To pronouns belong gender, person, number, and case.
To pronouns belong gender, person, number, and case.
GENDER. When we speak of a man, we say, he, his, him; when we speak of a woman, we say, she, hers, her; and when we speak of a thing, we say it. Hence you perceive, that gender belongs to pronouns as well as to nouns. Example; "The general, in gratitude to the lady, offered her his hand; but she, not knowing him, declined accepting it." The pronouns his and him, in this sentence, personate or represent the noun general; they are, therefore, of the masculine gender: her and she personate the lady; therefore, they are feminine: and it represents hand; for which reason it is of the neuter gender. This illustration shows you, then, that pronouns must be of the same gender as the nouns are for which they stand. But, as it relates to the variation of the pronouns to express the sex,
GENDER. When we talk about a man, we use he, his, him; when we talk about a woman, we use she, hers, her; and when we talk about a thing, we say it. So you can see that gender applies to pronouns as well as to nouns. For example, "The general, grateful to the lady, offered her his hand; but she, not knowing him, declined accepting it." The pronouns his and him in this sentence represent the noun general; therefore, they are masculine: her and she represent the lady; so they are feminine: and it represents hand; which is why it is neuter. This illustration shows you that pronouns must match the gender of the nouns they represent. However, as it relates to the variation of the pronouns to express sex,
Gender has respect only to the third person singular of the pronouns, he, she, it. He is masculine; she is feminine; it is neuter.
Gender applies only to the third person singular of the pronouns, he, she, it. He is masculine; she is feminine; it is neuter.
You may naturally inquire, why pronouns of the first and second persons are not varied to denote the gender of their nouns, as well as of the third. The reason is obvious. The first person, that is, the person speaking, and the second person, or the person spoken to, being at the same time the subjects of the discourse, are supposed to be present; from which, and other circumstances, their sex is commonly known, and, therefore, the pronouns that represent these persons, need not be marked by a distinction of gender; but the third person, that is, the person or thing spoken of, being absent, and in many respects unknown, necessarily requires the pronoun that stands for it, to be marked by a distinction of gender.
You might naturally wonder why first and second person pronouns aren't changed to indicate the gender of their nouns, unlike third person pronouns. The reason is simple. The first person—meaning the speaker—and the second person—meaning the person being spoken to—are usually present in the conversation, so their gender is generally known. That's why the pronouns for these persons don't need to show a distinction of gender. However, the third person, which refers to someone or something not present and often not well known, does require a gender distinction in its pronouns.
In parsing, we sometimes apply gender to pronouns of the first and second person, and also to the plural number of the third person; but these have no peculiar form to denote their gender; therefore they have no agreement, in this respect, with the nouns which they represent.
In parsing, we sometimes assign gender to first and second person pronouns, as well as the plural form of third person pronouns; however, these do not have a specific form to indicate their gender. Therefore, they do not agree, in this regard, with the nouns they represent.
PERSON. Pronouns have three persons in each number.
PERSON. Pronouns come in three persons for each number.
I, is the first person | { |
Thou, is the second person | {Singular. |
He, she, or it, is the third person | { |
We, is the first person | { |
Ye or you, is the second person | {Plural. |
They, is the third person | { |
This account of persons will be very intelligible, when you reflect, that there are three persons who may be the subject of any discourse: first, the person who speaks, may speak of himself; secondly, he may speak of the person to whom he addresses himself; thirdly, he may speak of some other person; and as the speakers, the persons spoken to, and the persons spoken of, may be many, so each of these persons must have a plural number.
This explanation of people will be easy to understand when you consider that there are three people who can be the focus of any conversation: first, the person who is speaking can talk about themselves; second, they can talk about the person they are addressing; third, they can talk about someone else. Since there can be many speakers, people being addressed, and people being talked about, each of these groups must be in plural form.
Pronouns of the second and third person, always agree, in person with the nouns they represent; but pronouns of the first person, do not. Whenever a pronoun of the first person is used, it represents a noun; but nouns are never of the first person, therefore these pronouns cannot agree in person with their nouns.
Pronouns in the second and third person always match in person with the nouns they refer to, but first-person pronouns don’t. When a first-person pronoun is used, it stands for a noun; however, nouns are never first-person, so these pronouns can't match in person with their nouns.
NUMBER. Pronouns, like nouns, have two numbers, the singular and the plural; as, I, thou, he; we, ye or you, they.
NUMBER. Pronouns, like nouns, have two forms: singular and plural; for example, I, you, he; we, you or you, they.
CASE. Pronouns have three cases, the nominative, the possessive, and the objective.
CASE. Pronouns have three cases: nominative, possessive, and objective.
In the next place I will present to you the declension of the personal pronouns, which declension you must commit to memory before you proceed any farther.
Next, I will show you the declension of the personal pronouns, which you need to memorize before moving on.
The advantages resulting from the committing of the following declension, are so great and diversified, that you cannot be too particular in your attention to it. You recollect, that it is sometimes very difficult to distinguish the nominative case of a noun from the objective, because these cases of nouns are not marked by a difference in termination; but this difficulty is removed in regard to the personal pronouns, for their cases are always known by their termination. By studying the declension you will learn, not only the cases of the pronouns, but, also, their genders, persons, and numbers.
The benefits of learning the following declension are so significant and varied that you should pay close attention to it. Remember that it can sometimes be quite challenging to tell the nominative case of a noun apart from the objective case, because these noun cases don't have different endings. However, this confusion does not apply to personal pronouns, as their cases are always clear based on their endings. By studying the declension, you will not only understand the cases of the pronouns but also their genders, persons, and numbers.
DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
FIRST PERSON.
Sing. | Plur. | |
Nom. | I, | we, |
Poss. | my or mine, | our or ours, |
Obj. | me. | us. |
SECOND PERSON.
Sing. | Plur. | |
Nom. | thou, | ye or you, |
Poss. | thy or thine, | your or yours, |
Obj. | thee. | you. |
THIRD PERSON.
Mas. Sing. | Plur. | |
Nom. | he, | they, |
Poss. | his, | their or theirs, |
Obj. | him. | them. |
THIRD PERSON.
Fem. Sing. | Plur. | |
Nom. | she, | they, |
Poss. | her or hers, | their or theirs. |
Obj. | her. | them. |
THIRD PERSON.
Neut. Sing. | Plur. | |
Nom. | it, | they, |
Poss. | its, | their or theirs, |
Obj. | it. | them. |
NOTES.
1. When self is added to the personal pronouns, as himself, myself, itself, themselves, &c. they are called compound personal pronouns, and are used in the nominative or objective case, but not in the possessive.
1. When self is added to personal pronouns like himself, myself, itself, themselves, etc., they are called compound personal pronouns and can be used in the nominative or objective case, but not in the possessive.
2. In order to avoid the disagreeable harshness of sound, occasioned by the frequent recurrence of the terminations est, edst, in the adaptation of our verbs to the nominative thou, a modern innovation which substitutes you for thou, in familiar style, has generally been adopted. This innovation contributes greatly to the harmony of our colloquial style. You was formerly restricted to the plural number; but now it is employed to represent either a singular or a plural noun. It ought to be recollected, however, that when used as the representative of a singular noun, this word retains its original plural form; and, therefore, the verb connected with it, should always be plural. Inattention to this peculiarity, has betrayed some writers into the erroneous conclusion, that, because you implies unity when it represents a singular noun, it ought, when thus employed, to be followed by a singular verb; as, "When was you there?" "How far was you from the parties?" Such a construction, however, is not supported by good usage, nor by analogy. It is as manifest a solecism as to say, We am, or we is. Were it, in any case, admissible to connect a singular verb with you, the use of was would still be ungrammatical, for this form of the verb is confined to the first and third persons, and you is second person. Wast being second person, it would approximate nearer to correctness to say, you wast. We never use the singular of the present tense with you:—you art, you is; you walkest, you walks. Why, then, should any attempt be made to force a usage so unnatural and gratuitous as the connecting of the singular verb in the past tense with this pronoun? In every point of view, the construction, "When were you there?" "How far were you from the parties?" is preferable to the other.
2. To avoid the unpleasant harshness of sound caused by the frequent endings est, edst when adapting our verbs to the nominative thou, a modern change has generally been adopted that replaces thou with you in casual speech. This change really helps make our everyday language flow better. You used to be limited to the plural form, but now it's used for both singular and plural nouns. However, it should be remembered that when you stands for a singular noun, it keeps its original plural form; therefore, the verb that goes with it should always be plural. Ignoring this detail has led some writers to mistakenly think that since you suggests singularity when it stands for a singular noun, it should follow a singular verb; for example, "When was you there?" "How far was you from the parties?" However, this kind of wording is not supported by good usage or by analogy. It's as clear a mistake as saying, We am or we is. Even if it were acceptable to link a singular verb with you, using was would still be incorrect, because this form of the verb is limited to the first and third persons, while you is second person. Since wast is second person, it would be closer to correct to say, you wast. We never use the singular present tense with you: you art, you is; you walkest, you walks. So, why should there be any attempt to force such an unnatural and unnecessary usage as connecting a singular verb in the past tense with this pronoun? In every context, the phrasing "When were you there?" "How far were you from the parties?" is better than the alternative.
3. The words my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, are, by many, denominated possessive adjective pronouns; but they always stand for nouns in the possessive case. They ought, therefore, to be classed with the personal pronouns. That principle of classification which ranks them with the adjective pronouns, would also throw all nouns in the possessive case among the adjectives. Example: "The lady gave the gentleman her watch for his horse." In this sentence her personates, or stands for, the noun "lady," and his represents "gentleman." This fact is clearly shown by rendering the sentence thus, "The lady gave the gentleman the lady's watch for the gentleman's horse." If lady's and gentleman's are nouns, her and his must be personal pronouns. The same remarks apply to my, thy, our, your, their and its. This view of these words may be objected to by those who speculate and refine upon the principles of grammar until they prove their non-existence, but it is believed, nevertheless, to be based on sound reason and common sense.
3. The words my, thy, his, her, our, your, their are often referred to as possessive adjective pronouns; however, they always represent nouns in the possessive case. Therefore, they should be grouped with the personal pronouns. This classification principle that places them among the adjective pronouns would also categorize all nouns in the possessive case as adjectives. For example: "The lady gave the gentleman her watch for his horse." In this sentence, her represents the noun "lady," and his represents "gentleman." This is clearly demonstrated by rephrasing the sentence as "The lady gave the gentleman the lady's watch for the gentleman's horse." If lady's and gentleman's are nouns, then her and his must be personal pronouns. The same points apply to my, thy, our, your, their, and its. Some might challenge this perspective by overanalyzing the principles of grammar to the point of proving their non-existence, but this view is still considered to be grounded in sound reasoning and common sense.
4. Mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, have, by many respectable grammarians, been considered merely the possessive cases of personal pronouns, whilst, by others, they have been denominated pronouns or nouns in the nominative or objective case. It is believed, however, that a little attention to the meaning and office of these words, will clearly show the impropriety of both these classifications. Those who pursue the former arrangement, allege, that, in the examples, "You may imagine what kind of faith theirs was; My pleasures are past; hers and yours are to come; they applauded his conduct, but condemned hers and yours," the words theirs, hers, and yours, are personal pronouns in the possessive case, and governed by their respective nouns understood. To prove this, they construct the sentence thus, "You may imagine what kind of faith their faith was;—her pleasures and your pleasures are to come;—but condemned her conduct and your conduct;" or thus, "You may imagine what kind of faith the faith of them was;—the pleasures of her and the pleasures of you, are to come;— but condemned the conduct of her and the conduct of you." But these constructions, (both of which are correct,) prove too much for their purpose; for, as soon as we supply the nouns after these words, they are resolved into personal pronouns of kindred meaning, and the nouns which we supply: thus, theirs becomes, their faith: hers, her pleasures; and yours, your pleasures. This evidently gives us two words instead of, and altogether distinct from, the first; so that, in parsing, their faith, we are not, in reality, analyzing theirs, but two other words of which theirs is the proper representative. These remarks also prove, with equal force, the impropriety of calling these words merely simple pronouns or nouns in the nominative or objective case. Without attempting to develop the original or intrinsic meaning of these pluralizing adjuncts, ne and s, which were, no doubt, formerly detached from the pronouns with which they now coalesce, for all practical purposes, it is sufficient for us to know, that, in the present application of these pronouns, they invariably stand for, not only the person possessing, but, also the thing possessed, which gives them a compound character. They may, therefore, be properly denominated COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS; and, as they always perform a double office in a sentence by representing two other words, and, consequently, including two cases, they should, like the compound relative what, be parsed as two words. Thus, in the example, "You may imagine what kind of faith theirs was," theirs is a compound personal pronoun, equivalent to their faith. Their is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun; personal, it personates the persons spoken of, understood; third pers. plur. numb., &c.—and in the possessive case, and governed by "faith," according to Rule 12. Faith is a noun, the name of a thing, &c. &c.—and in the nominative case to "was," and governs it; Rule 3. Or, if we render the sentence thus, "You may imagine what kind of faith the faith of them[4] was," faith would be in the nominative case to "was," and them would be in the objective case, and governed by "of:" Rule 31.
4. Mine, yours, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs are considered by many reputable grammarians to be just the possessive forms of personal pronouns. Others refer to them as pronouns or nouns in the nominative or objective case. However, with a little attention to what these words mean and how they function, it becomes clear that both classifications are inappropriate. Those who support the first classification claim that in the sentences, "You can imagine what kind of faith theirs was; my pleasures are gone; hers and yours are still to come; they praised his actions but judged hers and yours," the words theirs, hers, and yours are personal pronouns in the possessive case, governed by their understood nouns. To demonstrate this, they rephrase it as, "You can imagine what kind of faith their faith was;—her pleasures and your pleasures are still to come;—but judged her conduct and your conduct;" or, "You can imagine what kind of faith the faith of them was;—the pleasures of her and the pleasures of you are to come;—but condemned the conduct of her and the conduct of you." However, these constructions (both correct) actually support their argument too much; as soon as we insert the nouns after these words, they resolve into personal pronouns with similar meanings and the nouns we added: thus, theirs becomes their faith; hers, her pleasures; and yours, your pleasures. This clearly provides us with two words distinct from the first, so that in parsing their faith, we are not really analyzing theirs, but instead two other words of which theirs is the correct representation. These observations also effectively argue against classifying these words simply as personal pronouns or nouns in the nominative or objective case. Without trying to explore the original or inherent meaning of the pluralizing elements ne and s, which were likely once separate from the pronouns they now connect with, for all practical purposes, it's enough for us to know that in their current use, these pronouns always refer not only to the person who possesses but also to what is possessed, giving them a compound nature. They can therefore rightly be called COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS; and since they always serve a dual purpose in a sentence by representing two other words and therefore encompassing two cases, they should be parsed like the compound relative what, as two words. So in the example, "You can imagine what kind of faith theirs was," theirs is a compound personal pronoun, equal to their faith. Their is a pronoun, a word that substitutes for a noun; it's personal, representing the people being talked about, understood; third person, plural number, etc.—and in the possessive case, governed by "faith," according to Rule 12. Faith is a noun, the name of a thing, etc. etc.—and is in the nominative case to "was," and governs it; Rule 3. Alternatively, if we phrase the sentence as, "You can imagine what kind of faith the faith of them[4] was," faith would be in the nominative case to "was," and them would be in the objective case, governed by "of:" Rule 31.
Objections to this method of treating these pronouns, will doubtless be preferred by those who assert, that a noun is understood after these words, and not represented by them. But this is assertion without proof; for, if a noun were understood, it might be supplied. If the question be put, whose book? and the answer be, mine, ours, hers, or theirs, the word book is included in such answer. Were it not included, we might supply it, thus, mine book, ours book, hers book, and so on. This, however, we cannot do, for it would be giving a double answer: but when the question is answered by a noun in the possessive case, the word book is not included, but implied; as, Whose book? John's, Richard's; that is, John's book; Richard's book.
Objections to this method of treating these pronouns will likely be raised by those who claim that a noun is understood after these words, rather than being represented by them. But this is an assertion without proof; if a noun were understood, it could be supplied. If you ask, whose book? and the answer is mine, ours, hers, or theirs, the word book is part of that answer. If it weren’t included, we could supply it like this: mine book, ours book, hers book, and so on. However, we can’t do that, because it would be giving a double answer: when the question is answered by a noun in the possessive case, the word book is not included but implied; for example, Whose book? John's, Richard's; meaning, John's book; Richard's book.
This view of the subject, without a parallel, except in the compounds what, whoever, and others, is respectfully submitted to the public; believing, that those who approve of a critical analysis of words, will coincide with me. Should any still be disposed to treat these words so superficially as to rank them among the simple pronouns, let them answer the following interrogatory: If what, when compound, should be parsed as two words, why not mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, and theirs?
This perspective on the subject, unique except for the compounds what, whoever, and others, is respectfully presented to the public; I believe that those who appreciate a critical analysis of language will agree with me. If anyone still feels inclined to dismiss these words so lightly as to classify them among the simple pronouns, let them respond to the following question: If what, when combined, should be treated as two words, why not mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, and theirs?
5. Mine and thine, instead of my and thy, are used in solemn style, before a word beginning with a vowel or silent h; as, "Blot out all mine iniquities;" and when thus used, they are not compound. His always has the same form, whether simple or compound; as, "Give John his book; That desk is his." Her, when placed before a noun, is in the possessive case; as, Take her hat: when standing alone, it is in the objective case; as, Give the hat to her.
5. Mine and thine are used instead of my and thy in formal writing, before a word that starts with a vowel or a silent h; for example, "Blot out all mine iniquities." When used this way, they are not compound. His always stays the same, whether it’s simple or compound; for instance, "Give John his book; That desk is his." Her, when placed in front of a noun, is in the possessive case; for example, "Take her hat." When it stands alone, it is in the objective case; as in, "Give the hat to her."
When you shall have studied this lecture attentively, and committed the declension of the personal pronouns, you may commit the following
When you have studied this lecture carefully and learned the declension of the personal pronouns, you can move on to the following
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing a PERSONAL PRONOUN, is—a pronoun, and why?—personal, and why?—person, and why?—gender and number, and why?—RULE: case, and why?—RULE.—Decline it.
The process of analyzing a PERSONAL PRONOUN is—it's a pronoun, and why?—it's personal, and why?—it's about person, and why?—it's about gender and number, and why?—RULE: case, and why?—RULE.—Decline it.
There are many peculiarities to be observed in parsing personal pronouns in their different persons; therefore, if you wish ever to parse them correctly, you must pay particular attention to the manner in which the following are analyzed. Now notice, particularly, and you will perceive that we apply only one rule in parsing I and my, and two in parsing thou, him, and they.
There are many oddities to note when analyzing personal pronouns in their various forms; so, if you want to parse them correctly, you need to focus closely on how the following are analyzed. Now pay special attention, and you'll see that we use only one rule when parsing I and my, and two rules for parsing thou, him, and they.
"I saw my friend."
"I saw my friend."
I is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it represents the person speaking, understood—first person, it denotes the speaker—singular number, it implies but one—and in the nominative case, it represents the actor and subject of the verb "saw," and governs it, agreeably to RULE 3. The nom. case gov. the verb. Declined—first pers. sing. num. nom. I, poss. my or mine, obj. me. Plur. nom. we, poss. our or ours, obj. us.
I is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—it's personal, representing the person speaking, understood—first person, indicating the speaker—singular number, meaning just one—and in the nominative case, it represents the actor and subject of the verb "saw," and governs it, according to RULE 3. The nom. case gov. the verb. Declined—first pers. sing. num. nom. I, poss. my or mine, obj. me. Plur. nom. we, poss. our or ours, obj. us.
My is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it personates the person speaking, understood—first pers. it denotes the speaker—sing. num. it implies but one—and in the possessive case, it denotes possession; it is governed by the noun "friend", agreeably to RULE 12. A noun or pronoun in the possessive case, is governed by the noun it possesses. Declined—first pers. sing. nom. I, poss. my or mine, obj. me. Plur. nom. we, poss. our or ours, obj. us.
My is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it represents the speaker, understood—first person it refers to the person speaking—singular it implies just one—and in the possessive case, it indicates ownership; it is governed by the noun "friend", following RULE 12. A noun or pronoun in the possessive case is governed by the noun it possesses. Declined—first person singular nominative I, possessive my or mine, objective me. Plural nominative we, possessive our or ours, objective us.
"Young man, thou hast deserted thy companion, and left him in distress."
"Young man, you have deserted your companion and left him in distress."
Thou is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it personates "man"—second person, it represents the person spoken to—mas. gend. sing. num. because the noun "man" is for which it stands, according to RULE 13. Personal pronouns must agree with the nouns for which they stand in gender and number.
You is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it represents "man"—second person, it refers to the person being addressed—masc. gender, sing. number because the noun "man" is what it stands for, according to RULE 13. Personal pronouns must agree with the nouns for which they stand in gender and number.
Thou is in the nom. case, it represents the actor and subject of the verb "hast deserted," and governs it agreeably to RULE 3. The nom. case governs the verb. Declined—sec. pers. sing. num. nom. thou, poss. thy or thine, obj. thee. Plur. nom. ye or you, poss. your or yours, obj. you.
You is in the nominative case; it represents the actor and subject of the verb "have deserted," and governs it according to RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb. Declined—2nd person singular nominative you, possessive your or yours, object you. Plural nominative you, possessive your or yours, object you.
Him is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it personates "companion"—third pers. it represents the person spoken of—mas. gend. sing. num. because the noun "companion" is for which it stands: RULE 13. Pers. pro. &c. (Repeat the Rule.)—Him is in the objective case, the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive verb "hast left," and gov. by it: RULE 20. Active-trans. verbs gov. the obj. case. Declined—third pers. mas. gend. sing. num. nom. he, poss. his, obj. him. Plur. nom. they, poss. their or theirs, obj. them.
Him is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—it represents "companion"—in the third person, it refers to the person being talked about—masculine gender, singular number, because it stands for the noun "companion": RULE 13. Pers. pro. & c. (Repeat the Rule.)—Him is in the objective case, the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive verb "has left," and governed by it: RULE 20. Active-trans. verbs govern the obj. case. Declined—third person masculine gender singular number nominative he, possessive his, objective him. Plural nominative they, possessive their or theirs, objective them.
"Thrice I raised my voice, and called the chiefs to combat, but they dreaded the force of my arm."
"Three times I called out to the leaders to fight, but they feared the strength of my arm."
They is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it represents "chiefs"—third pers. it denotes the persons spoken of—mas. gend. plur. num. because the noun "chiefs" is for which it stands: RULE 13. Pers. Pron. &c. (Repeat the Rule.) It is the nom. case, it represents the actors and subject of the verb "dreaded," and governs it: RULE 3. The nom. case, gov. the verb. Declined—third pers. mas. gend. sing. num. nom. he, poss. his, obj. him. Plur. nom. they, poss. their or theirs, obj. them.
They is a pronoun, a word used in place of a noun—it's personal, representing "chiefs"—in the third person, it refers to the people being talked about—masculine gender, plural number because it stands for the noun "chiefs": RULE 13. Pers. Pron. &c. (Repeat the Rule.) It is the nominative case, representing the actors and the subject of the verb "dreaded," and governs it: RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb. Declined—third person masculine gender singular number nominative he, possessive his, object him. Plural nominative they, possessive their or theirs, object them.
NOTE. We do not apply gender in parsing the personal pronouns, (excepting the third person singular,) if the nouns they represent are understood; and therefore we do not, in such instances, apply Rule 13. But when the noun is expressed, gender should be applied, and two Rules.
NOTE. We do not consider gender when interpreting personal pronouns (except for third person singular) if the nouns they refer to are understood; therefore, we do not apply Rule 13 in those cases. However, when the noun is explicitly stated, gender should be applied, and two Rules.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
I saw a man leading his horse slowly over the new bridge. My friends visit me very often at my father's office. We improve ourselves by close application. Horace, thou learnest many lessons. Charles, you, by your diligence, make easy work of the task given you by your preceptor. Young ladies, you run over your lessons very carelessly. The stranger drove his horses too far into the water, and, in so doing, he drowned them.
I saw a man slowly leading his horse across the new bridge. My friends come to see me at my dad's office pretty often. We better ourselves by focusing closely. Horace, you’re learning a lot of lessons. Charles, with your hard work, you make the assignment from your teacher seem easy. Young ladies, you go through your lessons way too carelessly. The stranger drove his horses too far into the water, and as a result, he drowned them.
Gray morning rose in the east. A green narrow vale appeared before us: its winding stream murmured through the grove. The dark host of Rothmar stood on its banks, with their glittering spears. We fought along the vale. They fled. Rothmar sunk beneath my sword. Day was descending in the west, when I brought his arms to Crothar. The aged hero felt them with his hands: joy brightened his thoughts.
Gray morning broke in the east. A narrow green valley stretched out in front of us; its winding stream babbled through the trees. The dark warriors of Rothmar stood on its banks, their spurs glinting in the light. We fought along the valley. They fled. Rothmar fell beneath my sword. Day was fading in the west when I brought his weapons to Crothar. The old hero held them in his hands: joy lit up his thoughts.
NOTE. Horace, Charles, and ladies, are of the second person, and nom. case independent: see RULE 5, and NOTE. The first you is used in the nom. poss. and obj. case.—It represents Charles, therefore it is singular in sense, although plural in form. In the next example, you personifies ladies, therefore it is plural. Given is a perfect participle. You following given, is governed by to understood, according to NOTE 1, under Rule 32. Run over is a compound verb. And is a conjunction. The first its personates vale; the second its represents stream.
NOTE. Horace, Charles, and ladies are in the second person and are nominative case independent: see RULE 5, and NOTE. The first you is used in the nominative possessive and objective case.—It refers to Charles, so it is singular in meaning, even though it is plural in form. In the next example, you refers to ladies, so it is plural. Given is a perfect participle. You after given is governed by to understood, according to NOTE 1, under Rule 32. Run over is a compound verb. And is a conjunction. The first its refers to vale; the second its refers to stream.
You may now parse the following examples three times over.
You can now review the following examples three times.
COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
"Juliet, retain her paper, and present yours."
"Juliet, keep her paper, and show yours."
Yours is a compound personal pronoun, representing both the possessor and the thing possessed, and is equivalent to your paper. Your is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it personates "Juliet"—second person, it represents the person spoken to—fem. gender, sing. number, (singular in sense, but plural in form,) because the noun Juliet is for which it stands: Rule 13. Pers. Pron. &c.—Your is in the possessive case, it denotes possession, and is governed by "paper," according to Rule 12. A noun or pron. &c. (Repeat the Rule, and decline the pronoun.) Paper is a noun, the name of a thing—common, the name of a sort of things—neuter gender, it denotes a thing without sex—third person, spoken of—sing. number, it implies but one—and in the obj. case, it is the object of the action expressed by the transitive verb "present," and governed by it: Rule 20. Active-transitive verbs govern the obj. case.
Yours is a compound personal pronoun that shows both who owns something and what is owned, and it’s equivalent to your paper. Your is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—it personalizes "Juliet"—it’s second person, representing the person being addressed—it’s feminine, singular (singular in meaning, but plural in form), because it stands for the noun Juliet: Rule 13. Pers. Pron. &c.—Your is in the possessive case, indicating ownership, and is governed by "paper," according to Rule 12. A noun or pron. &c. (Repeat the Rule, and decline the pronoun.) Paper is a noun, the name of a thing—common, indicating a type of thing—neuter gender, it refers to something without gender—third person, spoken about—sing. number, it implies only one—and in the obj. case, it is the object of the action expressed by the transitive verb "present," and is governed by it: Rule 20. Active-transitive verbs govern the obj. case.
NOTE. Should it be objected, that yours does not mean your paper, any more than it means your book, your house, your any thing, let it be borne in mind, that pronouns have no definite meaning, like other words; but their particular signification is always determined by the nouns they represent.
NOTE. If someone argues that yours doesn't mean your paper, just like it doesn't mean your book, your house, your anything else, it's important to remember that pronouns don't have a definite meaning like other words do; instead, their particular meaning is always shaped by the nouns they refer to.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Julia injured her book, and soiled mine: hers is better than mine. My friend sacrificed his fortune to secure yours: his deeds deserve reward; yours merit disgrace. Henry's labors are past; thine are to come. We leave your forests of beasts for ours of men. My sword and yours are kin.
Julia messed up her book and stained mine: hers is better than mine. My friend gave up his fortune to secure yours: his actions deserve praise; yours deserve shame. Henry's work is done; yours is yet to come. We leave your wild animal forests for our forests filled with people. My sword and yours are related.
NOTE. She understood, is nominative to soiled, in the first example; and the substantive part of mine, after than, is nom. to is, understood: Rule 35. The verbs to secure and to come have no nominative. The pronouns mine, my, yours, thine, we, your, ours, my, and yours, personate nouns understood.
NOTE. She is understood as the subject of soiled in the first example; and the noun part of mine, following than, is understood as the subject of is: Rule 35. The verbs to secure and to come do not have a subject. The pronouns mine, my, yours, thine, we, your, ours, my, and yours represent understood nouns.
REMARKS ON IT.
For the want of a proper knowledge of this little pronoun it, many grammarians have been greatly puzzled how to dispose of it, or how to account for its multiform, and, seemingly, contradictory characters. It is in great demand by writers of every description. They use it without ceremony; either in the nominative or objective case; either to represent one person or thing, or more than one. It is applied to nouns in the masculine, feminine, or neuter gender, and, very frequently, it represents a member of a sentence, a whole sentence, or a number of sentences taken in a mass.
For the lack of a clear understanding of this small pronoun it, many grammarians have been very confused about how to use it or how to explain its various and often contradictory roles. Writers of all kinds have a high demand for it. They use it casually, whether in the nominative or objective case; to represent one person or thing, or more than one. It can be used with nouns in masculine, feminine, or neuter forms, and is often used to refer to a part of a sentence, an entire sentence, or several sentences grouped together.
A little attention to its true character, will, at once, strip it of all its mystery. It, formerly written hit, according to H. Tooke, is the past participle of the Moeso-Gothic verb haitan. It means, the said, and, therefore, like its near relative that, meaning, the assumed, originally had no respect, in its application, to number, person, or gender. "It is a wholesome law;" i.e. the said (law) is a wholesome law; or, that (law) is a wholesome law;—the assumed (law) is a wholesome law. "It is the man; I believe it to be them:"—the said (man) is the man; that (man) is the man: I believe the said (persons) to be them; I believe that persons (according to the ancient application of that) to be them. "It happened on a summer's day, that many people were assembled," &c.—Many people were assembled: it, that, or the said (fact or circumstance) happened on a summer's day.
A little attention to its true character will immediately reveal all its mystery. It, which used to be written as hit, according to H. Tooke, is the past participle of the Moeso-Gothic verb haitan. It means the said, and, therefore, like its close relative that, meaning the assumed, originally had no relevance to number, person, or gender. "It is a wholesome law;" i.e. the said (law) is a wholesome law; or, that (law) is a wholesome law;—the assumed (law) is a wholesome law. "It is the man; I believe it to be them:"—the said (man) is the man; that (man) is the man: I believe the said (people) to be them; I believe that people (according to the old use of that) to be them. "It happened on a summer's day, that many people were gathered," &c.—Many people were gathered: it, that, or the said (fact or circumstance) happened on a summer's day.
It, according to its accepted meaning in modern times, is not referred to a noun understood after it, but is considered a substitute. "How is it with you?" that is, "How is your state or condition?" "It rains; It freezes; It is a hard winter;"—The rain rains; The frost frosts or freezes; The said (winter) is a hard winter. "It is delightful to see brothers and sisters living in uninterrupted love to the end of their days." What is delightful? To see brothers and sisters living in uninterrupted love to the end of their days. It, this thing, is delightful. It, then, stands for all that part of the sentence expressed in italics; and the sentence will admit of the following construction; "To see brothers living in uninterrupted love to the end of their days, is delightful."
It, as it’s commonly understood today, doesn’t refer to a specific noun after it but is used as a substitute. "How is it with you?" means "How is your state or condition?" "It rains; It freezes; It is a hard winter;"—The rain is falling; The frost is freezing; The mentioned (winter) is a hard winter. "It is delightful to see brothers and sisters living in uninterrupted love until the end of their days." What is delightful? To see brothers and sisters living in uninterrupted love until the end of their days. It, this thing, is delightful. It, then, represents all that part of the sentence in italics; and the sentence could be rephrased as follows: "To see brothers living in uninterrupted love until the end of their days is delightful."
OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS, PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES, or, more properly, SPECIFYING ADJECTIVES, are a kind of adjectives which point out nouns by some distinct specification.
ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS, PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES, or, more accurately, SPECIFYING ADJECTIVES, are a type of adjective that identify nouns through specific distinctions.
Pronouns and adjectives are totally distinct in their character. The former stand for nouns, and never belong to them; the latter belong to nouns, and never stand for them. Hence, such a thing as an adjective-pronoun cannot exist. Each, every, either, this, that, some, other, and the residue, are pure adjectives.
Pronouns and adjectives are completely different in nature. The former represent nouns and never are part of them; the latter are part of nouns and never represent them. Therefore, there is no such thing as an adjective-pronoun. Each, every, either, this, that, some, other, and the rest are all pure adjectives.
Those specifying adjectives commonly called Adjective Pronouns, may be divided into three sorts; the distributive, the demonstrative, and the indefinite. They are all known by the lists.
Those specifying adjectives, often referred to as Adjective Pronouns, can be divided into three types: the distributive, the demonstrative, and the indefinite. They are all recognized by the lists.
I. The distributive adjectives are those that denote the persons or things that make up a number, each taken separately and singly. List: each, every, either, and sometimes neither; as, "Each of his brothers is in a favorable situation;" "Every man must account for himself;" "Neither of them is industrious."
I. The distributive adjectives refer to the individuals or items that form a group, with each considered individually. List: each, every, either, and sometimes neither; for example, "Each of his brothers is in a good position;" "Every person must be responsible for themselves;" "Neither of them is hardworking."
These distributives are words which are introduced into language in its refined state, in order to express the nicest shades and colors of thought. "Man must account for himself;" "Mankind must account for themselves;" "All men must account for themselves;" "All men, women, and children, must account for themselves;" "Every man must account for himself." Each of these assertions conveys the same fact or truth. But the last, instead of presenting the whole human family for the mind to contemplate in a mass, by the peculiar force of every, distributes them, and presents each separately and singly; and whatever is affirmed of one individual, the mind instantaneously transfers to the whole human race.
These distributives are words that enter language in its advanced form to express the subtle nuances and variations of thought. "Man must account for himself;" "Mankind must account for themselves;" "All men must account for themselves;" "All men, women, and children, must account for themselves;" "Every man must account for himself." Each of these statements communicates the same fact or truth. However, the last one, instead of presenting the entire human family for the mind to consider as a whole, uses the unique force of every to break them down and focus on each individual separately. Whatever is stated about one person, the mind automatically applies to all of humanity.
Each relates to two or more persons or things, and signifies either of the two, or every one of any number taken separately.
Each refers to two or more people or things, and means either one of the two, or every individual from any number considered separately.
Every relates to several persons or things, and signifies each one of them all taken separately.
Every refers to multiple people or things and means each one of them individually.
Either relates to two persons or things taken separately, and signifies the one or the other. "Either of the three," is an improper expression. It should be, "any of the three."
Either refers to two people or things considered individually, and means one or the other. "Either of the three," is incorrect. It should say, "any of the three."
Neither imports not either; that is, not one nor the other; as, "Neither of my friends was there." When an allusion is made to more than two, none should be used instead of neither; as, "None of my friends was there."
Neither means not either; that is, not one or the other; for example, "Neither of my friends was there." When referring to more than two, use none instead of neither; for instance, "None of my friends was there."
II. The demonstrative are those which precisely point out the subject to which they relate. List: this and that, and their plurals, these and those, and former and latter; as, "This is true charity; "that is only its image."
II. The demonstrative are words that specifically indicate the subject they refer to. List: this and that, along with their plurals, these and those, and former and latter; for example, "This is real charity; that is just its reflection."
There is but a slight shade of difference in the meaning and application of the and that. When reference is made to a particular book, we say, "Take the book;" but when we wish to be very pointed and precise, we say, "Take that book;" or, if it be near by, "Take this book." You perceive, then, that these demonstratives have all the force of the definite article, and a little more.
There’s only a small difference in the meaning and use of the and that. When we refer to a specific book, we say, "Take the book;" but when we want to be very specific and clear, we say, "Take that book;" or, if it’s close by, "Take this book." You can see that these demonstratives carry all the weight of the definite article, plus a bit more.
This and these refer to the nearest persons or things, that and those to the most distant; as, "These goods are superior to those." This and these indicate the latter, or last mentioned; that and those, the former, or first mentioned; as, "Both wealth and poverty are temptations; that tends to excite pride, this, discontent."
This and these refer to the closest people or things, while that and those refer to those that are further away; for example, "These products are better than those." This and these point to the latter or most recently mentioned; that and those refer to the former or first mentioned; as in, "Both wealth and poverty are temptations; that creates pride, while this brings discontent."
They, those. As it is the office of the personal they to represent a noun previously introduced to our notice, there appears to be a slight departure from analogy in the following application of it: "They who seek after wisdom, are sure to find her: They that sow in tears, sometimes reap in joy." This usage, however, is well established, and they, in such constructions, is generally employed in preference to those.
They, those. Since the personal they is used to refer to a noun that has already been mentioned, there seems to be a minor deviation from the norm in the following examples: "They who seek wisdom are sure to find it: They that sow in tears sometimes reap in joy." However, this usage is widely accepted, and they is typically used instead of those in these contexts.
III. The indefinite are those which express their subjects in an indefinite or general manner. List: some, other, any, one, all, such, both, same, another none. Of these, one and other are declined like nouns. Another is declined, but wants the plural.
III. The indefinite terms are those that refer to their subjects in a vague or general way. List: some, other, any, one, all, such, both, same, another none. Of these, one and other behave like nouns. Another follows a similar pattern but does not have a plural form.
The indefinite adjectives, like the indefinite article, leave the meaning unfixed, or, in some degree, vague. With a slight shade of difference in meaning, we say, Give me a paper, one paper, any paper, some paper, and so on. Though these words restrict the meaning of the noun, they do not fix it to a particular object. We therefore call them indefinite.
The indefinite adjectives, like the indefinite article, keep the meaning open-ended or somewhat unclear. With a slight difference in meaning, we say, Give me a paper, one paper, any paper, some paper, and so on. Although these words limit the meaning of the noun, they don’t tie it to a specific object. That’s why we call them indefinite.
These adjectives, or adjective pronouns, frequently belong to nouns understood, in which situation they should be parsed accordingly; as "You may take either; He is pleased with this book, but dislikes that (book;) All (men) have sinned, but some (men) have repented."
These adjectives, or adjective pronouns, often refer to understood nouns, in which case they should be analyzed accordingly; for example, "You can take either; He likes this book but doesn’t like that (book); All (people) have sinned, but some (people) have repented."
The words, one, other, and none, are used in both numbers; and, when they stand for nouns, they are not adjectives, but indefinite pronouns; as, "The great ones of the world have their failings;" "Some men increase in wealth, while others decrease;" "None escape."
The words, one, other, and none, are used in both singular and plural; and when they represent nouns, they are not adjectives, but indefinite pronouns; as in, "The great ones of the world have their failings;" "Some men increase in wealth, while others decrease;" "None escape."
The word "ones," in the preceding example, does not belong to a noun understood. If it did, we could supply the noun. The meaning is not "the great one men, nor ones men," therefore one is not an adjective pronoun; but the meaning is, "The great men of the world," therefore ones is a pronoun of the indefinite kind, representing the noun men understood, and it ought to be parsed like a personal pronoun. The word others, in the next example, is a compound pronoun, equivalent to other men; and should be parsed like mine, thine, &c. See Note 4th, page 100.
The word "ones" in the previous example doesn't refer to a specific understood noun. If it did, we could identify the noun. The meaning isn't "the great one men or ones men"; instead, it means "The great men of the world." Therefore, ones is an indefinite pronoun representing the understood noun men, and it should be treated like a personal pronoun. The word others in the next example is a compound pronoun, equivalent to other men, and should be treated like mine, thine, etc. See Note 4th, page 100.
I will now parse two pronouns, and then present some examples for you to analyze. If, in parsing the following exercises, you should be at a loss for definitions and rules, please to refer to the compendium. But before you proceed, you may commit the following
I will now break down two pronouns, and then I’ll provide some examples for you to analyze. If, while working through the following exercises, you find yourself unsure about definitions and rules, please refer to the compendium. But before you continue, you might want to memorize the following
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing an ADJECTIVE PRONOUN, is—an adjective pronoun, and why?—distributive, demonstrative, or indefinite, and why?—to what noun does it belong, or with what does it agree?—RULE.
The order for interpreting an ADJECTIVE PRONOUN is—an adjective pronoun, and why?—distributive, demonstrative, or indefinite, and why?—which noun does it correspond to, or with what does it agree?—RULE.
"One man instructs many others."
"One man teaches many others."
One is an adjective pronoun, or specifying adjective, it specifically points out a noun—indefinite, it expresses its subject in an indefinite or general manner, and belongs to the noun "man," according to RULE 19. Adjective pronouns belong to nouns, expressed or understood.
One is an adjective pronoun, or specifying adjective; it specifically identifies a noun—indefinite, it expresses its subject in a vague or general way, and relates to the noun "man," according to RULE 19. Adjective pronouns are associated with nouns, whether expressed or understood.
Others is a compound pronoun, including both an adjective pronoun and a noun, and is equivalent to other men. Other is an adjective pronoun, it is used specifically to describe its noun—indefinite, it expresses its subject in an indefinite manner, and belongs to men: Rule 19. (Repeat the rule.) Men is a noun, a name denoting persons—common, &c. (parse it in full;) and in the objective case, it is the object of the action expressed by the transitive verb "instructs," and gov. by it: Rule 20. Active-transitive verbs, &c.
Others is a compound pronoun that includes both an adjective pronoun and a noun, and it is equivalent to other men. Other is an adjective pronoun used specifically to describe its noun—indefinite; it expresses its subject in a vague way, and refers to men: Rule 19. (Repeat the rule.) Men is a noun that names persons—common, etc. (parse it in full); and in the objective case, it serves as the object of the action expressed by the transitive verb "instructs," and is governed by it: Rule 20. Active-transitive verbs, etc.
"Those books are mine."
"Those books are mine."
Those is an adjective pronoun, it specifies what noun is referred to—demonstrative, it precisely points out the subject to which it relates—and agrees with the noun "books" in the plural number, according to NOTE 1, under Rule 19. Adjective pronouns must agree in number with their nouns.
Those is an adjective pronoun that specifies which noun is being referred to—it's demonstrative, clearly pointing out the subject it relates to—and it matches the noun "books" in the plural form, as stated in NOTE 1, under Rule 19. Adjective pronouns must agree in number with their nouns.
Mine is a compound personal pronoun, including both the possessor and the thing possessed, and is equivalent to my books. My is a pron. a word used instead of a noun—personal, it stands for the name of the person speaking—first person, it denotes the speaker—sing. number, it implies but one—and in the poss. case, it denotes possession, and is gov. by "books," according to Rule 12. (Repeat the rule, and decline the pronoun.) Books is a noun, the name of a thing—common, &c. (parse it in full;)—and in the nominative case after "are," according to RULE 21. The verb to be admits the same case after it as before it.
Mine is a compound personal pronoun that includes both the possessor and the thing possessed, and it is equivalent to my books. My is a pronoun, which is a word used instead of a noun—it's personal, representing the name of the person speaking—first person, indicating the speaker—singular, meaning just one—and in the possessive case, it denotes ownership, and is governed by "books," according to Rule 12. (Repeat the rule, and decline the pronoun.) Books is a noun, the name of a thing—common, etc. (parse it in full;)—and in the nominative case after "are," according to RULE 21. The verb to be allows the same case after it as before it.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Each individual fills a space in creation. Every man helps a little. These men rank among the great ones of the world. That book belongs to the tutor, this belongs to me. Some men labor, others labor not; the former increase in wealth, the latter decrease. The boy wounded the old bird, and stole the young ones. None performs his duty too well. None of those poor wretches complain of their miserable lot.
Each person has a role in the world. Every man contributes a little. These men are among the greatest in the world. That book belongs to the teacher, and this one belongs to me. Some men work hard, while others do not; the former grow richer, while the latter become poorer. The boy hurt the old bird and took the young ones. None of them does their job perfectly. None of those unfortunate souls complain about their terrible situation.
NOTE. In parsing the distributive pronominal adjectives, NOTE 2, undo Rule 19, should be applied.
NOTE. When analyzing the distributive pronouns, refer to NOTE 2 and apply Rule 19.
III. OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Relative Pronouns are such as relate, in general, to some word or phrase going before, which is called the antecedent. They are who, which, and that.
Relative pronouns refer to a word or phrase that comes before them, known as the antecedent. They are who, which, and that.
The word antecedent, comes from the two Latin words, ante, before, and cedo, to go. Hence you perceive, that antecedent means going before; thus, "The man is happy who lives virtuously; This is the lady who relieved my wants; Thou who lovest wisdom, &c. We who speak from experience," &c. The relative who, in these sentences, relates to the several words, man, lady, thou, and we, which words, you observe, come before the relative: they are, therefore, properly called antecedents.
The word antecedent comes from the two Latin words, ante, before, and cedo, to go. So, you understand that antecedent means going before; for example, "The man is happy who lives virtuously; this is the lady who helped me; you who love wisdom, etc. We who speak from experience," etc. The relative who in these sentences relates to the words man, lady, you, and we, which you can see come before the relative: they are, therefore, properly called antecedents.
The relative is not varied on account of gender, person, or number, like a personal pronoun. When we use a personal pronoun, in speaking of a man, we say he, and of a woman, she; in speaking of one person or thing, we use a singular pronoun, of more than one, a plural, and so on; but there is no such variation of the relative. Who, in the first of the preceding examples, relates to an antecedent of the mas. gend. third pers. sing.; in the second, the antecedent is of the fem. gend.; in the third, it is of the second pers.; and in the fourth, it is of the first pers. plur. num.; and, yet, the relative is in the same form in each example. Hence you perceive, that the relative has no peculiar form to denote its gend. pers. and num., but it always agrees with its antecedent in sense. Thus, when I say, The man who writes, who is mas. gend. and sing.; but when I say, The ladies who write, who is feminine, and plural. In order to ascertain the gend. pers. and num. of the relative, you must always look at its antecedent.
The relative pronoun doesn’t change based on gender, person, or number like a personal pronoun does. When we use a personal pronoun to talk about a man, we say he, and for a woman, we say she; when referring to one person or thing, we use a singular pronoun, and for more than one, we use a plural pronoun, and so on. But there’s no change in the relative pronoun. Who, in the first example, refers to a masculine, third-person, singular antecedent; in the second, the antecedent is feminine; in the third, it's second person; and in the fourth, it's first person plural. Yet, the relative stays the same in each case. So, you can see that the relative pronoun doesn’t have a specific form to indicate its gender, person, or number; it always matches its antecedent in meaning. For example, when I say, The man who writes, who is masculine and singular; but when I say, The ladies who write, who is feminine and plural. To determine the gender, person, and number of the relative pronoun, you always have to look at its antecedent.
WHO, WHICH, and THAT.
Who is applied to persons, which to things and brutes; as, "He is a friend who is faithful in adversity; The bird which sung so sweetly, is flown; This is the tree which produces no fruit."
Who is used for people, while which is used for things and animals; for example, "He is a friend who stays loyal in tough times; The bird which sang so sweetly has flown away; This is the tree which bears no fruit."
That is often used as a relative, to prevent the too frequent repetition of who and which. It is applied both to persons and things; as, "He that acts wisely, deserves praise; Modesty is a quality that highly adorns a woman."
That is often used as a relative pronoun to avoid repeating who and which too often. It refers to both people and things, for example, "He that acts wisely deserves praise; modesty is a quality that greatly enhances a woman."
NOTES.
1. Who should never be applied to animals. The following application of it is erroneous:—"He is like a least of prey, who destroys without pity." It should be, that destroys, &c.
1. Who should never be used for animals. The following example is incorrect:—"He is like a least of prey, who destroys without pity." It should be, that destroys, &c.
2. Who should not be applied to children. It is incorrect to say, "The child whom we have just seen," &c. It should be, "The child that we have just seen."
2. Who shouldn't be used for children. It's wrong to say, "The child whom we just saw," etc. It should be, "The child that we just saw."
3. Which may be applied to persons when we wish to distinguish one person of two, or a particular person among a number of others; as, "Which of the two? Which of them is he?"
3. Which can be used for people when we want to identify one person from two, or a specific person among many others; for example, "Which one of the two? Which one is he?"
5. That is employed after the interrogative who, in cases like the following; "Who that has any sense of religion, would have argued thus?"
5. That is used after the question word who, in situations like the following: "Who that has any sense of religion would have argued this way?"
When the word ever or soever is annexed to a relative pronoun, the combination is called a compound pronoun; as, whoever or whosoever, whichever or whichsoever, whatever or whatsoever.
When the word ever or soever is added to a relative pronoun, the combination is known as a compound pronoun; for example, whoever or whosoever, whichever or whichsoever, whatever or whatsoever.
DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
SINGULAR AND PLURAL.
Nom. | who, | Poss. | whose, | Obj. | whom. |
" | whoever, | " | whosever, | " | whomever. |
" | whosoever, | " | whosesoever, | " | whomsoever. |
Which and that are indeclinable, except that whose is sometimes used as the possessive case of which; as, "Is there any other doctrine whose followers are punished;" that is, the followers of which are punished. The use of this license has obtained among our best writers; but the construction is not to be recommended, for it is a departure from a plain principle of grammar, namely, who, whose, whom, in their applications, should be confined to rational beings.
Which and that are not changeable, except that whose is sometimes used as the possessive form of which; for example, "Is there any other doctrine whose followers are punished;" meaning the followers of which are punished. This usage has been accepted among some of our best writers; however, this construction isn't recommended, as it strays from a basic rule of grammar, specifically that who, whose, and whom should only be used for rational beings.
That may be used as a pronoun, an adjective, and a conjunction, depending on the office which it performs in the sentence.
That can be used as a pronoun, an adjective, and a conjunction, depending on its role in the sentence.
That is a relative only when it can be changed to who or which without destroying the sense; as, "They that (who) reprove us, may be our best friends; From every thing that (which) you see, derive instruction." That is a demonstrative adjective, when it belongs to, or points out, some particular noun, either expressed or implied; as, "Return that book; That belongs to me; Give me that." When that is neither a relative nor an adjective pronoun, it is a conjunction; as, "Take care that every day be well employed." The word that, in this last sentence, cannot be changed to who or which without destroying the sense, therefore you know it is not a relative pronoun; neither does it point out any particular noun, for which reason you know it is not an adjective pronoun; but it connects the sentence, therefore it is a conjunction.
That is a relative only when it can be replaced with who or which without losing the meaning; for example, "They that (who) criticize us may be our best friends; From everything that (which) you see, learn something." That is a demonstrative adjective when it refers to, or indicates, a specific noun, whether stated or implied; for instance, "Return that book; That belongs to me; Give me that." When that is neither a relative nor an adjective pronoun, it serves as a conjunction; as in, "Make sure that each day is well spent." In this last sentence, that cannot be changed to who or which without losing the meaning, so you know it’s not a relative pronoun; it also doesn’t point to any specific noun, so it’s not an adjective pronoun either; instead, it connects the sentence, making it a conjunction.
If you pay particular attention to this elucidation of the word that, you will find no difficulty in parsing it. When it is a relative or an adjective pronoun, it may be known by the signs given; and whenever these signs will not apply to it, you know it is a conjunction.
If you really focus on this explanation of the word that, you'll have no trouble understanding it. When it's a relative or adjective pronoun, you can recognize it by the signs provided; and whenever those signs don't fit, you can tell it's a conjunction.
Some writers are apt to make too free use of this word. I will give you one example of affronted that, which may serve as a caution. The tutor said, in speaking of the word that, that that that that that lady parsed, was not the that that that gentleman requested her to analyze. This sentence, though rendered inelegant by a bad choice of words, is strictly grammatical. The first that is a noun; the second, a conjunction; the third, an adjective pronoun; the fourth, a noun; the fifth, a relative pronoun; the sixth, an adjective pronoun; the seventh, a noun; the eighth, a relative pronoun; the ninth, an adjective pronoun. The meaning of the sentence will be more obvious, if rendered thus; The tutor said, in speaking of the word that, that that that which that lady parsed, was not the that which that gentleman requested her to analyze.
Some writers tend to use this word too freely. I'll give you an example of the misunderstood that, which may serve as a warning. The tutor said, while discussing the word that, that the that that that lady parsed was not the that that that gentleman asked her to analyze. This sentence, although awkward because of poor word choice, is grammatically correct. The first that is a noun; the second, a conjunction; the third, an adjective pronoun; the fourth, a noun; the fifth, a relative pronoun; the sixth, an adjective pronoun; the seventh, a noun; the eighth, a relative pronoun; the ninth, an adjective pronoun. The meaning of the sentence will be clearer if expressed like this: The tutor said, while discussing the word that, that the that that which that lady parsed was not the that which that gentleman asked her to analyze.
WHAT.
What is generally a compound relative, including both the antecedent and the relative, and is equivalent to that which; as, "This is what I wanted;" that is, that which, or, the thing which I wanted.
What is typically a compound relative, consisting of both the antecedent and the relative, and is equivalent to that which; for example, "This is what I wanted;" meaning that which or the thing that I wanted.
What is compounded of which that. These words have been contracted and made to coalesce, a part of the orthography of both being still retained: what—wh[ich—t]hat; (which-that.) Anciently it appeared in the varying forms, tha qua, qua tha, qu'tha, quthat, quhat, hwat, and finally, what.
What is made up of which that. These words have been shortened and combined, with part of the spelling of both still kept: what—wh[ich—t]hat; (which-that.) In the past, it existed in various forms like tha qua, qua tha, qu'tha, quthat, quhat, hwat, and finally, what.
What may be used as three kinds of a pronoun, and as an interjection. When it is equivalent to that which, the thing which, or those things which, it is a compound relative, because it includes both the antecedent and the relative; as, "I will try what (that which) can be found in female delicacy; What you recollect with most pleasure, are the virtuous actions of your past life;" that is, those things which you recollect, &c.
What can function as three different types of pronouns and as an interjection. When it represents that which, the thing which, or those things which, it acts as a compound relative since it combines both the antecedent and the relative; for example, "I will try what (that which) can be found in female delicacy; What you remember with the most pleasure are the virtuous actions of your past life;" meaning those things which you remember, etc.
When what is a compound relative, you must always parse it as two words; that is, you must parse the antecedent part as a noun, and give it a case; the relative part you may analyze like any other relative, giving it a case likewise. In the first of the preceding examples, that, the antecedent part of what, is in the obj. case, governed by the verb "will try;" which, the relative part, is in the nom. case to "can be found." "I have heard what (i.e. that which, or the thing which) has been alleged."
When what is a compound relative, you must always treat it as two separate words; specifically, you should interpret the antecedent part as a noun and assign it a case. You can analyze the relative part like any other relative, also giving it a case. In the first of the earlier examples, that, the antecedent part of what, is in the object case, governed by the verb "will try;" which, the relative part, is in the nominative case in relation to "can be found." "I have heard what (i.e., that which, or the thing which) has been claimed."
Whoever and whosoever are also compound relatives, and should be parsed like the compound what; as, "Whoever takes that oath, is bound to enforce the laws." In this sentence, whoever is equivalent to he who, or, the man who; thus, "He who takes that oath, is bound," &c.
Whoever and whosoever are also compound relatives and should be analyzed like the compound what; for example, "Whoever takes that oath is required to enforce the laws." In this sentence, whoever is equivalent to he who or the person who; thus, "He who takes that oath is bound," etc.
Who, which, and what, when used in asking questions, are called interrogative pronouns, or relatives of the interrogative kind; as, "Who is he? Which is the person? What are you doing?"
Who, which, and what are the interrogative pronouns used to ask questions. For example, "Who is he? Which person is it? What are you doing?"
Interrogative pronouns have no antecedent; but they relate to the word or phrase which is the answer to the question, for their subsequent; as, "Whom did you see? The preceptor. What have you done? Nothing." Antecedent and subsequent are opposed to each other in signification. Antecedent means preceding, or going before; and subsequent means following, or coming after. What, when used as an interrogative, is never compound.
Interrogative pronouns don’t have an antecedent; instead, they connect to the word or phrase that answers the question, as in, "Whom did you see? The teacher. What have you done? Nothing." Antecedent and subsequent mean the opposite of each other. Antecedent refers to something that comes first, while subsequent refers to something that comes later. What, when used as a question, is never compound.
What, which, and that, when joined to nouns, are specifying adjectives, or adjective pronouns, in which situation they have no case, but are parsed like adjective pronouns of the demonstrative or indefinite kind; as, "Unto which promise our twelve tribes hope to come;" "What misery the vicious endure! What havock hast thou made, foul monster, sin!"
What, which, and that, when used with nouns, are specifying adjectives or adjective pronouns. In this case, they don’t have a case, but they function like adjective pronouns of the demonstrative or indefinite type; for example, "To which promise our twelve tribes hope to come;" "What misery the wicked endure! What havoc have you caused, foul monster, sin!"
What and which, when joined to nouns in asking questions, are denominated interrogative pronominal adjectives; as, "What man is that? Which road did he take?"
What and which, when used with nouns to ask questions, are called interrogative pronominal adjectives; for example, "What man is that? Which road did he take?"
What, whatever, and whatsoever, which, whichever, and whichsoever, in constructions like the following, are compound pronouns, but not compound relatives; as, "In what character Butler was admitted, is unknown; Give him what name you choose; Nature's care largely endows whatever happy man will deign to use her treasures; Let him take which course, or, whichever course he will." These sentences may be rendered thus; "That character, or, the character in which Butler was admitted, is unknown; Give him that name, or, the name which you choose; Nature's care endows that happy man who will deign, &c.; Let him take that course, or the course which he will." A compound relative necessarily includes both an antecedent and a relative. These compounds, you will notice, do not include antecedents, the first part of each word being the article the, or the adjective pronoun, that; therefore they cannot properly be denominated compound relatives.—With regard to the word ever annexed to these pronouns, it is a singular fact, that, as soon as we analyze the word to which it is subjoined, ever is entirely excluded from the sentence.
What, whatever, and whatsoever, which, whichever, and whichsoever, in phrases like the following, are compound pronouns, but not compound relatives; for example, "In what character Butler was admitted, is unknown; Give him what name you choose; Nature's care largely endows whatever happy man will deign to use her treasures; Let him take which course, or, whichever course he will." These sentences can be rephrased as follows: "That character, or, the character in which Butler was admitted, is unknown; Give him that name, or, the name which you choose; Nature's care endows that happy man who will deign, &c.; Let him take that course, or the course which he will." A compound relative necessarily includes both an antecedent and a relative. You will notice that these compounds do not include antecedents, with the first part of each word being the article the, or the adjective pronoun, that; therefore they cannot properly be called compound relatives.—Regarding the word ever attached to these pronouns, it is interesting to note that as soon as we break down the word it's attached to, ever is completely excluded from the sentence.
What is sometimes used as an interjection; as, "But what! is thy servant a dog, that he should do this? What! rob us of our right of suffrage, and then shut us up in dungeons!"
What is sometimes used as an interjection; as, "But what! is your servant a dog, that he should do this? What! rob us of our right to vote, and then lock us up in dungeons!"
You have now come to the most formidable obstacle, or, if I may so speak, to the most rugged eminence in the path of grammatical science; but be not disheartened, for, if you can get safely over this, your future course will be interrupted with only here and there a gentle elevation. It will require close application, and a great deal of sober thinking, to gain a clear conception of the nature of the relative pronouns, particularly the compound relatives, which are not easily comprehended by the young learner. As this eighth lecture is a very important one, it becomes necessary for you to read it carefully four or five times over before you proceed to commit the following order. Whenever you parse, you may spread the Compendium before you, if you please.
You have now reached the toughest challenge, or, if I may say so, the steepest peak in the journey of grammar; but don’t get discouraged, because if you can get past this, your future studies will only have the occasional minor bump. It will take a lot of focus and serious thought to really understand the nature of relative pronouns, especially the compound relatives, which can be tricky for young learners to grasp. Since this eighth lecture is very important, you should read it carefully four or five times before you move on to the next section. Whenever you practice parsing, feel free to have the Compendium open in front of you.
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing a RELATIVE PRONOUN, is—a pronoun, and why?—relative, and why?—gender, person, and number, and why?—RULE:—case, and why?—RULE.—Decline it.
The order for analyzing a RELATIVE PRONOUN is—a pronoun, and why?—relative, and why?—gender, person, and number, and why?—RULE:—case, and why?—RULE.—Decline it.
"This is the man whom we saw."
"This is the man we saw."
Whom is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—relative, it relates to "man" for its antecedent—mas. gend. third pers. sing. num. because the antecedent "man" is with which it agrees, according to
Whom is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—relative, it relates to "man" for its antecedent—mas. gend. third pers. sing. num. because the antecedent "man" is with which it agrees, according to
RULE 14. Relative pronouns agree with their antecedents in gender, person, and number. Whom is in the objective case, the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive verb "saw," and governed by it, agreeably to
RULE 14. Relative pronouns match their antecedents in gender, person, and number. Whom is in the objective case, serving as the object of the action expressed by the active-transitive verb "saw," and is determined by it, in accordance with
RULE 16. When a nominative comes between the relative and the verb, the relative is governed by the following verb, or some other word in its own member of the sentence.
RULE 16. When a subject comes between the relative pronoun and the verb, the relative pronoun is controlled by the following verb or another word in its part of the sentence.
Whom, in the objective case, is placed before the verb that governs it, according to NOTE 1, under Rule 16. (Repeat the Note, and decline who.)
Whom, in the objective case, is placed before the verb that governs it, according to NOTE 1, under Rule 16. (Repeat the Note, and decline who.)
"From what is recorded, he appears," &c.
"From what is recorded, he seems," &c.
What is a comp. rel. pron. including both the antecedent and the relative, and is equivalent to that which, or the thing which—Thing, the antecedent part of what, is a noun, the name of a thing—com. the name of a species—neuter gender, it has no sex—third person, spoken of—sing. number, it implies but one—and in the obj. case, it is the object of the relation expressed by the prep. "from," and gov. by it: RULE 31. (Repeat the Rule, and every other Rule to which I refer.) Which, the relative part of what, is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—relative, it relates to "thing" for its antecedent—neut. gender, third person, sing. number, because the antecedent "thing" is with which it agrees, according to RULE 14. Rel pron. &c. Which is in the nom. case to the verb "is recorded," agreeably to
What is a complete relative pronoun that includes both the antecedent and the relative, and is equivalent to that which or the thing which—Thing, the antecedent part of what, is a noun, the name of something—common, the name of a category—neuter gender, it has no gender—third person, referring to something not specified—singular number, it implies just one—and in the objective case, it is the object of the relationship expressed by the prep. "from," and governed by it: RULE 31. (Repeat the Rule, and every other Rule to which I refer.) Which, the relative part of what, is a pronoun, a word used in place of a noun—relative, it refers back to "thing" for its antecedent—neuter gender, third person, singular number, because the antecedent "thing" is what it agrees with, according to RULE 14. Rel pron. &c. Which is in the nominative case for the verb "is recorded," according to
RULE 15. The relative is the nominative case to the verb, when no nominative comes between it and the verb.
RULE 15. The relative pronoun is in the nominative case when no nominative word comes between it and the verb.
"What have you learned? Nothing."
"What have you learned? Nothing."
What is a pron. a word used, &c.—relative of the interrogative kind, because it is used in asking a question—it refers to the word "nothing" for its subsequent, according to
What is a pronoun, a word used, etc.—related to questions, because it's used to ask something—it refers to the word "nothing" for its subsequent, according to
RULE 17. When the rel. pron. is of the interrog. kind, it refers to the word or phrase containing the answer to the question, for its subsequent, which subsequent must agree in case with the interrogative. What is of the neut. gend. third pers. sing. because the subsequent "nothing" is with which it agrees; RULE 14. Rel. pron. agree, &c.—It is in the obj. case, the object of the action, of the active-transitive verb "have learned," and gov. by it, agreeably to RULE 16. When a nom. &c. See NOTE 1, under the Rule.
RULE 17. When the relative pronoun is of the interrogative type, it refers to the word or phrase that contains the answer to the question, and its subsequent must agree in case with the interrogative. What is neuter gender, third person, singular because it agrees with the subsequent "nothing"; RULE 14. Relative pronouns agree, &c.—It is in the objective case, the object of the action of the active-transitive verb "have learned," and governed by it, according to RULE 16. When a nominative, &c. See NOTE 1, under the Rule.
NOTE. 1. You need not apply gend. pers. and numb, to the interrogative when the answer to the question is not expressed.
NOTE. 1. You don't need to use gender, person, and number in the question when the answer is not stated.
WHO, WHICH, WHAT.
Truth and simplicity are twin sisters, and generally go hand in hand. The foregoing exposition of the "relative pronouns," is in accordance with the usual method of treating them; but if they were unfolded according to their true character, they would be found to be very simple, and, doubtless, much labor and perplexity, on the part of the learner, would thereby be saved.
Truth and simplicity are like two sides of the same coin and usually go together. The previous explanation of "relative pronouns" follows the typical approach, but if they were explained in a way that reflects their true nature, they'd appear much simpler, and it would certainly save the learner a lot of effort and confusion.
Of the words called "relatives," who, only, is a pronoun; and this is strictly personal; more so, indeed, if we except I and we, than any other word in our language, for it is always restricted to persons. It ought to be classed with the personal pronouns. I, thou, he, she, it, we, ye, you, and they, relate to antecedents, as well as who. Which, that, and what, are always adjectives. They never stand for, but always belong to nouns, either expressed or implied. They specify, like many other adjectives, and connect sentences.
Of the words called "relatives," who is the only pronoun, and it's strictly personal; even more so, if we set aside I and we, than any other word in our language, because it's always limited to people. It should be grouped with the personal pronouns. I, you, he, she, it, we, you, and they refer to antecedents just like who does. Which, that, and what are always adjectives. They never represent, but always belong to nouns, either stated or implied. They specify, like many other adjectives, and connect sentences.
Who supplies the place of which or what and its personal noun. Who came? i.e. what man, what woman, what person;—which man, woman, or person, came? "They heard what I said"—they heard that (thing) which (thing) I said. "Take what (or whichever) course you please;"—take that course which (course) you please to take. "What have you done?" i.e. what thing, act, or deed have you done? "Which thing I also did at Jerusalem." "Which will you take?"—which book, hat, or something else? "This is the tree which (tree) produces no fruit." "He that (man, or which man) acts wisely, deserves praise."
Who replaces which or what and its personal noun. Who showed up? i.e. what man, what woman, what person;—which man, woman, or person, showed up? "They heard what I said"—they heard that (thing) which (thing) I said. "Take what (or whichever) path you want;"—take that path which (path) you want to take. "What have you done?" i.e. what thing, act, or deed have you done? "Which thing I also did in Jerusalem." "Which one will you choose?"—which book, hat, or something else? "This is the tree which (tree) doesn't bear any fruit." "He that (man, or which man) acts wisely, deserves praise."
They who prefer this method of treating the "relatives," are at liberty to adopt it, and parse accordingly.
Those who prefer this way of treating the "relatives" can choose to do so and analyze it accordingly.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
The man who instructs you, labors faithfully. The boy whom I instruct, learns well. The lady whose house we occupy, bestows many charities. That modesty which highly adorns a woman, she possesses. He that acts wisely deserves praise. This is the tree which produces no fruit. I believe what He says. He speaks what he knows. Whatever purifies the heart, also fortifies it. What doest[5] thou? Nothing. What book have you? A poem. Whose hat have you? John's. Who does that work? Henry. Whom seest thou? To whom gave you the present? Which pen did he take? Whom ye ignorantly worship, him declare I unto you. I heard what he said. George, you may pursue whatever science suits your taste. Eliza, take whichever pattern pleases you best. Whoever lives to see this republic forsake her moral and literary institutions, will behold her liberties prostrated. Whosoever, therefore, will be a friend of the world, is the enemy of God.
The man who teaches you works hard. The boy I'm teaching learns well. The lady whose house we're in gives to many charities. She has the modesty that truly enhances a woman. He who acts wisely deserves praise. This is the tree that bears no fruit. I believe what He says. He speaks the truth. Whatever cleanses the heart also strengthens it. What are you doing? Nothing. What book do you have? A poem. Whose hat is this? John's. Who is doing that work? Henry. Who do you see? To whom did you give the gift? Which pen did he pick? The one you worship without knowing, I declare to you. I heard what he said. George, you can study whatever subject you enjoy. Eliza, choose whichever pattern you like best. Anyone who lives to see this republic abandon its moral and literary values will see its freedoms destroyed. Therefore, anyone who wants to be a friend of the world is an enemy of God.
NOTE. The nominative case is frequently placed after the verb, and the objective case, before the verb that governs it. Whom, in every sentence except one, house, modesty, book, hat, pen, him, the third what and which, the relative part of the first two whats, are all in the objective case, and governed by the several verbs that follow them. See RULE 16, and NOTE 1. Tree is nom. after is, according to RULE 21. Thing, the antecedent part of whatever, is nom. to "fortifies;" which, the relative part, is nom. to "purifies." Nothing is governed by do, and poem, by have, understood. Henry is nominative to does, understood. Whose and John's are governed according to RULE 12. I, thou, you, him, &c. represent nouns understood. Him, in the last sentence but five, is governed by declare, and I is nominative to declare. George and Eliza are in the nominative case independent: Rule 5. "Whatever science," &c. is equivalent to, that science which suits your taste;—"whichever pattern;" i.e. that pattern which pleases you best. Whoever is a compound relative; he, the antecedent part, is nominative to "will behold." Take agrees with you understood. Forsake is in the infinitive mood after "see:" Rule 25.
NOTE. The nominative case often comes after the verb, while the objective case is placed before the verb it connects to. Whom, in all but one sentence, house, modesty, book, hat, pen, him, the third what and which, along with the relative parts of the first two whats, are all in the objective case, governed by the various verbs that follow them. See RULE 16, and NOTE 1. Tree is nominative after is, according to RULE 21. Thing, the antecedent part of whatever, is nominative to "fortifies;" which, the relative part, is nominative to "purifies." Nothing is governed by do, and poem is governed by have, understood. Henry is nominative to does, understood. Whose and John's are governed according to RULE 12. I, thou, you, him, etc., represent nouns that are understood. Him, in the last sentence but five, is governed by declare, while I is nominative to declare. George and Eliza are in the nominative case independently: Rule 5. "Whatever science," etc., means that science which fits your taste;—"whichever pattern," meaning that pattern which you like best. Whoever is a compound relative; he, the antecedent part, is nominative to "will behold." Take agrees with you understood. Forsake is in the infinitive mood after "see:" Rule 25.
REMARKS ON RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Which sometimes relates to a member of a sentence, or to a whole sentence, for its antecedent: as, "We are required to fear God and keep his commandments, which is the whole duty of man." What is the whole duty of man? "To fear God and keep his commandments:" therefore, this phrase is the antecedent to which.
Which can sometimes refer to a part of a sentence or the entire sentence for its antecedent: for example, "We are required to fear God and keep his commandments, which is the whole duty of man." So, what is the whole duty of man? "To fear God and keep his commandments:" therefore, this phrase is the antecedent to which.
The conjunction as, when it follows such, many, or same, is frequently denominated a relative pronoun; as, "I am pleased with such as have a refined taste;" that is, with those who, or them who have, &c. "Let such as presume to advise others, look well to their own conduct;" that is, Let those, or them who presume, &c. "As many as were ordained to eternal life, believed;" that is, they, those, or all who were ordained, believed. "He exhibited the same testimonials as were adduced on a former occasion;" that is, those testimonials which were adduced, &c. But, in examples like these, if we supply the ellipsis which a critical analysis requires us to do, as will be found to be a conjunction; thus, "I am pleased with such persons, as those persons are who have a refined taste; Let such persons, as those persons are who presume," &c.
The conjunction as, when it follows such, many, or same, is often referred to as a relative pronoun; for example, "I am pleased with such as have a refined taste;" meaning, those who, or them who have, etc. "Let such as presume to advise others, look well to their own conduct;" which means, Let those, or them who presume, etc. "As many as were ordained to eternal life, believed;" meaning, they, those, or all who were ordained, believed. "He exhibited the same testimonials as were presented on a previous occasion;" meaning, those testimonials that were presented, etc. However, in examples like these, if we fill in the gap that a detailed analysis requires, as will be found to be a conjunction; so, "I am pleased with such persons, as those persons are who have a refined taste; Let such persons, as those persons are who presume," etc.
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
From what words is the term pronoun derived?—Do pronouns always avoid the repetition of nouns?—Name the three kinds of pronouns.—What distinguishes the personal from the relative pronouns?—How many personal pronouns are there?—Repeat them.—What belong to pronouns?—Is gender applied to all the personal pronouns?—To which of them is it applied?—Which of the personal pronouns have no peculiar termination to denote their gender?—How many persons have pronouns?—Speak them in their different persons.—How many numbers have pronouns?—How many cases?—What are they?—Decline all the personal pronouns.—When self is added to the personal pronouns, what are they called, and how are they used?—When is you singular in sense?—Is it ever singular in form?—Why are the words, my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, called personal pronouns?—Why are the words, mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, denominated compound pers. pron.?—How do you parse these compounds?—What is said of others?—Repeat the order of parsing a personal pronoun.—What rule do you apply in parsing a pronoun of the first person, and in the nom. case?—What rule when the pronoun is in the possessive case?—What Rules apply in parsing personal pronouns of the second and third person?—What Rules in parsing the compounds, yours, ours, mine, &c.?—What is said of the pronoun it?
From what words is the term "pronoun" derived?—Do pronouns always avoid repeating nouns?—Name the three types of pronouns.—What distinguishes personal pronouns from relative pronouns?—How many personal pronouns are there?—List them.—What belongs to pronouns?—Is gender applied to all personal pronouns?—To which ones is it applied?—Which personal pronouns do not have a specific ending to show their gender?—How many persons have pronouns?—State them in their different persons.—How many numbers do pronouns have?—How many cases?—What are they?—Decline all the personal pronouns.—When self is added to personal pronouns, what are they called and how are they used?—When is you singular in meaning?—Is it ever singular in form?—Why are the words my, thy, his, her, our, your, their called personal pronouns?—Why are mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs called compound personal pronouns?—How do you parse these compounds?—What is said about others?—Repeat the order of parsing a personal pronoun.—What rule do you apply when parsing a first-person pronoun in the nominative case?—What rule when the pronoun is in the possessive case?—What rules apply when parsing personal pronouns in the second and third person?—What rules apply when parsing the compounds yours, ours, mine, etc.?—What is said about the pronoun it?
What are adjective pronouns?—Name the three kinds.—What does each relate to?—To what does every relate?—To what does either relate?—What does neither import?—To what do this and these refer?—Give examples.—To what do that and those refer?—Give examples.—Repeat all the adjective pronouns.—When adj. pronouns belong to nouns understood, how are they parsed?—When they stand for, or represent nouns, what are they called?—Give examples.—Repeat the order of parsing an adj. pronoun.—What Rule do you apply in parsing the indefinite adjective pronouns?—What Notes, in parsing the distributives and demonstratives?
What are adjective pronouns?—Name the three types.—What does each refer to?—What does every refer to?—What does either refer to?—What does neither mean?—What do this and these refer to?—Give examples.—What do that and those refer to?—Give examples.—Repeat all the adjective pronouns.—When adjective pronouns refer to understood nouns, how are they parsed?—When they represent nouns, what are they called?—Give examples.—Repeat the order of parsing an adjective pronoun.—What rule do you use when parsing the indefinite adjective pronouns?—What notes apply when parsing the distributives and demonstratives?
What are relative pronouns?—Repeat them.—From what words is the term antecedent derived?—What does antecedent mean?—Are relatives varied on account of gender, person, or number?—To what are who and which applied?—To what is that applied?—Should who ever be applied to irrational beings or children?—In what instances may which be applied to persons?—Decline the rel. pronouns.—Can which and that be declined?—Is that ever used as three parts of speech?—Give examples.—What part of speech is the word what?—Is what ever used as three kinds of a pronoun?—Give examples.—What is said of whoever?—What words are used as interrogative pronouns?—Give examples.—When are the words, what, which, and that, called adj. pron.?—When are they called interrogative pronominal adjectives?—What is said of whatever and whichever?—Is what ever used as an interjection?—Give examples.—Repeat the order of parsing a rel. pron.—What Rules do you apply in parsing a relative?—What Rules in parsing a compound relative?—What Rules in parsing an interrogative?—Does the relative which ever relate to a sentence for its antecedent?—When does the conjunction as become a relative?—Give examples.
What are relative pronouns? — Repeat them. — From what words is the term antecedent derived? — What does antecedent mean? — Are relatives affected by gender, person, or number? — To what are who and which applied? — To what is that applied? — Should who ever be applied to non-human beings or children? — In what instances may which be applied to people? — Decline the relative pronouns. — Can which and that be declined? — Is that ever used as three parts of speech? — Give examples. — What part of speech is the word what? — Is what ever used as three types of pronouns? — Give examples. — What is said about whoever? — What words are used as interrogative pronouns? — Give examples. — When are the words what, which, and that called adjective pronouns? — When are they called interrogative pronominal adjectives? — What is said about whatever and whichever? — Is what ever used as an interjection? — Give examples. — Repeat the order of analyzing a relative pronoun. — What rules do you apply in analyzing a relative? — What rules in analyzing a compound relative? — What rules in analyzing an interrogative? — Does the relative which ever relate to a sentence for its antecedent? — When does the conjunction as become a relative? — Give examples.
EXERCISES IN FALSE SYNTAX.
NOTE 1, to RULE 13. When a noun or pronoun is the subject of a verb, it must be in the nominative case.
NOTE 1, to RULE 13. When a noun or pronoun is the subject of a verb, it must be in the nominative case.
Who will go? Him and I. How does thee do? Is thee well?
Who will go? Him and me. How are you? Are you well?
"Him and I;" not proper, because the pronoun him is the subject of the verb will go understood, therefore him should be in the nominative case, he, according to the above NOTE. (Repeat the NOTE.) Him and I are connected by the conjunction and, and him is in the obj. case, and I in the nom., therefore RULE 33d, is violated. (Repeat the Rule.) In the second and third examples, thee should be thou, according to the NOTE. The verbs, does and is, are of the third person, and the nom. thou is second, for which reason the verbs should be of the second person, dost do and art, agreeably to RULE 4. You may correct the other examples, four times over.
"Him and I" isn't correct because the pronoun him is the subject of the verb will go that is implied, so him should be in the nominative case, he, according to the above NOTE. (Repeat the NOTE.) Him and I are linked by the conjunction and, and him is in the object case, while I is in the nominative, which means RULE 33d is violated. (Repeat the Rule.) In the second and third examples, thee should be thou, based on the NOTE. The verbs, does and is, are in the third person, while the nominative thou is in the second, so the verbs should be in the second person, dost do and art, according to RULE 4. You can correct the other examples four times over.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Him and me went to town yesterday. Thee must be attentive. Him who is careless, will not improve. They can write as well as me. This is the man whom was expected. Her and I deserve esteem. I have made greater proficiency than him. Whom, of all my acquaintances, do you think was there? Whom, for the sake of his important services, had an office of honor bestowed upon him.
He and I went to town yesterday. You must pay attention. Someone who is careless will not improve. They can write as well as I can. This is the man who was expected. She and I deserve respect. I have made more progress than he has. Who, out of all my acquaintances, do you think was there? Who, for the sake of his important services, had an honorary office given to him?
NOTE 2, to RULE 13. Personal pronouns being used to supply the place of nouns, should not be employed in the same member of the sentence with the noun which they represent.
NOTE 2, to RULE 13. Personal pronouns used to replace nouns should not be used in the same part of the sentence as the noun they refer to.
FALSE SYNTAX.
The men they are there. I saw him the king. Our cause it is just. Many words they darken speech. That noble general who had gained so many victories, he died, at last, in prison. Who, instead of going about doing good, they are continually doing evil.
The men are here. I saw the king. Our cause is just. Many words cloud the message. That noble general, who won so many victories, finally died in prison. Instead of doing good, they keep doing harm.
In each of the preceding examples, the personal pronoun should be omitted, according to Note 2.
In each of the previous examples, the personal pronoun should be left out, according to Note 2.
NOTE 3, to RULE 13. A personal pronoun in the objective case, should not be used instead of these and those.
NOTE 3, to RULE 13. A personal pronoun in the objective case should not be used instead of these and those.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Remove them papers from the desk. Give me them books. Give them men their discharge. Observe them three there. Which of them two persons deserves most credit?
Remove those papers from the desk. Give me those books. Give those men their discharge. Look at those three over there. Which of those two individuals deserves the most credit?
In all these examples, those should be used in place of them. The use of the personal, them, in such constructions, presents two objectives after one verb or preposition. This is a solecism which may be avoided by employing an adjective pronoun in its stead.
In all these examples, those should be used instead of them. Using the personal pronoun, them, in these cases creates two objects after one verb or preposition. This is a mistake that can be avoided by using an adjective pronoun instead.
LECTURE IX.
OF CONJUNCTIONS.
A CONJUNCTION is a part of speech that is chiefly used to connect sentences, joining two or more simple sentences into one compound sentence: it sometimes connects only words; as, "Thou and he are happy, because you are good."
A CONJUNCTION is a part of speech mainly used to link sentences, combining two or more simple sentences into one compound sentence; it can also connect just words, like in "You and he are happy, because you are good."
Conjunctions are those parts of language, which, by joining sentences in different ways, mark the connexions and various dependances of human thought. They belong to language only in its refined state.
Conjunctions are the parts of language that connect sentences in various ways, highlighting the relationships and dependencies of human thought. They exist in language only in its more developed form.
The term CONJUNCTION comes from the two Latin words, con, which signifies together, and jungo, to join. A conjunction, then, is a word that conjoins, or joins together something. Before you can fully comprehend the nature and office of this sort of words, it is requisite that you should know what is meant by a sentence, a simple sentence, and a compound sentence, for conjunctions are chiefly used to connect sentences.
The term CONJUNCTION comes from the two Latin words, con, which means together, and jungo, which means to join. A conjunction is a word that connects or joins together things. Before you can fully understand what conjunctions are and what they do, you need to know what a sentence, a simple sentence, and a compound sentence are, since conjunctions are mainly used to connect sentences.
A SIMPLE SENTENCE contains but one subject, or nominative, and one verb which agrees with that nominative; as, "Wheat grows in the field."
A SIMPLE SENTENCE has only one subject and one verb that matches that subject; for example, "Wheat grows in the field."
You perceive that this sentence contains several words besides the nominative and the verb, and you will often see a simple sentence containing many parts of speech; but, if it has only one nominative and one finite verb, (that is, a verb not in the infinitive mood,) it is a simple sentence, though it is longer than many compound sentences.
You notice that this sentence has several words besides the subject and the verb, and you will often find a simple sentence with many parts of speech; however, if it has only one subject and one finite verb (which means a verb not in the infinitive form), it’s still a simple sentence, even if it’s longer than many compound sentences.
A COMPOUND SENTENCE is composed of two or more simple sentences connected together; as, "Wheat grows in the field, and men reap it."
A COMPOUND SENTENCE is made up of two or more simple sentences linked together; for example, "Wheat grows in the field, and men reap it."
This sentence is compound, because it is formed of two simple sentences joined together by the word and; which word, on account of its connecting power, is called a conjunction. If we write this sentence without the conjunction, it becomes two simple sentences: thus, "Wheat grows in the field. Men reap it."
This sentence is compound because it consists of two simple sentences connected by the word and; this word, due to its ability to connect, is called a conjunction. If we write this sentence without the conjunction, it turns into two simple sentences: "Wheat grows in the field. Men reap it."
The nature and importance of the conjunction, are easily illustrated. After expressing one thought or sentiment, you know we frequently wish to add another, or several others, which are closely connected with it. We generally effect this addition by means of the conjunction: thus, "The Georgians cultivate rice and cotton;" that is, "They cultivate rice add cotton." This sentence is compound, and without the use of the conjunction, it would be written in two separate, simple sentences: thus, "The Georgians cultivate rice. They cultivate cotton." The conjunction, though chiefly used to connect sentences, sometimes connects only words; in which capacity it is nearly allied to the preposition; as, "The sun and (add) the planets constitute the solar system." In this, which is a simple sentence, and connects two words.
The nature and importance of conjunctions are easy to understand. After sharing one thought or feeling, we often want to add another or several related ones. We typically do this using conjunctions: for example, "The Georgians cultivate rice and cotton;" which means "They cultivate rice add cotton." This sentence is compound, and without the conjunction, it would be written as two separate, simple sentences: "The Georgians cultivate rice. They cultivate cotton." While conjunctions are mostly used to connect sentences, they can also connect just words; in this role, they are closely related to prepositions, as in "The sun and (add) the planets make up the solar system." In this simple sentence, and connects two words.
A few more examples will illustrate the nature, and exhibit the use of this part of speech so clearly, as to enable you fully to comprehend it. The following simple sentences and members of sentences, have no relation to each other until they are connected by conjunctions. He labors harder—more successfully—I do. That man is healthy—he is temperate. By filling up the vacancies in these sentences with conjunctions, you will see the importance of this sort of words: thus, He labors harder and more successfully than I do. That man is healthy because he is temperate.
A few more examples will clarify the nature of this part of speech and show how it's used so clearly that you'll be able to fully understand it. The following simple sentences and parts of sentences have no relation to each other until they're connected by conjunctions. He works harder—more successfully—I do. That guy is healthy—he is self-disciplined. By filling in the gaps in these sentences with conjunctions, you'll see how important these words are: so, He works harder and more successfully than I do. That guy is healthy because he is self-disciplined.
Conjunctions are divided into two sorts, the Copulative and Disjunctive.
Conjunctions are categorized into two types: Copulative and Disjunctive.
I. The Conjunction Copulative serves to connect and continue a sentence by joining on a member which expresses an addition, a supposition, or a cause; as, "Two and three are five; I will go if he will accompany me; You are happy because you are good."
I. The conjunction Copulative connects and extends a sentence by linking a part that indicates an addition, a condition, or a reason; for example, "Two and three are five; I will go if he comes with me; You are happy because you are good."
In the first of these examples, and joins on a word that expresses an addition; in the second, if connects a member that implies a supposition or condition; and in the third, because connects a member that expresses a cause.
In the first example, and connects a word that indicates an addition; in the second, if links a part that suggests a supposition or condition; and in the third, because connects a part that conveys a cause.
II. The Conjunction Disjunctive serves to connect and continue a sentence by joining on a member that expresses opposition of meaning; as, "They came with her, but they went away without her."
II. The conjunction disjunctive is used to connect and extend a sentence by linking to a part that expresses opposing meanings; for example, "They came with her, but they went away without her."
But joins on a member of this sentence which expresses, not only something added, but, also, opposition of meaning.
But connects to a part of this sentence that conveys not just something additional, but also, contradiction of meaning.
The principal conjunctions, may be known by the following lists, which you may now commit to memory. Some words in these lists, are, however, frequently used as adverbs, and sometimes as prepositions; but if you study well the nature of all the different sorts of words, you cannot be at a loss to tell the part of speech of any word in the language.
The main conjunctions can be identified by the following lists, which you can now memorize. Some words in these lists are often used as adverbs and sometimes as prepositions; but if you understand the nature of all the different types of words, you won’t have any trouble identifying the part of speech of any word in the language.
LISTS OF THE CONJUNCTIONS.
Copulative. And, if, that, both, then, since, for, because, therefore, wherefore, provided, besides.
Copulative. And, if, that, both, then, since, for, because, therefore, wherefore, provided, besides.
Disjunctive. But, or, nor, as, than, lest, though, unless, either, neither, yet, notwithstanding, nevertheless, except, whether, whereas, as well as.
Disjunctive. But, or, nor, as, than, lest, though, unless, either, neither, yet, notwithstanding, nevertheless, except, whether, whereas, as well as.
Some conjunctions are followed by corresponding conjunctions, so that, in the subsequent member of the sentence, the latter answers to the former; as,
Some conjunctions are followed by related conjunctions, so that in the next part of the sentence, the second one corresponds to the first; for example,
1. Though—yet or nevertheless; as, "Though he was rich, yet for our sakes he became poor."
1. Though—yet or nevertheless; for example, "Though he was wealthy, yet for our sake he became poor."
2. Whether—or; as, "Whether he will go, or not, I cannot tell." It is improper to say, "Whether he will go or no."
2. Whether—or; as, "Whether he will go, or not, I cannot tell." It is incorrect to say, "Whether he will go or no."
3. Either—or; as, "I will either send it, or bring it myself."
3. Either—or; for example, "I will either send it, or bring it myself."
4. Neither—nor; as, "Neither thou nor I can comprehend it."
4. Neither—nor; as, "Neither you nor I can understand it."
5. As—as; as, "She is as amiable as her sister."
She is as friendly as her sister.
6. As—so; as, "As the stars, so shall thy seed be."
6. As—so; as, "As the stars, so will your descendants be."
7. So—as; as, "To see thy glory, so as I have seen thee in the sanctuary."
7. So—as; as, "To see your glory, so as I have seen you in the sanctuary."
8. So—that; as, "He became so vain, that everyone disliked him."
8. So—that; as, "He became so conceited, that everyone disliked him."
NOTES.
1. Some conjunctions are used to connect simple sentences only, and form them into compound sentences; such as, further, again, besides, &c. Others are employed to connect simple members only, so as to make them compound members; such as, than, lest, unless, that, so that, if, though, yet, because, as well as, &c. But, and, therefore, or, nor, for, &c., connect either whole sentences, or simple members.
1. Some conjunctions are used to connect simple sentences only and turn them into compound sentences, like further, again, besides, etc. Others are used to connect simple members only, making them compound members, like than, lest, unless, that, so that, if, though, yet, because, as well as, etc. But, and, therefore, or, nor, for, etc., connect either whole sentences or simple members.
2. Relative pronouns, as well as conjunctions, serve to connect sentences; as, "Blessed is the man who feareth the Lord, and keepeth his commandments."
2. Relative pronouns, like conjunctions, connect sentences; for example, "Blessed is the man who fears the Lord, and keeps his commandments."
You will now please to turn back and read this lecture four or five times over; and then, after committing the following order, you may parse the subsequent exercises.
You are now requested to go back and read this lecture four or five times; and then, after memorizing the following order, you can work on the upcoming exercises.
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing a CONJUNCTION, is—a conjunction, and why?—copulative or disjunctive, and why?—what does it connect?
The sequence for analyzing a CONJUNCTION is—a conjunction, and why?—is it copulative or disjunctive, and why?—what does it link?
"Wisdom and virtue form the good man's character."
"Wisdom and virtue shape a good person's character."
And is a conjunction, a word that is chiefly used to connect sentences; but in this example it connects only words—copulative, it serves to connect and continue the sentence by joining on a member which expresses an addition—it connects the words "wisdom and virtue."
And is a conjunction, a word mainly used to connect sentences; but in this example, it connects only words—it's a copulative that helps to link and extend the sentence by adding on a part that expresses an addition—it links the words "wisdom and virtue."
Wisdom is a noun, the name of a thing—(You may parse it in full.)—Wisdom is one of the nominatives to the verb "form."
Wisdom is a noun, the name of a thing—(You may break it down completely.)—Wisdom is one of the subjects of the verb "form."
Virtue is a noun, the name, &c.—(Parse it in full:)—and in the nom. case to the verb "form," and connected to the noun "wisdom" by and, according to RULE 33. Conjunctions connect nouns and pronouns in the same case.
Virtue is a noun, the name, etc.—(Parse it in full:)—and in the nominative case to the verb "form," and linked to the noun "wisdom" by and, according to RULE 33. Conjunctions connect nouns and pronouns in the same case.
Form is a verb, a word which signifies to do, &c.—of the third person, plural, because its two nominatives, "wisdom and virtue," are connected by a copulative conjunction, agreeably to RULE 8. Two or more nouns in the singular number, joined by copulative conjunctions, must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns agreeing with them in the plural.
Form is a verb, meaning to do, etc.—in the third person, plural, because its two subjects, "wisdom and virtue," are linked by a conjunction, in accordance with RULE 8. Two or more singular nouns connected by conjunctions must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns that agree with them in the plural.
"Wisdom or folly governs us."
"Wisdom or foolishness governs us."
Or is a conjunction, a word that is chiefly used to connect sentences: it sometimes connects words—disjunctive, it serves not only to connect and continue the sentence, but also to join on a member which expresses opposition of meaning—it connects the nouns "wisdom and folly."
Or is a conjunction, a word that is mainly used to connect sentences; it sometimes connects words—disjunctively, it not only helps to connect and continue the sentence but also links a part that expresses opposing meanings—it connects the nouns "wisdom and folly."
Governs is a verb, a word that signifies, &c.—of the third person, singular number, agreeing with "wisdom or folly," according to RULE 9. Two or more nouns singular, joined by disjunctive conjunctions, must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns agreeing with them in the singular:
Governs is a verb, a word that means, &c.—in the third person, singular form, matching with "wisdom or folly," as per RULE 9. Two or more singular nouns, connected by disjunctive conjunctions, must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns that match them in the singular:
If you reflect, for a few moments, on the meaning of me last two Rules presented, you will see, at once, their propriety and importance. For example; in the sentence, "Orlando and Thomas, who study their lessons, make rapid progress," you notice that the two singular nouns, Orlando and Thomas, are connected by the copulative conjunction and, therefore the verb make, which agrees with them, is plural, because it expresses the action of both its nominatives or actors. And you observe, too, that the pronouns who and their, and the noun lessons, are plural, agreeing with the nouns Orlando and Thomas, according to RULE 8. The verb study is plural, agreeing with who, according to RULE 4.
If you take a moment to think about the meaning of the last two rules presented, you'll immediately see their relevance and significance. For instance, in the sentence, "Orlando and Thomas, who study their lessons, make rapid progress," you can see that the two singular nouns, Orlando and Thomas, are linked by the conjunction and, so the verb make, which corresponds to them, is plural because it reflects the action of both subjects. You also notice that the pronouns who and their, along with the noun lessons, are plural, in agreement with the nouns Orlando and Thomas, according to RULE 8. The verb study is plural, matching who, as stated in RULE 4.
But let us connect these two nouns by a disjunctive conjunction, and see how the sentence will read: "Orlando or Thomas, who studies his lesson, makes rapid progress." Now, you perceive, that a different construction takes place, for the latter expression does not imply, that Orlando and Thomas, both study and make rapid progress; but it asserts, that either the one or the other studies, and makes rapid progress. Hence the verb makes is singular, because it expresses the action of the one or the other of its nominatives. And you observe, too, that the pronouns who and his, and the noun lesson, are likewise in the singular, agreeing with Orlando or Thomas, agreeably to RULE 9. Studies is also singular, agreeing with who, according to RULE 4.
But let’s link these two nouns with a disjunctive conjunction and see how the sentence sounds: "Orlando or Thomas, who studies his lesson, makes rapid progress." Now, you can see that a different structure is at play because the second part doesn’t mean that Orlando and Thomas both study and make rapid progress; it states that either one or the other studies and makes rapid progress. So, the verb makes is singular since it reflects the action of either one or the other of its subjects. You can also notice that the pronouns who and his, and the noun lesson, are also in the singular, matching with Orlando or Thomas, in line with RULE 9. Studies is also singular, matching with who, according to RULE 4.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Joseph and his brother reside in New York. The Sun, moon, and stars, admonish us of a superior and superintending Power. I respect my friend, because he is upright and obliging. Henry and William, who obey their teacher, improve rapidly. Henry or William, who obeys his teacher, improves very fast. Neither rank nor possession makes the guilty mind happy. Wisdom, virtue, and meekness, form the good man's happiness and interest: they support him in adversity, and comfort him in prosperity. Man is a little lower than the angels. The United States, as justly as Great Britain, can now boast of their literary institutions.
Joseph and his brother live in New York. The sun, moon, and stars remind us of a higher power watching over us. I value my friend because he is honest and helpful. Henry and William, who listen to their teacher, are improving quickly. Whether it's Henry or William, whoever pays attention to their teacher learns fast. Neither status nor wealth brings happiness to a guilty mind. Wisdom, virtue, and humility create a good person's happiness and well-being: they support him during tough times and bring him comfort in good times. People are a little lower than the angels. The United States can proudly claim its literary institutions, just like Great Britain.
NOTE. The verb form is plural, and agrees with three nouns singular, connected by copulative conjunctions, according to RULE 8. The verb comfort agrees with they for its nominative. It is connected to support by the conjunction and, agreeably to RULE 34. Angels is nom. to are understood, and Great Britain is nom. to can boast understood, according to RULE 35.
NOTE. The verb form is plural and matches three singular nouns that are connected by conjunctions, following RULE 8. The verb comfort corresponds with they as its nominative. It is linked to support by the conjunction and, in accordance with RULE 34. Angels is the subject for the understood are, and Great Britain is the subject for the understood can boast, as per RULE 35.
REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS AND PREPOSITIONS.
The same word is occasionally employed, either as a conjunction, an adverb, or a preposition. "I submitted, for it was in vain to resist;" in this example, for is a conjunction, because it connects the two members of a compound sentence. In the next it is a preposition, and governs victory in the objective case: "He contended for victory only."
The same word is sometimes used as a conjunction, an adverb, or a preposition. "I submitted, for it was pointless to resist;" in this example, for is a conjunction because it connects the two parts of a compound sentence. In the next example, it functions as a preposition, governing victory in the objective case: "He contended for victory only."
In the first of the following sentences, since is a conjunction; in the second, it is a preposition, and in the third, an adverb; "Since we must part, let us do it peaceably; I have not seen him since that time; Our friendship commenced long since."
In the first of the following sentences, since is a conjunction; in the second, it's a preposition, and in the third, an adverb; "Since we have to part, let’s do it peacefully; I haven’t seen him since that time; Our friendship started long since."
"He will repent before he dies; Stand before me; Why did you not return before" [that or this time;] in the first of these three examples, before is an adverbial conjunction, because it expresses time and connects; and in the second and third, it is a preposition.
"He will regret before he dies; Stand before me; Why didn’t you come back before" [that or this time;] in the first of these three examples, before is an adverbial conjunction because it expresses time and connects; and in the second and third, it is a preposition.
As the words of a sentence are often transposed, so are also its members. Without attending to this circumstance, the learner may sometimes be at a loss to perceive the connecting power of a preposition or conjunction, for every preposition and every conjunction connects either words or phrases, sentences or members of sentences. Whenever a sentence begins with a preposition or conjunction, its members are transposed; as, "In the days of Joram, king of Israel, flourished the prophet Elisha;" "If thou seek the Lord, he will be found of thee; but, if thou forsake him, he will cast thee off for ever."
As the words in a sentence can often be rearranged, so can its components. Without considering this, a learner might sometimes struggle to understand the connecting role of a preposition or conjunction because each preposition and conjunction connects either words, phrases, sentences, or parts of sentences. When a sentence starts with a preposition or conjunction, its components are rearranged; for example, "In the days of Joram, king of Israel, the prophet Elisha flourished;" "If you seek the Lord, He will be found by you; but, if you forsake Him, He will cast you off forever."
That the words in, if, and when, in these examples, connect the members of the respective sentences to which they are attached, will obviously appear if we restore these sentences to their natural order, and bring these particles between the members which they connect: thus, "Elisha the prophet flourished in the days of Joram, king of Israel;" "The Lord will be found of thee if thou seek him; but he will cast thee off for ever if thou forsake him:"
That the words in, if, and when in these examples link the different parts of the sentences they belong to is clear when we rearrange the sentences to their natural order and place these words between the parts they connect: for example, "Elisha the prophet thrived in the days of Joram, king of Israel;" "The Lord will be found by you if you seek him; but he will reject you forever if you turn away from him:"
As an exercise on this lecture, you may now answer these
As an exercise for this lecture, you can now answer these
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
From what words is the term conjunction derived?—What is a sentence?—What is a simple sentence?—What is a compound sentence?—Give examples.—In what respect do conjunctions and prepositions agree in their nature?—How many sorts of conjunctions are there?—Repeat the lists of conjunctions.—Repeat some conjunctions with their corresponding conjunctions.—Do relative pronouns ever connect sentences?—Repeat the order of parsing a conjunction.—Do you apply any Rule in parsing a conjunction?—What Rule should be applied in parsing a noun or pronoun connected with another?—What Rule in parsing a verb agreeing with two or more nouns singular, connected by a copulative conjunction?—What Rule when the nouns are connected by a disjunctive?—In parsing a verb connected to another by a conjunction, what Rule do you apply?—Is a conjunction ever used as other parts of speech?—Give examples.—What is said of the words for, since, and before?—What is said of the transposition of sentences?
From what words is the term conjunction derived?—What is a sentence?—What is a simple sentence?—What is a compound sentence?—Give examples.—In what way do conjunctions and prepositions share similarities?—How many types of conjunctions are there?—List the conjunctions.—List some conjunctions along with their matching counterparts.—Do relative pronouns ever link sentences?—What is the order for parsing a conjunction?—Do you follow any rule when parsing a conjunction?—What rule should be applied when parsing a noun or pronoun linked with another?—What rule applies when parsing a verb that agrees with two or more singular nouns connected by a copulative conjunction?—What rule when the nouns are linked by a disjunctive?—In parsing a verb connected to another by a conjunction, what rule do you use?—Can a conjunction ever be used as other parts of speech?—Give examples.—What is said about the words for, since, and before?—What is mentioned regarding the rearrangement of sentences?
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
On scientific principles, our connectives, commonly denominated prepositions and conjunctions, are but one part of speech, the distinction between them being merely technical. Some conjunctions unite only words, and some prepositions connect sentences. They are derived from nouns and verbs; and the time has been, when, perhaps, in our language, they did not perform the office of connectives.
On scientific principles, our connectives, commonly known as prepositions and conjunctions, are really just one part of speech, with the difference between them being purely technical. Some conjunctions only link words, while some prepositions connect entire sentences. They come from nouns and verbs; and there was a time when, perhaps, they did not serve as connectives in our language.
"I wish you to believe, that I would not wilfully hurt a fly." Here, in the opinion of H. Tooke, our modern conjunction that, is merely a demonstrative adjective, in a disguised form; and he attempts to prove it by the following resolution: "I would not wilfully hurt a fly. I wish you to believe that [assertion."] Now, if we admit, that that is an adjective in the latter construction, it does not necessarily follow, that it is the same part of speech, nor that its associated meaning is precisely the same, in the former construction. Instead of expressing our ideas in two detached sentences, by the former phraseology we have a quicker and closer transition of thought, and both the mode of employing that, and its inferential meaning, are changed. Moreover, if we examine the meaning of each of these constructions, taken as a whole, we shall find, that they do not both convey the same ideas. By the latter, I assert, positively, that "I would not wilfully hurt a fly:" whereas, by the former, I merely wish you to believe that "I would not wilfully hurt a fly;" but I do not affirm, that as a fact.
"I want you to believe that I wouldn’t intentionally hurt a fly." Here, according to H. Tooke, our modern conjunction "that" is simply a disguised demonstrative adjective, and he tries to prove this with the following statement: "I would not intentionally hurt a fly. I want you to believe that [assertion]." Now, if we accept that "that" is an adjective in the second statement, it doesn’t necessarily mean it is the same part of speech, nor that its associated meaning is exactly the same, in the first statement. Instead of expressing our ideas in two separate sentences, the first phrasing allows for a quicker and more direct transition of thought, and both the way we use "that" and its inferred meaning have changed. Additionally, if we look at the meaning of each of these constructions as a whole, we will find that they do not both convey the same ideas. In the second statement, I assert, clearly, that "I would not intentionally hurt a fly;" whereas, in the first, I only wish you to believe that "I would not intentionally hurt a fly;" but I do not affirm it as a fact.
That being the past part, of thean, to get, take, assume, by rendering it as a participle, instead of an adjective, we should come nearer to its primitive character. Thus, "I would not wilfully hurt a fly. I wish you to believe the assumed [fact or statement;] or, the fact assumed or taken."
That being the past part of thean, meaning to get, take, or assume, when we use it as a participle instead of an adjective, we get closer to its original meaning. So, "I wouldn't intentionally hurt a fly. I want you to believe the assumed [fact or statement;] or, the fact assumed or taken."
If, (formerly written gif, give, gin,) as previously stated, is the imperative of the Anglo-Saxon verb gifan, to give. In imitation of Horne Tooke, some of our modern philosophical writers are inclined to teach pupils to render it as a verb. Thus, "I will go, if he will accompany me:"—"He will accompany me. Grant—give that [fact] I will go." For the purpose of ascertaining the primitive meaning of this word, I have no objection to such a resolution; but, by it, do we get the exact meaning and force of if as it is applied in our modern, refined state of the language? I trow not. But, admitting we do, does this prove that such a mode of resolving sentences can be advantageously adopted by learners in common schools? I presume it can not be denied, that instead of teaching the learner to express himself correctly in modern English, such a resolution is merely making him familiar with an ancient and barbarous construction which modern refinement has rejected. Our forefathers, I admit, who were governed by those laws of necessity which compel all nations in the early and rude state of their language, to express themselves in short, detached sentences, employed if as a verb when they used the following circumlocution: "My son will reform. Give that fact. I will forgive him." But in the present, improved state of our language, by using if as a conjunction, (for I maintain that it is one,) we express the same thought more briefly; and our modern mode of expression has, too, a decisive advantage over the ancient, not only in point of elegance, but also in perspicuity and force. In Scotland and the north of England, some people still make use of gin, a contraction of given: thus, "I will pardon my son, gin he reform." But who will contend, that they speak pure English?
If, (previously written gif, give, gin,) as mentioned earlier, is the imperative form of the Old English verb gifan, meaning to give. Following the ideas of Horne Tooke, some modern philosophical writers suggest teaching students to interpret it as a verb. For example, "I will go, if he will accompany me:"—"He will accompany me. Grant—give that [fact] I will go." While I have no objection to this approach for understanding the primitive meaning of the word, does it accurately capture the meaning and function of if as we use it in our contemporary, refined language? I trow not. Even if it does, does this method of breaking down sentences benefit students in regular schools? I think it’s undeniable that instead of helping students express themselves properly in modern English, this method merely familiarizes them with an archaic and clumsy structure that modern usage has abandoned. I agree that our ancestors, bound by the necessities that compel all nations in the early stages of their language to communicate in short, standalone sentences, used if as a verb when they said, "My son will reform. Give that fact. I will forgive him." However, in our current, improved state of the language, using if as a conjunction (which I argue it is) allows us to convey the same idea more concisely, and our modern expression has a clear advantage over the old, not only in elegance but also in clarity and strength. In Scotland and the north of England, some people still use gin, a contraction of given: for instance, "I will pardon my son, gin he reform." But who would claim they speak pure English?
But perhaps the advocates of what they call a philosophical development of language, will say, that by their resolution of sentences, they merely supply an ellipsis. If, by an ellipsis, they mean such a one as is necessary, to the grammatical construction, I cannot accede to their assumption. In teaching grammar, as well as in other things, we ought to avoid extremes:—we ought neither to pass superficially over an ellipsis necessary to the sense of a phrase, nor to put modern English to the blush, by adopting a mode of resolving sentences that would entirely change the character of our language, and carry the learner back to the Vandalic age.
But maybe the supporters of what they call a philosophical development of language will argue that their breakdown of sentences only fills in an ellipsis. If by ellipsis they mean one that’s necessary for the grammatical structure, I can’t agree with their claim. In teaching grammar, as in other areas, we should avoid extremes—we shouldn’t skim over an ellipsis that is essential for understanding a phrase, nor should we embarrass modern English by using a method of breaking down sentences that would completely alter the nature of our language and take the learner back to a barbaric era.
But comes from the Saxon verb, beon-utan, to be-out. "All were well but (be-out, leave-out) the stranger." "Man is but a reed, floating on the current of time." Resolution: "Man is a reed, floating on the current of time; but (be-out this fact) he is not a stable being."
But comes from the Saxon verb, beon-utan, meaning to be out. "All were well but (be-out, leave-out) the stranger." "Man is but a reed, floating on the current of time." Resolution: "Man is a reed, floating on the current of time; but (be-out this fact) he is not a stable being."
And—aned, an'd, and, is the past part. of ananad, to add, join. A, an, ane, or one, from the same verb, points out whatever is aned, oned, or made one. And also refers to the thing that is joined to, added to, or made one with, some other person or thing mentioned. "Julius and Harriet will make a happy pair." Resolution: "Julius, Harriet joined, united, or aned, will make a happy pair;" i.e. Harriet made one with Julius; will make a happy pair.
And is the past participle of add, to combine or connect. A, an, one, from the same verb, indicates whatever is joined, combined, or made one. It also refers to the thing that is connected to, added to, or made one with, some other person or thing mentioned. "Julius and Harriet will make a happy pair." Resolution: "Julius, Harriet joined, united, or added, will make a happy pair;" i.e. Harriet made one with Julius; will make a happy pair.
For means cause.
For means cause.
Nor is a contraction of ne or. Ne is a contraction of not, and or, of other. Nor is, not other-wise: not in the other way or manner.
Nor is a contraction of ne or. Ne is a contraction of not, and or means other. Nor is, not otherwise: not in the other way or manner.
Else is the imperative of alesan, unless, of onlesan, and lest, the past part. of lesan, all signifying to dismiss, release, loosen, set free. "He will be punished, unless he repent;"—"Unless, release, give up, (the fact) he repents he will be punished." Though is the imperative of the Saxon verb thafigan, to allow, and yet of getan, to get. Yet is simply, get; ancient g is the modern y. "Though he slay me, yet will I trust in him:—Grant or allow (the fact) he slay me, get, or retain (the opposite fact) I will trust in him."
Else is the imperative form of alesan, unless, of onlesan, and lest, the past participle of lesan, all meaning to dismiss, release, loosen, or set free. "He will be punished, unless he repents;"—"Unless, release, give up, (the fact) he repents he will be punished." Though is the imperative of the Saxon verb thafigan, to allow, and yet of getan, to get. Yet is simply, get; ancient g is the modern y. "Though he slay me, yet will I trust in him:—Grant or allow (the fact) he slay me, get, or retain (the opposite fact) I will trust in him."
QUESTIONS ON THE PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
From what parts of speech are prepositions and conjunctions derived?—What is Horne Tooke's opinion of that?—From what is each of the following words derived, that, if, but, and, because, nor, else, unless, lest, though, and yet?
From which parts of speech do prepositions and conjunctions come? What does Horne Tooke think about that? What are the origins of each of the following words: that, if, but, and, because, nor, else, unless, lest, though, and yet?
LECTURE X.
OF INTERJECTIONS.—CASES OF NOUNS.
INTERJECTIONS are words which express the sudden emotions of the speaker; as, "Alas! I fear for life;" "O death! where is thy sting?"
INTERJECTIONS are words that convey the sudden emotions of the speaker; for example, "Alas! I fear for my life;" "O death! where is your sting?"
Interjections are not so much the signs of thought, as of feeling. Almost any word may be used as an interjection; but when so employed, it is not the representative of a distinct, idea. A word which denotes a distinct conception of the mind, must necessarily belong to some other part of speech. They who wish to speak often, or rather, to make noises, when they have no useful information to communicate, are apt to use words very freely in this way; such as the following expressions, la, la me, my, O my, O dear, dear me, surprising, astonishing, and the like.
Interjections aren't so much signals of thought as they are expressions of feeling. Almost any word can function as an interjection; however, when used that way, it doesn't represent a distinct idea. A word that conveys a clear idea must belong to some other part of speech. People who want to speak a lot, or rather, to make noises when they have no useful information to share, tend to use words quite freely in this manner, such as the following expressions: la, la me, my, O my, O dear, dear me, surprising, astonishing, and similar phrases.
Interjections not included in the following list, are generally known by their taking an exclamation point after them.
Interjections not included in the following list are generally recognized by having an exclamation point after them.
A LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL INTERJECTIONS.
- Of earnestness or grief; as, O! oh! ah! alas!
- Contempt; as, Pish! tush!
- Wonder; as, Heigh! really! strange!
- Calling; as, Hem! ho! halloo!
- Disgust or aversion; as, Foh! fy! fudge! away!
- Attention; as, Lo! behold! hark!
- Requesting silence; as, Hush! hist!
- Salutation; as, Welcome! hail! all hail!
NOTE. We frequently meet with what some call an interjective phrase; such as, Ungrateful wretch! impudence of hope! folly in the extreme! what ingratitude! away with him!
NOTE. We often come across what some refer to as an interjective phrase; for example, Ungrateful wretch! Impudence of hope! Extreme folly! What ingratitude! Get rid of him!
As the interjection is the least important part of speech in the English language, it will require but little attention. You may, however, make yourself well acquainted with what has been said respecting it, and then commit the
As the interjection is the least important part of speech in the English language, it will need very little attention. However, you can familiarize yourself with what has been discussed about it and then commit the
SYSTEMATIC ORDER OF PARSING.
The order of parsing an INTERJECTION, is—an interjection, and why?
The order of parsing an INTERJECTION, is—an interjection, and why?
"O virtue! how amiable thou art!"
"O virtue! how lovely you are!"
O is an interjection, a word used to express some passion or emotion of the speaker.
O is an interjection, a word used to express strong feelings or emotions of the speaker.
The ten parts of speech have now been unfolded and elucidated, although some of them have not been fully explained. Before you proceed any farther, you will please to begin again at the first lecture, and read over, attentively, the whole, observing to parse every example in the exercises systematically. You will then be able to parse the following exercises, which contain all the parts of speech. If you study faithfully six hours in a day, and pursue the directions given, you may become, if not a critical, at least, a good, practical grammarian, in six weeks; but if you study only three hours in a day, it will take you nearly three months to acquire the same knowledge.
The ten parts of speech have now been explained, although some of them might not be fully covered. Before moving on, please start again at the first lecture and read through everything carefully, making sure to parse every example in the exercises systematically. You’ll then be able to parse the following exercises, which include all the parts of speech. If you study diligently for six hours a day and follow the given instructions, you may become a good practical grammarian in six weeks, if not a critical one; but if you only study for three hours a day, it will take you almost three months to gain the same knowledge.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
True cheerfulness makes a man happy in himself, and promotes the happiness of all around him.
True cheerfulness makes a person happy within themselves and encourages the happiness of everyone around them.
Modesty always appears graceful in youth: it doubles the lustre of every virtue which it seems to hide.
Modesty always looks graceful in young people: it enhances the shine of every virtue that it seems to conceal.
He who, every morning, plans the transactions of the day, and follows out that plan, carries on a thread that will guide him through the labyrinth of the most busy life.
Anyone who plans their daily tasks every morning and sticks to that plan will have a thread to navigate through the chaos of the busiest life.
The king gave me a generous reward for committing that barbarous act; but, alas! I fear the consequence.
The king rewarded me generously for that brutal act, but unfortunately, I'm worried about the consequences.
NOTE. In the second sentence of the foregoing exercises, which is governed by the verb to hide, according to RULE 16. He is nom. to carries; who is nom. to plans. Follows agrees with who understood, and is connected to plans by and; RULE 34. What did the king give? A reward to me. Then reward is in the obj. case, gov. by gave; RULE 20. Me is gov. by to understood; NOTE 1, RULE 32. The phrase, committing that barbarous act, is gov. by for; NOTE 2, under RULE 28. Hour is in the obj. case, gov. by to spend; RULE 20. Look is connected to set by and; RULE 34. Joys is nom. to are. That is gov. by brings; RULE 16. Those is nom. to are understood. They is nom. to are understood; RULE 35.
NOTE. In the second sentence of the previous exercises, which is governed by the verb to hide, according to RULE 16. He is the subject of carries; who is the subject of plans. Follows agrees with the understood who and is linked to plans by and; RULE 34. What did the king give? A reward to me. Then reward is in the object case, governed by gave; RULE 20. Me is governed by the understood to; NOTE 1, RULE 32. The phrase committing that barbarous act is governed by for; NOTE 2, under RULE 28. Hour is in the object case, governed by to spend; RULE 20. Look is connected to set by and; RULE 34. Joys is the subject of are. That is governed by brings; RULE 16. Those is the subject of the understood are. They is the subject of the understood are; RULE 35.
CASES OF NOUNS.
In a former lecture, I promised to give you a more extensive explanation of the cases of nouns; and, as they are, in many situations, a little difficult to be ascertained, I will now offer some remarks on this subject. But before you proceed, I wish you to parse all the examples in the exercises just presented, observing to pay particular attention to the remarks in the subjoined NOTE. Those remarks will assist you much in analyzing.
In a previous lecture, I promised to give you a more detailed explanation of noun cases, and since they can be a bit tricky to identify in many situations, I will now share some thoughts on this topic. But before you continue, I want you to go through all the examples in the exercises I just presented, making sure to pay close attention to the comments in the attached NOTE. Those comments will really help you with your analysis.
A noun is sometimes nominative to a verb placed many lines after the noun. You must exercise your judgment in this matter. Look at the sentence in the preceding exercises beginning with, "He who, every morning," &c. and see if you can find the verb to which he is nominative. What does he do? He carries on a thread, &c. He, then, is nominative to the verb carries. What does who do? Who plans, and who follows, &c. Then who is nom. to plans, and who understood, is nominative to follows.
A noun can sometimes be the subject of a verb that appears many lines later in the text. You need to use your judgment here. Look at the sentence in the previous exercises that starts with, "He who, every morning," and see if you can identify the verb that he is the subject of. What does he do? He carries on a thread, etc. So, he is the subject of the verb carries. What does who do? Who plans, and who follows, etc. Therefore, who is the subject of plans, and who, understood, is the subject of follows.
In order to find the verb to which the noun soul, in this sentence, is the nominative, put the question; What does a soul without reflection do? Such, a soul runs to ruin, like a pile without inhabitant. Thus you discover, that soul is nominative to runs.
In order to find the verb that the noun soul is the subject of in this sentence, ask the question: What does a soul without reflection do? Such a soul runs to ruin, like a building without inhabitants. Therefore, you can see that soul is the subject of runs.
When the words of a sentence are arranged according to their natural order, the nominative case, you recollect, is placed before the verb, and the objective, after it; but when the words of a sentence are transposed; that is, not arranged according to their natural order, it frequently happens, that the nominative comes after, and the objective, before the verb; especially in poetry, or when a question is asked: as, "Whence arises the misery of the present world?" "What good thing shall I do to inherit eternal life?" Put these expressions in the declarative form, and the nominative will precede, and the objective follow its verb: thus, "The misery of the present world arises whence; I shall do what good thing to inherit eternal life."
When the words of a sentence are arranged in their natural order, the subject (nominative case) comes before the verb, and the object (objective case) comes after it. However, when the words are rearranged, meaning they aren't in their natural order, the subject often appears after the verb, and the object appears before it; this is especially common in poetry or when asking a question. For example, "Where does the misery of the present world come from?" "What good thing should I do to inherit eternal life?" If you change these into declarative sentences, the subject will come before the verb, and the object will follow: "The misery of the present world comes from where; I will do what good thing to inherit eternal life."
What did the evening do? The evening came on. Gray twilight had clad what? Twilight had clad all things in her sober livery. Evening, then, is nom. to came, and the noun things is in the objective case, and gov. by had clad: RULE 20. What did she bear? She bore thy rigid lore with patience, for, or during, many a year. Hence you find, that lore is in the objective case, and governed by bore, according to RULE 20. Year is gov. by during understood: RULE 32.
What did the evening do? The evening arrived. Gray twilight had cloaked what? Twilight had cloaked all things in her somber attire. Evening, then, is the subject of arrived, and the noun things is in the objective case, governed by had cloaked: RULE 20. What did she carry? She carried your strict knowledge with patience, for, or through, many a year. Hence you see that knowledge is in the objective case, governed by carried, according to RULE 20. Year is governed by through understood: RULE 32.
A noun is frequently nominative to a verb understood, or in the objective, and governed by a verb understood; as, "Lo, [there is] the poor Indian! whose untutored mind." "O, the pain [there is!] the bliss [there is] in dying!" "All were sunk, but the wakeful nightingale [was not sunk."] "He thought as a sage [thinks,] though he felt as a man [feels."] "His hopes, immortal, blow them by, as dust [is blown by."] Rule 35 applies to these last three examples.
A noun is often the subject of an implied verb, or in the object position, governed by an implied verb; for example, "Look, [there is] the poor Indian! whose untaught mind." "Oh, the pain [there is!] the bliss [there is] in dying!" "Everyone was sunk, except for the wakeful nightingale [was not sunk]." "He thought like a sage [thinks,] but he felt like a man [feels.]" "His hopes, immortal, get blown away like dust [is blown away."] Rule 35 applies to the last three examples.
In the next place I will explain several cases of nouns and pronouns which have not yet come under our notice. Sometimes a noun or pronoun may be in the nominative case when it has no verb to agree with it.
In the next section, I will explain several instances of nouns and pronouns that we haven't covered yet. Sometimes, a noun or pronoun may be in the nominative case even when there isn't a verb for it to agree with.
OF THE NOMINATIVE CASE INDEPENDENT.
Whenever a direct address is made, the person or thing spoken to, is in the nominative case independent; as, "James, I desire you to study."
Whenever a direct address is made, the person or thing being spoken to is in the nominative case independent; for example, "James, I want you to study."
You notice that, in this expression, I address myself to James that is, I speak to him; and you observe, too, that there is no verb, either expressed or implied, to which James can be the nominative; therefore you know that James is in the nom. case independent, according to Rule 5. Recollect, that whenever a noun is of the second person, it is in the nom. case independent; that is, independent of any verb; as, Selma, thy halls are silent; Love and meekness, my lord, become a churchman, better than ambition; O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, how often would I have gathered thy children together, even as a hen gathereth her chickens under her wings, but ye would not!—For a farther illustration of this case, see Note 2, under the 5th Rule of Syntax.
You can see that in this expression, I’m addressing James, meaning I’m speaking to him; and you also notice that there’s no verb, whether stated or implied, that would make James the subject; so you understand that James is in the nominative case independent, according to Rule 5. Remember, whenever a noun is in the second person, it’s in the nominative case independent; that is, independent of any verb; like, Selma, your halls are silent; Love and humility, my lord, suit a churchman better than ambition; O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, how often I wanted to gather your children together, as a hen gathers her chicks under her wings, but you wouldn’t!—For further illustration of this case, see Note 2, under the 5th Rule of Syntax.
NOTE. When a pronoun of the second person is in apposition with a noun independent, it is in the same case; as, "Thou traitor, I detest thee."
NOTE. When a pronoun of the second person is placed alongside an independent noun, it is in the same case; for example, "You traitor, I detest you."
OF THE NOMINATIVE CASE ABSOLUTE.
A noun or pronoun placed before a participle, without any verb to agree with it, is in the nominative case absolute; as, "The sun being risen, we pursued our journey."
A noun or pronoun placed before a participle, without any verb to agree with it, is in the nominative case absolute; as, "The sun having risen, we continued our journey."
Sun is here placed before the participle "being risen," and has no verb to agree with it; therefore it is in the nominative case absolute, according to RULE 6.
Sun is placed before the participle "being risen," and has no verb to match it; therefore it is in the nominative case absolute, according to RULE 6.
NOTE 1. A noun or pronoun in the nominative case independent, is always of the second person; but, in the case absolute, it is generally of the third person.
NOTE 1. A noun or pronoun that stands alone in the nominative case is always of the second person; however, in the absolute case, it is typically of the third person.
2. The case absolute is always nominative; the following sentence is therefore incorrect; "Whose top shall tremble, him descending," &c.; it should be, he descending.
2. The absolute case is always nominative; the following sentence is therefore incorrect: "Whose top shall tremble, him descending," &c.; it should be, he descending.
OF NOUNS IN APPOSITION.
Two or more nouns or pronouns signifying the same person or thing, are put, by apposition, in the same case; as, "Cicero, the great orator, philosopher, and statesman of Rome, was murdered by Antony."
Two or more nouns or pronouns that refer to the same person or thing are placed, by apposition, in the same case; for example, "Cicero, the great orator, philosopher, and statesman of Rome, was murdered by Antony."
Apposition, in a grammatical sense, means something added, or names added, in order more fully to define or illustrate the sense of the first name mentioned.
Apposition, in grammatical terms, refers to something that is added, or names that are added, to better define or illustrate the meaning of the first name mentioned.
You perceive that Cicero, in the preceding example, is merely the proper name of a man; but when I give him the three additional appellations, and call him a great orator, philosopher, and statesman, you understand what kind of a man he was; that is, by giving him these three additional names, his character and abilities as a man are more fully made known. And, surely, you cannot be at a loss to know that these four nouns must be in the same case, for they are all names given to the same person; therefore, if Cicero was murdered, the orator was murdered, and the philosopher was murdered, and the statesman was murdered, because they all mean one and the same person.
You see that Cicero, in the previous example, is just the name of a man; but when I give him three more titles and call him a great orator, philosopher, and statesman, you understand what kind of man he was; by adding these three titles, his character and abilities as a person become clearer. And, of course, you can’t miss that these four nouns must be in the same case since they all refer to the same individual; therefore, if Cicero was murdered, the orator was murdered, the philosopher was murdered, and the statesman was murdered, because they all refer to one and the same person.
Nouns and pronouns in the objective case, are frequently in apposition; as, He struck Charles the student. Now it is obvious, that, when he struck Charles, he struck the student, because Charles was the student, and the student was Charles; therefore the noun student is in the objective case, governed by "struck," and put by apposition with Charles, according to RULE 7.
Nouns and pronouns in the objective case are often in apposition; for example, He struck Charles the student. It's clear that when he struck Charles, he struck the student, since Charles was the student, and the student was Charles; so the noun student is in the objective case, governed by "struck," and placed in apposition with Charles, following RULE 7.
Please to examine this lecture very attentively. You will then be prepared to parse the following examples correctly and systematically.
Please examine this lecture carefully. You'll be ready to analyze the following examples accurately and systematically.
PARSING.
"Weep on the rocks of roaring winds, O maid of Inistore."
"Weep on the rocks of howling winds, O girl of Inistore."
Maid is a noun, the name of a person—- com. the name of a sort—fem. gender, it denotes a female—second pers. spoken to—sing. num. it implies but one—and in the nominative case independent, because it is addressed, and has no verb to agree with it, according to
Maid is a noun, the name of a person— the name of a type—fem. gender, it refers to a female—second person spoken to—sing. num. it implies only one—and in the nominative case independent, because it is addressed, and has no verb to agree with it, according to
RULE 5. When an address is made, the noun or pronoun addressed, is put in the nominative case independent.
RULE 5. When giving an address, the noun or pronoun being addressed is placed in the nominative case independent.
"The general being ransomed, the barbarians permitted him to depart."
"The general was ransomed, and the barbarians allowed him to leave."
General is a noun, the name, &c. (parse it in full:)—and in the nominative case absolute, because it is placed before the participle "being ransomed," and it has no verb to agree with it, agreeably to
General is a noun, the name, etc. (parse it in full:)—and in the nominative case absolute, because it is placed before the participle "being ransomed," and it has no verb to agree with it, according to
RULE 6. A noun or pronoun placed before a participle, and being independent of the rest of the sentence, is in the nominative case absolute.
RULE 6. A noun or pronoun that comes before a participle and is independent of the rest of the sentence is in the nominative absolute case.
"Thou man of God, flee to the land of Judah."
"You man of God, escape to the land of Judah."
Thou is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it personates "man"—second pers. spoken to—mas. gender, sing. num. because the noun "man" is for which it stands; RULE 13 (Repeat the Rule.)—Thou is in the nominative case independent and put by apposition with man, because it signifies the same thing, according to
You is a pronoun, a word used instead of a noun—personal, it represents "man"—second person spoken to—masculine gender, singular number, because the noun "man" is what it stands for; RULE 13 (Repeat the Rule.)—You is in the nominative case independent and placed by apposition with man, because it signifies the same thing, according to
RULE 7. Two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, signifying the same thing, are put, by apposition, in the same case.
RULE 7. Two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, that refer to the same thing, are placed in the same case by apposition.
Man is in the nominative case independent, according to Rule 5. Flee agrees with thou understood.
Man is in the nominative case and stands alone, according to Rule 5. Flee agrees with the understood thou.
Newton is a noun, (parse it in full,) and in the nominative case to "shines." RULE 3.
Newton is a noun, (analyze it completely,) and it's in the nominative case relating to "shines." RULE 3.
Priest is a noun, (parse it in full,) and in the nom. case, it is the actor and subject of the verb "shines," and put by apposition with "Newton," because it signifies the same thing, agreeably to Rule 7. (Repeat the Rule.)
Priest is a noun (analyze it fully), and in the nominative case, it serves as the actor and subject of the verb "shines," and is used in relation to "Newton," because it represents the same concept, in accordance with Rule 7. (Repeat the Rule.)
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Turn from your evil ways, O house of Israel! Ye fields of light, celestial plains, ye scenes divinely fair! proclaim your Maker's wondrous power. O king! live for ever. The murmur of thy streams, O Lora, brings back the memory of the past. The sound of thy woods, Garmallar, is lovely in my ear. Dost thou not behold, Malvina, a rock with its head of heath? Three aged pines bend from its face; green is the plain at its feet; there the flower of the mountain grows, and shades its white head in the breeze.
Turn away from your evil ways, O house of Israel! You fields of light, celestial plains, and beautiful scenes! Proclaim your Maker's amazing power. O king! live forever. The sound of your streams, O Lora, reminds me of the past. The rustle of your woods, Garmallar, is delightful to my ears. Don’t you see, Malvina, a rock with its head of heather? Three old pines lean from its face; green is the plain at its feet; there the mountain flower blooms and shades its white head in the breeze.
The General being slain, the army was routed. Commerce having thus got into the legislative body, privilege must be done away. Jesus had conveyed himself away, a multitude being in that place. I being in great haste, he consented. The rain having ceased, the dark clouds rolled away. The Son of God, while clothed in flesh, was subject to all the frailties and inconveniences of human nature, sin excepted; (that is, sin being excepted.)
The General was killed, and the army was defeated. With commerce now part of the legislative process, privileges need to be eliminated. Jesus had slipped away while a crowd was there. I was in a hurry, and he agreed. Once the rain stopped, the dark clouds cleared. The Son of God, while in human form, experienced all the weaknesses and challenges of human nature, except for sin.
In the days of Joram, king of Israel, flourished the prophet Elisha. Paul the apostle suffered martyrdom. Come, peace of mind, delightful guest! and dwell with me. Friends, Romans, countrymen, lend me your ears.
In the days of Joram, king of Israel, the prophet Elisha was active. Paul the apostle was martyred. Come, peace of mind, wonderful guest! and stay with me. Friends, Romans, countrymen, listen to me.
NOTE. Those verbs in italics, in the preceding examples, are all in the imperative mood, and second person, agreeing with thou, ye, or you, understood. House of Israel is a noun of multitude. Was routed and must be done are passive verbs. Art fled is a neuter verb in a passive form. Clothed is a perfect participle. Till is an adverbial conjunction.
NOTE. The verbs in italics in the previous examples are all in the imperative mood and the second person, referring to thou, ye, or you, understood. House of Israel is a collective noun. Was routed and must be done are passive verbs. Art fled is a neuter verb in a passive form. Clothed is a perfect participle. Till is an adverbial conjunction.
When you shall have analyzed, systematically, every word in the foregoing exercises, you may answer the following
When you have systematically analyzed every word in the previous exercises, you may answer the following
QUESTIONS NOT ANSWERED IN PARSING.
Repeat the list of interjections.—Repeat some interjective phrases.—Repeat the order of parsing an interjection.—In order to find the verb to which a noun is nom. what question do you put?—Give examples.—Is the nominative case ever placed after the verb?—When?—Give examples.—Does the objective case ever come before the verb?—Give examples.—Is a noun ever nom. to a verb understood?—Give examples.—When is a noun or pronoun in the nom. case independent?—Give examples.—Are nouns of the second person always in the nom. case independent?—When a pronoun is put by apposition with a noun independent, in what case is it?—When is a noun or pronoun in the nom. case absolute?—Give examples.—When are nouns or nouns and pronouns put, by apposition, in the same case?—Give examples.—In parsing a noun or pronoun in the nom. case independent, what Rule should be applied?—In parsing the nom. case absolute, what Rule?—What Rule in parsing nouns or pronouns in apposition?—Do real interjections belong to written language?—(Phil. Notes.)—From what are the following words derived, pish, fy, lo, halt, farewell, welcome, adieu!
Repeat the list of interjections.—Repeat some interjective phrases.—Repeat the order of parsing an interjection.—To find the verb that corresponds to a noun in the nominative case, what question do you ask?—Give examples.—Is the nominative case ever placed after the verb?—When?—Give examples.—Does the objective case ever come before the verb?—Give examples.—Can a noun ever be nominative to an understood verb?—Give examples.—When is a noun or pronoun in the nominative case independent?—Give examples.—Are second person nouns always in the nominative case independent?—When a pronoun is placed in apposition with an independent noun, what case is it in?—When is a noun or pronoun in the nominative case absolute?—Give examples.—When are nouns or nouns and pronouns placed in the same case by apposition?—Give examples.—In parsing a noun or pronoun in the nominative case independent, what rule should be applied?—In parsing the nominative case absolute, what rule?—What rule for parsing nouns or pronouns in apposition?—Do real interjections belong to written language?—(Phil. Notes.)—From what are the following words derived, pish, fy, lo, halt, farewell, welcome, adieu!
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
The term INTERJECTION is applied to those inarticulate sounds employed both by men and brutes, not to express distinct ideas, but emotions, passions, or feelings. The sounds employed by human beings in groaning, sighing, crying, screaming, shrieking, and laughing, by the dog in barking, growling, and whining, by the horse in snorting and neighing, by the sheep in bleating, by the cat in mewing, by the dove in cooing, by the duck in quacking, and by the goose in hissing, we sometimes attempt to represent by words; but, as written words are the ocular representatives of articulate sounds, they cannot be made clearly to denote inarticulate or indistinct noises. Such indistinct utterances belong to natural language; but they fall below the bounds of regulated speech. Hence, real interjections are not a part of written language.
The term INTERJECTION refers to those inarticulate sounds made by both people and animals, not to convey specific ideas, but emotions, passions, or feelings. The sounds used by humans when groaning, sighing, crying, screaming, shrieking, and laughing, by dogs when barking, growling, and whining, by horses when snorting and neighing, by sheep when bleating, by cats when mewing, by doves when cooing, by ducks when quacking, and by geese when hissing, we sometimes try to represent with words; however, since written words are visual representations of articulate sounds, they cannot adequately convey inarticulate or indistinct noises. Such indistinct expressions belong to natural language but fall outside the realm of structured speech. Therefore, real interjections are not part of written language.
The meaning of those words commonly called interjections, is easily shown by tracing them to their roots.
The meaning of the words known as interjections is easily revealed by looking at their origins.
Pish and pshaw are the Anglo-Saxon paec, paeca; and are equivalent to trumpery! i.e. tromperie, from tromper.
Pish and pshaw come from the Anglo-Saxon paec, paeca; and are the same as trumpery! i.e. tromperie, from tromper.
Fy or fie is the imperative, foe, the past tense, and foh or faugh, the past part. of the Saxon verb fian, to hate. Lo is the imperative of look. Halt is the imperative of healden, to hold. Farewell—fare-well, is a compound of faran, to go, and the adverb well. It means, to go well. Welcome—well-come, signifies, it is well that you are come. Adieu comes from the French a Dieu, to God; meaning, I commend you to God.
Fy or fie is the command form, foe is the past tense, and foh or faugh is the past participle of the Saxon verb fian, which means to hate. Lo is the command form of look. Halt is the command form of healden, meaning to hold. Farewell—fare-well is a combination of faran, which means to go, and the adverb well. It means to go well. Welcome—well-come signifies that it is well that you have come. Adieu comes from the French a Dieu, meaning to God; it signifies that I commend you to God.
LECTURE XI.
OF THE MOODS AND TENSES OF VERBS.
You have now acquired a general, and, I may say, an extensive, knowledge of nine parts of speech; but you know but little, as yet, respecting the most important one of all; I mean the VERB. I will, therefore, commence this lecture by giving you an explanation of the Moods and Tenses of verbs. Have the goodness, however, first to turn back and read over Lecture II., and reflect well upon what is there said respecting the verb; after which I will conduct you so smoothly through the moods and tenses, and the conjugation of verbs, that, instead of finding yourself involved in obscurities and deep intricacies, you will scarcely find an obstruction to impede your progress.
You now have a good and, I might say, broad understanding of the nine parts of speech; however, you still know very little about the most important one of all: the VERB. So, I will start this lecture by explaining the Moods and Tenses of verbs. But first, please go back and read over Lecture II., and think carefully about what is discussed there regarding the verb; after that, I will guide you through the moods and tenses, as well as the conjugation of verbs, in such a clear way that instead of getting lost in complexities and confusion, you will barely encounter anything that slows you down.
I. OF THE MOODS.
The MOOD or MODE of a verb means the manner in which its action, passion, or being, is represented.
The mood or mode of a verb refers to the way its action, emotion, or existence is expressed.
When I wish to assert a thing, positively, I use the declarative or indicative mode; as, The man walks; but sometimes the action or occurrence of which I wish to speak, is doubtful, and then I must not declare it positively, but I must adopt another mode of expression; thus, If the man walk, he will refresh himself with the bland breezes. This second mode or manner of representing the action, is called the subjunctive or conditional mode.
When I want to state something clearly, I use the declarative or indicative mode; for example, The man walks; but sometimes the action or event I'm referring to is uncertain, and I can't state it as a fact. Instead, I need to use a different mode of expression; for instance, If the man walks, he will enjoy the gentle breezes. This second way of expressing the action is called the subjunctive or conditional mode.
Again, we sometimes employ a verb when we do not wish to declare a thing, nor to represent the action in a doubtful or conditional manner; but we wish to command some one to act. We then use the imperative or commanding mode, and say, Walk, sir. And when we do not wish to command a man to act, we sometimes allude to his power or ability to act. This fourth mode of representing action, is called the potential mode; as, He can walk; He could walk. The fifth and last mode, called the infinitive or unlimited mode, we employ in expressing action in an unlimited manner; that is, without confining it, in respect to number and person, to any particular agent; as, To walk, to ride. Thus you perceive, that the mood, mode, or manner of representing the action, passion, or being of a verb, must vary according to the different intentions of the mind.
Again, we sometimes use a verb when we don’t want to state something, or to express the action in a uncertain or conditional way; instead, we want to instruct someone to act. We then use the imperative or commanding form, and say, Walk, sir. When we don’t want to tell someone to act, we might refer to their ability or capacity to act. This fourth way of expressing action is called the potential form; for example, He can walk; He could walk. The fifth and final form, known as the infinitive or unlimited form, is used to express action in a broad way; that is, without limiting it in terms of number and person to any specific agent; as in To walk, to ride. So you can see that the mood, form, or way of expressing the action, feeling, or existence of a verb can change based on the different intentions of the mind.
Were we to assign a particular name to every change in the mode or manner of representing action or being, the number of moods in our language would amount to many hundreds. But this principle of division and arrangement, if followed out in detail, would lead to great perplexity, without producing any beneficial result. The division of Mr. Harris, in his Hermes, is much more curious than instructive. He has fourteen moods; his interrogative, optative, hortative, promissive, precautive, requisitive, enunciative, &c. But as far as philosophical accuracy and the convenience and advantage of the learner are concerned, it is believed that no arrangement is preferable to the following. I am not unaware that plausible objections may be raised against it; but what arrangement cannot be objected to?
If we were to give a specific name to each change in how we express actions or states of being, the number of moods in our language would reach into the hundreds. However, if we were to break this down in detail, it would create a lot of confusion without adding any real benefit. Mr. Harris's division in his Hermes is more interesting than useful. He lists fourteen moods, including interrogative, optative, hortative, promissive, precautive, requisitive, enunciative, etc. But when it comes to philosophical clarity and the ease of learning, it’s believed that no system is better than the one outlined below. I recognize that there could be reasonable objections to it; but really, what system is free from criticism?
There are five moods of verbs, the Indicative, the Subjunctive, the Imperative, the Potential, and the Infinitive.
There are five verb moods: the Indicative, the Subjunctive, the Imperative, the Potential, and the Infinitive.
The INDICATIVE MOOD simply indicates or declares a thing; as, "He writes;" or it asks a question; as, "Does he write? Who wrote that?"
The INDICATIVE MOOD just states or declares something; for example, "He writes;" or it poses a question; like, "Does he write? Who wrote that?"
The term indicative, comes from the Latin indico, to declare. Hence, the legitimate province of the indicative mood, is to declare things, whether positively or negatively; thus, positively, He came with me; negatively, He came not with me. But in order to avoid a multiplication of moods, we extend its meaning, and use the indicative mood in asking a question; as, Who came with you?
The term indicative comes from the Latin indico, which means to declare. Therefore, the proper purpose of the indicative mood is to declare things, either positively or negatively; for example, positively, He came with me; negatively, He did not come with me. However, to avoid having too many moods, we broaden its meaning and use the indicative mood to ask a question; for instance, Who came with you?
The subjunctive mood being more analogous to the indicative in conjugation, than any other, it ought to be presented next in order. This mood, however, differs materially from the indicative in sense; therefore you ought to make yourself well acquainted with the nature of the indicative, before you commence with the subjunctive.
The subjunctive mood is more similar to the indicative in conjugation than to any other mood, so it should be presented next. However, this mood differs significantly from the indicative in meaning; therefore, you should familiarize yourself with the nature of the indicative before starting with the subjunctive.
When a verb is preceded by a word that expresses a condition, doubt, motive, wish, or supposition, it is in the SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD; as, "If he study, he will improve; I will respect him, though he chide me; He will not be pardoned, unless he repent; Had he been there, he would have conquered;" (that is, if he had been there.)
When a verb is preceded by a word that indicates a condition, doubt, motivation, wish, or assumption, it is in the SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD; for example, "If he studies, he will improve; I will respect him, even if he rebukes me; He will not be forgiven, unless he repents; If he had been there, he would have won;" (that is, if he had been there.)
The conjunctions if, though, unless, in the preceding examples, express condition, doubt, &c.; therefore, the verbs study, chide, repent, and had been, are in the subjunctive mood.
The conjunctions if, though, unless, in the examples above, express condition, doubt, etc.; therefore, the verbs study, chide, repent, and had been, are in the subjunctive mood.
NOTE 1. A verb in this mood is generally attended by another verb in some other mood. You observe, that each of the first three of the preceding examples, contains a verb in the indicative mood, and the fourth, a verb in the potential.
NOTE 1. A verb in this mood is usually accompanied by another verb in a different mood. You’ll notice that each of the first three examples above contains a verb in the indicative mood, and the fourth has a verb in the potential.
2. Whenever the conjunctions if, though, unless, except, whether, lest, or any others, denote contingency or doubt, the verbs that follow them are in the subjunctive mood; as, "If he ride out every day, his health will probably improve;" that is, if he shall or should ride out hereafter. But when these conjunctions do not imply doubt, &c. the verbs that follow them are in the indicative, or some other mood; as, "Though he rides out daily, his health is no better." The conjunctive and indicative forms of this mood, are explained in the conjugation of the verb to love. See page.
2. Whenever the conjunctions if, though, unless, except, whether, lest, or any others indicate a possibility or uncertainty, the verbs that follow them are in the subjunctive mood; for example, "If he rides out every day, his health will probably improve;" meaning, if he will or should ride out in the future. But when these conjunctions do not suggest doubt, the verbs that follow are in the indicative or another mood; for example, "Though he rides out daily, his health is not any better." The conjunctive and indicative forms of this mood are explained in the conjugation of the verb to love. See page.
The IMPERATIVE MOOD is used for commanding, exhorting, entreating, or permitting; as, "Depart thou; Remember my admonitions; Tarry awhile longer; Go in peace."
The IMPERATIVE MOOD is used for giving commands, urging, requesting, or allowing; for example, "Leave now; Keep my advice in mind; Stay a bit longer; Go in peace."
The verb depart expresses a command; remember exhorts; tarry expresses entreaty; and go, permission; therefore they are all in the imperative mood.
The verb depart gives a command; remember encourages; tarry asks earnestly; and go grants permission; so they are all in the imperative mood.
The imperative, from impero, to command, is literally that mood of the verb used in commanding; but its technical meaning in grammar is extended to the use of the verb in exhorting, entreating, and permitting.
The imperative, from impero, meaning to command, is literally the mood of the verb used for commanding; however, its technical meaning in grammar also includes the use of the verb for exhorting, entreating, and permitting.
A verb in the imperative mood, is always of the second person, though never varied in its terminations, agreeing with thou, ye, or you, either expressed or implied. You may know a verb in this mood by the sense; recollect, however, that the nominative is always second person, and frequently understood; as, George, give me my hat; that is, give thou, or give you. When the nominative is expressed, it is generally placed after the verb; as, Go thou; Depart ye; or between the auxiliary and the verb; as, Do thou go; Do ye depart. (Do is the auxiliary.)
A verb in the imperative mood is always in the second person, but it never changes its endings, whether it matches thou, ye, or you, either stated or implied. You can identify a verb in this mood by the context; however, remember that the subject is always second person and often understood. For example, George, give me my hat; meaning give thou, or give you. When the subject is mentioned, it usually comes after the verb, like in Go thou; Depart ye; or between the auxiliary and the verb, as in Do thou go; Do ye depart. (Do is the auxiliary.)
The POTENTIAL MOOD implies possibility, liberty, or necessity, power, will, or obligation; as, "It may rain; He may go or stay; We must eat and drink; I can ride; He would walk; They should learn."
The POTENTIAL MOOD indicates possibility, freedom, or necessity, ability, willingness, or obligation; for example, "It might rain; He can go or stay; We have to eat and drink; I can ride; He would walk; They should learn."
In the first of these examples, the auxiliary may implies possibility; in the second it implies liberty; that is, he is at liberty to go or to stay; in the third, must denotes necessity; can denotes power or ability; would implies will or inclination; that is, he had a mind to walk; and should implies obligation. Hence you perceive, that the verbs, may rain, may go, must eat, must drink, can ride, world walk, and should learn, are in the potential mood.
In the first example, the auxiliary may suggests possibility; in the second, it indicates freedom; that is, he is free to go or stay; in the third, must signifies necessity; can indicates power or ability; would suggests willingness or inclination; that is, he wanted to walk; and should indicates obligation. Thus, you'll notice that the verbs may rain, may go, must eat, must drink, can ride, would walk, and should learn are in the potential mood.
NOTE 1. As a verb in the indicative mood is converted into the subjunctive when it is preceded by a conjunction expressing doubt, contingency, supposition, &c., so a verb in the potential mood, may, in like manner, be turned into the subjunctive; as, "If I could deceive him, I should abhor it; Though he should increase in wealth, he would not be charitable." I could deceive, is in the potential; If I could deceive, is in the subjunctive mood.
NOTE 1. A verb in the indicative mood becomes subjunctive when it's preceded by a conjunction that suggests doubt, possibility, or assumption, and similarly, a verb in the potential mood can also be changed to the subjunctive; for example, "If I could deceive him, I would hate it; Though he should increase in wealth, he wouldn't be charitable." The phrase could deceive is in the potential; If I could deceive is in the subjunctive mood.
2. The potential mood, as well as the indicative, is used in asking a question; as, "May I go? Could you understand him? Must we die?"
2. The potential mood, along with the indicative, is used when asking a question; for example, "May I go? Could you understand him? Must we die?"
The INFINITIVE MOOD expresses action, passion, or being, in a general and unlimited manner, having no nominative, consequently, neither person nor number; as, "To speak, to walk."
The INFINITIVE MOOD expresses action, emotion, or existence in a broad and unrestricted way, having no subject and therefore no specific person or number; as, "To speak, to walk.
Infinitive means unconfined, or unlimited. This mood is called the infinitive, because its verb is not confined or limited to a nominative. A verb in any other mood is limited; that is, it must agree in number and person with its nominative; but a verb in this mood has no nominative, therefore, it never changes its termination, except to form the perfect tense. Now you understand why all verbs are called finite or limited, excepting those in the infinitive mood.
Infinitive means unconfined or unlimited. This mood is called the infinitive because its verb isn't restricted or limited to a subject. A verb in any other mood is limited; that is, it has to match in number and person with its subject. But a verb in this mood has no subject, so it never changes its ending, except when forming the perfect tense. Now you see why all verbs are called finite or limited, except for those in the infinitive mood.
NOTE. To, the sign of the infinitive mood, is often understood before the verb; as, "Let me proceed;" that is, Let me to proceed. See RULE 25. To is not a preposition when joined to a verb in this mood; thus, to ride, to rule; but it should be parsed with the verb, and as a part of it.
NOTE. To, the sign of the infinitive mood, is often implied before the verb; for example, "Let me proceed;" that is, Let me to proceed. See RULE 25. To is not a preposition when attached to a verb in this mood; thus, to ride, to rule; but it should be analyzed with the verb, as part of it.
If you study this lecture attentively, you will perceive, that when I say, I write, the verb is in the indicative mood; but when I say, if I write, or, unless I write, &c. the verb is in the subjunctive mood; write thou, or write ye or you, the imperative; I may write, I must write, I could write, &c. the potential; and to write, the infinitive. Any other verb (except the defective) may be employed in the same manner.
If you pay close attention to this lecture, you'll notice that when I say, I write, the verb is in the indicative mood; but when I say, if I write, or unless I write, etc., the verb is in the subjunctive mood; write thou, or write ye or you, is the imperative; I may write, I must write, I could write, etc., is the potential; and to write, is the infinitive. Any other verb (except for the defective ones) can be used in the same way.
II. OF THE TENSES.
TENSE means time.
TENSE means time period.
Verbs have six tenses, the Present, the Imperfect, the Perfect, the Pluperfect, and the First and Second Future tenses.
Verbs have six tenses: the Present, the Imperfect, the Perfect, the Pluperfect, and the First and Second Future tenses.
The PRESENT TENSE represents an action or event as taking place at the time in which it is mentioned; as, "I smile; I see; I am seen."
The PRESENT TENSE shows an action or event happening at the moment it’s mentioned; for example, "I smile; I see; I am seen."
NOTE 1. The present tense is also used in speaking of actions continued, with occasional intermissions, to the present time; as, "He rides out every morning."
NOTE 1. The present tense is also used when talking about actions that continue, with occasional breaks, up to the present time; for example, "He rides out every morning."
2. This tense is sometimes applied to represent the actions of persons long since dead; as, "Seneca reasons and moralizes well; An honest man is the noblest work of God."
2. This tense is sometimes used to describe the actions of people who have been dead for a long time; as in, "Seneca reasoned and moralized well; An honest man is the noblest work of God."
3. When the present tense is preceded by the words, when, before, after, as soon as, &c. it is sometimes used to point out the relative time of a future action; as, "When he arrives we shall hear the news."
3. When the present tense comes after the words, when, before, after, as soon as, etc., it's sometimes used to indicate the relative timing of a future action; for example, "When he arrives, we will hear the news."
The IMPERFECT TENSE denotes a past action or event, however distant; or,
The IMPERFECT TENSE indicates a past action or event, no matter how far back; or,
The IMPERFECT TENSE represents an action or event as past and finished, but without defining the precise time of its completion; as, "I loved her for her modesty and virtue; They were travelling post when he met them."
The IMPERFECT TENSE shows an action or event as having happened in the past and completed, but it doesn’t specify exactly when it was completed; for example, "I loved her for her modesty and virtue; They were traveling by carriage when he met them."
In these examples, the verbs loved and met express past and finished actions, and therefore constitute a perfect tense as strictly as any form of the verb in our language; but, as they do not define the precise time of the completion of these actions, their tense may properly be denominated an indefinite past. By defining the present participle in conjunction with the verb, we have an imperfect tense in the expression, were travelling. This course, however, would not be in accordance with the ordinary method of treating the participle. Hence it follows, that the terms imperfect and perfect, as applied to this and the next succeeding tense, are not altogether significant of their true character; but if you learn to apply these tenses correctly, the propriety or impropriety of their names is not a consideration of very great moment.
In these examples, the verbs loved and met represent past and finished actions, so they form a perfect tense just like any verb form in our language. However, since they don't specify the exact time when these actions were completed, their tense can rightly be called indefinite past. When we use the present participle with the verb, we get an imperfect tense, as seen in were travelling. This approach, though, doesn't align with the usual way of discussing the participle. Therefore, the terms imperfect and perfect, as applied to this and the next tense, don't fully capture their true nature. Still, if you learn to use these tenses correctly, whether their names are appropriate or not isn't a major concern.
The PERFECT TENSE denotes past time, and also conveys an allusion to the present; as, "I have finished my letter."
The PERFECT TENSE indicates past time but also suggests a connection to the present; for example, "I have finished my letter."
The verb have finished, in this example, signifies that the action, though past, was perfectly finished at a point of time immediately preceding, or in the course of a period which comes to the present. Under this view of the subject, the term perfect may be properly applied to this tense, for it specifies, not only the completion of the action, but, also, alludes to the particular period of its accomplishment.
The verb have finished in this example indicates that the action, although completed in the past, was fully done at a time just before or during a period that leads to the present. From this perspective, the term perfect can accurately describe this tense, as it highlights not just the completion of the action but also refers to the specific time frame in which it was completed.
The PLUPERFECT TENSE represents a past action or event that transpired before some other past time specified; as, "I had finished my letter before my brother arrived."
The PLUPERFECT TENSE represents a past action or event that happened before another past time mentioned; for example, "I had finished my letter before my brother arrived."
You observe that the verb had finished, in this example, represents one past action, and the arrival of my brother, another past action; therefore had finished is in the pluperfect tense, because the action took place prior to the taking place of the other past action specified in the same sentence.
You notice that the verb had finished in this example indicates one past action, and my brother's arrival is another past action; therefore, had finished is in the pluperfect tense because it happened before the other past action mentioned in the same sentence.
The FIRST FUTURE TENSE denotes a future action or event; as "I will finish; I shall finish my letter."
The FIRST FUTURE TENSE indicates a future action or event; as "I will finish; I shall finish my letter."
The SECOND FUTURE TENSE represents a future action that will be fully accomplished, at or before the time of another future action or event; as, "I shall have finished my letter when my brother arrives."
The SECOND FUTURE TENSE indicates a future action that will be completely done by the time another future action or event occurs; for example, "I will have finished my letter when my brother arrives."
This example clearly shows you the meaning and the proper use of the second future tense. The verb "shall have finished" implies a future action that will be completely finished, at or before the time of the other future event denoted by the phrase, "when my brother arrives."
This example clearly shows you the meaning and the proper use of the second future tense. The verb "shall have finished" implies a future action that will be completely finished at or before the time of the other future event indicated by the phrase, "when my brother arrives."
NOTE. What is sometimes called the Inceptive future, is expressed thus, "I am going to write;" "I am about to write." Future time is also indicated by placing the infinitive present immediately after the indicative present of the verb to be; thus, "I am to write;" "Harrison is to be, or ought to be, commander in chief;" "Harrison is to command the army."
NOTE. The future tense that’s sometimes called the Inceptive future is expressed like this: "I am going to write;" "I am about to write." Future time is also indicated by placing the present infinitive right after the present indicative of the verb to be; for example, "I am to write;" "Harrison is to be, or ought to be, commander in chief;" "Harrison is to command the army."
You may now read what is said respecting the moods and tenses several times over, and then you may learn to conjugate a verb. But, before you proceed to the conjugation of verbs, you will please to commit the following paragraph on the Auxiliary verbs and, also, the signs of the moods and tenses; and, in conjugating, you must pay particular attention to the manner in which these signs are applied.
You can now read about the moods and tenses multiple times, and then you can learn to conjugate a verb. But before you start conjugating verbs, please memorize the following paragraph about the Auxiliary verbs and the signs of the moods and tenses; and when you conjugate, you must pay close attention to how these signs are used.
OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS.
AUXILIARY or HELPING VERBS are those by the help of which the English verbs are principally conjugated. May, can, must, might, could, would, should, and shall, are always auxiliaries; do, be, have, and will, are sometimes auxiliaries, and sometimes principal verbs.
AUXILIARY or HELPING VERBS are the ones that help conjugate English verbs. May, can, must, might, could, would, should, and shall are always auxiliaries; do, be, have, and will can be auxiliaries or main verbs, depending on the context.
The use of the auxiliaries is shown in the following conjugation.
The use of the auxiliary verbs is shown in the following conjugation.
SIGNS OF THE MOODS.
The Indicative Mood is known by the sense, or by its having no sign, except in asking a question; as, "Who loves you?"
The Indicative Mood is recognized by the sense or by lacking any sign except when asking a question; for example, "Who loves you?"
The conjunctions if, though, unless, except, whether, and lest, are generally signs of the Subjunctive; as, "If I love; unless I love," &c.
The conjunctions if, though, unless, except, whether, and lest are generally indicators of the Subjunctive; for example, "If I love; unless I love," etc.
A verb is generally known to be in, the Imperative Mood by its agreeing with thou, or ye or you, understood; as, "Love virtue, and follow her steps;" that is, love thou, or love ye or you; follow thou, &c.
A verb is usually recognized as being in the Imperative Mood when it matches with thou, ye, or you, even if those words are implied; for example, "Love virtue, and follow her steps;" meaning love thou, or love ye or you; follow thou, etc.
May, can, and must, might, could, would, and should, are signs of the Potential Mood; as, "I may love; I must love; I should love," &c.
May, can, and must, might, could, would, and should are indicators of the Potential Mood; for example, "I may love; I must love; I should love," etc.
To is the sign of the Infinitive; as, "To love, to smile, to hate, to walk."
To is the marker for the Infinitive; for example, "To love, to smile, to hate, to walk."
SIGNS OF THE TENSES.
The first form of the verb is the sign of the present tense; as, love, smile, hate, walk.
The first form of the verb indicates the present tense; for example, love, smile, hate, walk.
Ed—the imperfect tense of regular verbs; as, loved, smiled, hated, walked.
Ed—the past tense of regular verbs; like, loved, smiled, hated, walked.
Have—the perfect; as, have loved.
Have the perfect; as, have loved.
Had—the pluperfect; as, had loved. Shall or will—the first future; as, shall love, or will love; shall smile, will smile.
Had—the past perfect; like, had loved. Shall or will—the simple future; as in, shall love, or will love; shall smile, will smile.
Shall or will have—the second future; as, shall have loved, or will have loved.
Shall or will have—the second future; as, shall have loved, or will have loved.
NOTE. There are some exceptions to these signs, which you will notice by referring to the conjugation in the potential mood.
NOTE. There are some exceptions to these signs, which you can see by checking the conjugation in the potential mood.
Now, I hope you will so far consult your own ease and advantage, as to commit, perfectly, the signs of the moods and tenses before you proceed farther than to the subjunctive mood. If you do, the supposed Herculean task of learning to conjugate verbs, will be transformed into a few hours of pleasant pastime.
Now, I hope you will take the time to understand the signs of the moods and tenses completely before you move on to the subjunctive mood. If you do, the seemingly overwhelming task of learning to conjugate verbs will turn into a few hours of enjoyable activity.
The Indicative Mood has six tenses.
The Indicative Mood has six tenses.
The Subjunctive has also six tenses.
The Subjunctive also has six tenses.
The Imperative has only one tense.
The Imperative has only one tense.
The Potential has four tenses.
The Potential has four tenses.
The Infinitive has two tenses.
The Infinitive has two tenses.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
The CONJUGATION of a verb is the regular combination and arrangement of its several numbers, persons, moods, and tenses.
The CONJUGATION of a verb is the usual combination and arrangement of its various numbers, persons, moods, and tenses.
The Conjugation of an active verb, is styled the active voice; and that of a passive verb, the passive voice.
The conjugation of an active verb is called the active voice; and that of a passive verb is called the passive voice.
Pres. Tense. | Imp. Tense. | Perf. Participle |
I favor. | I favored. | favored. |
I love. | I loved, | loved. |
A Regular Verb is conjugated in the following manner.
A regular verb is conjugated like this.
TO LOVE.—INDICATIVE MOOD.
TO LOVE — INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
Present Tense.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. Pers. I love, | 1. We love, |
2. Pers. Thou lovest, | 2. Ye or you love, |
3. Pers. He, she, or it, loveth or loves. | 3. They love. |
When we wish to express energy or positiveness, the auxiliary do should precede the verb in the present tense: thus,
When we want to express energy or positivity, the auxiliary do should come before the verb in the present tense: thus,
Singular. | Plural. |
1. I do love, | 1. We do love, |
2. Thou dost love, | 2. Ye or you do love, |
3. He doth or does love. | 3. They do love. |
Imperfect Tense.
Imperfect Tense.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. I loved, | 1. We loved, |
2. Thou lovedst, | 2. Ye or you loved, |
3. He loved. | 3. They loved. |
Or by prefixing did to the present: thus,
Or by adding did to the present: so,
Singular. | Plural. |
1. I did love | 1. We did love, |
2. Thou didst love, | 2. Ye or you did love, |
3. He did love. | 3. They did love. |
Perfect Tense.
Perfect Tense.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. I have loved, | 1. We have loved, |
2. Thou hast loved, | 2. Ye or you have loved, |
3. He hath or has loved. | 3. They have loved. |
Pluperfect Tense.
Past Perfect Tense.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. I had loved, | 1. We had loved, |
2. Thou hadst loved, | 2. Ye or you had loved, |
3. He had loved. | 3. They had loved. |
First Future Tense.
Future Simple Tense.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. I shall or will love, | 1. We shall or will love, |
2. Thou shalt or wilt love, | 2. Ye or you shall or will love, |
3. He shall or will love, | 3. They shall or will love. |
Second Future Tense.
Second Future Tense.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. I shall have loved, | 1. We shall have loved, |
2. Thou wilt have loved, | 2. Ye or you will have loved, |
3. He will have loved, | 3. They will have loved. |
NOTE. Tenses formed without auxiliaries, are called simple tenses; as, I love; I loved; but those formed by the help of auxiliaries, are denominated compound tenses; as, I have loved; I had loved, &c.
NOTE. Tenses formed without auxiliary verbs are called simple tenses; for example, I love; I loved; but those formed with the help of auxiliary verbs are called compound tenses; for instance, I have loved; I had loved, &c.
This display of the verb shows you, in the clearest light, the application of the signs of the tenses, which signs ought to be perfectly committed to memory before you proceed any farther. By looking again at the conjugation, you will notice, that have, placed before the perfect participle of any verb, forms the perfect tense; had, the pluperfect; shall or will, the first future, and so on.
This display of the verb clearly shows you how to use the signs of the tenses. You should memorize these signs perfectly before going any further. If you look again at the conjugation, you'll notice that have, placed before the perfect participle of any verb, creates the perfect tense; had creates the pluperfect; shall or will creates the first future, and so on.
Now speak each of the verbs, love, hate, walk, smile, rule, and conquer, in the first person of each tense in this mood, with the pronoun I before it; thus, indicative mood, pres. tense, first pers. sing. I love; imperf. I loved; perf. I have loved; and so on, through all the tenses. If you learn thoroughly the conjugation of the verb in the indicative mood, you will find no difficulty in conjugating it through those that follow, for in the conjugation through all the moods, there is a great similarity.
Now, say each of the verbs, love, hate, walk, smile, rule, and conquer, in the first person for each tense in this mood, with the pronoun I in front of it; so, for the indicative mood, present tense, first person singular: I love; past tense: I loved; perfect tense: I have loved; and so on, through all the tenses. If you thoroughly learn the conjugation of the verb in the indicative mood, you will have no trouble conjugating it in the others that follow, because there is a lot of similarity in the conjugation across all the moods.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present Tense, or elliptical future.—Conjunctive form.
Present Tense, or future with ellipsis.—Conjunctive form.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. If I love, | 1. If we love, |
2. If thou love, | 2. If ye or you love, |
3. If he love. | 3. If they love. |
Look again at the conjugation in the indicative present, and you will observe, that the form of the verb differs from this form in the subjunctive. The verb in the present tense of this mood, does not vary its termination on account of number or person. This is called the conjunctive form of the verb; but sometimes the verb in the subjunctive mood, present tense, is conjugated in the same manner as it is in the indicative, with this exception, if, though, unless, or some other conjunction, is prefixed; as,
Look again at the conjugation in the present indicative, and you’ll notice that the verb form is different from the subjunctive. The verb in the present tense of this mood doesn’t change its ending based on number or person. This is called the conjunctive form of the verb; however, sometimes the verb in the present tense subjunctive is conjugated the same way as it is in the indicative, with the exception that if, though, unless, or some other conjunction is added; for example,
Indicative form.
Indicative mood.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. If I love, | 1. If we love, |
2. If thou lovest, | 2. If ye or you love, |
3. If he loves, | 3. If they love. |
The following general rule will direct you when to use the conjunctive form of the verb, and when the indicative. When a verb in the subjunctive mood, present tense, has a future signification, or a reference to future time, the conjunctive form should be used; as, "If thou prosper, thou shouldst be thankful;" "He will maintain his principles, though he lose his estate;" that is, If thou shalt or shouldst prosper; though he shall or should lose, &c. But when a verb in the subjunctive mood, present tense, has no reference to future time, the indicative form ought to be used; as, "Unless he means what he says, he is doubly faithless." By this you perceive, that when a verb in the present tense of the subjunctive mood, has a future signification, an auxiliary is always understood before it, for which reason, in this construction, the termination of the principal verb never varies; us, "He will not become eminent, unless he exert himself;" that is, unless he shall exert, or should exert himself. This tense of the subjunctive mood ought to be called the elliptical future.
The following general rule will guide you on when to use the subjunctive form of the verb and when to use the indicative. When a verb in the present tense subjunctive mood has a future meaning or refers to future time, the subjunctive form should be used; for example, "If you prosper, you should be thankful;" "He will stick to his principles, even if he loses his estate;" meaning, if you should prosper; even if he should lose, etc. However, when a verb in the present tense subjunctive has no reference to future time, the indicative form should be used; for example, "Unless he means what he says, he is being doubly unfaithful." From this, you can see that when a verb in the present tense of the subjunctive mood has a future meaning, an auxiliary is always implied before it; that’s why, in this construction, the ending of the main verb never changes; as in, "He will not become well-known unless he exerts himself;" meaning, unless he shall exert, or should exert himself. This form of the subjunctive mood should be referred to as the elliptical future.
The imperfect, the perfect, the pluperfect, and the first future tenses of this mood, are conjugated, in every respect, like the same tenses of the indicative, with this exception; in the subjunctive mood, a conjunction implying doubt, &c. is prefixed to the verb. In the second future tense of this mood, the verb is conjugated thus:
The imperfect, the perfect, the pluperfect, and the first future tenses of this mood are conjugated in every way like the same tenses of the indicative, with one exception: in the subjunctive mood, a conjunction suggesting doubt, etc., is placed before the verb. In the second future tense of this mood, the verb is conjugated like this:
Second Future Tense.
Second Future Tense.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. If I shall have loved, | 1. If we shall have loved, |
2. If thou shalt have loved, | 2. If you shall have loved, |
3. If he shall have loved. | 3. If they shall have loved. |
Look at the same tense in the indicative mood, and you will readily perceive the distinction between the two conjugations.
Look at the same tense in the indicative mood, and you will easily see the difference between the two conjugations.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
IMPERATIVE.
Singular. | Plural. |
2. Love, or love thou, or do thou love. | 2. Love, or love ye or you, or do ye or you love. |
NOTE. We cannot command, exhort, &c. either in past or future time; therefore a verb in this mood is always in the present tense.
NOTE. We cannot command, urge, etc. either in past or future time; therefore a verb in this mood is always in the present tense.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Vibe Check.
Present Tense.
Present Tense.
Singular. | Plural. | |
1. I may, can, or must love, | 1. We may, can, or must love, | |
2. Thou mayst, canst, or must love, | 2. Ye or you may, can, or must love, | |
3. He may, can, or must love. | 3. They may, can, or must love. |
Imperfect Tense.
Imperfect Tense.
Singular. | Plural. | |
1. I might, could, would, or should love, | 1. We might, could, would, or should love, | |
2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst love, | 2. Ye or you might, could, would, or should love, | |
3. He might, could, would, or should love, | 3. They might, could, would, or should love. |
Perfect Tense.
Perfect Tense.
Singular. | Plural. | |
1. I may, can, or must have loved, | 1. We may, can, or must have loved, | |
2. Thou mayst, canst, or must have loved, | 2. Ye or you may, can, or must have loved, | |
3. He may, can, or must have loved. | 3. They may, can, or must have loved. |
Pluperfect Tense.
Pluperfect tense.
Singular. | Plural. |
1. I might, could, would, or should have loved, | 1. We might, could, would, or should have loved, |
2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst have loved, | 2. Ye or you might, could, would, or should have loved, |
3. He might, could, would, or should have loved, | 3. They might, could, would, or should have loved. |
By examining carefully the conjugation of the verb through this mood, you will find it very easy; thus, you will notice, that whenever any of the auxiliaries, may, can, or must, is placed before a verb, that verb is in the potential mood, present tense; might, could, would, or should, renders it in the potential mood, imperfect tense; may, can, or must have, the perfect tense; and might, could, would, or should have, the pluperfect tense.
By carefully examining the verb conjugation in this mood, you'll find it quite simple. You'll notice that whenever any of the auxiliaries, may, can, or must, come before a verb, that verb is in the potential mood, present tense; might, could, would, or should, puts it in the potential mood, imperfect tense; may, can, or must have, indicates the perfect tense; and might, could, would, or should have, signifies the pluperfect tense.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
INFINITIVE FORM.
Pres. Tense. To love. | Perf. Tense. To have loved. |
PARTICIPLES.
PARTICIPLES.
Present or imperfect, | Loving. |
Perfect or passive, | Loved. |
Compound, | Having loved. |
NOTE. The perfect participle of a regular verb, corresponds exactly with the imperfect tense; yet the former may, at all times, be distinguished from the latter, by the following rule: In composition, the imperfect tense of a verb always has a nominative, either expressed or implied: the perfect participle never has.
NOTE. The perfect participle of a regular verb matches the imperfect tense exactly; however, the two can always be distinguished by the following rule: In construction, the imperfect tense of a verb always has a subject, either stated or understood: the perfect participle never has.
For your encouragement, allow me to inform you, that when you shall have learned to conjugate the verb to love, you will be able to conjugate all the regular verbs in the English language, for they are all conjugated precisely in the same manner. By pursuing the following direction, you can, in a very short time, learn to conjugate any verb. Conjugate the verb love through all the moods and tenses, in the first person singular, with the pronoun I before it, and speak the Participles: thus, Indicative mood, pres. tense, first pers. sing. I love, imperf. tense, I loved; perf. tense, I have loved; and so on, through every mood and tense. Then conjugate it in the second pers. sing, with the pronoun thou before it, through all the moods and tenses; thus, Indic. mood, pres. tense, second pers. sing, thou lovest; imperf. tense, thou lovedst; and so on, through the whole. After that, conjugate it in the third pers. sing, with he before it; and then in the first pers. plural, with we before it, in like manner through all the moods and tenses. Although this mode of procedure may, at first, appear to be laborious, yet, as it is necessary, I trust you will not hesitate to adopt it. My confidence in your perseverance, induces me to recommend any course which I know will tend to facilitate your progress.
To encourage you, let me tell you that once you learn to conjugate the verb to love, you'll be able to conjugate all the regular verbs in English because they all follow the same pattern. By following the steps below, you can quickly learn to conjugate any verb. Start by conjugating the verb love through all the moods and tenses in the first person singular, using the pronoun I before it, and say the Participles: for example, Indicative mood, present tense, first person singular I love, imperfect tense, I loved; perfect tense, I have loved; and continue this through every mood and tense. Next, conjugate it in the second person singular, using the pronoun thou before it, through all the moods and tenses; for instance, Indicative mood, present tense, second person singular thou lovest; imperfect tense, thou lovedst; and so on through all the forms. After that, conjugate it in the third person singular using he before it; then in the first person plural with we before it, in the same way through all the moods and tenses. This process may seem tedious at first, but since it’s necessary, I hope you won’t hesitate to take it on. I believe in your persistence, which is why I recommend any method that I know will help your progress.
When you shall have complied with my requisition, you may conjugate the following verbs in the same manner; which will enable you, hereafter, to tell the mood and tense of any verb without hesitation: walk, hate, smile, rule, conquer, reduce, relate, melt, shun, fail.
When you have followed my request, you can conjugate the following verbs in the same way; this will help you, later on, to identify the mood and tense of any verb without any doubt: walk, hate, smile, rule, conquer, reduce, relate, melt, shun, fail.
PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
The changes in the termination of words, in all languages, have been formed by the coalescence of words of appropriate meaning. This subject was approached on page 49. It is again taken up for the purpose of showing, that the moods and tenses, as well as the number and person, of English verbs, do not solely depend on inflection.
The coalescing syllables which form the number and person of the Hebrew verb, are still considered pronouns; and, by those who have investigated the subject, it is conceded, that the same plan has been adopted in the formation of the Latin and Greek verbs, as in the Hebrew. Some languages have carried this process to a very great extent. Ours is remarkable for the small number of its inflections. But they who reject the passive verb, and those moods and tenses which are formed by employing what are called "auxiliary verbs," because they are formed of two or more verbs, do not appear to reason soundly. It is inconsistent to admit, that walk-eth, and walk-ed, are tenses, because each is but one word, and to reject have walked, and will walk, as tenses, because each is composed of two words. Eth, as previously shown, is a contraction of doeth, or haveth, and ed, of dede, dodo, doed, or did; and, therefore, walk-eth; i.e. walk-doeth, or doeth-walk, and walk-ed; i.e. walk-did, or doed or did-walk, are, when analyzed, as strictly compound, as will walk, shall walk, and have walked. The only difference in the formation of these tenses, is, that in the two former, the associated verbs have been contracted and made to coalesce with the main verb, but in the two latter, they still maintain their ground as separate words.
The combined syllables that make up the number and person of the Hebrew verb are still seen as pronouns; and those who have studied this topic agree that the same method is used in forming Latin and Greek verbs, just like in Hebrew. Some languages have taken this process to a much greater degree. Our language is notable for having very few inflections. However, those who reject the passive verb, along with the moods and tenses created by using what are called "auxiliary verbs," because they consist of two or more verbs, don’t seem to think logically. It’s inconsistent to accept that walk-eth and walk-ed are tenses because each is just one word, but to dismiss have walked and will walk as tenses because each consists of two words. Eth, as shown earlier, is a contraction of doeth or haveth, and ed comes from dede, dodo, doed, or did; thus, walk-eth, meaning walk-doeth or doeth-walk, and walk-ed, meaning walk-did or doed or did-walk, are, when broken down, just as much compound forms as will walk, shall walk, and have walked. The only difference in how these tenses are formed is that, in the first two, the additional verbs have been shortened and blended with the main verb, while in the latter two, they remain separate words.
If it be said that will walk is composed of two words, each of which conveys a distinct idea, and, therefore, should be analyzed by itself, the same argument with all its force, may be applied to walk-eth, walk-ed, walk-did, or did walk. The result of all the investigations of this subject, appears to settle down into the hackneyed truism, that the passive verbs, and the moods and tenses, of some languages, are formed by inflections, or terminations either prefixed or postfixed, and of other languages, by the association of auxiliary verbs, which have not yet been contracted and made to coalesce as terminations. The auxiliary, when contracted into a terminating syllable, retains its distinct and intrinsic meaning, as much as when associated with a verb by juxtaposition: consequently, an "auxiliary verb" may form a part of a mood or tense, or passive verb, with as much propriety as a terminating syllable. They who contend for the ancient custom of keeping the auxiliaries distinct, and parsing them as primary verbs, are, by the same principle, bound to extend their dissecting-knife to every compound word in the language.
If someone argues that will walk is made up of two words, each representing its own idea, and therefore should be analyzed on its own, the same reasoning can be applied to walk-eth, walk-ed, walk-did, or did walk. The outcome of all the discussions on this topic seems to boil down to the well-worn truth that in some languages, passive verbs, moods, and tenses are formed by inflections or endings added before or after, while in other languages, they are created by combining auxiliary verbs that haven’t been shortened and merged into terminations. When an auxiliary is shortened into a terminating syllable, it still keeps its clear meaning, just like when it’s paired with a verb side by side. Therefore, an "auxiliary verb" can be part of a mood or tense, or a passive verb, just as appropriately as a terminating syllable. Those who argue for the old practice of keeping auxiliaries separate and parsing them as main verbs are, by the same logic, obligated to apply their analytical approach to every compound word in the language.
Having thus attempted briefly to prove the philosophical accuracy of the theory which recognises the tenses, moods, and passive verbs, formed by the aid of auxiliaries, I shall now offer one argument to show that this theory, and this only, will subserve the purposes of the practical grammarian.
Having briefly tried to demonstrate the philosophical accuracy of the theory that acknowledges tenses, moods, and passive verbs created with the help of auxiliary verbs, I will now present one argument to show that this theory, and this only, will serve the needs of the practical grammarian.
As it is not so much the province of philology to instruct in the exact meaning of single and separate words, as it is to teach the student to combine and employ them properly in framing sentences, and as those combinations which go by the name of compound tenses and passive verbs, are necessary in writing and discourse, it follows, conclusively, that that theory which does not explain these verbs in their combined state, cannot teach the student the correct use and application of the verbs of our language. By such an arrangement, he cannot learn when it is proper to use the phrases, shall have walked, might have gone, have seen, instead of, shall walk, might go, and saw; because this theory has nothing to do with the combining of verbs. If it be alleged, that the speaker or writer's own good sense must guide him in combining these verbs, and, therefore, that the directions of the grammarian are unnecessary, it must be recollected, that such an argument would bear, equally, against every principle of grammar whatever. In short, the theory of the compound tenses, and of the passive verb, appears to be so firmly based in the genius of our language, and so practically important to the student, as to defy all the engines of the paralogistic speculator, and the philosophical quibbler, to batter it down.
As philology focuses more on teaching students how to properly combine and use words in sentences rather than just the exact meaning of individual words, understanding the combinations known as compound tenses and passive verbs is essential for writing and speaking. Therefore, any theory that fails to explain these verbs in their combined form cannot effectively teach students how to correctly use and apply the verbs in our language. Without this understanding, students won’t know when to use phrases like shall have walked, might have gone, have seen instead of just shall walk, might go, and saw; this is because the theory ignores how verbs combine. If someone argues that a speaker or writer should rely on their own judgment to combine these verbs, then that argument could be applied against any grammatical principle. In summary, the theory behind compound tenses and passive verbs is deeply embedded in the nature of our language and is crucial for students, making it resistant to challenges from misguided thinkers and philosophical detractors.
But the most plausible objection to the old theory is, that it is encumbered with much useless technicality and tedious prolixity, which are avoided by the simple process of exploding the passive verb, and reducing the number of the moods to three, and of the tenses to two. It is certain, however, that if we reject the names of the perfect, pluperfect, and future tenses, the names of the potential and subjunctive moods, and of the passive verb, in writing and discourse we must still employ those verbal combinations which form them; and it is equally certain, that the proper mode of employing such combinations, is as easily taught or learned by the old theory, which names them, as by the new, which gives them no name.
But the most convincing criticism of the old theory is that it’s weighed down with a lot of unnecessary jargon and frustratingly long explanations, which can be avoided by simply eliminating the passive verb and reducing the number of moods to three and tenses to two. However, it’s clear that even if we discard the terms for perfect, pluperfect, and future tenses, as well as the terms for potential and subjunctive moods and the passive voice, we still need to use those verbal combinations that create them in writing and conversation; and it's just as easy to learn the proper way to use those combinations through the old theory, which names them, as it is through the new theory, which gives them no names.
On philosophical principles, we might, perhaps, dispense with the future tenses of the verb, by analyzing each word separately; but, as illustrated on page 79, the combined words which form our perfect and pluperfect tenses have an associated meaning, which is destroyed by analyzing each word separately. That arrangement, therefore, which rejects these tenses, appears to be, not only unphilosophical, but inconsistent and inaccurate.
On philosophical grounds, we could possibly do away with the future tenses of the verb by breaking down each word individually; however, as shown on page 79, the combined words that make up our perfect and pluperfect tenses have an associated meaning that gets lost when we analyze each word separately. Therefore, the approach that disregards these tenses seems to be not only unphilosophical, but also inconsistent and inaccurate.
For the satisfaction of those teachers who prefer it, and for their adoption, too, a modernized philosophical theory of the moods and tenses is here presented. If it is not quite so convenient and useful as the old one, they need not hesitate to adopt it. It has the advantage of being new; and, moreover, it sounds large, and will make the commonalty stare. Let it be distinctly understood, that you teach "philosophical grammar, founded on reason and common sense," and you will pass for a very learned man, and make all the good housewives wonder at the rapid march of intellect, and the vast improvements of the age.
For those teachers who prefer it and want to adopt it, a modernized philosophical theory of moods and tenses is presented here. If it isn’t quite as convenient and useful as the old one, there's no need for them to hesitate in adopting it. It has the advantage of being new; plus, it sounds impressive and will make the common people take notice. Let it be clear that if you teach "philosophical grammar, based on reason and common sense," you’ll be viewed as a very knowledgeable person, and you’ll leave all the good housewives amazed at the swift progress of knowledge and the significant advancements of our time.
MOOD.
Verbs have three moods, the indicative, (embracing what is commonly included under the indicative, the subjunctive, and the potential,) the imperative, and the infinitive.—For definitions, refer to the body of the work.
Verbs have three moods: the indicative (which includes what’s generally covered under the indicative, the subjunctive, and the potential), the imperative, and the infinitive. For definitions, refer to the main text.
TENSE OR TIME.
Verbs have only two tenses, the present and the past. A verb expressing action commenced and not completed, is in the present tense; as, "Religion soars: it has gained many victories: it will [to] carry its votaries to the blissful regions."
Verbs have just two tenses, the present and the past. A verb that shows an action that has started but isn't finished is in the present tense; for example, "Religion soars: it has won many victories: it will [to] carry its followers to the blissful places."
When a verb expresses finished action, it is in the past tense; as, "This page (the Bible) God hung out of heaven, and retired."
When a verb shows that an action is complete, it is in the past tense; for example, "This page (the Bible) God hung out of heaven, and retired."
A verb in the imperative and infinitive moods, is always in the present tense, high authorities to the contrary notwithstanding. The command must necessarily be given in time present, although its fulfilment must be future. John, what are you doing? Learning my task. Why do you learn it? Because my preceptor commanded me to do so. When did he command you? Yesterday.—Not now, of course.
A verb in the imperative and infinitive moods is always in the present tense, despite what some authorities say. The command must necessarily be given in the present time, even though its fulfilment will happen in the future. John, what are you doing? Learning my task. Why are you learning it? Because my teacher commanded me to do so. When did he command you? Yesterday.—Not now, of course.
That it is inconsistent with the nature of things for a command to be given in future time, and that the fulfilment of the command, though future, has nothing to do with the tense or time of the command itself, are truths so plain as to put to the blush the gross absurdity of those who identify the time of the fulfilment with that of the command.
That it doesn’t make sense for a command to be given in the future tense, and that the fulfilment of the command, even if it’s in the future, has nothing to do with the tense or timing of the command itself, are truths so obvious that they expose the ridiculousness of those who equate the timing of the fulfilment with that of the command.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
You may read the book which I have printed.
You can read the book that I have printed.
May, an irregular active verb, signifying "to have and to exercise might or strength," indic. mood, pres. tense, second pers. plur. agreeing with its nom. you. Read, an irregular verb active, infinitive mood, pres. tense, with the sign to understood, referring to you as its agent. Have, an active verb, signifying to possess, indic. present, and having for its object, book understood after "which." Printed, a perf. participle, referring to book understood.
May, an irregular active verb, meaning "to have and exert power or strength," indicative mood, present tense, second person plural agreeing with its subject you. Read, an irregular active verb, infinitive mood, present tense, with the word to implied, referring to you as the doer. Have, an active verb, meaning to possess, indicative present, with the object being "book" understood after "which." Printed, a perfect participle, referring to "book" understood.
Johnson, and Blair, and Lowth, would have been laughed at, had they essayed to thrust any thing like our modernized philosophical grammar down the throats of their contemporaries.
Johnson, Blair, and Lowth would have been laughed at if they had tried to force anything like our modern philosophical grammar onto their peers.
Would, an active verb, signifying "to exercise volition," in the past tense of the indicative. Have, a verb, in the infinitive, to understood. Been, a perfect part. of to be, referring to Johnson, Blair, and Lowth. Laughed at, perf. part, of to laugh at, referring to the same as been. Had, active verb, in the past tense of the indicative, agreeing with its nom. they. Essayed, perf. part, referring to they. Call this "philosophical parsing, on reasoning principles, according to the original laws of nature and of thought," and the pill will be swallowed, by pedants and their dupes, with the greatest ease imaginable.
Would is an active verb that means "to make a choice," in the past tense of the indicative. Have is a verb in the infinitive, with to understood. Been is a perfect participle of be, referring to Johnson, Blair, and Lowth. Laughed at is a perfect participle of laugh at, referring to the same as been. Had is an active verb in the past tense of the indicative, agreeing with its nominative they. Essayed is a perfect participle referring to they. Call this "philosophical parsing, based on reasoning principles, according to the original laws of nature and thought," and the pill will be swallowed by pedants and their followers with the greatest ease imaginable.
LECTURE XII.
OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
Irregular verbs are those that do not form their imperfect tense and perfect participle by the addition of d or ed to the present tense; as,
Irregular verbs are those that don't create their past tense and past participle by adding d or ed to the present tense; for example,
Pres. Tense. | Imperf. Tense. | Perf. or Pass. Part. |
I write | I wrote | written |
I begin | I began | begun |
I go | I went | gone |
The following is a list of the irregular verbs. Those marked with an R are sometimes conjugated regularly.
The following is a list of the irregular verbs. Those marked with an R are sometimes conjugated regularly.
Pres. Tense. | Imperf. Tense. | Perf. or Pass. Part. |
Abide | abode | abode |
Am | was | been |
Arise | arose | arisen |
Awake | awoke, R. | awaked |
Bear, to bring forth | bare | born |
Bear, to carry | bore | borne |
Beat | beat | beaten, beat |
Begin | began | begun |
Bend | bent | bent |
Bereave | bereft, R. | bereft, R. |
Beseech | besought | besought |
Bid | bade, bid | bidden, bid |
Bind | bound | bound |
Bite | bit | bitten, bit |
Bleed | bled | bled |
Blow | blew | blown |
Break | broke | broken |
Breed | bred | bred |
Bring | brought | brought |
Build | built | built |
Burst | burst, R. | burst, R. |
Buy | bought | bought |
Cast | cast | cast |
Catch | caught, R. | caught, R. |
Chide | chid | chidden, chid |
Choose | chose | chosen |
Cleave, to adhere | clave, R. | cleaved |
Cleave, to split | cleft or clove | cleft, cloven |
Cling | clung | clung |
Clothe | clothed | clad, R. |
Come | came | come |
Cost | cost | cost |
Crow | crew, R. | crowed |
Creep | crept | crept |
Cut | cut | cut |
Dare, to venture | durst | dared |
Dare, to challenge | REGULAR | |
Deal | dealt, R. | dealt, R. |
Dig | dug, R. | dug, R. |
Do | did | done |
Draw | drew | drawn |
Drive | drove | driven |
Drink | drank | drunk, drank[6] |
Dwell | dwelt, R. | dwelt, R. |
Eat | eat, ate | eaten |
Fall | fell | fallen |
Feed | fed | fed |
Feel | felt | felt |
Fight | fought | fought |
Find | found | found |
Flee | fled | fled |
Fling | flung | flung |
Fly | flew | flown |
Forget | forgot | forgotten |
Forsake | forsook | forsaken |
Freeze | froze | frozen |
Get | got | got[7] |
Gild | gilt, R. | gilt, R. |
Gird | girt, R. | girt, R. |
Give | gave | given |
Go | went | gone |
Grave | graved | graven, R. |
Grind | ground | ground |
Grow | grew | grown |
Have | had | had |
Hang | hung, R. | hung, R. |
Hear | heard | heard |
Hew | hewed | hewn, R. |
Hide | hid | hidden, hid |
Hit | hit | hit |
Hold | held | held |
Hurt | hurt | hurt |
Keep | kept | kept |
Knit | knit, R. | knit, R. |
Know | knew | known |
Lade | laded | laden |
Lay | laid | laid |
Lead | led | led |
Leave | left | left |
Lend | lent | lent |
Let | let | let |
Lie, to lie down | lay | lain |
Load | loaded | laden, R. |
Lose | lost | lost |
Make | made | made |
Meet | met | met |
Mow | mowed | mown, R. |
Pay | paid | paid |
Put | put | put |
Read | read | read |
Rend | rent | rent |
Rid | rid | rid |
Ride | rode | rode, ridden[8] |
Ring | rung, rang | rung |
Rise | rose | risen |
Rive | rived | riven |
Run | ran | run |
Saw | sawed | sawn, R. |
Say | said | said |
See | saw | seen |
Seek | sought | sought |
Sell | sold | sold |
Send | sent | sent |
Set | set | set |
Shake | shook | shaken |
Shape | shaped | shaped, shapen |
Shave | shaved | shaven, R. |
Shear | sheared | shorn |
Shed | shed | shed |
Shine | shone, R. | shone, R. |
Show | showed | shown |
Shoe | shod | shod |
Shoot | shot | shot |
Shrink | shrunk | shrunk |
Shred | shred | shred |
Shut | shut | shut |
Sing | sung, sang[9] | sung |
Sink | sunk, sank[9] | sunk |
Sit | sat | set |
Slay | slew | slain |
Sleep | slept | slept |
Slide | slid | slidden |
Sling | slung | slung |
Slink | slunk | slunk |
Slit | slit, R. | slit |
Smite | smote | smitten |
Sow | sowed | sown, R. |
Speak | spoke | spoken |
Speed | sped | sped |
Spend | spent | spent |
Spill | spilt, R. | spilt, R. |
Spin | spun | spun |
Spit | spit, spat | spit, spitten[10] |
Split | split | split |
Spread | spread | spread |
Spring | sprung, sprang | sprung |
Stand | stood | stood |
Steal | stole | stolen |
Stick | stuck | stuck |
Sting | stung | stung |
Stink | stunk | stunk |
Stride | strode, strid | stridden |
Strike | struck | struck or stricken |
String | strung | strung |
Strive | strove | striven |
Strow or strew | strowed or strewed | strown, strowed or strewed |
Sweat | swet, R. | swet, R. |
Swear | swore | sworn |
Swell | swelled | swollen, R. |
Swim | swum, swam | swum |
Swing | swung | swung |
Take | took | taken |
Teach | taught | taught |
Tear | tore | torn |
Tell | told | told |
Think | thought | thought |
Thrive | throve, R. | thriven |
Throw | threw | thrown |
Thrust | thrust | thrust |
Tread | trod | trodden |
Wax | waxed | waxen, R. |
Wear | wore | worn |
Weave | wove | woven |
Wet | wet | wet, R. |
Weep | wept | wept |
Win | won | won |
Wind | wound | wound |
Work | wrought, worked | wrought, worked |
Wring | wrung | wrung |
Write | wrote | written |
In familiar writing and discourse, the following, and some other verbs, are often improperly terminated by t instead of ed; as, "learnt, spelt, spilt, stopt, latcht." They should be, "learned, spelled, spilled, stopped, latched."
In everyday writing and conversation, the following and some other verbs are often incorrectly ended with t instead of ed; for example, "learnt, spelt, spilt, stopt, latcht." They should be "learned, spelled, spilled, stopped, latched."
You may now conjugate the following irregular verbs, in a manner similar to the conjugation of regular verbs: arise, begin, bind, do, go, grow, run, lend, teach, write. Thus, to arise—Indicative mood, pres. tense, first person, sing. I arise; imperf. tense, I arose; perf. tense, I have arisen, and so on, through all the moods, and all the tenses of each mood; and then speak the participles: thus, pres. arising, perf. arisen, comp. having arisen. In the next place, conjugate the same verb in the second person sing. through all the moods and tenses; and then in the third person sing. and in the first pers. plural. After that, you may proceed in the same manner with the words begin, bind, &c.
You can now conjugate the following irregular verbs, similar to how you conjugate regular verbs: arise, begin, bind, do, go, grow, run, lend, teach, write. So, for arise—Indicative mood, present tense, first person, singular: I arise; imperfect tense: I arose; perfect tense: I have arisen, and continue this through all the moods and tenses of each mood; then state the participles: present: arising, perfect: arisen, compound: having arisen. Next, conjugate the same verb in the second person singular through all the moods and tenses; then do the same for the third person singular and first person plural. After that, you can follow the same steps with the words begin, bind, etc.
Now read the eleventh and twelfth lectures four or five times over, and learn the order of parsing a verb. You will then be prepared to parse the following verbs in full; and I presume, all the other parts of speech. Whenever you parse, you must refer to the Compendium for definitions and rules, if you cannot repeat them without, I will now parse a verb, and describe all its properties by applying the definitions and rules according to the systematic order.
Now read the eleventh and twelfth lectures four or five times, and learn the steps to analyze a verb. You’ll then be ready to analyze the following verbs in detail, and I assume, all the other parts of speech as well. Whenever you analyze, you should refer to the Compendium for definitions and rules if you can’t recall them on your own. I will now analyze a verb and explain all its properties by using the definitions and rules in the proper order.
"We could not accomplish the business."
"We couldn't get the business done."
Could accomplish is a verb, a word which signifies to do—active, it expresses action—transitive, the action passes over from the nom. "we" to the object "business"—regular, it will form its imperfect tense of the indic. mood and perf. part, in ed—potential mood, it implies possibility or power—imperfect tense, it denotes past time however distant—first pers. plural, because the nom. "we" is with which it agrees, agreeably to RULE 4. A verb must agree, &c. Conjugated—Indic. mood, present tense, first pers. sing. I accomplish; imperfect tense, I accomplished; perfect, I have accomplished; pluperfect, I had accomplished; and so on.—Speak it in the person of each tense through all the moods, and conjugate, in the same manner, every verb you parse.
Could accomplish is a verb, which means to do—it's active, expressing action—transitive, meaning the action goes from the subject "we" to the object "business"—regular, it will form its past tense in ed—potential mood, indicating possibility or capability—imperfect tense, which refers to the past regardless of how long ago—first person plural, because it agrees with the subject "we," following RULE 4. A verb must agree, etc. Conjugated—indicative mood, present tense, first person singular: I accomplish; imperfect tense: I accomplished; perfect: I have accomplished; pluperfect: I had accomplished; and so on.—Say it in each tense through all the moods, and conjugate every verb you analyze in the same way.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
These exercises contain a complete variety of Moods and Tenses.
These exercises include a full range of moods and tenses.
I learn my lesson well. Charles, thou learnest thy lesson badly. John, do you write a good hand? Those ladies wrote a beautiful letter, but they did not despatch it. Have you seen the gentleman to whom I gave the book? He has gone. They had received the news before the messenger arrived. When will those persons return? My friend shall receive his reward. He will have visited me three times, if he come to-morrow.
I learn my lesson well. Charles, you learned your lesson poorly. John, can you write well? Those ladies wrote a beautiful letter, but they didn’t send it. Have you seen the gentleman I gave the book to? He’s gone. They had received the news before the messenger arrived. When will those people return? My friend will get his reward. He will have visited me three times if he comes tomorrow.
If Eliza study diligently, she will improve. If Charles studies he does not improve. Unless that man shall have accomplished his work, by midsummer, he will receive no wages. Orlando, obey my precepts, unless you wish to injure yourself. Remember what is told you. The physician may administer the medicine, but Providence only can bless it. I told, him that he might go, but he would not. He might have gone last week, had he conducted himself properly; (that is, if he had conducted, &c.) Boys, prepare to recite your lessons. Young ladies, let me hear you repeat what you have learned. Study, diligently, whatever task may be allotted to you. To correct the spirit of discontent, let us consider how little we deserve. To die for one's country, is glorious. How can we become wise? To seek God is wisdom. What is true greatness? Active benevolence. A good man is a great man.
If Eliza studies hard, she will get better. If Charles studies, he doesn’t improve. Unless that man finishes his work by midsummer, he won't get paid. Orlando, follow my advice unless you want to hurt yourself. Remember what you’ve been told. The doctor can give the medicine, but only Providence can bless it. I told him he could go, but he wouldn’t. He could have left last week if he had behaved properly; (that is, if he had behaved, etc.) Boys, get ready to recite your lessons. Young ladies, let me hear you repeat what you have learned. Study hard, whatever task you’ve been given. To fix the spirit of discontent, let’s think about how little we deserve. To die for one’s country is glorious. How can we become wise? Seeking God is wisdom. What is true greatness? Active kindness. A good person is a great person.
NOTE 1. Man, following great, and what, in the last two examples, are nom. after is: RULE 21. To seek God, and to die for one's country, are members of sentences, each put as the nom. case to is respectively: RULE 24. The verb to correct is the infinitive mood absolute: NOTE under RULE 23. May be allotted is a passive verb, agreeing with which, the relative part of whatever. That, the first part of whatever, is an adj. pronoun, agreeing with task; and task is governed by study. Hear, following let, and repeat, following hear, are in the infinitive mood without the sign to, according to RULE 25. To recite is governed by prepare: RULE 23. Is told, is a passive verb, agreeing with which, the relative part of whatever; and you, following, is governed by to understood: NOTE 1, under RULE 32.
NOTE 1. Man, following great, and what, in the last two examples, are the nominative case after is: RULE 21. To seek God and to die for one's country are parts of sentences, each treated as the nominative case to is respectively: RULE 24. The verb to correct is the infinitive mood absolute: NOTE under RULE 23. May be allotted is a passive verb, agreeing with which, the relative part of whatever. That, the first part of whatever, is an adjective pronoun, agreeing with task; and task is governed by study. Hear, following let, and repeat, following hear, are in the infinitive mood without the sign to, according to RULE 25. To recite is governed by prepare: RULE 23. Is told is a passive verb, agreeing with which, the relative part of whatever; and you, following, is governed by to understood: NOTE 1, under RULE 32.
2. In parsing a pronoun, if the noun for which it stands is not expressed, you must say it represents some person or thing understood.
2. When analyzing a pronoun, if the noun it replaces is not mentioned, you should say it refers to some person or thing that is implied.
LECTURE XIII.
OF THE AUXILIARY, PASSIVE, AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.
I. AUXILIARY VERBS.
Before you attend to the following additional remarks on the Auxiliary Verbs, you will do well to read again what is said respecting them in Lecture XI. page 140. The short account there given, and their application in conjugating verbs, have already made them quite familiar to you; and you have undoubtedly observed, that, without their help, we cannot conjugate any verb in any of the tenses, except the present and imperfect of the indicative and subjunctive moods, and the present of the imperative and infinitive. In the formation of all the other tenses, they are brought into requisition.
Before you dive into the following additional notes on the Auxiliary Verbs, it’s a good idea to revisit what was discussed about them in Lecture XI, page 140. The brief overview provided there, along with how they are used in verb conjugation, should have made them quite familiar to you. You’ve probably noticed that without their assistance, we can only conjugate verbs in the present and imperfect tenses of the indicative and subjunctive moods, as well as the present tense of the imperative and infinitive. For all other tenses, we rely on them.
MAY.
Pres. Tense | Sing. | I may, thou mayst, he may. |
Plur. | We may, ye or you may, they may. |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I might, thou mightst, he might. |
Plur. | We might, ye or you might, they might. |
CAN.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | I can, thou canst, he can. |
Plur. | We can, ye or you can, they can. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I could, thou couldst, he could. |
Plur. | We could, ye or you could, they could. |
WILL.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | I will, thou wilt, he will. |
Plur. | We will, ye or you will, they will. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I would, thou wouldst, he would. |
Plur. | We would, ye or you would, they would. |
SHALL.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | I shall, thou shalt, he shall. |
Plur. | We shall, ye or you shall, they shall. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I should, thou shouldst, he should. |
Plur. | We should, ye or you should, they should. |
TO DO.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | I do, thou dost or doest, he doth or does. |
Plur. | We do, ye or you do, they do. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I did, thou didst, he did. |
Plur. | We did, ye or you did, they did. |
Participles. | Pres. doing. | Perf. done. |
TO BE.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | I am, thou art, he is. |
Plur. | We are, ye or you are, they are. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I was, thou wast, he was. |
Plur. | We were, ye or you were, they were. |
Participles. | Pres. being. | Perf. been. |
TO HAVE.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | I have, thou hast, he hath or has. |
Plur. | We have, ye or you have, they have. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I had, thou hadst, he had. |
Plur. | We had, ye or you had, they had. |
Participles. | Pres. having. | Perf. had. |
Do, be, have, and will, are sometimes used as principal verbs; and when employed as such, do, be, and have, may be conjugated, by the help of other auxiliaries, through all the moods and tenses.
Do, be, have, and will are sometimes used as main verbs; when they are used this way, do, be, and have can be conjugated, with the help of other auxiliary verbs, across all moods and tenses.
DO. The different tenses of do, in the several moods, are thus formed: Indicative mood, pres. tense, first pers. sing. I do; imperfect tense, I did; perf. I have done; pluperfect, I had done; first future, I shall or will do; sec. fut. I shall have done. Subjunctive mood, pres. tense, If I do; imperf. if I did; and so on. Imperative mood, do thou. Potential, pres. I may, can, or must do, &c. Infinitive, present, to do; perf. to have done. Participles, pres. doing; perf. done; compound, having done.
DO. The different tenses of do, in various moods, are formed as follows: Indicative mood, present tense, first person singular: I do; past tense: I did; perfect: I have done; past perfect: I had done; simple future: I shall or will do; future perfect: I shall have done. Subjunctive mood, present tense: If I do; past tense: if I did; and so on. Imperative mood: do thou. Potential, present: I may, can, or must do, etc. Infinitive, present: to do; perfect: to have done. Participles, present: doing; perfect: done; compound: having done.
HAVE. Have is in great demand. No verb can be conjugated through all the moods and tenses without it. Have, when used as a principal verb, is doubled in some of the past tenses, and becomes an auxiliary to itself; thus, Indic. mood, pres. tense, first pers. sing. I have; imperf. tense, I had; perf. I have had; pluperf. I had had; first fut. I shall or will have; sec. fut. I shall have had. Subjunctive, present, if I have; imperf. if I had; perf. if I have had; pluperf. if I had had; first fut. if I shall or will have; sec. fut. if I shall have had. Imper. mood, have thou. Potential, present, I may, can, or must have; imperf. I might, could, would, or should have; perf. I may, can, or must have had; pluperf. I might, could, would, or should have had. Infinitive, present, to have; perf. to have had. Participles, pres. having; perf. had; compound, having had.
HAVE. Have is in high demand. No verb can be conjugated through all the moods and tenses without it. Have, when used as a main verb, appears twice in some past tenses and acts as an auxiliary to itself; so, indicative mood, present tense, first person singular I have; imperfect tense, I had; perfect I have had; pluperfect I had had; future I shall or will have; future perfect I shall have had. Subjunctive, present, if I have; imperfect, if I had; perfect, if I have had; pluperfect, if I had had; future, if I shall or will have; future perfect, if I shall have had. Imperative mood, have you. Potential, present, I may, can, or must have; imperfect, I might, could, would, or should have; perfect, I may, can, or must have had; pluperfect, I might, could, would, or should have had. Infinitive, present, to have; perfect, to have had. Participles, present, having; perfect, had; compound, having had.
BE. In the next place I will present to you the conjugation of the irregular, neuter verb, Be, which is an auxiliary whenever it is placed before the perfect participle of another verb, but in every other situation, it is a principal verb.
BE. Next, I will show you the conjugation of the irregular, neuter verb, Be, which acts as an auxiliary whenever it comes before the perfect participle of another verb, but in all other cases, it functions as a main verb.
TO BE.—INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | I am, thou art, he, she, or it is. |
Plur. | We are, ye or you are, they are. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I was, thou wast, he was. |
Plur. | We were, ye or you were, they were. | |
Perf. Tense. | Sing. | I have been, thou hast been, he hath or has been. |
Plur. | We have been, ye or you have been, they have been. | |
Plup. Tense. | Sing. | I had been, thou hadst been, he had been. |
Plur. | We had been, ye or you had been, they had been. | |
First Fut. T. | Sing. | I shall or will be, thou shalt or wilt be, he shall or will be. |
Plur. | We shall or will be, you shall or will be, they shall or will be. | |
Second Fut. T. | Sing. | I shall have been, thou wilt have been, he will have been. |
Plur. | We shall have been, you will have been, they will have been. |
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | If I be, if thou be, if he be. |
Plur. | If we be, if ye or you be, if they be. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | If I were, if thou wert, if he were. |
Plur. | If we were, if ye or you were, if they were. |
The neuter verb to be, and all passive verbs, have two forms in the imperfect tense of this mood, as well as in the present; therefore, the following rule may serve to direct you in the proper use of each form. When the sentence implies doubt, supposition, &c. and the neuter verb be, or the passive verb, is used with a reference to present or future time, and is either followed or preceded by another verb in the imperfect of the potential mood, the conjunctive form of the imperfect tense must be employed; as, "If he were here, we should rejoice together;" "She might go, were she so disposed." But when there is no reference to present or future time, and the verb is neither followed nor preceded by another in the potential imperfect, the indicative form of the imperfect tense must be used; as, "If he was ill, he did not make it known;" "Whether he was absent or present, is a matter of no consequence." The general rule for using the conjunctive form of the verb, is presented on page 145. See, also, page 135.
The neutral verb to be and all passive verbs have two forms in the imperfect tense of this mood, just like in the present. Therefore, the following rule can help guide you in the correct use of each form. When a sentence expresses doubt, speculation, etc., and the neutral verb be or the passive verb is used in reference to present or future time and is either followed or preceded by another verb in the imperfect of the potential mood, the subjunctive form of the imperfect tense should be used; for example, "If he were here, we would rejoice together;" "She might go, if she wished." However, when there’s no reference to present or future time, and the verb is neither followed nor preceded by another in the potential imperfect, the indicative form of the imperfect tense must be used; for instance, "If he was ill, he did not let it be known;" "Whether he was absent or present is of no significance." The general rule for using the subjunctive form of the verb is presented on page 145. See also page 135.
The perfect, pluperfect, and first future tenses of the subjunctive mood, are conjugated in a manner similar to the correspondent tenses of the indicative. The second future is conjugated thus:
The perfect, pluperfect, and first future tenses of the subjunctive mood are conjugated in a way that's similar to the corresponding tenses of the indicative. The second future is conjugated like this:
Second Fut. T.
Sing. | If I shall have been, if thou shalt have been, if he shall. &c |
Plur. | If we shall have been, if you shall have been, if they, &c. |
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | Be, or be thou, or do thou be. |
Plur. | Be, or be ye or you, or do ye or you be. |
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Pres. Tense | Sing. | I may, can, or must be, thou mayst, canst, or must be, he may, can, or must be. |
Plur. | We may, can, or must be, ye or you may, can, or must be, they may, can, or must be. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I might, could, would, or should be, thou mightest, &c. |
Plur. | We might, could, would, or should be, you might, &c. | |
Perf. Tense | Sing. | I may, can, or must have been, thou mayst, canst, &c. |
Plur. | We may, can, or must have been, you may, can, or must be, &c. | |
Pluper. Tense. | Sing. | I might, could, would, or should have been, thou, &c. |
Plur. | We might, could, would, or should have been, you, &c. |
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Pres. Tense. | To be. | Perf. Tense. | To have been. |
PARTICIPLES.
Pres. | Being. | Perf. | Been. | Compound. | Having been. |
This verb to be, though very irregular in its conjugation, is by far the most important verb in our language, for it is more frequently used than any other; many rules of syntax depend on constructions associated with it, and, without its aid, no passive verb can be conjugated. You ought, therefore, to make yourself perfectly familiar with all its changes, before you proceed any farther.
This verb "to be," although very irregular in how it’s conjugated, is by far the most important verb in our language, as it’s used more often than any other. Many rules of grammar rely on the constructions that involve it, and without its help, no passive verb can be conjugated. So, you should make sure you fully understand all its forms before you go any further.
II. PASSIVE VERBS.
The cases of nouns are a fruitful theme for investigation and discussion. In the progress of these lectures, this subject has frequently engaged our attention; and, now, in introducing to your notice the passive verb, it will, perhaps, be found both interesting and profitable to present one more view of the nominative case.
The cases of nouns are a rich topic for exploration and conversation. Throughout these lectures, we've often focused on this subject; and now, as I introduce you to the passive verb, it might be both intriguing and beneficial to offer one more perspective on the nominative case.
Every sentence, you recollect, must have one finite verb, or more than one, and one nominative, either expressed or implied, for, without them, no sentence can exist.
Every sentence, as you remember, must have at least one finite verb, or more, and one nominative, either stated or understood, because without these elements, a sentence cannot exist.
The nominative is the actor or subject concerning which the verb makes an affirmation. There are three kinds of nominatives, active, passive, and neuter.
The nominative is the actor or subject that the verb refers to when making a statement. There are three types of nominatives: active, passive, and neuter.
The nominative to an active verb, is active, because it produces an action, and the nominative to a passive verb, is passive, because it receives or endures the action expressed by the verb; for,
The subject of an active verb is active, because it creates an action, and the subject of a passive verb is passive, because it receives or experiences the action expressed by the verb; for,
You perceive, that the nominative boy, in this example, is not represented as the actor, but as the object of the action expressed by the verb is beaten; that is, the boy receives or endures the action performed by his father; therefore boy is a passive nominative. And you observe, too, that the verb is beaten, denotes the action received or endured by the nominative; therefore is beaten is a passive verb.
You notice that the noun boy, in this example, isn’t shown as the doer, but as the receiver of the action expressed by the verb is beaten; that is, the boy receives or goes through the action done by his father; therefore, boy is a passive noun. You also see that the verb is beaten indicates the action experienced or received by the noun; so is beaten is a passive verb.
If I say, John kicked the horse, John is an active nominative, because he performed or produced the action; but if I say, John was kicked by the horse, John is a passive nominative, because he received or endured the action.
If I say, John kicked the horse, John is the active subject because he did the action; but if I say, John was kicked by the horse, John is the passive subject because he received the action.
The nominative to a neuter verb, is neuter, because it does not produce an action nor receive one; as, John sits in the chair. John is here connected with the neuter verb sits, which expresses simply the state of being of its nominative, therefore John is a neuter nominative.
The subject of a neuter verb is neuter, because it neither performs an action nor receives one; for example, John sits in the chair. Here, John is linked to the neuter verb sits, which simply expresses the state of being of its subject, making John a neuter subject.
I will now illustrate the active, passive, and neuter nominatives by a few examples.
I will now show the active, passive, and neuter nominatives with a few examples.
I. Of ACTIVE NOMINATIVES; as, "The boy beats the dog; The lady sings; The ball rolls; The man walks."
I. Of ACTIVE NOMINATIVES; as, "The boy beats the dog; The lady sings; The ball rolls; The man walks."
II. Of PASSIVE NOMINATIVES; as, "The boy is beaten; The lady is loved; The ball is rolled; The man was killed."
II. Of PASSIVE NOMINATIVES; as, "The boy is being beaten; The lady is being loved; The ball is being rolled; The man was killed."
III. Of NEUTER NOMINATIVES; as, "The boy remains idle; The lady is beautiful; The ball lies on the ground; The man lives in town." You may now proceed to the conjugation of passive verbs.
III. Of NEUTER NOMINATIVES; as, "The boy stays idle; The lady is beautiful; The ball is on the ground; The man lives in town." You may now proceed to the conjugation of passive verbs.
Passive Verbs are called regular when they end in ed; as, was loved; was conquered.
Passive verbs are called regular when they end in ed; for example, was loved; was conquered.
All Passive Verbs are formed by adding the perfect participle of an active-transitive verb, to the neuter verb to be.
All Passive Verbs are formed by adding the perfect participle of an active-transitive verb to the neuter verb to be.
If you place a perfect participle of an active-transitive verb after this neuter verb be, in any mood or tense, you will have a passive verb in the same mood and tense that the verb be would be in if the participle were not used; as, I am slighted; I was slighted; he will be slighted; If I be slighted; I may, can, or must be slighted, &c. Hence you perceive, that when you shall have learned the conjugation of the verb be, you will be able to conjugate any passive verb in the English language.
If you place a perfect participle of an active-transitive verb after the neuter verb be, in any mood or tense, you will create a passive verb in the same mood and tense that the verb be would be in if the participle were not used; for example, I am slighted; I was slighted; he will be slighted; If I be slighted; I may, can, or must be slighted, etc. Thus, you can see that once you learn the conjugation of the verb be, you will be able to conjugate any passive verb in the English language.
The regular passive verb to be loved, which is formed by adding the perfect participle loved to the neuter verb to be, is conjugated in the following manner:
The regular passive verb to be loved, which is formed by adding the perfect participle loved to the neuter verb to be, is conjugated like this:
TO BE LOVED.—INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pres. Tense | Sing. | I am loved, thou art loved, he is loved. |
Plur. | We are loved, ye or you are loved, they are loved. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I was loved, thou wast loved, he was loved. |
Plur. | We were loved, ye or you were loved, they were loved. | |
Perfect Tense. | Sing. | I have been loved, thou hast been loved, he has been loved. |
Plur. | We have been loved, you have been loved, they have, &c. | |
Pluper. Tense | Sing. | I had been loved, thou hadst been loved, he had been, &c. |
Plur. | We had been loved, you had been loved, they had been, &c. | |
First Future. | Sing. | I shall or will be loved, thou shall or wilt be loved, he, &c. |
Plur. | We shall or will be loved, you shall or will be loved, they, &c. | |
First Future. | Sing. | I shall have been loved, thou wilt have been loved, he, &c. |
Plur. | We shall have been loved, you will have been loved, &c. |
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Pres. Tense | Sing. | If I be loved, if thou be loved, if he be loved. |
Plur. | If we be loved, if ye or you be loved, if they be loved. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | If I were loved, if thou wert loved, if he were loved. |
Plur. | If we were loved, if you were loved, if they were loved. |
This mood has six tenses:—See conjugation of the verb to be.
This mood has six tenses:—See the conjugation of the verb to be.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Pres. Tense. | Sing. | Be thou loved, or do thou be loved. |
Plur. | Be ye or you loved, or do ye be loved. |
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Pres. Tense | Sing. | I may, can, or must be loved, thou mayst, canst, or must, &c. |
Plur. | We may, can, or must be loved, you may, can, or must, &c. | |
Imperf. Tense. | Sing. | I might, could, would, or should be loved, thou mightst, &c. |
Plur. | We might, could, would, or should be loved, ye or you, &c. | |
Perfect Tense. | Sing. | I may, can, or must have been loved, thou mayst, canst, &c. |
Plur. | We may, can, or must have been loved, you may, can, &c. | |
Plup. Tense. | Sing. | I might, could, would, or should have been loved, thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst have |
Plur. | We might, could, would, or should have been loved, you might, could, would, or should have been loved, they, &c. |
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Pres. Tense. | To be loved. | Perf. Tense. | To have been loved. |
PARTICIPLES.
Present, | Being loved. | Perfect or Passive, | Loved. | Compound, | Having been loved. |
NOTE. This conjugation of the passive verb to be loved, is called the passive, voice of the regular active-transitive verb to love.
NOTE. This conjugation of the passive verb to be loved is called the passive voice of the regular active-transitive verb to love.
Now conjugate the following passive verbs; that is, speak them in the first pers. sing, and plur. of each tense, through all the moods, and speak the participles; "to be loved, to be rejected, to be slighted, to be conquered, to be seen, to be beaten, to be sought, to be taken."
Now conjugate the following passive verbs; that is, say them in the first person singular and plural of each tense, through all the moods, and say the participles: "to be loved, to be rejected, to be slighted, to be conquered, to be seen, to be beaten, to be sought, to be taken."
NOTE 1. When the perfect participle of an intransitive verb is joined to the neuter verb to be, the combination is not a passive verb, but a neuter verb in a passive form; as, "He is gone; The birds are flown; The boy is grown; My friend is arrived." The following mode of construction, is, in general, to be preferred; "He has gone; The birds have flown; The boy has grown; My Friend has arrived."
NOTE 1. When the perfect participle of an intransitive verb is combined with the neuter verb to be, the result is not a passive verb, but a neuter verb in a passive form; for example, "He is gone; The birds are flown; The boy is grown; My friend is arrived." The following construction is generally preferred: "He has gone; The birds have flown; The boy has grown; My friend has arrived."
2. Active and neuter verbs may be conjugated by adding their present participle to the auxiliary verb to be, through all its variations; as, instead of, I teach, thou teachest, he teaches, &c., we may say, I am teaching, thou art teaching, he is teaching, &c.; and, instead of, I taught, &c.; I was teaching, &c. This mode of conjugation expresses the continuation of an action or state of being; and has, on some occasions, a peculiar propriety, and contributes to the harmony and precision of language. When the present participle of an active verb is joined with the neuter verb to be, the two words united, are, by some grammarians, denominated an active verb, either transitive or intransitive, as the case may be; as, "I am writing a letter; He is walking:" and when the present participle of a neuter verb is thus employed, they term the combination a neuter verb; as, "I am sitting; He is standing." Others, in constructions like these, parse each word separately. Either mode may be adopted.
2. Active and neuter verbs can be conjugated by adding their present participle to the auxiliary verb to be, in all its forms; for example, instead of saying, I teach, you teach, he teaches, etc., we can say, I am teaching, you are teaching, he is teaching, etc.; and instead of saying, I taught, etc., we can say, I was teaching, etc. This way of conjugating expresses the continuation of an action or state of being and has a unique appropriateness in some cases, contributing to the rhythm and clarity of language. When the present participle of an active verb is combined with the neuter verb to be, some grammarians refer to the combined form as an active verb, whether it's transitive or intransitive, depending on the context; for example, "I am writing a letter; He is walking." When the present participle of a neuter verb is used this way, they call the combination a neuter verb; for instance, "I am sitting; He is standing." Others analyze each word individually in these constructions. Either method can be used.
III. DEFECTIVE VERBS.
DEFECTIVE VERBS are those which are used only in some of the moods and tenses.
DEFECTIVE VERBS are those that are only used in certain moods and tenses.
The principal of them are these.
These are the main ones.
Pres. Tense. | Imperf. Tense. | Perfect or Passive Participle is wanting. |
May, | might. | —————— |
Can, | could. | —————— |
Will, | would. | —————— |
Shall, | should. | —————— |
Must, | must. | —————— |
Ought, | ought. | —————— |
——— | quoth. | —————— |
NOTE. Must and ought are not varied. Ought and quoth are never used as auxiliaries. Ought is always followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, which verb determines its tenses. Ought is in the present tense when the infinitive following it is in the present; as, "He ought to do it;" and ought is in the imperfect tense when followed by the perfect of the infinitive; as, "He ought to have done it."
NOTE. Must and ought do not change form. Ought and quoth are never used as helping verbs. Ought is always followed by a verb in the infinitive form, which determines its tense. Ought is in the present tense when the following infinitive is in the present; for example, "He ought to do it;" and ought is in the past tense when followed by the perfect infinitive; for example, "He ought to have done it."
Before you proceed to the analysis of the following examples, you may read over the last three lectures carefully and attentively; and as soon as you become acquainted with all that has been presented, you will understand nearly all the principles and regular constructions of our language. In parsing a verb, or any other part of speech, be careful to pursue the systematic order, and to conjugate every verb until you become familiar with all the moods and tenses.
Before you dive into analyzing the following examples, you should carefully read through the last three lectures. Once you're familiar with everything that's been presented, you'll grasp almost all the principles and standard constructions of our language. When parsing a verb or any other part of speech, make sure to follow the systematic order and conjugate each verb until you're comfortable with all the moods and tenses.
"He should have been punished before he committed that atrocious deed."
"He should have been punished before he did that terrible act."
Should have been punished is a verb, a word that signifies to do—passive, it denotes action received or endured by the nom.—it is formed by adding the perfect part, punished to the neuter verb to be—regular, the perf. part, ends in ed—potential mood, it implies obligation, &c.—pluperfect tense, it denotes a past act which was prior to the other past time specified by "committed"—third pers. sing. num. because the nom. "he" is with which it agrees: RULE 4. The verb must agree, &c.—Conjugated, Indic. mood, pres. tense, he is punished; imperf. tense, he was punished; perf. tense, he has been punished; and so on. Conjugate it through all the moods and tenses, and speak the participles.
Should have been punished is a verb, a word that indicates an action—passive, it refers to action that is received or endured by the subject. It is formed by adding the perfect participle, punished, to the neuter verb to be. It's regular, as the perfect participle ends in ed. In the potential mood, it suggests obligation, etc. In the pluperfect tense, it indicates a past action that occurred before another past action described by "committed." It's third-person singular because it agrees with the subject "he": RULE 4. The verb must agree, etc. Conjugated, in the indicative mood, present tense, he is punished; imperfect tense, he was punished; perfect tense, he has been punished; and so on. Conjugate it through all the moods and tenses, and list the participles.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Columbus discovered America. America was discovered by Columbus. The preceptor is writing a letter. The letter is written by the preceptor. The work can be done. The house would have been built ere this, had he fulfilled his promise. If I be beaten by that man, he will be punished. Young man, if you wish to be respected, you must be more assiduous. Being ridiculed and despised, he left the institution. He is reading Homer. They are talking. He may be respected, if he become more ingenuous. My worthy friend ought to be honored for his benevolent deeds. This ought ye to have done.
Columbus discovered America. America was discovered by Columbus. The teacher is writing a letter. The letter is being written by the teacher. The work can be done. The house would have been built by now if he had kept his promise. If I get beaten by that man, he will be punished. Young man, if you want to be respected, you need to work harder. After being ridiculed and looked down on, he left the school. He is reading Homer. They are talking. He may be respected if he becomes more sincere. My good friend deserves to be honored for his kind actions. This is what you should have done.
ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN PARSING.
All the most important principles of the science, together with many of the rules, have now been presented and illustrated. But before you proceed to analyze the following exercises, you may turn over a few pages, and you will find all the rules presented in a body. Please to examine them critically, and parse the examples under each rule and note. The examples, you will notice, are given to illustrate the respective rules and notes under which they are placed; hence, by paying particular attention to them, you will be enabled fully and clearly to comprehend the meaning and application of all the rules and notes.
All the key principles of the science, along with many of the rules, have now been presented and explained. Before you dive into the exercises that follow, feel free to flip a few pages back to see all the rules compiled together. Please take a moment to review them closely, and analyze the examples under each rule and note. You’ll see that the examples are provided to illustrate the specific rules and notes they correspond to; therefore, by focusing on them, you'll be able to fully and clearly understand the meaning and application of all the rules and notes.
As soon as you become familiarly acquainted with all the definitions so that you can apply them with facility, you may omit them in parsing; but you must always apply the rules of Syntax. When you parse without applying the definitions, you may proceed in the following manner:
As soon as you become familiar with all the definitions and can use them easily, you can skip them when parsing; however, you must always follow the rules of Syntax. When you parse without using the definitions, you can proceed like this:
"Mercy is the true badge of nobility."
"Compassion is the real mark of nobility."
Mercy is a noun common, of the neuter gender, third person, singular number, and in the nominative case to "is:" RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb.
Mercy is a noun that is common, neutral, third person, singular, and in the nominative case to "is:" RULE 3. The nominative case governs the verb.
Is is an irregular neuter verb, indicative mood, present tense, third person, singular number, agreeing with "mercy," according to RULE 4. The verb must agree, &c.
Is is an irregular neuter verb, indicative mood, present tense, third person, singular number, agreeing with "mercy," according to RULE 4. The verb must agree, &c.
The is a definite article, belonging to "badge," in the singular number: RULE 2. The definite article the, &c.
The is a definite article that refers to "badge," in the singular form: RULE 2. The definite article the, &c.
True is an adjective in the positive degree, and belongs to the noun "badge:" RULE 18. Adjectives belong, &c.
True is a positive adjective that describes the noun "badge:" RULE 18. Adjectives belong, etc.
Badge is a noun com. neuter gender, third person, singular number, and in the nominative case after "is," and put by apposition with "mercy," according to RULE 21. The verb to be may have the same case after it as before it.
Badge is a neuter noun, third person, singular, and in the nominative case after "is," and is used in apposition with "mercy," according to RULE 21. The verb to be may have the same case after it as before it.
Of is a preposition, connecting "badge" and "nobility," and showing the relation between them.
Of is a preposition that connects "badge" and "nobility," indicating the relationship between them.
Nobility is a noun of multitude, mas. and fem. gender, third person, sing, and in the obj. case, and governed by "of:" RULE 31. Prepositions govern the objective case.
Nobility is a noun that can refer to both men and women, is used in the third person, singular, and is in the objective case, governed by "of:" RULE 31. Prepositions govern the objective case.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Learn to unlearn what you have learned amiss.
Learn to forget what you've learned wrongly.
What I forfeit for myself is a trifle; that my indiscretions should reach my posterity, wounds me to the heart.
What I give up for myself is insignificant; the thought that my mistakes might affect my descendants hurts me deeply.
Lady Jane Gray fell a sacrifice to the wild ambition of the duke of Northumberland.
Lady Jane Gray became a victim of the reckless ambition of the Duke of Northumberland.
King Missipsi charged his sons to consider the senate and people of Rome as proprietors of the kingdom of Numidia.
King Missipsi urged his sons to view the senate and the people of Rome as the rightful owners of the kingdom of Numidia.
Hazael smote the children of Israel in all their coasts; and from what is left on record of his actions, he plainly appears to have proved, what the prophet foresaw him to be, a man of violence, cruelty, and blood.
Hazael attacked the children of Israel in all their territories; and from what is recorded about his actions, he clearly seems to have shown that the prophet predicted accurately, being a man of violence, cruelty, and bloodshed.
Heaven hides from brutes what men, from men what spirits know.
Heaven keeps secrets from animals, what people know is hidden from other people, and spirits know things beyond that.
He that formed the ear, can he not hear?
He who created the ear, can't he hear?
He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.
He who has ears to listen, let him listen.
NOTE 1. Learn, in the first of the preceding examples, is a transitive verb, because the action passes over from the nom. you understood, to the rest of the sentence for its object: RULE 24. In the next example, that my indiscretions should reach my posterity, is a part of a sentence put as the nominative to the verb wounds, according to the same Rule.
NOTE 1. Learn, in the first of the previous examples, is a transitive verb because the action moves from the subject you to the rest of the sentence as its object: RULE 24. In the next example, that my indiscretions should reach my posterity is a part of a sentence acting as the subject for the verb wounds, following the same rule.
2. The noun sacrifice, in the third example, is nom. after the active-intransitive verb fell: RULE 22. The noun proprietors, in the next sentence, is in the objective case, and put by apposition with senate and people: RULE 7, or governed by consider, understood, according to RULE 35.
2. The noun sacrifice, in the third example, is the subject after the active-intransitive verb fell: RULE 22. The noun proprietors, in the next sentence, is in the objective case and is set in apposition with senate and people: RULE 7, or is governed by an understood consider, according to RULE 35.
3. In the fifth example, what, following proved, is a compound relative. Thing, the antecedent part, is in the nom. case after to be, understood, and put by apposition with he, according to RULE 21, and NOTE. Which, the relative part, is in the obj. case after to be expressed, and put by apposition with him, according to the same RULE. Man is in the obj. case, put by apposition with which: RULE 7. The latter part of the sentence may be literally rendered thus: He plainly appears to have proved to be that base character which the prophet foresaw him to be, viz. a man of violence, cruelty, and blood. The antecedent part of the first what, in the next sentence, is governed by hides; and which, the relative part, is governed by know understood. The antecedent part of the second what, is governed by hides understood, and the relative part is governed by know expressed.
3. In the fifth example, what, coming after proved, is a compound relative. Thing, the antecedent part, is in the nominative case after to be, which is understood, and is positioned in apposition with he, according to RULE 21, and NOTE. Which, the relative part, is in the objective case after to be expressed, and is positioned in apposition with him, following the same RULE. Man is in the objective case, positioned in apposition with which: RULE 7. The latter part of the sentence can be literally interpreted as: He clearly seems to have proved to be that despicable character which the prophet predicted he would be, specifically a man of violence, cruelty, and bloodshed. The antecedent part of the first what, in the next sentence, is governed by hides; and which, the relative part, is governed by know understood. The antecedent part of the second what is governed by hides understood, and the relative part is governed by know expressed.
4. The first he, in the seventh example, is, in the opinion of some, nom. to can hear understood; but Mr. N.R. Smith, a distinguished and acute grammarian, suggests the propriety of rendering the sentence thus; "He that formed the ear, formed it to hear; can he not hear?" The first he, in the last example, is redundant; yet the construction is sometimes admissible, for the expression is more forcible than it would be to say, "Let him hear who hath ears to hear;" and if we adopt the ingenious method of Mr. Smith, the sentence is grammatical, and may be rendered thus; "He that hath ears, hath ears to hear; let him hear."
4. The first he in the seventh example is, according to some, understood as the subject of can hear; however, Mr. N.R. Smith, a notable and sharp grammarian, suggests that it would be more appropriate to phrase the sentence this way: "He who made the ear, made it to hear; can he not hear?" The first he in the last example is unnecessary; still, this construction is sometimes acceptable because the expression is stronger than saying, "Let him hear who has ears to hear;" and if we apply Mr. Smith's clever approach, the sentence is grammatical and can be phrased as: "He who has ears, has ears to hear; let him hear."
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
Idioms, anomalies, and intricacies.
- "The wall is three feet high."
- "His son is eight years old."
- "My knife is worth a shilling."
- "She is worth him and all his connexions."
- "He has been there three times."
- "The hat cost ten dollars."
- "The load weighs a tun."
- "The spar measures ninety feet."
REMARKS.—Anomaly is derived from the Greek, a, without, and omales, similar; that is, without similarity. Some give its derivation thus; anomaly, from the Latin, ab, from, or out of, and norma, a rule, or law, means an outlaw; a mode of expression that departs from the rules, laws, or general usages of the language; a construction in language peculiar to itself. Thus, it is a general rule of the language, that adjectives of one syllable are compared by adding r, or er, and st, or est, to the positive degree; but good, better, best; bad, worse, worst, are not compared according to the general rule. They are, therefore, anomalies. The plural number of nouns is generally formed by adding s to the singular: man, men; woman, women; child, children; penny, pence, are anomalies. The use of news, means, alms and amends, in the singular, constitutes anomalies. Anomalous constructions are correct according to custom; but, as they are departures from general rules, by them they cannot be analyzed.
REMARKS.—Anomaly comes from the Greek, a, meaning without, and omales, meaning similar; so it translates to without similarity. Some explain its origin this way: anomaly comes from the Latin, ab, meaning from or out of, and norma, meaning a rule or law, which means an outlaw; a way of expressing something that strays from the rules, laws, or general usages of the language; a construction in language that is unique to itself. For instance, the standard rule in the language states that one-syllable adjectives are compared by adding r or er and st or est to the positive degree; however, good, better, best; bad, worse, worst do not follow this general rule. They are, therefore, anomalies. The plural form of nouns is usually created by adding an s to the singular: man, men; woman, women; child, children; penny, pence, are exceptions. The use of news, means, alms, and amends in the singular creates anomalies. Anomalous constructions are accepted according to custom; however, because they deviate from general rules, they cannot be analyzed by them.
An idiom, Latin idioma, a construction peculiar to a language, may be an anomaly, or it may not. An idiomatical expression which is not an anomaly, can be analyzed.
An idiom, from the Latin idioma, is a phrase unique to a specific language, which may be an exception or it may not. An idiomatic expression that isn’t an exception can be broken down and analyzed.
Feet and years, in the 1st and 2d examples, are not in the nominative after is, according to Rule 21, because they are not in apposition with the respective nouns that precede the verb; but the constructions are anomalous; and, therefore, no rule can be applied to analyze them. The same ideas, however; can be conveyed by a legitimate construction which can be analyzed; thus, "The height of the wall is three feet;" "The age of my son is eight years."
Feet and years, in the 1st and 2nd examples, are not in the nominative case after is, following Rule 21, because they aren’t in apposition with the corresponding nouns that come before the verb; yet, these constructions are irregular; as a result, no rule can be used to analyze them. However, the same ideas can be expressed through a proper construction that can be analyzed; for example, "The height of the wall is three feet;" "The age of my son is eight years."
An anomaly, when ascertained to be such, is easily disposed of; but sometimes it is very difficult to decide whether a construction is anomalous or not. The 3d, 4th, and 5th examples, are generally considered anomalies; but if we supply, as we are, perhaps, warranted in doing, the associated words which modern refinement has dropped, they will cease to be anomalies; thus, "My knife is of the worth of a shilling;" "—of the worth of him," &c. "He has been there for three times;" as we say, "I was unwell for three days, after I arrived;" or, "I was unwell three days." Thus it appears, that by tracing back, for a few centuries, what the merely modern English scholar supposes to be an anomaly, an ellipsis will frequently be discovered, which, when supplied, destroys the anomaly.
An anomaly, once identified, is usually easy to deal with; however, it can sometimes be challenging to determine if a construction is truly anomalous. The 3rd, 4th, and 5th examples are often seen as anomalies; but if we add the associated words that modern language has dropped, they stop being anomalies. For instance, "My knife is of the worth of a shilling;" and "—of the worth of him," etc. "He has been there for three times;" as we say, "I was unwell for three days, after I arrived;" or, "I was unwell three days." It seems that by looking back for a few centuries, what the contemporary English scholar views as an anomaly can often be revealed as an ellipsis that, when filled in, eliminates the anomaly.
On extreme points, and peculiar and varying constructions in a living language, the most able philologists can never be agreed; because many usages will always be unsettled and fluctuating, and will, consequently, be disposed of according to the caprice of the grammarian. By some, a sentence may be treated as an anomaly; by others who contend for, and supply, an ellipsis, the same sentence may be analyzed according to the ellipsis supplied; whilst others, who deny both the elliptical and anomalous character of the sentence, construct a rule by which to analyze it, which rule has for its foundation the principle contained in that sentence only. This last mode of procedure, inasmuch as it requires us to make a rule for every peculiar construction in the language, appears to me to be the most exceptionable of the three. It appears to be multiplying rules beyond the bounds of utility.
When it comes to extreme cases and unique, varying structures in a living language, even the most skilled linguists can never fully agree. This is because many usages are always unstable and changing, and will therefore be dealt with according to the whims of the grammarian. Some may view a sentence as an exception; others who argue for an ellipsis might analyze the same sentence based on that ellipsis; meanwhile, some who reject both the elliptical and exceptional nature of the sentence create a rule to analyze it, basing that rule solely on the principle found in the sentence itself. This last approach, since it demands a new rule for every unusual construction in the language, seems to me to be the least reasonable of the three. It feels like it's creating more rules than are truly necessary.
The verbs, cost, weighs, and measures, in the 6th, 7th, and 8th examples, may be considered as transitive. See remarks on resemble, have, own, &c., page 56.
The verbs, cost, weighs, and measures, in the 6th, 7th, and 8th examples, can be seen as transitive. See notes on resemble, have, own, &c., page 56.
EXAMPLES.
- "And God said, 'Let there be light,' and there was light." "Let us make man." "Let us bow before the Lord." "Let high-born seraphs tune the lyre."
- "Be it enacted." "Be it remembered." "Blessed be he that blesseth thee; and cursed be he that curseth thee." "My soul, turn from them:—turn we to survey," &c.
- "Methinks I see the portals of eternity wide open to receive him." "Methought I was incarcerated beneath the mighty deep." "I was there just thirty years ago."
- "Their laws and their manners, generally speaking, were extremely rude." "Considering their means, they have effected much."
The verb let, in the idiomatic examples under number 1, has no nominative specified, and is left applicable to a nominative of the first, second, or third person, and of either number. Every action necessarily depends on an agent or moving cause; and hence it follows, that the verb, in such constructions, has a nominative understood; but as that nominative is not particularly pointed out, the constructions may be considered anomalous.
The verb let, in the idiomatic examples under number 1, doesn't specify a subject and can apply to a subject in the first, second, or third person, and in either singular or plural. Every action depends on an agent or a motivating cause; therefore, it follows that the verb, in these constructions, has an implied subject. However, since that subject is not specifically identified, these constructions can be seen as unusual.
Instead of saying, "Let it [to] be enacted;" or, "It is or shall be enacted;" "Let him [to] be blessed;" or, "He shall be blessed;" "Let us turn to survey," &c.; the verbs, be enacted, be blessed, turn, &c. according to an idiom of our language, or the poet's license, are used in the imperative, agreeing with a nominative of the first or third person.
Instead of saying, "Let it [to] be enacted;" or, "It is or shall be enacted;" "Let him [to] be blessed;" or, "He shall be blessed;" "Let us turn to survey," etc.; the verbs, be enacted, be blessed, turn, etc. according to an idiom of our language, or the poet's license, are used in the imperative, agreeing with a nominative of the first or third person.
The phrases, methinks and methought, are anomalies, in which the objective pronoun me, in the first person, is used in place of a nominative, and takes a verb after it in the third person. Him was anciently used in the same manner; as, "him thute, him thought." There was a period when these constructions were not anomalies in our language. Formerly, what we call the objective cases of our pronouns, were employed in the same manner as our present nominatives are. Ago is a contraction of agone, the past part. of to go. Before this participle was contracted to an adverb, the noun years preceding it, was in the nominative case absolute; but now the construction amounts to an anomaly. The expressions, "generally speaking," and "considering their means," under number 4, are idiomatical and anomalous, the subjects to the participles not being specified.
The phrases, methinks and methought, are unusual because the objective pronoun me, in the first person, is used instead of a nominative, and it takes a verb in the third person. Him was used in the same way in the past, as in, "him thute, him thought." There was a time when these constructions were not considered unusual in our language. Previously, what we now refer to as the objective cases of our pronouns were used in the same way that our current nominatives are. Ago is a contraction of agone, the past participle of go. Before this participle became an adverb, the noun years preceding it was in the nominative case absolute; but now this structure is considered unusual. The phrases, "generally speaking," and "considering their means," listed under number 4, are idiomatic and peculiar, as the subjects to the participles are not specified.
According to the genius of the English language, transitive verbs and prepositions require the objective case of a noun or pronoun after them; and this requisition is all that is meant by government, when we say, that these parts of speech govern the objective case. See pages 52, 57, and 94. The same principle applies to the interjection. Interjections require the objective case of a pronoun of the first person after them; but the nominative of a noun or pronoun of the second or third person; as, "Ah me! Oh thou! O my country!" To say, then, that interjections require particular cases after them, is synonymous with saying, that they govern those cases; and this office of the interjection is in perfect accordance with that which it performs in the Latin and many other languages. In the examples under number 5, the first me is in the objective after "ah," and the second me, after ah understood; thus, "Ah miserable me!" according to NOTE 2, under Rule 5.—Happiness, under number 6, is nom. independent; Rule 5, or in the nom. after O, according to this Note. The principle contained in the note, proves that every noun of the second person is in the nominative case; for, as the pronoun of the second person, in such a situation, is always nominative, which is shown by its form, it logically follows that the noun, under such circumstances, although it has no form to show its case, must necessarily be in the same case as the pronoun. "Good, pleasure, ease, content, that," the antecedent part of "whatever," and which, the relative part, are nom. after art understood; Rule 21, and name is nom. to be understood.
According to the intricacies of the English language, transitive verbs and prepositions require the objective case of a noun or pronoun that follows them; and this requirement is what is meant by government when we say that these parts of speech govern the objective case. See pages 52, 57, and 94. The same principle applies to interjections. Interjections require the objective case of a first-person pronoun after them, but the nominative case of a noun or pronoun from the second or third person; for example, "Ah me! Oh thou! O my country!" Thus, to say that interjections require specific cases afterwards is the same as saying that they govern those cases; and this role of the interjection aligns perfectly with its function in Latin and many other languages. In the examples under number 5, the first me is in the objective case after "ah," and the second me is after ah understood; so, "Ah miserable me!" according to NOTE 2, under Rule 5.—Happiness, under number 6, is nominative independent; according to this Note, it follows Rule 5, or is in the nominative after O. The principle in the note shows that every noun of the second person is in the nominative case; since the pronoun of the second person, in such cases, is always nominative, as indicated by its form, it logically follows that the noun, in those circumstances, even without form to indicate its case, must necessarily be in the same case as the pronoun. "Good, pleasure, ease, content, that," the antecedent part of "whatever," and which, the relative part, are nominative after art understood; Rule 21, and name is nominative to be understood.
The second line may be rendered thus; Whether thou art good, or whether thou art pleasure, &c. or be thy name that [thing] which [ever thing] it may be: putting be in the imperative, agreeing with name in the third person. Something is nominative after art understood.
The second line can be expressed like this: Whether you are good, or whether you are pleasure, etc., or let your name be that thing which it may be: putting "be" in the imperative, agreeing with "name" in the third person. "Something" is understood as nominative after "are."
EXAMPLES.
"All were well but the stranger." "I saw nobody but the stranger." "All had returned but he." "None but the brave deserve the fair." "The thing they can't but purpose, they postpone." "This life, at best, is but a dream." "It affords but a scanty measure of enjoyment." "If he but touch the hills, they will smoke." "Man is but a reed, floating on the current of time."
"Everyone was good except for the stranger." "I saw no one except the stranger." "Everyone had come back except him." "Only the brave deserve the fair." "The things they can't help but plan, they delay." "This life, at best, is just a dream." "It provides only a small amount of enjoyment." "If he just touches the hills, they will smoke." "Man is just a reed, floating on the current of time."
"Notwithstanding his poverty, he is content."
"Even though he's poor, he is happy."
"Open your hand wide." "The apples boil soft." "The purest clay is that which burns white." "Drink deep, or taste not the Pierian spring."
"Open your hand wide." "The apples cook soft." "The cleanest clay is the one that burns white." "Drink deep, or don’t even taste the Pierian spring."
"What though the swelling surge thou see?" &c. "What if the foot, ordain'd the dust to tread?" &c.
"What if you see the rising waves?" &c. "What if the foot is meant to walk on the ground?" &c.
REMARKS.—According to the principle of analysis assumed by many of our most critical philologists, but is always a disjunctive conjunction; and agreeably to the same authorities, to construe it, in any case, as a preposition, would lead to error. See false Syntax under Rule 35. They maintain, that its legitimate and undeviating office is, to join on a member of a sentence which expresses opposition of meaning, and thereby forms an exception to, or takes from the universality of, the proposition contained in the preceding member of the sentence. That it sustains its true character as a conjunction in all the examples under number 1, will be shown by the following resolution of them.—"All were well but the stranger [was not well."] "I saw nobody but [I saw] the stranger." "None deserve the fair but the brave [deserve the fair."] "They postpone the thing which [they ought to do, and do not] but which [thing] they cannot avoid purposing to do." "This life, at best, [is not a reality,] but it is a dream. It [affords not unbounded fruition] but it affords a scanty measure of enjoyment." "If he touch the hills, but exert no greater power upon them, they will smoke;"—"If he exert no greater power upon the hills, but [be-out this fact] if he touch them, they will smoke." "Man is not a stable being, but he is a reed, floating on the current of time." This method of analyzing sentences, however, if I mistake not, is too much on the plan of our pretended philosophical writers, who, in their rage for ancient constructions and combinations, often overlook the modern associated meaning and application of this word. It appears to me to be more consistent with the modern use of the word, to consider it an adverb in constructions like the following: "If he but (only, merely) touch the hills they will smoke."
REMARKS.—According to the analysis principle assumed by many critical linguists, but is always a disjunctive conjunction; and according to the same experts, interpreting it as a preposition in any case would lead to mistakes. See false syntax under Rule 35. They argue that its legitimate and consistent role is to connect a part of a sentence that expresses opposition in meaning, thereby creating an exception to, or limiting the universality of, the proposition in the previous part of the sentence. Its true character as a conjunction is evident in all the examples under number 1, as shown by the following breakdown of them.—"All were well but the stranger [was not well]." "I saw nobody but [I saw] the stranger." "None deserve the fair but the brave [deserve the fair]." "They delay the thing which [they ought to do, and do not] but which [thing] they can’t avoid planning to do." "This life, at best, [is not a reality,] but it is a dream. It [offers not unbounded fulfillment,] but it offers a limited amount of enjoyment." "If he touches the hills, but exerts no greater power upon them, they will smoke;"—"If he exerts no greater power upon the hills, but [be-out this fact] if he touches them, they will smoke." "Man is not a stable being, but he is a reed, floating on the current of time." However, this method of analyzing sentences, if I’m not mistaken, resembles the approach of our so-called philosophical writers, who, in their obsession with ancient constructions and combinations, often overlook the modern associated meanings and applications of this word. It seems more consistent with the modern use of the word to consider it an adverb in constructions like the following: "If he but (only, merely) touches the hills they will smoke."
Except and near, in examples like the following, are generally construed as prepositions: "All went except him;" "She stands near them." But many contend, that when we employ but instead of except, in such constructions, a nominative should follow: "All went but he [did not go."] On this point and many others, custom is variable; but the period will doubtless arrive, when but, worth, and like, will be considered prepositions, and, in constructions like the foregoing, invariably be followed by an objective case. This will not be the case, however, until the practice of supplying an ellipsis after these words is entirely dropped.
Except and near, in examples like the ones below, are usually seen as prepositions: "Everyone went except him;" "She stands near them." However, many argue that when we use but instead of except in these situations, a nominative should follow: "Everyone went but he [did not go]." On this issue and many others, custom is variable; but the time will likely come when but, worth, and like will be regarded as prepositions, and in constructions like these, will always be followed by an objective case. However, this won’t happen until the practice of using an ellipsis after these words is completely abandoned.
Poverty, under number 2, is governed by the preposition notwithstanding, Rule 31. The adjectives wide, soft, white, and deep, under number 3, not only express the quality of nouns, but also qualify verbs: Note 4, under Rule 18.—What, in the phrases "what though" and "what if," is an interrogative in the objective case, and governed by the verb matters understood, or by some other verb; thus, "What matters it—what dost thou fear, though thou see the swelling surge?" "What would you think, if the foot, which is ordained to tread the dust, aspired to be the head?"
Poverty, under number 2, is governed by the preposition notwithstanding, Rule 31. The adjectives wide, soft, white, and deep, under number 3, not only describe nouns but also modify verbs: Note 4, under Rule 18.—What, in the phrases "what though" and "what if," is an interrogative in the objective case and is governed by the verb matters understood, or by some other verb; thus, "What matters it—what do you fear, even if you see the rising waves?" "What would you think if the foot, which is meant to tread the dust, aspired to be the head?"
In the following examples, the same word is used as several parts of speech. But by exercising judgment sufficient to comprehend the meaning, and by supplying what is understood, you will be able to analyze them correctly.
In the following examples, the same word is used in different parts of speech. However, by using your judgment to understand the meaning and by filling in what is implied, you'll be able to analyze them correctly.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
- I like what you dislike.
- Every creature loves its like.
- Anger, envy, and like passions, are sinful.
- Charity, like the sun, brightens every object around it.
- Thought flies swifter than light.
- He thought as a sage, though he felt as a man.
- Hail often proves destructive to vegetation.
- I was happy to hail him as my friend.
- Hail! beauteous stranger of the wood.
- The more I examine the work, the better I like it.
- Johnson is a better writer than Sterne.
- Calm was the day, and the scene delightful.
- We may expect a calm after a storm.
- To prevent passion is easier than to calm it.
- Damp air is unwholesome.
- Guilt often casts a damp over our sprightliest hours.
- Soft bodies damp the sound much more than hard ones.
- Much money has been expended.
- Of him to whom much is given, much will be required.
- It is much better to give than to receive.
- Still water runs deep. He labored to still the tumult.
- Those two young profligates remain still in the wrong.
- They wrong themselves as well as their friends.
I will now present to you a few examples in poetry. Parsing in poetry, as it brings into requisition a higher degree of mental exertion than parsing in prose, will be found a more delightful and profitable exercise. In this kind of analysis, in order to come at the meaning of the author, you will find it necessary to transpose his language, and supply what is understood; and then you will have the literal meaning in prose.
I will now show you a few examples in poetry. Analyzing poetry, since it requires a higher level of mental effort than analyzing prose, is a more enjoyable and beneficial activity. In this type of analysis, to uncover the author's meaning, you will need to rearrange their language and fill in what is implied; then you will arrive at the literal meaning in prose.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
APOSTROPHE TO HOPE.—CAMPBELL.
TRANSPOSED.
Eternal Hope! thy joyous youth began when yonder sublime spheres pealed their first notes to sound the march of time:—but it began not to fade.—Thou, undismayed, shalt smile over the ruins, when all the sister planets shall have decayed; and thou shalt light thy torch at Nature's funeral pile, when wrapt in flames, the realms of ether glow, and Heaven's last thunder shakes the world below.
Eternal Hope! your joyful youth began when those magnificent spheres sounded their first notes to mark the passage of time—but it hasn’t started to fade. You, undaunted, will smile over the ruins when all the other planets have crumbled; and you will light your torch at Nature's funeral pyre, when the realms of the sky blaze with flames, and Heaven's final thunder shakes the world below.
ADDRESS TO ADVERSITY.—GRAY.
TRANSPOSED.
Daughter of heaven, relentless power, thou tamer of the human breast, whose iron scourge and torturing hour affright the bad, and afflict the best! Revive thou in me the generous, extinct spark; and teach thou me to love others, and to forgive them; and teach thou me to scan my own defects exactly, or critically: and teach thou me that which others are to feel; and make thou me to know myself to be a man.
Daughter of heaven, relentless power, you who tame the human heart, your iron whip and tormenting hour scare the wicked and weigh down the good! Revive in me the generous, lost spark; and teach me to love others and forgive them; and help me to examine my own flaws closely; and teach me to understand what others feel; and help me to know myself as a man.
ADDRESS TO THE ALMIGHTY.—POPE.
TRANSPOSED.
O God, teach thou me to pursue that (the thing) which conscience dictates to be done, more ardently than I pursue heaven; and teach thou me to shun this (the thing) which conscience warns me not to do, more cautiously than I would shun hell.
O God, teach me to chase after what my conscience tells me to do with more passion than I chase after heaven; and teach me to avoid what my conscience warns me against with more caution than I would avoid hell.
TRIALS OF VIRTUE.—MERRICK.
TRANSPOSED.
For see thou, ah! see thou a hostile world to raise its terrors, and see thou a hostile world to spread its delusive snares, while I yet tread her (virtue's) ways with doubtful steps.
For you see, ah! you see a hostile world to raise its terrors, and you see a hostile world to spread its deceitful traps, while I still walk her (virtue's) paths with uncertain steps.
O how shall I learn to meet those terrors with a prepared heart? How shall I learn to guard my unexperienced feet from the thousand snares of the world?
O how will I learn to face those fears with a ready heart? How will I learn to protect my inexperienced feet from the countless traps of the world?
THE MORNING IN SUMMER.—THOMPSON.
TRANSPOSED.
The doubtful empire of the night is short; and the meek-eyed morn, (which is the) mother of dews, observant of approaching day, soon appears, gleaming faintly, at first, in the dappled east, till the widening glow spreads far over ether, and the white clouds break away from before the lustre of her face.
The uncertain empire of night is brief; and the gentle morning, (which is the) mother of dew, aware of the coming day, quickly shows up, shining softly at first in the patterned east, until the growing light spreads widely across the sky, and the white clouds pull away from the brightness of her face.
NATURE BOUNTIFUL.—AKENSIDE.
TRANSPOSED.
Nature's care, which is just to all her children, largely endows, with richest treasures and an ample state, that happy man who will deign to use them.
Nature’s care, which is fair to all her children, generously provides the richest treasures and a great life to that fortunate person who is willing to make use of them.
NOTE. What, in the second example, is a comp. rel. The antecedent part is gov. by teach understood; and the relative part by to feel expressed. To shun and to pursue, in the third example, are in the infinitive mood, gov. by than, according to a NOTE under Rule 23. Faint and from, in the 5th example, are adverbs. An adverb, in poetry, is often written in the form of an adjective. Whatever, in the last sentence, is a compound pronoun, and is equivalent to that and who. That is an adj. pron. belonging to "man;" who is nom. to "will deign;" and ever is excluded from the sentence in sense. See page 113. Parse these examples as they are transposed, and you will find the analysis very easy.
NOTE. What, in the second example, is a compound relative. The antecedent part is governed by teach (understood), and the relative part is governed by to feel (expressed). To shun and to pursue, in the third example, are in the infinitive form, governed by than, according to a NOTE under Rule 23. Faint and from, in the 5th example, are adverbs. An adverb, in poetry, is often written as if it were an adjective. Whatever, in the last sentence, is a compound pronoun and is equivalent to that and who. That is an adjective pronoun belonging to "man;" who is the subject of "will deign;" and ever is not included in the sentence in sense. See page 113. Parse these examples as they are arranged, and you will find the analysis very easy.
ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN PARSING.
GOLD, NOT GENUINE WEALTH.
TRANSPOSED.
Where is thy true treasure? Gold says, "It is not in me;" and the Diamond says, "It is not in me." Gold is poor.
Where is your true treasure? Gold says, "It’s not in me;" and the Diamond says, "It’s not in me." Gold is worthless.
SOURCE OF FRIENDSHIP.—DR. YOUNG.
TRANSPOSED.
Lorenzo, repress thou pride; nor hope thou to find a friend, only in him who has already found a friend in thee.
Lorenzo, hold back your pride; don't expect to find a friend only in someone who has already found a friend in you.
TRUE GREATNESS.—POPE.
TRANSPOSED.
That man is great indeed, let him to reign like unto good Aurelius, or let him to bleed like unto Socrates, who obtains noble ends by noble means; or that man is great indeed, who, failing to obtain noble ends by noble means, smiles in exile or in chains.
That man is truly great, whether he rules like good Aurelius or suffers like Socrates, who achieves noble goals through noble actions; or that man is indeed great, who, if he doesn't achieve noble goals through noble actions, can still smile in exile or in chains.
INVOCATION.—POLLOK.
TRANSPOSED.
Eternal Spirit! God of truth! to whom all things seem to be as they really are, inspire thou my song; and unscale thou my eyes: teach thou to me the thing which is substance; and teach thou to me the thing which is shadow, while I sing of things which are to come, as one sings of things which are past rehearsing. Grant thou to me thought and phraseology which shall severely sift out the whole idea.
Eternal Spirit! God of truth! to whom everything is as it truly is, inspire my song; and open my eyes: teach me what is real, and teach me what is illusion, while I sing about what’s to come, just as one sings of what has already happened. Grant me the thoughts and words that will carefully reveal the entire concept.
THE VOYAGE OF LIFE.
TRANSPOSED.
How few persons, favored by every element, safely make the promised port with swelling sails, and with all their wishes freighted! Yet even these few persons who do safely make the promised port with all their wishes freighted, soon complain. Though they are free from misfortunes, yet (though and yet, corresponding conjunctions, form only one connexion) they are not free from the course of nature, for they still are men; and when is man secure? Time is as fatal to him, as a storm is to the mariner.—The rush of years beats down their strength; (that is, the strength of these few;) and their numberless escapes end in ruin: and then their proud success only plants new terrors on the victor's brow. What pain it is to them to quit the world, just as they have made it to be their own world; when their nests are built so high, and when they are downed so deeply!—They who build beneath the stars, build too low for their own safety.
How few people, blessed by every possible element, actually reach their destination with full sails and all their dreams fulfilled! Yet even these lucky individuals who do make it to their destination with all their dreams fulfilled soon start to complain. Even though they are free from misfortunes, they are not free from the course of nature, because they are still human; and when is a person ever truly secure? Time is as deadly to them as a storm is to a sailor. The passage of years weakens their strength; and countless escapes ultimately lead to ruin: their proud achievements only bring new fears to the victor's brow. What a burden it is for them to leave the world just when they've finally made it their own; when their nests are built so high, and when they've dug themselves in so deep! Those who aim for the stars end up building too low for their own safety.
REFLECTIONS ON A SCULL.—LORD BYRON.
TRANSPOSED.
Remove thou yonder scull out from the scattered heaps. Is that a temple, where a God may dwell? Why, even the worm at last disdains her shattered cell! Look thou on its broken arch, and look thou on its ruined wall, and on its desolate chambers, and on its foul portals:—yes, this scull was once ambition's airy hall; (it was) the dome of thought, the palace of the soul. Behold thou, through each lack-lustre, eyeless hole, the gay recess of wisdom and of wit, and passion's host, which never brooked control. Can all the works which saints, or sages, or sophists have ever written, repeople this lonely tower, or can they refit this tenement?
Remove that skull from the scattered piles. Is this a temple where a God can reside? Even the worm eventually rejects her shattered home! Look at its broken arch, and look at its ruined wall, and its empty chambers, and its filthy portals:—yes, this skull was once the airy hall of ambition; (it was) the dome of thought, the palace of the soul. Look through each dull, eyeless hole, at the bright recess of wisdom and wit, and the crowd of passions that never accepted control. Can all the works that saints, or sages, or thinkers have ever written bring life back to this lonely tower, or can they restore this dwelling?
For your future exercises in parsing, you may select pieces from the English Reader, or any other grammatical work. I have already hinted, that parsing in poetry, as it brings more immediately into requisition the reasoning faculties, than parsing in prose, will necessarily tend more rapidly to facilitate your progress: therefore it is advisable that your future exercises in this way, be chiefly confined to the analysis of poetry. Previous to your attempting to parse a piece of poetry, you ought always to transpose it, in a manner similar to the examples just presented; and then it can be as easily analyzed as prose.
For your future practice in parsing, you can choose excerpts from the English Reader or any other grammar resource. I've already mentioned that parsing poetry, since it engages your reasoning skills more directly than parsing prose, will help you progress faster. So, it's a good idea to focus your future exercises mainly on analyzing poetry. Before you try to parse a piece of poetry, you should always rearrange it in a way similar to the examples provided earlier; after that, it can be analyzed just as easily as prose.
Before you proceed to correct the following exercises in false syntax, you may turn back and read over the whole thirteen lectures, unless you have the subject-matter already stored in your mind.
Before you start correcting the following exercises in incorrect syntax, feel free to go back and review all thirteen lectures, unless you already have the material memorized.
LECTURE XIV.
OF DERIVATION.
At the commencement of Lecture II., I informed you that Etymology treats, 3dly, of derivation. This branch of Etymology, important as it is, cannot be very extensively treated in an elementary work on grammar. In the course of the preceding lectures, it has been frequently agitated; and now I shall offer a few more remarks, which will doubtless be useful in illustrating some of the various methods in which one word is derived from another. Before you proceed, however, please to turn back and read again what is advanced on this subject on page 27, and in the PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
At the start of Lecture II, I told you that Etymology deals, thirdly, with derivation. This part of Etymology, while crucial, can't be covered in great detail in a basic grammar guide. Throughout the previous lectures, we've touched on it multiple times, and now I'd like to share a few more thoughts that will certainly help illustrate the different ways one word can come from another. Before you move on, though, please go back and read what’s written on this topic on page 27 and in the PHILOSOPHICAL NOTES.
- Nouns are derived from verbs.
- Verbs are derived from nouns, adjectives, and sometimes from adverbs.
- Adjectives are derived from nouns.
- Nouns are derived from adjectives.
- Adverbs are derived from adjectives.
1. Nouns are derived from verbs; as, from "to love," comes "lover;" from "to visit, visiter;" from "to survive, surviver," &c.
1. Nouns come from verbs; for example, from "to love," we get "lover;" from "to visit," we get "visitor;" from "to survive," we get "survivor," etc.
In the following instances, and in many others, it is difficult to determine whether the verb was deduced from the noun, or the noun from the verb, viz. "Love, to love; hate, to hate; fear, to fear; sleep, to sleep; walk, to walk; ride, to ride; act, to act," &c.
In the following cases, and in many others, it’s hard to tell whether the verb came from the noun or the noun came from the verb, for example. "Love, to love; hate, to hate; fear, to fear; sleep, to sleep; walk, to walk; ride, to ride; act, to act," &c.
2. Verbs are derived from nouns, adjectives, and sometimes from adverbs; as, from the noun salt, comes "to salt;" from the adjective warm, "to warm;" and from the adverb forward, "to forward." Sometimes they are formed by lengthening the vowel, or softening the consonant; as, from "grass, to graze;" sometimes by adding en; as, from "length, to lengthen;" especially to adjectives; as, from "short, to shorten; bright, to brighten."
2. Verbs come from nouns, adjectives, and sometimes from adverbs; for example, from the noun salt, we get "to salt;" from the adjective warm, we have "to warm;" and from the adverb forward, it's "to forward." Sometimes they are created by stretching the vowel or softening the consonant; for instance, from "grass," we get "to graze;" sometimes by adding en; like from "length," we form "to lengthen;" especially with adjectives; for example, from "short," we get "to shorten;" and from "bright," it's "to brighten."
3. Adjectives are derived from nouns in the following manner: adjectives denoting plenty are derived from nouns by adding y; as, from "Health, healthy; wealth, wealthy; might, mighty," &c.
3. Adjectives come from nouns like this: adjectives that mean abundance are made by adding y; for example, "Health, healthy; wealth, wealthy; might, mighty," &c.
Adjectives denoting the matter out of which any thing is made, are derived from nouns by adding en; as, from "Oak, oaken; wood, wooden; wool, woollen," &c.
Adjectives that describe the material that something is made from are formed from nouns by adding en; for example, "oak, oaken; wood, wooden; wool, woolen," etc.
Adjectives denoting abundance are derived from nouns by adding ful; as, from "Joy, joyful; sin, sinful; fruit, fruitful," &c.
Adjectives that indicate abundance are formed from nouns by adding ful; for example, "Joy, joyful; sin, sinful; fruit, fruitful," etc.
Adjectives denoting plenty, but with some kind of diminution, are derived from nouns by adding some; as, from "Light, lightsome; trouble, troublesome; toil, toilsome," &c.
Adjectives that indicate abundance but with a sense of reduction are formed from nouns by adding some; for example, from "Light, lightsome; trouble, troublesome; toil, toilsome," &c.
Adjectives denoting want are derived from nouns by adding less; as, from "Worth, worthless;" from "care, careless; joy, joyless," &c.
Adjectives that show a lack of something are made from nouns by adding less; for example, from "worth, worthless;" from "care, careless;" from "joy, joyless," etc.
Adjectives denoting likeness are derived from nouns by adding ly; as, from "Man, manly; earth, earthly; court, courtly," &c.
Adjectives that express similarity are formed from nouns by adding ly; for example, from "Man, manly; earth, earthly; court, courtly," & etc.
Some adjectives are derived from other adjectives, or from nouns by adding ish to them; which termination when added to adjectives, imports diminution, or lessening the quality; as, "White, whitish;" i.e. somewhat white. When added to nouns, it signifies similitude or tendency to a character; as, "Child, childish; thief, thievish."
Some adjectives come from other adjectives or nouns by adding ish to them. When this ending is added to adjectives, it means a smaller or lesser quality, like "white" becoming "whitish," meaning somewhat white. When added to nouns, it indicates similarity or a tendency toward a certain characteristic, such as "child" becoming "childish" or "thief" becoming "thievish."
Some adjectives are formed from nouns or verbs by adding the termination able; and those adjectives signify capacity; as, "Answer, answerable; to change, changeable."
Some adjectives are made from nouns or verbs by adding the suffix able; and these adjectives indicate capability; for example, "Answer, answerable; to change, changeable."
4. Nouns are derived from adjectives, sometimes by adding the termination ness; as, "White, whiteness; swift, swiftness;" sometimes by adding th or t, and making a small change in some of the letters; as, "Long, length; high, height."
4. Nouns come from adjectives, sometimes by adding the suffix ness; like, "White, whiteness; swift, swiftness;" sometimes by adding th or t, and slightly changing some letters; like, "Long, length; high, height."
5. Adverbs of quality are derived from adjectives, by adding ly, or changing le into ly; and denote the same quality as the adjectives from which they are derived; as, from "base," comes "basely;" from "slow, slowly;" from "able, ably."
5. Adverbs of quality come from adjectives by adding ly or changing le to ly; they show the same quality as the adjectives they're based on; for example, from "base," we get "basely;" from "slow," we get "slowly;" from "able," we get "ably."
There are so many other ways of deriving words from one another, that it would be extremely difficult, if not impossible, to enumerate them. The primitive words of every language are very few; the derivatives form much the greater number. A few more instances only can be given here.
There are countless other ways to derive words from one another, making it very hard, if not impossible, to list them all. The basic words in every language are quite limited; the derived words make up the majority. Here are just a few more examples.
Some nouns are derived from other nouns, by adding the terminations hood or head, ship, ery, wick, rick, dom, ian, ment, and age.
Some nouns come from other nouns by adding the endings hood, head, ship, ery, wick, rick, dom, ian, ment, and age.
Nouns ending in hood or head, are such as signify character or qualities; as, "Manhood, knighthood, falsehood," &c.
Nouns that end in hood or head signify character or qualities, like "manhood, knighthood, falsehood," etc.
Nouns ending in ship, are those that signify office, employment, state, or condition; as, "Lordship, stewardship, partnership," &c. Some nouns in ship are derived from adjectives; as, "Hard, hardship," &c.
Nouns that end in ship refer to an office, position, state, or condition; for example, "Lordship, stewardship, partnership," etc. Some nouns ending in ship come from adjectives; for instance, "Hard, hardship," etc.
Nouns which end in ery, signify action or habit; as, "Slavery, foolery, prudery," &c. Some nouns of this sort come from adjectives; as, "Brave, bravery," &c.
Nouns that end in ery indicate action or habit, like "slavery, foolery, prudery," etc. Some of these nouns come from adjectives, such as "brave, bravery," etc.
Nouns ending in wick, rick, and dom, denote dominion, jurisdiction, or condition; as, "Bailiwick, bishopric, kingdom, dukedom, freedom," &c.
Nouns that end in wick, rick, and dom indicate dominion, jurisdiction, or condition; for example, "Bailiwick, bishopric, kingdom, dukedom, freedom," etc.
Nouns which end in ian, are those that signify profession; as, "Physician, musician," &c. Those that end in ment and age, come generally from the French, and commonly signify the act or habit; as, "Commandment," "usage."
Nouns that end in ian refer to professions, like "physician," "musician," etc. Those that end in ment and age usually come from French and typically signify an action or a habit, such as "commandment" and "usage."
Some nouns ending in ard, are derived from verbs or adjectives, and denote character or habit; as, "Drunk, drunkard; dote, dotard."
Some nouns ending in ard come from verbs or adjectives and describe character or behavior, like "Drunk, drunkard; dote, dotard."
Some nouns have the form of diminutives; but these are not many. They are formed by adding the terminations kin, ling, ing, ock, el, and the like; as, "Lamb, lambkin; goose, gosling; duck, duckling; hill, hillock; cock, cockerel," &c.
Some nouns have diminutive forms, but there aren’t many of them. They are created by adding endings like kin, ling, ing, ock, el, and similar ones; for example, "lamb, lambkin; goose, gosling; duck, duckling; hill, hillock; cock, cockerel," etc.
OF PREPOSITIONS USED AS PREFIXES.
I shall conclude this lecture by presenting and explaining a list of Latin and Greek prepositions which are extensively used in English as prefixes. By carefully studying their signification, you will be better qualified to understand the meaning of those words into the composition of which they enter, and of which they form a material part.
I’ll finish this lecture by showing and explaining a list of Latin and Greek prepositions that are commonly used in English as prefixes. By studying their meanings carefully, you’ll be better equipped to understand the meaning of the words they are part of and that they contribute significantly to.
I. LATIN PREFIXES.
A, ab, abs—signify from or away; as, a-vert, to turn from; ab-ject, to throw away; abs-tract, to draw away.
A, ab, abs—indicate from or away; for example, a-vert, to turn away; ab-ject, to dispose of; abs-tract, to pull away.
Ad—to or at; as, ad-here, to stick to; ad-mire, to wonder at.
Ad—to or at; like, ad-here, to stick to; ad-mire, to wonder at.
Ante—means before; as, ante-cedent, going before.
Ante—means before; as in, ante-cedent, going before.
Circum—signifies round, about; as, circum-navigate, to sail round.
Circum—means round or about; for example, circum-navigate, which means to sail around.
Con, com, co, col—together; as, con-join, to join together; com-press, to press together; co-operate, to work together; col-lapse, to fall together.
Con, com, co, col—together; for example, con-join, to join together; com-press, to press together; co-operate, to work together; col-lapse, to fall together.
Contra—against; as, contra-dict, to speak against.
Contra—against; as in contra-dict, to speak against.
De—from, down; as, de-duct, to take from; de-scend, to go down.
De—from, down; as, de-duct, to take away; de-scend, to go down.
Di, dis—asunder, away; as, di-lacerate, to tear asunder; dis-miss, to send away.
Di, dis—apart, away; as in di-lacerate, to tear apart; dis-miss, to send away.
E, ef, ex—out; as, e-ject, to throw out; ef-flux, to flow out; ex-clude, to shut out.
E, ef, ex—out; as in e-ject, to throw out; ef-flux, to flow out; ex-clude, to shut out.
Extra—beyond; as, extra-ordinary, beyond what is ordinary.
Extra—beyond; for example, extraordinary, more than what is ordinary.
In, im, il, ir—(in, Gothic, inna, a cave or cell;) as, in-fuse, to pour in. These prefixes, when incorporated with adjectives or nouns, commonly reverse their meaning; as, in-sufficient, im-polite, il-legitimate, ir-reverence, ir-resolute.
In, im, il, ir—(in, Gothic, inna, a cave or cell;) as in in-fuse, meaning to pour in. These prefixes, when added to adjectives or nouns, usually change their meaning to the opposite; for example, in-sufficient, im-polite, il-legitimate, ir-reverence, ir-resolute.
Inter—between; as, inter-pose, to put between.
Inter—between; as in inter-pose, to place between.
Intro—within, into; intro-vert, to turn within; intro-duce, to lead into.
Intro—within, into; intro-vert, to turn inward; intro-duce, to lead in.
Ob, op—denote opposition; as, ob-ject, to bring against; op-pugn, to oppose.
Ob, op—represent opposition; for example, ob-ject, to argue against; op-pugn, to challenge.
Per—through, by; as, per-ambulate, to walk through; per-haps, by haps.
Per—through, by; as in per-ambulate, to walk through; per-haps, by chance.
Post—after; as, post-script, written after; post-fix, placed after.
Post—after; as in, post-script, written after; post-fix, added after.
Præ, pre—before; as, pre-fix, to fix before.
Pre—before; as in prefix, to attach beforehand.
Pro—for, forth, forward; as, pro-noun, for a noun; pro-tend, to stretch forth; pro-ject, to shoot forward.
Pro—for, forth, forward; as in pro-noun, for a noun; pro-tend, to stretch forward; pro-ject, to throw forward.
Præter—past, beyond; as, preter-perfect, pastperfect; preter-natural, beyond the course of nature.
Præter—past, beyond; for example, preter-perfect, past perfect; preter-natural, beyond the natural order.
Re—again or back; as, re-peruse, to peruse again; re-trade, to trade back.
Re—again or back; as, re-peruse, to read again; re-trade, to trade back.
Retro—backwards; as, retro-spective, looking backwards.
Retro—backward; as, retro-spective, looking backward.
Se—aside, apart; as, se-duce, to draw aside.
Se—to set apart; for example, se-duce, to draw someone away.
Sub—under; as, sub-scribe, to write under, or sub-sign.
Sub—meaning under; for example, sub-scribe, to write underneath, or sub-sign.
Subter—under; as, subter-fluous, flowing under.
Subter—under; as, subter-fluous, flowing beneath.
Super—above or over; as, super-scribe, to write above; super-vise, to overlook.
Super—above or over; for example, super-scribe, to write above; super-vise, to oversee.
Trans—over, beyond, from one place to another; as, trans-port, to carry over; trans-gress, to pass beyond.
Trans—across, beyond, or from one place to another; for example, trans-port, to carry across; trans-gress, to go beyond.
II. GREEK PREFIXES.
A—signifies privation; as, anonymous, without name.
A—indicates lack; as, anonymous, without a name.
Amphi—both or two; as, amphi-bious, partaking of both or two natures,
Amphi—meaning both or two; as in amphi-bious, having characteristics of both or two natures,
Anti—against; as, anti-masonry, against masonry.
Anti—against; for example, anti-masonry, against masonry.
Dia—through; as, dia-meter, line passing through a circle.
Dia—meaning through; as in diameter, the line that passes through a circle.
Hyper—over; as, hyper-critical, over or too critical.
Hyper—over; as in, hyper-critical, overly or excessively critical.
Hypo—under, implying concealment or disguise; as, hypo-crite, one dissembling his real character.
Hypo—under, suggesting concealment or disguise; for example, hypo-crite, someone who is hiding their true character.
Meta—denotes change or transmutation; as, meta-morphose, to change the shape.
Meta—refers to change or transformation; for example, meta-morphose, to change form.
Para—contrary or against; as, para-dox, a thing contrary to received opinion.
Para—meaning contrary or against; for example, para-dox, something that opposes accepted belief.
Peri—round about; as, peri-phrasis, circumlocution.
Peri—around; as in peri-phrasis, circumlocution.
Syn, syl, sym—together; as, syn-tax, a placing together; syn-od, a meeting or coming together; syl-lable, that portion of a word which is taken together; sym-pathy, fellow-feeling, or feeling together.
Syn, syl, sym—together; as in syn-tax, the arrangement of words; syn-od, a gathering or meeting; syl-lable, the part of a word that is considered as a single unit; sym-pathy, shared feelings or emotions.
RULES OF SYNTAX,
WITH ADDITIONAL EXERCISES IN FALSE SYNTAX.
The third part of Grammar is SYNTAX, which treats of the agreement and government of words and of their proper arrangement in a sentence.
The third part of Grammar is SYNTAX, which deals with how words agree with each other, their roles, and the correct way to arrange them in a sentence.
SYNTAX consists of two parts, Concord and Government.
SYNTAX has two parts, Concord and Government.
CONCORD is the agreement which one word has with another, in gender, person, number, or case.
CONCORD is the agreement between words in terms of gender, person, number, or case.
For the illustration of agreement and government, see pages 52, and 53.
For examples of agreement and governance, see pages 52 and 53.
For the definition of a sentence, and the transposition of its words and members, see pages 119, 124, 128, and 167.
For the definition of a sentence and the rearrangement of its words and parts, see pages 119, 124, 128, and 167.
The principal parts of a simple sentence are the nominative or subject, the verb or attribute, or word that makes the affirmation, and the object, or thing affected by the action of the verb; as, "A wise man governs his passions." In this sentence, man is the subject; governs, the attribute; and passions the object.
The main components of a simple sentence are the nominative or subject, the verb or action that makes the statement, and the object, or thing impacted by the action of the verb; for example, "A wise man governs his passions." In this sentence, man is the subject; governs is the verb; and passions is the object.
A PHRASE is two or more words rightly put together, making sometimes a part of a sentence, and sometimes a whole sentence.
A PHRASE is two or more words that are correctly combined, sometimes forming part of a sentence and sometimes a complete sentence.
ELLIPSIS is the omission of some word or words, in order to avoid disagreeable and unnecessary repetitions, and to express our ideas concisely, and with strength and elegance.
ELLIPSIS is the omission of some words to avoid unpleasant and unnecessary repetitions, allowing us to express our ideas concisely, with strength and elegance.
In this recapitulation of the rules, Syntax is presented in a condensed form, many of the essential NOTES being omitted. This is a necessary consequence of my general plan, in which Etymology and Syntax, you know are blended. Hence, to acquire a complete knowledge of Syntax from this work, you must look over the whole.
In this summary of the rules, Syntax is presented in a simplified form, with many important NOTES left out. This is an unavoidable result of my overall approach, where Etymology and Syntax are combined. Therefore, to gain a full understanding of Syntax from this work, you must review everything.
You may now proceed and parse the following additional exercises in false Syntax; and, as you analyze, endeavor to correct all the errors without looking at the Key. If, in correcting these examples, you should be at a loss in assigning the reasons why the constructions are erroneous, you can refer to the manner adopted in the foregoing pages.
You can now go ahead and work on the following extra exercises in incorrect Syntax; and, as you analyze them, try to fix all the mistakes without looking at the Key. If you find yourself unsure about why the constructions are wrong while correcting these examples, you can refer to the method used in the previous pages.
RULE I.
The article a or an agrees with nouns in the singular number only, individually or collectively; as, "A star, an eagle, a score, a thousand."
The article a or an agrees with nouns only when they are in the singular form, whether individually or collectively; for example, "A star, an eagle, a score, a thousand."
RULE II.
The definite article the belongs to nouns in the singular or plural number; as, "The star, the stars; the hat, the hats."
The definite article the is associated with nouns in either the singular or plural form; for example, "The star, the stars; the hat, the hats."
NOTE 1. A nice distinction in the meaning is sometimes effected by the use or omission of the article a. If I say, "He behaved with a little reverence," my meaning is positive. But if I say, "He behaved with little reverence," my meaning is negative. By the former, I rather praise a person; by the latter, I dispraise him. When I say, "There were few men with him," I speak diminutively, and mean to represent them as inconsiderable; whereas, when I say, "There were a few men with him," I evidently intend to make the most of them.
NOTE 1. A nice distinction in meaning is sometimes made by the use or omission of the article a. When I say, "He behaved with a little reverence," I have a positive connotation. But if I say, "He behaved with little reverence," I have a negative connotation. The former implies praise for the person; the latter implies criticism. When I say, "There were few men with him," I'm downplaying their significance and suggesting they are unimportant; however, when I say, "There were a few men with him," I obviously intend to highlight their presence.
2. The indefinite article sometimes has the meaning of every or each; as, "They cost five shillings a dozen;" that is, 'every dozen.'
2. The indefinite article can sometimes mean every or each; for example, "They cost five shillings a dozen;" which means 'every dozen.'
3. When several adjectives are connected, and express the various qualities of things individually different, though alike in name, the article should be repeated; but when the qualities all belong to the same thing or things, the article should not be repeated. "A black and a white calf," signifies, A black calf, and a white calf; but "A black and white calf," describes the two colors of one calf.
3. When several adjectives are used together to describe different qualities of things that have similar names, you should repeat the article; but when the qualities all relate to the same thing or things, you don’t need to repeat it. "A black and a white calf" means a black calf and a white calf; but "A black and white calf" describes the two colors of one calf.
RULE III.
The nominative case governs the verb; as, "I learn, thou learnest, he learns, they learn."
The nominative case controls the verb; for example, "I learn, you learn, he learns, they learn."
RULE IV.
The verb must agree with its nominative in number and person; as, "The bird sings, the birds sing, thou singest."
The verb must match its subject in number and person; for example, "The bird sings, the birds sing, you sing."
NOTE 1. Every verb, when it is not in the infinitive mood, must have a nominative, expressed or implied; as, "Awake, arise;" that is, Awake ye; arise ye.
NOTE 1. Every verb, when it's not in the infinitive form, must have a subject, either stated or implied; for example, "Awake, arise;" which means, Awake you; arise you.
EXAMPLES OF FALSE SYNTAX.
Frequent commission of sin harden men in it.
Frequent sinning makes people become desensitized to it.
Great pains has been taken to reconcile the parties.
Great effort has been made to bring the parties together.
So much both of ability and merit, are seldom found.
So much talent and skill are rarely found.
The sincere is always esteemed.
Genuine people are always valued.
Not one of them are happy.
Not one of them is happy.
What avails the best sentiments, if people do not live suitably to them?
What good are the best intentions if people don’t live up to them?
Disappointments sinks the heart of man; but the renewal of hope give consolation.
Disappointments weigh heavily on a person's heart; but the renewal of hope brings comfort.
The variety of the productions of genius, like that of the operations of nature; are without limit.
The range of creative works from genius, just like the processes of nature, is endless.
A variety of blessings have been conferred upon us.
We have received many blessings.
Thou cannot heal him, it is true, but thou may do something to relieve him.
You can’t heal him, it’s true, but you can do something to help him feel better.
In piety and virtue consist the happiness of man.
Happiness for a person comes from their faith and moral character.
Note 1. | Will martial flames for ever fire thy mind, Will burning passions always consume your thoughts, And never, never be to Heaven resigned? And never, ever accept being resigned to Heaven? |
He was a man whose inclinations led him to be corrupt, and had great abilities to manage the business.
He was a man whose tendencies made him corrupt, and he had remarkable skills for running the business.
Note 2. | The crown of virtue is peace and honor. |
His chief occupation and enjoyment were controversy.
His main focus and pleasure were arguments.
RULE V.
When an address is made, the noun or pronoun addressed, is put in the nominative case independent; as, "Plato, thou reasonest well;" "Do, Trim, said my uncle Toby."
When an address is made, the noun or pronoun being addressed is put in the nominative case independent; for example, "Plato, you reason well;" "Do, Trim, my uncle Toby said."
NOTE 1. A noun is independent, when it has no verb to agree with it.
NOTE 1. A noun is independent when it doesn't have a verb to agree with it.
2. Interjections require the objective case of a pronoun of the first person after them, but the nominative of a noun or pronoun of the second or third person; as, "Ah! me; Oh! thou; O! virtue."
2. Interjections need the objective form of a first-person pronoun after them, but the nominative form of a noun or pronoun from the second or third person; for example, "Ah! me; Oh! you; O! virtue."
RULE VI.
A noun or pronoun placed before a participle, and being independent of the rest of the sentence, is in the nominative case absolute; as, "Shame being lost; all virtue is lost;" "The sun being risen, we travelled on."
A noun or pronoun that comes before a participle and stands independently from the rest of the sentence is in the nominative case absolute; for example, "Shame being lost; all virtue is lost;" "The sun being risen, we traveled on."
NOTE. Every nominative case, except the case absolute and independent, should belong to some verb expressed or understood; as, "To whom thus Adam;" that is, spoke.
NOTE. Every nominative case, except for the absolute and independent cases, should relate to some verb that is either expressed or understood; for example, "To whom thus Adam," meaning spoke.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Note.—Two substantives, when they come together, and do not signify the same thing, the former must be in the genitive case.
Note.—When two nouns come together and do not mean the same thing, the first one must be in the genitive case.
Virtue, however it may be neglected for a time, men are so constituted as ultimately to acknowledge and respect genuine merit.
Virtue, even if it's overlooked for a while, is something that people are naturally inclined to recognize and value true worth.
RULE VII.
Two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, signifying the same thing, are put, by apposition, in the same case; as, "Paul, the apostle;" "Joram, the king;" "Solomon, the son of David, king of Israel, wrote many proverbs."
Two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, that refer to the same thing, are placed in the same case by apposition; for example, "Paul, the apostle;" "Joram, the king;" "Solomon, the son of David, king of Israel, wrote many proverbs."
NOTE. A noun is sometimes put in apposition with a sentence; as, "The sheriff has just seized and sold his valuable library—(which was) a misfortune that greatly depressed him."
NOTE. A noun can sometimes be placed alongside a sentence; for example, "The sheriff just seized and sold his valuable library—(which was) a misfortune that really got him down."
FALSE SYNTAX.
The pronoun he in this sentence, is improperly used in the nominative case. It is the object of the action of the transitive verb "love," and put by apposition with "God;" therefore it should be the objective case, him, according to Rule 7. (Repeat the Rule, and correct the following.)
The pronoun he in this sentence is incorrectly used in the nominative case. It is the object of the action of the transitive verb "love," and is placed alongside "God;" therefore it should be in the objective case, him, according to Rule 7. (Repeat the Rule, and correct the following.)
I saw Juliet and her brother, they that you visited.
I saw Juliet and her brother, the ones you visited.
They slew Varus, he that was mentioned before.
They killed Varus, the one mentioned earlier.
It was John, him who preached repentance.
It was John, the one who preached repentance.
Adams and Jefferson, them who died on the fourth of July 1826, were both signers and the firm supporters of the Declaration of Independence.
Adams and Jefferson, who both died on July 4, 1826, were signers and strong supporters of the Declaration of Independence.
Augustus the Roman emperor, him who succeeded Julius Cesar, is variously described by historians.
Augustus, the Roman emperor who followed Julius Caesar, is described in various ways by historians.
RULE VIII.
Two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, in the singular number, connected by copulative conjunctions, must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns, agreeing with them in the plural; as, "Socrates and Plato were wise; they were eminent philosophers."
Two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, in the singular form, connected by conjunctions, must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns that agree with them in the plural; for example, "Socrates and Plato were wise; they were prominent philosophers."
NOTE 1. When each or every relates to two or more nominatives in the singular, although connected by a copulative, the verb must agree with each of them in the singular; as, "Every leaf, and every twig, and every drop of water, teems with life."
NOTE 1. When each or every refers to two or more singular subjects that are joined by a conjunction, the verb must be in the singular form to match each subject; as in, "Every leaf, and every twig, and every drop of water, teems with life."
2. When the singular nominative of a complex sentence, has another noun joined to it with a preposition, it is customary to put the verb and pronoun agreeing with it in the singular; as, "Prosperity with humility, renders its possessor truly amiable;" "The General, also, in conjunction with the officers, has applied for redress."
2. When the singular subject of a complex sentence has another noun connected to it with a preposition, it's common to use the verb and pronoun that agree with it in the singular, as in, "Prosperity with humility renders its possessor truly amiable;" "The General, along with the officers, has applied for redress."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Coffee and sugar grows in the West Indies: it is exported in large quantities.
Coffee and sugar are grown in the West Indies and are exported in large quantities.
Two singular nouns coupled together, form a plural idea. The verb grow is improper, because it expresses the action of both its nominatives, "coffee and sugar," which two nominatives are connected by the copulative conjunction, and; therefore the verb should be plural, grow; and then it would agree with coffee and sugar, according to Rule 8. (Repeat the Rule.) The pronoun it, as it represents both the nouns, "coffee and sugar," ought also to be plural, they, agreeably to Rule 8. The sentence should be written thus. "Coffee and sugar grow in the West Indies: they are exported in large quantities."
Two singular nouns combined create a plural idea. The verb grow is incorrect because it describes the action of both subjects, "coffee and sugar," which are joined by the conjunction and; therefore, the verb should be plural, grow, to agree with coffee and sugar, according to Rule 8. (Repeat the Rule.) The pronoun it, representing both nouns "coffee and sugar," should also be plural, they, in accordance with Rule 8. The sentence should be written as follows: "Coffee and sugar grow in the West Indies: they are exported in large quantities."
Time and tide waits for no man.
Time and tide wait for no one.
Patience and diligence, like faith, removes mountains.
Patience and hard work, just like faith, can move mountains.
Life and health is both uncertain.
Life and health are both unpredictable.
Wisdom, virtue, happiness, dwells with the golden mediocrity.
Wisdom, virtue, and happiness are found in the golden middle ground.
The planetary system, boundless space, and the immense ocean, affects the mind with sensations of astonishment.
The planetary system, endless space, and the vast ocean affect the mind with feelings of wonder.
What signifies the counsel and care of preceptors, when you think you have no need of assistance?
What does the guidance and support of teachers mean when you believe you don't need any help?
Their love, and their hatred, and their envy, is now perished.
Their love, hatred, and envy have now vanished.
Why is whiteness and coldness in snow?
Why is snow white and cold?
Obey the commandment of thy father, and the law of thy mother; bind it continually upon thy heart.
Obey your father's command and your mother's law; keep it close to your heart at all times.
Pride and vanity always render its possessor despicable in the eyes of the judicious.
Pride and vanity always make the person who has them look pathetic in the eyes of the wise.
There is error and discrepance in the schemes of the orthoepists, which shows the impossibility of carrying them into effect.
There are mistakes and inconsistencies in the guidelines of the pronunciation experts, which highlights the difficulty of implementing them.
EXAMPLES FOR THE NOTE.
Every man, woman, and child, were numbered.
Every man, woman, and child was numbered.
Not proper; for, although and couples things together so as to present the whole at one view, yet every has a contrary effect: it distributes them, and brings each separately and singly under consideration. Were numbered is therefore improper. It should be, "was numbered," in the singular, according to the Note. (Repeat it.)
Not proper; for, although and connects things together to show the whole at once, every does the opposite: it separates them and brings each one into focus individually. Were numbered is therefore incorrect. It should be, "was numbered," in the singular, as noted. (Repeat it.)
When benignity and gentleness reign in our breasts, every person and every occurrence are beheld in the most favorable light.
When kindness and gentleness fill our hearts, we see every person and every situation in the best possible way.
RULE IX.
Two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, in the singular number, connected by disjunctive conjunctions, must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns, agreeing with them in the singular; as, "Neither John nor James has learned his lesson."
Two or more nouns, or nouns and pronouns, in the singular form, connected by disjunctive conjunctions, must have verbs, nouns, and pronouns that agree with them in the singular; for example, "Neither John nor James has learned his lesson."
NOTE 1. When singular pronouns, or a noun and pronoun, of different persons, are disjunctively connected, the verb must agree, in person, with that which is placed nearest to it; as, "Thou or I am in fault; I or thou art to blame; I, or thou, or he, is the author of it." But it would be better to say "Either I am to blame or thou art," &c.
NOTE 1. When singular pronouns, or a noun and pronoun, from different people are connected by "or," the verb should agree in person with the one closest to it; for example, "You or I am at fault; I or you are to blame; I, or you, or he, is the author of it." However, it’s better to say "Either I am to blame or you are," etc.
2. When a disjunctive occurs between a singular noun or pronoun and a plural one, the verb must agree with the plural noun or pronoun, which should generally be placed next to the verb; as, "Neither poverty nor riches were injurious to him;" "I or they were offended by it."
2. When there’s a choice between a singular noun or pronoun and a plural one, the verb should agree with the plural noun or pronoun, which should typically be placed next to the verb; for example, "Neither poverty nor riches were harmful to him;" "I or they were offended by it."
Constructions like these ought generally to be avoided.
Constructions like these should generally be avoided.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Ignorance or negligence have caused this mistake.
Ignorance or carelessness has led to this mistake.
The verb, have caused, in this sentence, is improperly used in the plural, because it expresses the action, not of both, but of either the one or the other of its nominatives; therefore it should be in the singular, has caused; and then it would agree with "ignorance or negligence," agreeably to Rule 9 (Repeat the Rule.)
The verb, have, used in this sentence is incorrectly plural because it refers to the action of either one or the other of its subjects, not both. It should be in the singular form, has, so it agrees with "ignorance or negligence," in accordance with Rule 9 (Repeat the Rule.)
A circle or a square are the same in idea.
A circle and a square are the same in concept.
Neither whiteness nor redness are in the porphyry.
Neither whiteness nor redness is in the porphyry.
Neither of them are remarkable for precision.
Neither of them is known for precision.
Man is not such a machine as a clock or a watch, which move merely as they are moved.
Man is not just a machine like a clock or a watch, which only move when they are wound up.
When sickness, infirmity, or reverse of fortune, affect us, the sincerity of friendship is proved.
When illness, weakness, or misfortune hit us, the true nature of friendship is revealed.
Man's happiness or misery are, in a great measure, put into his own hands.
A person's happiness or unhappiness is largely in their own control.
Despise no infirmity of mind or body, nor any condition of life, for they may be thy own lot.
Despise no weakness of mind or body, nor any circumstance of life, because they might be your own fate.
The prince, as well as the people, were blameworthy.
The prince and the people were both at fault.
RULE X.
A collective noun or noun of multitude, conveying unity of idea, generally has a verb or pronoun agreeing with it in the singular; as, "The meeting was large, and it held three hours."
A collective noun, or noun of multitude, representing unity of concept, usually takes a verb or pronoun that agrees with it in the singular; for example, "The meeting was large, and it lasted three hours."
FALSE SYNTAX.
The nation are powerful.
The nation is powerful.
The fleet were seen sailing up the channel.
The fleet was seen sailing up the channel.
The church have no power to inflict corporal punishment. The flock, and not the fleece, are, or ought to be, the objects of the shepherd's care.
The church has no authority to impose physical punishment. The congregation, not their resources, should be the focus of the shepherd's attention.
That nation was once powerful; but now they are feeble.
That country was once strong; but now they are weak.
RULE XI.
A noun of multitude, conveying plurality of idea, must have a verb or pronoun agreeing with it in the plural; as, "The council were divided in their sentiments."
A noun that represents a large group and indicates plurality of idea must have a verb or pronoun that matches it in plural; for example, "The council were divided in their opinions."
FALSE SYNTAX.
My people doth not consider.
My people do not consider.
The multitude eagerly pursues pleasure as its chief good.
The crowd eagerly chases pleasure as its main goal.
The committee was divided in its sentiments, and it has referred the business to the general meeting.
The committee had mixed feelings about the issue, so they forwarded it to the general meeting.
The people rejoices in that which should give it sorrow.
The people take joy in what should make them sad.
RULE XII.
A noun or pronoun in the possessive case, is governed by the noun it possesses; as, "Man's happiness;" "Its value is great."
A noun or pronoun in the possessive case is controlled by the noun it belongs to; for example, "Man's happiness;" "Its value is great."
NOTE 1. When the possessor is described by a circumlocution, the possessive sign should generally be applied to the last term only; as, "The duke of Bridgewater's canal; The bishop of Landaff's excellent book; The captain of the guard's house." This usage, however, ought generally to be avoided. The words do not literally convey the ideas intended. What nonsense to say, "This is the governor of Ohio's house!"
NOTE 1. When describing the possessor with a roundabout expression, the possessive form should usually only be applied to the last term; for example, "The duke of Bridgewater's canal; The bishop of Landaff's excellent book; The captain of the guard's house." However, this usage should generally be avoided. The words don’t clearly convey the intended ideas. It sounds silly to say, "This is the governor of Ohio's house!"
2. When nouns in the possessive case are in apposition, and follow each other in quick succession, the possessive sign is generally annexed to the last only; as, "For David my servant's sake; John the Baptist's head; The canal was built in consequence of De Witt Clinton the governor's advice."
2. When nouns in the possessive case are in apposition and follow each other closely, the possessive sign is usually added only to the last one; for example, "For David my servant's sake; John the Baptist's head; The canal was built because of De Witt Clinton the governor's advice."
But when a pause is proper, and the governing noun not expressed, the sign should be applied to the first possessive only, and understood to the rest; as, "I reside at Lord Stormont's, my old patron and benefactor."
But when a pause is appropriate, and the main noun isn't stated, the apostrophe should be applied only to the first possessive and understood for the others; for example, "I live at Lord Stormont's, my old patron and benefactor."
3. Its, the possessive case of it, is often improperly used for 'tis, or, it is; as, "Its my book: Its his," &c.; instead of, "It is my book; or, 'Tis my book; It is his; or, 'Tis his."
3. Its, the possessive form of it, is often incorrectly used instead of 'tis or it is; for example, "Its my book; Its his," etc.; instead of "It is my book; or, 'Tis my book; It is his; or, 'Tis his."
4. Participles frequently govern nouns and pronouns in the possessive case, as, "In case of his majesty's dying without issue, &c.; Upon God's having ended all his works, &c.; I remember its being reckoned a great exploit; At my coming in he said," &c. But in such instances, the participle with its adjuncts may be considered a substantive phrase, according to Note 2, Rule 28.
4. Participles often govern nouns and pronouns in the possessive case, like, "If his majesty dies without an heir, &c.; After God finishes all His works, &c.; I remember it being considered a great achievement; When I walked in, he said," &c. However, in these cases, the participle along with its modifiers can be seen as a noun phrase, according to Note 2, Rule 28.
5. Phrases like these, "A work of Washington Irving's; A brother of Joseph's; A friend of mine; A neighbor of yours," do not, as some have supposed, each contain a double possessive, or two possessive cases, but they may be thus construed; "A work of (out of, or, among the number of) Washington Irving's works; that is, One of the works of Washington Irving; One of the brothers of Joseph; One friend of my friends; One neighbor of your neighbors."
5. Phrases like these, "A work of Washington Irving's; A brother of Joseph's; A friend of mine; A neighbor of yours," do not, as some have thought, each contain a double possessive or two possessive cases, but they can be understood this way: "A work of (out of, or, among the number of) Washington Irving's works; that is, One of the works of Washington Irving; One of the brothers of Joseph; One friend of my friends; One neighbor of your neighbors."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Homers works are much admired.
Homer's works are widely admired.
Nevertheless, Asa his heart was not perfect with the Lord.
Nevertheless, Asa's heart was not completely loyal to the Lord.
James Hart, his book, bought August the 19, 1829.
James Hart, his book, purchased on August 19, 1829.
Note 1. It was the men's, women's, and children's lot to suffer great calamities.
Note 1. The men, women, and children all had to endure major hardships.
This is Peter's, John's, and Andrew's occupation.
This is Peter's, John's, and Andrew's job.
Note 2. This is Campbell's the poet's production.
Note 2. This is the work of Campbell the poet.
The silk was purchased at Brown's, the mercer's and haberdasher's.
The silk was bought at Brown's, the fabric and accessories store.
Note 4. Much will depend on the pupil composing frequently.
Note 4. A lot will depend on the student writing often.
Much depends on this rule being observed.
Much relies on this rule being followed.
The measure failed in consequence of the president neglecting to lay it before the council.
The measure failed because the president didn't present it to the council.
RULE XIII.
Personal pronouns must agree with the nouns for which they stand, in gender and number; as, "John writes, and he will soon write well."
Personal pronouns need to match the nouns they refer to in gender and number; for example, "John writes, and he will soon write well."
NOTE. You, though frequently employed to represent a singular noun, is always plural in form; therefore the verb connected with it should be plural; as, "My friend, you were mistaken." See pages 99 and 100.
NOTE. You, although often used to refer to a singular noun, is always plural in form; therefore, the verb that goes with it should be plural; for example, "My friend, you were mistaken." See pages 99 and 100.
FALSE SYNTAX
Every man will be rewarded according to their works.
Every person will be rewarded based on their actions.
Incorrect, because the pronoun their does not agree in gender or number with the noun "man," for which it stands; consequently Rule 13, is violated. Their should be his; and then the pronoun would be of the masculine gender, singular number, agreeing with man, according to Rule 13. (Repeat the Rule.)
Incorrect, because the pronoun their doesn’t match in gender or number with the noun "man,” for which it stands; therefore, Rule 13 is violated. Their should be his; then the pronoun would be masculine and singular, agreeing with man, according to Rule 13. (Repeat the Rule.)
An orator's tongue should be agreeable to the ear of their audience.
An orator's speech should be pleasant to the ears of their audience.
Rebecca took goodly raiment, and put them on Jacob.
Rebecca took fine clothes and put them on Jacob.
Take handfuls of ashes, and let Moses sprinkle it towards heaven, in the sight of Pharaoh, and it shall become small dust.
Take handfuls of ashes, and let Moses sprinkle it toward heaven, in the presence of Pharaoh, and it will turn into fine dust.
No one should incur censure for being tender of their reputation.
No one should be criticized for caring about their reputation.
Note. Horace, you was blamed; and I think you was worthy of censure.
Note. Horace, you were blamed; and I think you were deserving of criticism.
Witness, where was you standing during the transaction? How far was you from the defendant?
Witness, where were you standing during the transaction? How far were you from the defendant?
RULE XIV.
Relative pronouns agree with their antecedents, in gender, person, and number; as, "Thou who lovest wisdom;" "I who speak from experience."
Relative pronouns match their antecedents in gender, person, and number; for example, "You who love wisdom;" "I who speak from experience."
NOTE. When a relative pronoun is preceded by two antecedents of different persons, the relative and the verb may agree in person with either, but not without regard to the sense; as, "I am the man who command you;" or, "I am the man who commands you." The meaning of the first of these examples will more obviously appear, if we render it thus: "I who command you, am the man."
NOTE. When a relative pronoun comes after two antecedents of different people, the relative and the verb can agree in person with either one, as long as it makes sense. For example, "I am the man who command you;" or, "I am the man who commands you." The meaning of the first example becomes clearer if we rephrase it like this: "I who command you, am the man."
When the agreement of the relative has been fixed with either of the preceding antecedents, it must be preserved throughout the sentence; as, "I am the Lord, that maketh all things; that stretcheth forth the heavens alone; that spreadeth abroad the earth by myself," &c.
When the agreement of the relative has been established with either of the previous subjects, it must be maintained throughout the sentence; for example, "I am the Lord, who creates all things; who stretches out the heavens alone; who spreads the earth by myself," &c.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Thou who has been a witness of the fact, canst state it.
You who have witnessed the fact can state it.
The wheel killed another man, which make the sixth which have lost their lives by this means.
The wheel killed another man, making that the sixth person who has lost their life by this means.
Thou great First Cause, least understood!
You great First Cause, least understood!
Who all my sense confined.
Who all my senses confined.
Note, 2d part. Thou art the Lord, who didst choose Abraham, and brought him forth out of Ur of the Chaldees.
Note, 2d part. You are the Lord who chose Abraham and brought him out of Ur of the Chaldees.
RULE XV.
The relative is the nominative case to the verb, when no nominative comes between it and the verb; as, "The master who taught us, was eminent."
The relative is the nominative case to the verb when no nominative comes between it and the verb; for example, "The master who taught us was eminent."
FALSE SYNTAX.
If he will not hear his best friend, whom shall be sent to admonish him.
If he won't listen to his best friend, who should be sent to warn him?
This is the man whom, he informed me, was my benefactor.
This is the guy who he told me was my benefactor.
RULE XVI.
When a nominative comes between the relative and the verb, the relative is governed by the following verb, or by some other word in its own member of the sentence; as, "He whom I serve, is eternal."
When a subject comes between the relative pronoun and the verb, the relative is influenced by the following verb or by another word in its part of the sentence; for example, "He whom I serve, is eternal."
NOTE 1. Who, which, what, the relative that, and their compounds, whomever, whomsoever, &c., though in the objective case, are always placed before the verb; as, "He whom ye seek, has gone hence."
NOTE 1. Who, which, what, the relative that, and their compounds, whomever, whomsoever, etc., even in the objective case, are always placed before the verb; for example, "He whom you seek, has gone away."
2. Every relative must have an antecedent to which it relates, either expressed or implied; as, "Who steals my purse, steals trash;" that is, he who.
2. Every relative has to have an antecedent it relates to, whether it's stated or implied; like, "Who steals my purse, steals trash;" that is, he who.
3. The pronouns whichsoever, whatsoever, and the like, are sometimes elegantly divided by the interposition of the corresponding nouns; as, "On which side soever the king cast his eyes," &c.
3. The pronouns whichever, whatever, and similar terms, can sometimes be nicely separated by placing the corresponding nouns in between; for example, "On which side ever the king cast his eyes," &c.
4. The pronoun what is sometimes improperly used instead of the conjunction that; as, "He would not believe but what I was in fault." It should be "but that," &c.
4. The pronoun what is sometimes incorrectly used instead of the conjunction that; as in, "He would not believe but what I was at fault." It should be "but that," &c.
FALSE SYNTAX.
That is the friend who I sincerely esteem.
That is the friend I truly value.
Not proper, because who, which is the object of the action expressed by the transitive verb "esteem," is in the nominative case. It ought to be whom, in the objective; and then it would be governed by esteem, according to Rule 16. (Repeat the Rule:)—and, also, according to Rule 20. "That is the friend whom I sincerely esteem."
Not correct, because who, which is the object of the action expressed by the transitive verb "esteem," is in the nominative case. It should be whom, in the objective; and then it would be governed by esteem, according to Rule 16. (Repeat the Rule:)—and, also, according to Rule 20. "That is the friend whom I sincerely esteem."
They who much is given to, will have much to answer for.
Those who are given much will have much to account for.
From the character of those who you associate with, your own will be estimated.
From the people you surround yourself with, others will judge your own character.
He is a man who I greatly respect.
He is a man I really respect.
Our benefactors and tutors are the persons who we ought to love, and who we ought to be grateful to.
Our mentors and supporters are the people we should love and be thankful for.
They who conscience and virtue support, may smile at the caprices of fortune.
Those who are guided by conscience and virtue can smile at the whims of fate.
Who did you walk with?
Who did you walk with?
Who did you see there?
Who did you see there?
Who did you give the book to?
Who did you give the book to?
RULE XVII.
When a relative pronoun is of the interrogative kind, it refers to the word or phrase containing the answer to the question for its subsequent, which subsequent must agree in case with the interrogative; as, "Whose book is that? Joseph's;" "Who gave you this? John."
When a relative pronoun is in the form of a question, it refers to the word or phrase that contains the answer for its subsequent, which must agree in case with the interrogative; as in, "Whose book is that? Joseph's; Who gave you this? John."
NOTE. Whether the interrogative really refers to a subsequent or not, is doubtful; but it is certain that the subsequent should agree in case with the interrogative.
NOTE. It's uncertain whether the interrogative really refers to a subsequent or not; however, it's clear that the subsequent should match in case with the interrogative.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Who gave John those books? Us. Of whom did you buy them? Of a bookseller, he who lives in Pearl street.
Who gave John those books? We did. From whom did you buy them? From a bookseller who lives on Pearl Street.
Who walked with you? My brother and him.
Who walked with you? My brother and that guy.
Who will accompany me to the country? Her and me.
Who will go with me to the country? Her and me.
RULE XVIII.
Adjectives belong to, and qualify nouns, expressed or understood; as, "He is a good, as well as a wise man."
Adjectives modify and describe nouns, whether they're stated or implied; for example, "He is a good and wise man."
NOTE 1. Adjectives frequently belong to pronouns; as, "I am miserable; He is industrious."
NOTE 1. Adjectives often go with pronouns; for example, "I am miserable; He is industrious."
2. Numeral adjectives belong to nouns, which nouns must agree in number with their adjectives, when of the cardinal kind; as, "Ten feet; Eighty fathoms." But some anomalous and figurative expressions form an exception to this rule; as, "A fleet of forty sail;" "Two hundred head of cattle."
2. Numeral adjectives are associated with nouns, and those nouns must match in number with their adjectives when it comes to the cardinal type; for example, "Ten feet; Eighty fathoms." However, certain irregular and figurative expressions are exceptions to this rule, such as "A fleet of forty sail; 'Two hundred head of cattle."
3. Adjectives sometimes belong to verbs in the infinitive mood, or to a part of a sentence; as, "To see is pleasant; To be blind is unfortunate; To die for our country is glorious."
3. Adjectives can sometimes relate to verbs in the infinitive form or to a part of a sentence; for example, "To see is pleasant; To be blind is unfortunate; To die for our country is glorious."
4. Adjectives are often used to modify the sense of other adjectives, or the action of verbs, and to express the quality of things in connexion with the action by which that quality is produced; as, "Red hot iron; Pale blue lining; Deep sea-green sash; The apples boil soft; Open your hand wide; The clay burns white; The fire burns blue; The eggs boil hard."
4. Adjectives are often used to modify the meaning of other adjectives or the actions of verbs, and to express the quality of things in relation to the actions that create that quality; for example, "Red hot iron; Pale blue lining; Deep sea-green sash; The apples boil soft; Open your hand wide; The clay burns white; The fire burns blue; The eggs boil hard."
5. When an adjective is preceded by a preposition, and the noun is understood, the two words may be considered an adverbial phrase; as, "In general, in particular;" that is, generally, particularly.
5. When an adjective is followed by a preposition, and the noun is implied, the two words can be seen as an adverbial phrase; for example, "In general, in particular;" which means generally, particularly.
6. Adjectives should be placed next to the nouns which they qualify; as, "A tract of good land."
6. Adjectives should be placed next to the nouns they describe; for example, "A piece of good land."
7. We should generally avoid comparing such adjectives as do not literally admit of comparison; such as, more impossible, most impossible; more unconquerable, more perfect, &c. See REMARKS on adjectives, page 76.
7. We should usually avoid comparing adjectives that can't literally be compared, like more impossible, most impossible; more unconquerable, more perfect, etc. See REMARKS on adjectives, page 76.
8. When an adjective or an adverb is used in comparing two objects, it should be in the comparative degree; but when more than two are compared, the superlative ought to be employed; as, "Julia is the taller of the two; Her specimen is the best of the three."
8. When an adjective or adverb is used to compare two things, it should be in the comparative form; but when comparing more than two, the superlative should be used; for example, "Julia is the taller of the two; her specimen is the best of the three."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Note 2. The boat carries thirty tun.
Note 2. The boat carries thirty tons.
The chasm was twenty foot broad, and one hundred fathom in depth.
The gap was twenty feet wide and one hundred fathoms deep.
Note 6. He bought a new pair of shoes, and an elegant piece of furniture.
Note 6. He bought a new pair of shoes and a stylish piece of furniture.
My cousin gave his fine pair of horses for a poor tract of land.
My cousin traded his great pair of horses for a rundown piece of land.
Note 7. The contradictions of impiety are still more incomprehensible.
Note 7. The contradictions of disrespect are even more confusing.
It is the most uncertain way that can be devised.
It’s the most unreliable way that can be thought of.
This is a more perfect model than I ever saw before.
This is a better model than I've ever seen before.
Note 8. Which of those two cords is the strongest?
Note 8. Which of those two cords is stronger?
I was at a loss to determine which was the wiser of the three.
I couldn't figure out which of the three was the smartest.
RULE XIX.
Adjective pronouns belong to nouns, expressed or understood; as, "Any man, all men."
Adjective pronouns refer to nouns, whether mentioned or implied; for example, "Any man, all men."
NOTE 1. The demonstrative adjective pronouns must agree in number with their nouns; as, "This book, these books; that sort, those sorts."
NOTE 1. The demonstrative adjective pronouns must match in number with their nouns; for example, "This book, these books; that type, those types."
2. The pronominal adjectives, each, every, either, neither, another, and one, agree with nouns in the singular number only; as, "Each man, every person, another lesson;" unless the plural nouns convey a collective idea: as, "Every six months."
2. The pronoun adjectives, each, every, either, neither, another, and one, agree with nouns only in the singular form; for example, "Each man, every person, another lesson;" unless the plural nouns suggest a collective idea: for instance, "Every six months."
3. Either is often improperly employed instead of each; as, "The king of Israel, and Jehoshaphat the king of Judah, sat either of them on his throne." Each signifies both taken separately; either implies only the one or the other taken disjunctively:—"sat each on his throne."
3. Either is often incorrectly used instead of each; for example, "The king of Israel and Jehoshaphat, the king of Judah, sat either of them on his throne." Each means both considered individually; either refers to just one or the other separately:—"sat each on his throne."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Note 1. Those sort of favors do real injury.
Note 1. Those kinds of favors can cause real harm.
They have been playing this two hours.
They have been playing for two hours.
These kind of indulgences soften and injure the mind. He saw one or more persons enter the garden.
These kinds of indulgences weaken and harm the mind. He saw one or more people enter the garden.
Note 2. Let each esteem others better than themselves.
Note 2. Let everyone consider others as more important than themselves.
There are bodies, each of which are so small as to be invisible.
There are tiny bodies that are so small they can't be seen.
Every person, whatever their station may be, are bound by the laws of morality and religion.
Every person, regardless of their position, is bound by the laws of morality and religion.
Note 3. On either side of the river was the tree of life.
Note 3. On both sides of the river was the tree of life.
Nadab and Abihu took either of them his censer.
Nadab and Abihu each took their censer.
RULE XX.
Active-transitive verbs govern the objective case; as, "Cesar conquered Pompey;" "Columbus discovered America;" "Truth ennobles her."
Active-transitive verbs take the objective case; for example, "Cesar conquered Pompey;" "Columbus discovered America;" "Truth ennobles her."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Ye who were dead, hath he quickened.
You who were dead, He has brought to life.
Ye, in the nominative case, is erroneous, because it is the object of the action expressed by the transitive verb "hath quickened;" and therefore it should be you, in the objective case. You would then be governed by "hath quickened," agreeably, to Rule 20. Active-transitive verbs govern the objective case.
You, in the nominative case, is incorrect because it is the object of the action expressed by the transitive verb "has quickened;" and therefore it should be you, in the objective case. You would then be governed by "has quickened," according to Rule 20. Active-transitive verbs govern the objective case.
Who did they entertain so freely?
Who did they entertain so openly?
They who opulence has made proud, and who luxury has corrupted, cannot relish the simple pleasures of nature.
People who have become arrogant from wealth and have been corrupted by luxury cannot appreciate the simple joys of nature.
He and they we know, but who are ye?
He and they we know, but who are you?
She that is negligent, reprove sharply.
She who is careless should be corrected firmly.
He invited my brother and I to pay him a visit.
He invited my brother and me to come visit him.
Who did they send on that mission?
Who did they send on that mission?
They who he has most injured, he had the greatest reason to love.
Those he has hurt the most are the ones he has the greatest reason to love.
RULE XXI.
The verb to be may have the same case after it as before it; as, "I am the man;" "I believe it to have been them;" "He is the thief."
The verb to be can have the same case after it as it does before it; for example, "I am the man;" "I believe it to have been them;" "He is the thief."
NOTE 1. When nouns or pronouns next preceding and following the verb to be, signify the same thing, they are in apposition, and, therefore, in the same case. Rule 21 is predicated on the principle contained in Rule 7.
NOTE 1. When nouns or pronouns that come before and after the verb to be refer to the same thing, they are in apposition, and are therefore in the same case. Rule 21 is based on the principle found in Rule 7.
2. The verb to be is often understood; as, "The Lord made me man; He made him what he was;" that is, "The Lord made me to be man; He made him to be that which he was." "They desired me to call them brethren;" i.e. by the name of brethren. "They named him John;" i.e. by the name of John; or, by the name John; putting these two nouns in apposition.
2. The verb to be is often understood; as, "The Lord made me man; He made him what he was;" that is, "The Lord made me to be man; He made him to be what he was." "They wanted me to call them brothers;" i.e. by the name of brothers. "They named him John;" i.e. by the name of John; or, by the name John; putting these two nouns in apposition.
FALSE SYNTAX.
I know it to be they.
I know it's them.
Improper, because it is in the objective case before the verb "to be," and they is in the nominative after; consequently, Rule 21 is violated. They is in apposition with it, therefore they should be them, in the objective after to be, according to Rule 21. (Repeat the Rule.)
Improper, because it is in the objective case before the verb "to be," and they is in the nominative after; consequently, Rule 21 is violated. They is in apposition with it, therefore they should be them, in the objective after to be, according to Rule 21. (Repeat the Rule.)
Be composed, it is me.
Stay calm, it’s me.
I would not act thus, if I were him.
I wouldn't do that if I were him.
Well may you be afraid; it is him, indeed.
You have every right to be scared; it's really him.
Who do you fancy him to to be?
Who do you think he is?
Whom do men say that I am? Whom say ye that I am?
Who do people say that I am? Who do you say that I am?
If it was not him, who do you imagine it to have been?
If it wasn't him, who do you think it could have been?
He supposed it was me; but you knew that it was him.
He thought it was me; but you knew it was him.
RULE XXII.
NOTE 1. Active-intransitive verbs sometimes assume a transitive form, and govern the objective case; as, "To dream a dream; To run a race; To walk the horse; To dance the child; To fly the kite."
NOTE 1. Active-intransitive verbs can sometimes take a transitive form and require the objective case; for example, "To dream a dream; To run a race; To walk the horse; To dance the child; To fly the kite."
2. According to a usage too common in colloquial style, an agent not literally the correct one, is employed as the nominative to a passive verb, which causes the verb to be followed by an objective case without the possibility of supplying before it a preposition: thus, "Pitticus was offered a large sum by the king;" "She was promised them (the jewels) by her mother;" "I was asked a question." It would be better sense, and more agreeable to the idiom of our language, to say, "A large sum was offered to Pitticus;" "They were promised (to) her;" "A question was put to me."
2. In everyday conversation, it's common to use the wrong subject with a passive verb, which leads to the verb being followed by an objective case without a preposition before it: for example, "Pitticus was offered a large sum by the king;" "She was promised them (the jewels) by her mother;" "I was asked a question." It makes more sense and aligns better with our language to say, "A large sum was offered to Pitticus;" "They were promised (to) her;" "A question was put to me."
3. Some passive verbs are formed by using the participles of compound active verbs. To smile, to wonder, to dream, are intransitive verbs, for which reason they have no passive voice; but, to smile on, to wonder at, to dream of, are compound active-transitive verbs, and, therefore, admit of a passive voice; as, "He was smiled on by fortune; The accident is not to be wondered at;"
3. Some passive verbs are created by using the participles of compound active verbs. To smile, to wonder, and to dream are intransitive verbs, which is why they don't have a passive form; however, to smile on, to wonder at, and to dream of are compound active-transitive verbs, and therefore can have a passive voice; for example, "He was smiled on by fortune; The accident is not to be wondered at;"
RULE XXIII.
A verb in the infinitive mood may be governed by a verb, noun, adjective, participle, or pronoun; as, "Cease to do evil;" "We all have our talent to be improved;" "She is eager to learn;" "They are preparing to go;" "Let him do it."
A verb in the infinitive form can be influenced by a verb, noun, adjective, participle, or pronoun; for example, "Cease doing evil;" "We all have our talent to improve;" "She is eager to learn;" "They are preparing to go;" "Let him do it."
ILLUSTRATION. The supposed principle of government referred to in this rule, may be thus illustrated. In the sentence, "Cease to do evil," the peculiar manner in which cease is introduced, requires or compels us to put the verb do in the infinitive mood; and, according to the genius of our language, we cannot express this act of doing, when thus connected with cease, in any other mood, unless we change the construction of the sentence. Hence we say, that cease governs the mood of the verb do. Similar remarks may be applied to the words talent, eager, preparing, and him, in the respective examples under the rule.
ILLUSTRATION. The supposed principle of government mentioned in this rule can be illustrated like this. In the sentence, "Cease to do evil," the way cease is used requires or compels us to use the verb do in the infinitive form; and, according to the rules of our language, we can't express this act of doing, when connected with cease, in any other form unless we change the structure of the sentence. Therefore, we say that cease governs the mood of the verb do. Similar comments can be made about the words talent, eager, preparing, and him, in the respective examples under the rule.
Many respectable grammarians refer the government of this mood invariably to the preposition to prefixed, which word they do not, of course, consider a part of the verb. Others contend, and with some plausibility, that this mood is not governed by any particular word. If we reject the idea of government, as applied to the verb in this mood, the following rule, if substituted for the foregoing, might, perhaps, answer all practical purposes.
Many respected grammarians say that the use of this mood is always linked to the preposition to, which they don't consider a part of the verb. Others argue, with some justification, that this mood isn't controlled by any specific word. If we dismiss the concept of control as it applies to the verb in this mood, then the following rule, if used instead of the one above, might cover all practical needs.
RULE.
ILLUSTRATION of the examples under Rule XXIII. "To do" refers to thou understood for its agent; "to be improved" refers to talent; "to learn," to she; "to go," to they; and "to do," refers to him.
ILLUSTRATION of the examples under Rule XXIII. "To do" refers to you understood for its agent; "to be improved" refers to talent; "to learn," to her; "to go," to them; and "to do," refers to him.
NOTE 1. The infinitive mood absolute stands independent of the rest of the sentence; as, "To confess the truth, I was in fault."
NOTE 1. The infinitive mood absolute stands independent of the rest of the sentence; as, "To confess the truth, I was at fault."
2. The infinitive mood is sometimes governed by conjunctions or adverbs; as, "An object so high as to be invisible;" "He is wise enough to deceive;" "The army is about to march."
2. The infinitive mood is sometimes controlled by conjunctions or adverbs; for example, "An object so high as to be invisible;" "He is wise enough to deceive;" "The army is about to march."
RULE XXIV.
RULE XXV.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Bid him to come.
Ask him to come.
He durst not to do it without permission.
He didn't dare to do it without permission.
Hear him to read his lesson.
Listen to him read his lesson.
It is the difference in their conduct, which makes us to approve the one, and to reject the other.
It’s their behavior that leads us to support one and dismiss the other.
It is better live on a little, than outlive a great deal.
It’s better to live on a little than to outlive a lot.
I wish him not wrestle with his happiness.
I hope he doesn't struggle with his happiness.
RULE XXVI.
Participles have the same government as the verbs have from which they are derived; as, "I saw the tutor instructing his pupils."
Participles have the same governing rules as the verbs they come from; for example, "I saw the tutor instructing his pupils."
NOTE. The present participle with the definite article the before it, becomes a noun, and must have the preposition of after it. The and of must both be used, or both be omitted; as, "By the observing of truth, you will command respect;" or, "By observing truth," &c.
NOTE. When the present participle has the definite article the in front of it, it turns into a noun and should be followed by the preposition of. You must use both the and of, or leave them both out; for example, "By the observing of truth, you will command respect;" or, "By observing truth," &c.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Note. We cannot be wise and good without the taking pains for it.
Note. We can't be wise and good without putting in the effort.
The changing times and seasons, the removing and setting up kings, belong to Providence alone.
The changing times and seasons, the rising and falling of kings, belong to Providence alone.
These are the rules of grammar, by observing of which you may avoid mistakes.
These are the grammar rules that you can follow to avoid making mistakes.
RULE XXVII.
RULE XXVIII.
NOTE 1. Participles of neuter verbs have the same case after them as before them; as, "Pontius Pilate being Governor of Judea, and Herod being Tetrarch," &c.
NOTE 1. The participles of neutral verbs take the same case after them as they do before them; for example, "Pontius Pilate being Governor of Judea, and Herod being Tetrarch," &c.
2. A participle with its adjuncts, may sometimes be considered as a substantive or participial phrase, which phrase may be the subject of a verb, or the object of a verb or preposition; as, "Taking from another without his knowledge or assent, is called stealing; He studied to avoid expressing himself too severely; I cannot fail of having money, &c.; By promising much and performing but little, we become despicable."
2. A participle along with its modifiers can sometimes be treated as a noun or participial phrase, which can serve as the subject of a verb or the object of a verb or preposition; for example, "Taking from someone without their knowledge or agreement is called stealing; He studied to avoid being too harsh in his expression; I cannot help having money, etc.; By promising a lot and delivering little, we become contemptible."
3. As the perfect participle and the imperfect tense of irregular verbs, are sometimes different in their form, care must be taken that they be not indiscriminately used. It is frequently said, 'He begun,' for 'he began;' 'He run,' for 'he ran;' 'He come,' for 'he came;' the participles being here used instead of the imperfect tense; and much more frequently is the imperfect tense employed instead of the participle; as, 'I had wrote,' for 'I had written;' 'I was chose,' for 'I was chosen;' 'I have eat,' for 'I have eaten.' 'He would have spoke;'—spoken. 'He overrun his guide;'—overran. 'The sun had rose;'—risen.
3. Since the perfect participle and the imperfect tense of irregular verbs can look different, it's important to avoid mixing them up. People often say, "He begun," instead of "he began;" "He run," instead of "he ran;" "He come," instead of "he came;" using the participles when they should use the imperfect tense. It's even more common for the imperfect tense to be used instead of the participle, like saying, "I had wrote," instead of "I had written;" "I was chose," instead of "I was chosen;" "I have eat," instead of "I have eaten." "He would have spoke;"—spoken. "He overrun his guide;"—overran. "The sun had rose;"—risen.
FALSE SYNTAX.
I seen him. I have saw many a one.
I saw him. I've seen many people.
Seen is improper, the perfect participle being used instead of the imperfect tense of the verb. It ought to be, "I saw him," according to Note 3, Have saw is also erroneous, the imperfect tense being employed instead of the perfect participle. The perfect tense of a verb is formed by combining the auxiliary have with its perfect participle: therefore the sentence should be written thus, "I have seen many a one:" Note 3.
Seen is incorrect; the perfect participle is being used instead of the past tense of the verb. It should be, "I saw him," according to Note 3. Have saw is also wrong, as the past tense is used instead of the perfect participle. The perfect tense of a verb is formed by combining the auxiliary have with its perfect participle; therefore, the sentence should be written as, "I have seen many a one:" Note 3.
Note 3. He done me no harm, for I had wrote my letter before he come home.
Note 3. He didn’t do me any harm, because I had written my letter before he got home.
Had not that misfortune befel my cousin, he would have went to Europe long ago.
Had that misfortune not happened to my cousin, he would have gone to Europe long ago.
The sun had already arose, when I began my journey.
The sun had already risen when I started my journey.
Since the work is began, it must be prosecuted.
Since the work has started, it must be continued.
The French language is spoke in every state in Europe.
The French language is spoken in every country in Europe.
He writes as the best authors would have wrote, had they writ on the same subject.
He writes like the best authors would have, if they had written on the same topic.
RULE XXIX.
Adverbs qualify verbs, participles, adjectives, and other adverbs; as, "A very good pen writes extremely well;" "By living temperately," &c.
Adverbs modify verbs, participles, adjectives, and other adverbs; for example, "A very good pen writes extremely well;" "By living temperately," &c.
NOTE 1. Adverbs are generally set before adjectives or adverbs, after verbs, or between the auxiliary and the verb; as, "He made a very sensible discourse, and was attentively heard."
NOTE 1. Adverbs usually come before adjectives or other adverbs, after verbs, or between the auxiliary verb and the main verb; for example, "He made a very sensible speech, and was attentively listened to."
2. When the qualifying word which follows a verb, expresses quality, it must be an adjective, but when it expresses manner, an adverb should be used; as, "She looks cold; She looks coldly on him; He feels warm; He feels warmly the insult offered to him." If the verb to be can be substituted for the one employed, an adjective should follow, and not an adverb; as, "She looks [is] cold; The hay smells [is] sweet; The fields look [are] green; The apples taste [are] sour; The wind blows [is] fresh."
2. When the qualifying word that follows a verb expresses quality, it must be an adjective, but when it expresses manner, an adverb should be used; for example, "She looks cold; She looks coldly at him; He feels warm; He feels warmly about the insult he received." If the verb to be can be replaced with the verb being used, an adjective should follow, not an adverb; for instance, "She looks [is] cold; The hay smells [is] sweet; The fields look [are] green; The apples taste [are] sour; The wind blows [is] fresh."
3. It is not strictly proper to apply the adverbs here, there, and where, to verbs signifying motion, instead of the adverbs hither, thither, whither; thus, "He came here [hither] hastily;" "They rode there [thither] in two hours;" "Where [whither] will he go?" But in familiar style, these constructions are so far sanctioned as sometimes to be admissible.
3. It's not entirely correct to use the adverbs here, there, and where with action verbs instead of the adverbs hither, thither, whither; for example, "He came here [hither] quickly;" "They rode there [thither] in two hours;" "Where [whither] will he go?" However, in casual conversation, these uses are often accepted and can be appropriate.
4. The use of where, instead of in which, in constructions like the following, is hardly admissible: "The immortal sages of '76, formed a charter, where [in which] their rights are boldly asserted."
4. Using where instead of in which in sentences like the following is not really acceptable: "The immortal sages of '76 formed a charter, where [in which] their rights are boldly asserted."
5. As the adverbs hence, thence, and whence, literally supply the place of a noun and preposition, there appears to be a solecism in employing a preposition in conjunction with them: "From whence it follows;" "He came from thence since morning." Better, "whence it follows;" "He came thence." The following phrases are also exceptionable: "The then ministry;" "The above argument;" "Ask me never so much dowry;" "Charm he never so wisely." Better, "The ministry of that time or period;" "The preceding argument;" "Ever so much dowry;" "Ever so wisely."
5. Since the adverbs hence, thence, and whence essentially take the place of a noun and preposition, it’s incorrect to use a preposition with them: "From whence it follows;" "He came from thence since morning." Instead, say "whence it follows;" "He came thence." The following phrases are also problematic: "The then ministry;" "The above argument;" "Ask me never so much dowry;" "Charm he never so wisely." Better alternatives are "The ministry of that time or period;" "The preceding argument;" "Ever so much dowry;" "Ever so wisely."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Note 1. It cannot be impertinent or ridiculous therefore to remonstrate.
Note 1. It can’t be inappropriate or silly to speak up.
He was pleasing not often, because he was vain.
He wasn't pleasing very often because he was vain.
These things should be never separated.
These things should never be separated.
We may happily live, though our possessions are small.
We can live happily, even if we don't have much.
RULE XXX.
Two negatives destroy one another, and are generally equivalent to an affirmative; as, "Such things are not uncommon;" i.e. they are common.
Two negatives cancel each other out and usually mean the same as a positive; for example, "Such things are not uncommon;" meaning they are common.
NOTE. When one of the two negatives employed is joined to another word, it forms a pleasing and delicate variety of expression; as, "His language, though inelegant, is not ungrammatical;" that is, it is grammatical.
NOTE. When one of the two negatives used is connected to another word, it creates a nice and subtle variation in expression; for example, "His language, though awkward, is not ungrammatical;" meaning, it is grammatical.
But, as two negatives, by destroying each other, are equivalent to an affirmative, they should not be used when we wish to convey a negative meaning. The following sentence is therefore inaccurate: "I cannot by no means allow him what his argument must prove." It should be, "I cannot by any means," &c., or, "I can by no means."
But since two negatives cancel each other out and create a positive, they shouldn't be used when we want to express a negative meaning. The following sentence is therefore incorrect: "I cannot by no means allow him what his argument must prove." It should be, "I cannot by any means," &c., or, "I can by no means."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Note, 2d part. I don't know nothing about it.
Note, 2d part. I don't know anything about it.
I did not see nobody there. Nothing never affects her.
I didn’t see anyone there. Nothing ever affects her.
Be honest, nor take no shape nor semblance of disguise.
Be honest, and don’t take on any form or appearance of disguise.
There cannot be nothing more insignificant than vanity.
There can’t be anything more insignificant than vanity.
Precept nor discipline is not so forcible as example.
No rule or teaching is as powerful as showing by example.
RULE XXXI.
FALSE SYNTAX.
Each is accountable for hisself.
Each is accountable for himself.
They settled it among theirselves.
They settled it among themselves.
It is not I who he is displeased with.
It’s not me he’s upset with.
Who did you go with?
Who'd you go with?
Who did you receive instruction from?
Who taught you?
RULE XXXII.
Home, and nouns signifying distance, time when, how long, &c. are generally governed by a preposition understood; as, "The horse ran a mile;" "He came home last June;" "My friend lived four years at college;" that is, ran through the space of a mile; or, ran over a space called a mile; to his home in last June; during four years, &c.
Home, along with nouns that represent distance, time when, how long, etc., are typically governed by an understood preposition; for example, "The horse ran a mile;" "He came home last June;" "My friend lived four years at college;" meaning he ran through the distance of a mile; or, ran over a distance known as a mile; to his home in last June; for four years, etc.
NOTE 1. The prepositions to and for are often understood, chiefly before the pronouns; as, "Give [to] me a book; Get [for] him some paper."
NOTE 1. The prepositions to and for are often implied, especially before pronouns; for example, "Give [to] me a book; Get [for] him some paper."
2. To or unto, is, by some, supposed to be understood after like and unlike; as, "He is like [unto] his brother; She is unlike [to] him." Others consider this mode of expression an idiom of the language, and maintain that like governs the objective following it.
2. To or unto is thought by some to be implied after like and unlike; for example, "He is like his brother; She is unlike him." Others view this way of speaking as an idiom of the language and argue that like takes the objective case that follows it.
3. Nouns signifying extension, duration, quantity, quality, or value, are used without a governing word; as, "The Ohio is one thousand miles long; She is ten years old; My hat is worth ten dollars." These are sometimes considered anomalies. See page 163.
3. Nouns that indicate extension, duration, quantity, quality, or value can be used without a governing word, such as, "The Ohio is one thousand miles long; She is ten years old; My hat is worth ten dollars." These are occasionally seen as exceptions. See page 163.
RULE XXXIII.
Conjunctions connect nouns and pronouns in the same case; as, "The master taught her and me to write;" "He and she are associates."
Conjunctions connect nouns and pronouns that are in the same case; for example, "The master taught her and me to write;" "He and she are associates."
FALSE SYNTAX.
My brother and him are grammarians.
My brother and he are grammarians.
You and me enjoy great privileges.
You and I enjoy great privileges.
Him and I went to the city in company; but John and him returned without me.
He and I went to the city together; but John and he returned without me.
Between you and I there is a great disparity of years.
Between you and me, there is a big difference in age.
RULE XXXIV.
Conjunctions generally connect verbs of like moods and tenses; as, "If thou sincerely desire, and earnestly pursue virtue, she will assuredly be found by thee, and prove a rich reward."
Conjunctions usually connect verbs that have similar moods and tenses; for example, "If you sincerely desire, and earnestly pursue virtue, she will definitely be found by you, and prove a great reward."
NOTE 1. When different moods and tenses are connected by conjunctions, the nominative must be repeated; as, "He may return, but he will not tarry."
NOTE 1. When different moods and tenses are linked by conjunctions, the subject must be repeated; for example, "He may return, but he will not tarry."
2. Conjunctions implying contingency or doubt, require the subjunctive mood after them; as, "If he study, he will improve." See pages 135, 145, and 155.
2. Conjunctions that suggest uncertainty or possibility need the subjunctive mood after them; for example, "If he studies, he will improve." See pages 135, 145, and 155.
3. The conjunctions if, though, unless, except, whether, and lest, generally require the subjunctive mood after them.
3. The conjunctions if, though, unless, except, whether, and lest typically require the subjunctive mood to follow them.
4. Conjunctions of a positive and absolute nature, implying no doubt, require the indicative mood; as, "As virtue advances, so vice recedes."
4. Conjunctions that are positive and absolute, suggesting certainty, require the indicative mood; as, "As virtue advances, so vice recedes."
FALSE SYNTAX.
Did he not tell me his fault, and entreated me to forgive him?
Did he not confess his mistake and ask me to forgive him?
Professing regard, and to act differently, discovers a base mind.
Pretending to care while acting otherwise shows a low character.
Note 1. He has gone home, but may return.
Note 1. He has gone home, but he might come back.
The attorney executed the deed, but will write no more.
The lawyer signed the document but won't say anything else.
Note 2. I shall walk to-day, unless it rains.
Note 2. I will walk today, unless it rains.
If he acquires riches, they will corrupt his mind.
If he gains wealth, it will corrupt his mind.
RULE XXXV.
A noun or pronoun following the conjunction than, as, or but, is nominative to a verb, or governed by a verb or preposition, expressed or understood; as, "Thou art wiser than I [am."] "I saw nobody but [I saw] him."
A noun or pronoun that comes after the conjunction than, as, or but is either the subject of a verb or is affected by a verb or preposition, either stated or implied; for example, "You are wiser than I [am.]" "I saw nobody but [I saw] him."
NOTE 1. The conjunction as, when it is connected with such, many, or same, is sometimes, though erroneously, called a relative pronoun; as, "Let such as presume to advise others," &c.; that is, Let them who, &c. See page 116.
NOTE 1. The conjunction as, when connected with such, many, or same, is sometimes incorrectly referred to as a relative pronoun; for example, "Let such as presume to advise others," &c.; that is, Let them who, &c. See page 116.
2. An ellipsis, or omission of some words, is frequently admitted, which must be supplied in the mind in order to parse grammatically; as "Wo is me;" that is, to me; "To sleep all night;" i.e. through all the night; "He has gone a journey;" i.e. on a journey; "They walked a league;" i.e. over a space called a league.
2. An ellipsis, or omission of some words, is often allowed, which must be filled in mentally to make sense grammatically; as in "Wo is me;" that is, to me; "To sleep all night;" meaning through all the night; "He has gone a journey;" meaning on a journey; "They walked a league;" meaning over a space called a league.
3. When the omission of words would obscure the sense, or weaken its force, they must be expressed.
3. When leaving out words would make the meaning unclear or lessen its impact, those words need to be included.
4. In the use of prepositions, and words that relate to each other, we should pay particular regard to the meaning of the words or sentences which they connect: all the parts of a sentence should correspond to each other, and a regular and clear construction throughout should be carefully preserved.
4. When using prepositions and words that relate to each other, we should pay special attention to the meaning of the words or sentences they connect: all parts of a sentence should match up, and a consistent and clear structure throughout should be carefully maintained.
FALSE SYNTAX.
They are much greater gainers than me.
They benefit way more than I do.
They know how to write as well as him; but he is a better grammarian than them.
They know how to write just as well as he does, but he is a better grammarian than they are.
They were all well but him.
They were all fine except for him.
None were rewarded but him and me.
None were rewarded except for him and me.
Jesus sought none but they who had gone astray.
Jesus sought only those who had gone astray.
REMARKS ON THE TENSES.
1. In the use of verbs, and other words and phrases which, in point of time, relate to each other, a due regard to that relation should be observed.
1. When using verbs and other words and phrases that relate to each other in terms of time, it's important to pay attention to that relationship.
Instead of saying, "The Lord hath given, and the Lord hath taken away;" we should say, "The Lord gave, and the Lord hath taken away." Instead of, "I remember the family more than twenty years;" it should be, "I have remembered the family more than twenty years."
Instead of saying, "The Lord has given, and the Lord has taken away;" we should say, "The Lord gave, and the Lord has taken away." Instead of, "I remember the family more than twenty years;" it should be, "I have remembered the family more than twenty years."
2. The best rule that can be given for the management of the tenses, and of words and phrases which, in point of time, relate to each other, is this very general one; Observe what the sense necessarily requires.
2. The best guideline for managing tenses and for words and phrases that relate to each other in time is a simple one: Pay attention to what the meaning requires.
To say, "I have visited Washington last summer; I have seen the work more than a month ago," is not good sense. The constructions should be, "I visited Washington, &c.; I saw the work, &c." "This mode of expression has been formerly much admired:"—"was formerly much admired." "If I had have been there;" "If I had have seen him;" "Had you have known him," are solecisms too gross to need correction. We can say, I have been, I had been; but what sort of a tense is, had have been? To place had before the defective verb ought, is an error equally gross and illiterate:—"had ought, hadn't ought." This is as low a vulgarism as the use of theirn, hern, and hizzen, tother, furder, baynt, this ere, I seed it, I tell'd him.
To say, "I have visited Washington last summer; I have seen the work more than a month ago," doesn't make sense. The correct way to say it is, "I visited Washington, etc.; I saw the work, etc." "This way of expressing things has been admired in the past:"—"was admired in the past." "If I had have been there;" "If I had have seen him;" "Had you have known him," are mistakes that don’t need correction. We can say, I have been, I had been; but what kind of tense is had have been? Putting had before the incomplete verb ought is an equally gross and uneducated error:—"had ought, hadn't ought." This is as low a vulgarism as using theirn, hern, hizzen, tother, furder, baynt, this ere, I seed it, I tell'd him.
3. When we refer to a past action or event, and no part of that time in which it took place; remains, the imperfect tense should be used; but if there is still remaining some portion of the time in which we declare that the thing has been done, the perfect tense should be employed.
3. When we talk about a past action or event, and none of the time it happened is left, the imperfect tense should be used; however, if there is still some part of the time we say the action has been completed, the perfect tense should be used.
Thus, we say, "Philosophers made great discoveries in the last century;" "He was much afflicted last year;" but when we refer to the present century, year, week, day, &c. we ought to use the perfect tense; as, "Philosophers have made great discoveries in the present century;" "He has been much afflicted this year;" "I have read the president's message this week;" "We have heard important news this morning;" because these events occurred in this century, this year, this week, and to-day, and still there remains a part of this century, year, week, and day, of which I speak.
So, we say, "Philosophers made great discoveries in the last century;" "He was very troubled last year;" but when we talk about the present century, year, week, day, etc., we should use the perfect tense; like, "Philosophers have made great discoveries in the present century;" "He has been very troubled this year;" "I have read the president's message this week;" "We have heard important news this morning;" because these events happened in this century, this year, this week, and today, and there's still some time left in this century, year, week, and day that I'm referring to.
In general, the perfect tense may be applied wherever the action is connected with the present time, by the actual existence either of the author of the work, though it may have been performed many centuries ago; but if neither the author nor the work now remains, the perfect tense ought not to be employed. Speaking of priests in general, we may say, "They have, in all ages, claimed great powers;" because the general order of the priesthood still exists; but we cannot properly say, "The Druid priests have claimed great powers;" because that order is now extinct. We ought, therefore, to say, "The Druid priests claimed great powers."
In general, the perfect tense can be used wherever the action is connected to the present time, as long as either the author of the work still exists, even if what they did was many centuries ago; however, if neither the author nor the work exists anymore, the perfect tense shouldn’t be used. Speaking of priests in general, we can say, "They have claimed great powers in all ages," because the overall priesthood still exists; but we can’t correctly say, "The Druid priests have claimed great powers," since that order is now extinct. Therefore, we should say, "The Druid priests claimed great powers."
The following examples may serve still farther to illustrate the proper use and application of the tenses. "My brother has recently been to Philadelphia." It should be, "was recently at Philadelphia;" because the adverb recently refers to a time completely past, without any allusion to the present time. "Charles is grown considerably since I have seen him the last time." Corrected, "Charles has grown, since I saw him," &c. "Payment was at length made, but no reason assigned for its being so long postponed." Corrected, "for its having been so long postponed." "They were arrived an hour before we reached the city:"—"They had arrived."
The following examples may further illustrate the proper use and application of the tenses. "My brother has recently been to Philadelphia." It should be, "was recently in Philadelphia;" because the adverb recently refers to a time entirely in the past, with no connection to the present. "Charles is grown considerably since I have seen him the last time." Corrected, "Charles has grown since I saw him," etc. "Payment was finally made, but no reason was given for its being delayed so long." Corrected, "for its having been delayed so long." "They were arrived an hour before we reached the city:"—"They had arrived."
"The workmen will complete the building at the time I take possession of it." It should be, "will have completed the building," &c. "This curious piece of workmanship was preserved, and shown to strangers for more than fifty years past:"—"has been preserved, and been shown to strangers," &c. "I had rather write than beg:"—"I would rather write than beg."
"The workmen will have completed the building by the time I take possession of it." It should be, "will have completed the building," &c. "This curious piece of workmanship has been preserved and shown to strangers for more than fifty years:"—"has been preserved and been shown to strangers," &c. "I would rather write than beg:"—"I would rather write than beg."
"On the morrow, because he would have known the certainty whereof Paul was accused of the Jews, he loosed him from his bands." It ought to be, "because he would know; or, being willing to know," &c. "The blind man said, 'Lord, that I might receive my sight;'" "If by any means I might attain unto the resurrection of the dead." In both these examples, may would be preferable to might. "I feared that I should have lost the parcel, before I arrived:"—"that I should lose." "It would have afforded me no satisfaction, if I could perform it." It ought to be, "if I could have performed it;" or, "It would afford me no satisfaction, if I could perform it." "This dedication may serve for almost any book that has, is, or shall be published:"—"that has been, or will be published."
"Tomorrow, because he would have known for sure what Paul was accused of by the Jews, he released him from his chains." It should say, "because he would know; or, being willing to know," &c. "The blind man said, 'Lord, so that I can receive my sight;'" "If by any chance I could reach the resurrection of the dead." In both these examples, may would be better than might. "I was afraid that I would lose the package before I got there:"—"that I would lose." "It wouldn’t give me any satisfaction, if I could do it." It should be, "if I could have done it;" or, "It would give me no satisfaction, if I could do it." "This dedication can work for almost any book that has, is, or will be published:"—"that has been, or will be published."
4. In order to employ the two tenses of the infinitive mood with propriety, particular attention should be paid to the meaning of what we express.
4. To use the two tenses of the infinitive mood correctly, we should pay close attention to the meaning of what we're expressing.
Verbs expressive of hope, desire, intention, or command, ought to be followed by the PRESENT tense of the Infinitive mood.
Verbs that express hope, desire, intention, or command should be followed by the PRESENT tense of the Infinitive mood.
"Last week I intended to have written," is improper. The intention of writing was then present with me; and, therefore, the construction should be, "I intended to write." The following examples are also inaccurate; "I found him better than I expected to have found him;" "My purpose was, after spending ten months more in commerce, to have withdrawn my wealth to another country." They should be, "expected to find him;" "to withdraw my wealth."
"Last week I intended to have written," is incorrect. The intention of writing was then present for me; so it should be, "I intended to write." The following examples are also wrong: "I found him better than I expected to have found him;" "My purpose was, after spending ten more months in business, to have withdrawn my wealth to another country." They should be, "expected to find him;" "to withdraw my wealth."
"This is a book which proves itself to be written by the person whose name it bears." It ought to be "which proves itself to have been written," &c. "To see him would have afforded me pleasure all my life." Corrected, "To have seen him;" or, "To see him would afford me pleasure," &c. "The arguments were sufficient to have satisfied all who heard them:"—"were sufficient to satisfy." "History painters would have found it difficult to have invented such a species of beings:"—"to invent such a species."
"This is a book that proves it's written by the person whose name it bears." It should be "that proves it was written," etc. "Seeing him would have made me happy all my life." Corrected, "Having seen him;" or, "Seeing him would make me happy," etc. "The arguments were enough to satisfy everyone who heard them:"—"were enough to satisfy." "History painters would have found it hard to invent such a species of beings:"—"to invent such a species."
5. General and immutable truths ought to be expressed in the present tense.
5. General and unchanging truths should be stated in the present tense.
Instead of saying, "He did not know that eight and twenty were equal to twenty and eight;" "The preacher said very audibly, that whatever was useful, was good;" "My opponent would not believe, that virtue was always advantageous.;" The constructions should be, "are equal to twenty;" "whatever is useful, is good;" "virtue is always advantageous."
Instead of saying, "He did not know that eight and twenty were equal to twenty and eight;" "The preacher said very audibly, that whatever was useful, was good;" "My opponent would not believe, that virtue was always advantageous.;" The constructions should be, "are equal to twenty;" "whatever is useful, is good;" "virtue is always advantageous."
EXAMPLES IN FALSE SYNTAX PROMISCUOUSLY ARRANGED.
We adore the Divine Being, he who is from eternity to eternity.
We love the Divine Being, who exists from eternity to eternity.
On these causes depend all the happiness or misery which exist among men.
On these causes depend all the happiness or misery that people experience.
The enemies who we have most to fear, are those of our own hearts.
The enemies we should fear the most are the ones within our own hearts.
Is it me or him who you requested to go?
Is it me or him that you asked to go?
Though great has been his disobedience and his folly, yet if he sincerely acknowledges his misconduct, he shall be forgiven.
Though he has been very disobedient and foolish, if he sincerely admits his wrongdoings, he will be forgiven.
There were, in the metropolis, much to amuse them.
There was a lot to entertain them in the city.
By exercising of our memories, they are improved.
By using our memories, we can enhance them.
The property of my friend, I mean his books and furniture, were wholly consumed.
My friend's belongings, meaning his books and furniture, were completely destroyed.
Affluence might give us respect in the eyes of the vulgar, but will not recommend us to the wise and good.
Wealth may earn us respect from those who are shallow, but it won't endear us to the wise and virtuous.
The cares of this world, they often choke the growth of virtue.
The worries of this world often stifle the growth of goodness.
They that honor me, I will honor; and them that despise me, shall be lightly esteemed.
Those who honor me, I will honor; and those who disrespect me will be regarded with little value.
I intended to have called last week, but could not.
I meant to call last week, but I couldn't.
The fields look freshly and gayly since the rain.
The fields look fresh and bright since the rain.
The book is printed very neat, and on fine wove paper.
The book is printed very neatly and on high-quality paper.
I have recently been in Washington, where I have seen Gen. Andrew Jackson, he who is now president.
I was recently in Washington, where I saw Gen. Andrew Jackson, who is now the president.
Take the two first, and, if you please, the three last.
Take the first two, and if you want, the last three.
The Chinese wall is thirty foot high.
The Chinese wall is thirty feet high.
It is an union supported by an hypothesis, merely.
It’s a union backed by just a theory.
I have saw him who you wrote to; and he would have came back with me, if he could.
I saw the person you wrote to, and he would have come back with me if he could.
Not one in fifty of those who call themselves deists, understand the nature of the religion which they reject.
Not one in fifty of those who call themselves deists understand the nature of the religion they reject.
If thou studiest diligently, thou will become learned.
If you study diligently, you will become knowledgeable.
Education is not attended to properly in Spain.
Education is not given proper attention in Spain.
He know'd it was his duty; and he ought, therefore, to do it.
He knew it was his duty, and he should, therefore, do it.
He has little more of the great man besides the title.
He has very little of the great man except for the title.
Richard acted very independent on the occasion.
Richard acted very independently on that occasion.
We have done no more than it was our duty to have done.
We have only done what we were supposed to do.
The time of my friend entering on business, soon arrived.
The time for my friend to start his business soon arrived.
His speech is the most perfect specimen I ever saw.
His speech is the most perfect example I’ve ever seen.
Calumny and detraction are sparks which, if you do not blow, they will go out of themselves.
Calumny and gossip are sparks that, if you don't fan them, will go out on their own.
Those two authors have each of them their merit.
Those two authors each have their own merit.
A great mass of rocks thrown together by the hand of nature with wildness and confusion, strike the mind with more grandeur, than if they were adjusted to one another with the accuratest symmetry.
A huge pile of rocks tossed together by nature's hand in a wild and chaotic way has a more impressive impact on the mind than if they were arranged perfectly in symmetry.
A lampoon or a satire do not carry in them robbery or murder.
A lampoon or a satire doesn't involve theft or killing.
The side A, with the sides B and C, compose the triangle.
The side A, along with sides B and C, forms the triangle.
If some persons opportunities were never so favorable, they would be too indolent to improve.
If some people's opportunities were never so good, they would be too lazy to take advantage of them.
It is reported that the governor will come here to-morrow.
It’s reported that the governor will be here tomorrow.
Beauty and innocence should be never separated.
Beauty and innocence should never be separated.
Extravagance and folly may reduce you to a situation where you will have much to fear and little to hope.
Extravagance and foolishness can put you in a position where you have a lot to worry about and very little to look forward to.
Not one in fifty of our modern infidels are thoroughly versed in their knowledge of the Scriptures.
Not one in fifty of our modern skeptics really understands the Scriptures.
Virtue and mutual confidence is the soul of friendship. Where these are wanting, disgust or hatred often follow little differences.
Virtue and mutual trust are the essence of friendship. When these are lacking, even small disagreements can lead to dislike or animosity.
An army present a painful sight to a feeling mind.
An army presents a painful sight to a sensitive person.
To do good to them that hate us, and, on no occasion, to seek revenge, is the duty of a Christian.
To be kind to those who hate us and never seek revenge is the responsibility of a Christian.
The polite, accomplished libertine, is but miserable amidst all his pleasures: the rude inhabitant of Lapland is happier than him.
The polite, skilled libertine is actually unhappy despite all his pleasures: the rough resident of Lapland is happier than he is.
There are principles in man, which ever have, and ever will, incline him to offend.
There are principles in humans that have always, and will always, lead them to do wrong.
This is one of the duties which requires great circumspection.
This is one of the tasks that requires careful consideration.
They that honor me, them will I honor.
Those who honor me, I will honor.
Every church and sect have opinions peculiar to themselves.
Every church and denomination has its own unique beliefs.
Pericles gained such an ascendant over the minds of the Athenians, that he might be said to attain a monarchical power in Athens.
Pericles gained such influence over the people of Athens that it could be said he achieved a form of monarchical power in the city.
Thou, Lord, who hath permitted affliction to come upon us, shall deliver us from it in due time.
You, Lord, who has allowed hardship to come our way, will rescue us from it in due time.
That writer has given us an account of the manner in which Christianity has formerly been propagated among the heathens.
That writer has provided us with a description of how Christianity was spread among non-believers in the past.
Though the measure be mysterious, it is not unworthy of your attention.
Though the measure may be mysterious, it is still worth your attention.
In his conduct was treachery, and in his words, faithless professions. After I visited Europe, I returned to America.
In his actions was betrayal, and in his words, empty promises. After I traveled to Europe, I came back to America.
I have not, nor shall not, consent to a proposal so unjust.
I have not, and will not, agree to such an unfair proposal.
I had intended yesterday to have walked out, but I have been again disappointed.
I planned to go out yesterday, but I was disappointed again.
Five and eight makes thirteen; five from eight leaves three.
Five plus eight equals thirteen; five subtracted from eight leaves three.
If he goes to Saratoga next week, it will make eight times that he has visited that renowned watering place.
If he goes to Saratoga next week, it will be the eighth time he has visited that famous spa.
I could not convince him, that a forgiving disposition was nobler than a revengeful one. I consider the first, one of the brightest virtues that ever was or can be possessed by man.
I couldn't convince him that being forgiving is better than seeking revenge. I think being forgiving is one of the greatest virtues anyone can ever have.
The college consists of one great, and several smaller edifices.
The college has one large building and several smaller ones.
He would not believe, that honesty was the best policy.
He wouldn't believe that honesty is the best policy.
The edifice was erected sooner than I expected it to have been.
The building was put up earlier than I thought it would be.
Surely, goodness and mercy shall follow me all the days of my life; and I will dwell in the house of the Lord for ever.
Surely, kindness and compassion will be with me all my life; and I will live in the Lord's house forever.
If a man have a hundred sheep, and one of them be gone astray, doth he not leave the ninety and nine, &c.?
If a man has a hundred sheep and one of them goes missing, doesn't he leave the ninety-nine, etc.?
He might have completed his task sooner, but he could not do it better.
He could have finished his task earlier, but he couldn't have done it better.
The most ignorant and the most savage tribes of men, when they have looked round on the earth, and on the heavens, could not avoid ascribing their origin to some invisible, designing cause, and felt a propensity to adore their Creator.
The most ignorant and savage tribes of humans, when they looked around at the earth and the sky, couldn’t help but attribute their existence to some unseen, deliberate force, and felt an urge to worship their Creator.
CRITICAL NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS.
OBSERVATION 1. The following absurd phrases so common in the sacred desk and elsewhere, should be carefully avoided by all who regard common sense:—"Sing the two first and three last verses." Just as if there could be more than one first and one last. There may be a first two, a second two, &c.; a first three, a second three, a last three. "Within the two last centuries;" "The second syllable of the three first words;" "The three first of these orthoepists have no rule by which their pronunciation is regulated:"—"the last two centuries;" "the first three words;" "the first three of these orthoepists."
OBSERVATION 1. The following absurd phrases, which are so common in speeches and elsewhere, should be carefully avoided by anyone who values common sense:—"Sing the first two and last three verses." As if there could be more than one first and one last. There can be a first two, a second two, etc.; a first three, a second three, a last three. "Within the last two centuries;" "The second syllable of the first three words;" "The first three of these pronunciation guides have no rule by which their pronunciation is governed:"—"the last two centuries;" "the first three words;" "the first three of these pronunciation guides."
2. Adjectives should not be used to express the manner of action. "The higher the river, the swifter it flows;" "James learns easier than Juliet; he sees deeper into the millstone than she:"—"the more swiftly it flows;" "learns more easily; farther into the millstone." "He conducted the boldest of any:"—"the most boldly."
2. Adjectives shouldn’t be used to describe how an action is done. "The higher the river, the swifter it flows;" "James learns easier than Juliet; he sees deeper into the millstone than she:"—"the more swiftly it flows;" "learns more easily; farther into the millstone." "He conducted the boldest of anyone:"—"the most boldly."
3. More requires than after it. The following sentences are therefore improper: "He was more beloved, but not so much admired, as Cinthio;" "Richard is more active, but not so studious, as his companion." The legitimate mode of supplying the ellipses in these constructions, will show their gross impropriety: thus, "He was more beloved as Cinthio;" "Richard is more active as his companion," &c.
3. More needs than to follow it. The following sentences are therefore incorrect: "He was more loved, but not so much admired, as Cinthio;" "Richard is more active, but not so studious, as his companion." The correct way to complete these constructions will highlight their clear incorrectness: thus, "He was more loved as Cinthio;" "Richard is more active as his companion," etc.
4. Adverbs, as illustrated on page 85, are generally substitutes for two or more words belonging to other parts of speech. "Will you accompany me to Europe next summer?" "Yes." "Do you believe that the voyage will restore your health?" "No." In these examples, the adverbs yes and no, are substitutes for whole sentences, and, therefore, do not qualify any words understood. Yes, in this instance, literally means, "I will accompany you to Europe next summer;" and no, "I do not believe that the voyage will restore my health." Many other adverbs are often employed in a similar manner.
4. Adverbs, as shown on page 85, are typically substitutes for two or more words from other parts of speech. "Will you come with me to Europe next summer?" "Yes." "Do you think the trip will improve your health?" "No." In these examples, the adverbs yes and no replace whole sentences and don’t modify any understood words. Yes in this case literally means, "I will come with you to Europe next summer;" and no means, "I don’t think the trip will improve my health." Many other adverbs are often used in a similar way.
"Firstly," is often improperly used instead of the adverb first; "a good deal," instead of, much, or, a great deal.
"Firstly," is often incorrectly used instead of the adverb first; "a good deal," instead of, much, or, a great deal.
5. A nice distinction should be observed in the use of such and so. The former may be employed in expressing quality; the latter, in expressing a degree of the quality; as, "Such a temper is seldom found;" "So bad a temper is seldom found." In the following examples, so should be used instead of such: "He is such an extravagant young man, that I cannot associate with him;" "I never before saw such large trees."
5. It's important to note the difference between such and so. The first is used to express quality; the second is used to express a degree of that quality. For example, "Such a temper is rarely found;" "So bad a temper is rarely found." In the following examples, you should use so instead of such: "He is such an extravagant young man that I can’t associate with him;" "I’ve never seen such large trees before."
The affected use of cardinal, instead of ordinal numbers, ought not to be imitated. "On page forty-five;" "Look at page nineteen;"—forty-fifth, nineteenth.
The improper use of cardinal numbers instead of ordinal numbers should not be copied. "On page forty-five;" "Look at page nineteen;"—forty-fifth, nineteenth.
6. In the choice and application of prepositions, particular regard should be paid to their meaning as established by the idiom of our language and the best usage. "In my proceedings, I have been actuated from the conviction, that I was supporting a righteous cause;" "He should have profited from those golden precepts;" "It is connected to John with the conjunction and;" "Aware that there is, in the minds of many, a strong predilection in favor of established usages;" "He was made much on at Argos;" "They are resolved of going;" "The rain has been falling of a long time;" "It is a work deserving of encouragement." These examples may be corrected thus, "actuated by the conviction;" "by those golden precepts;" "by the conjunction and;" "predilection for;" "much of at Argos;" "on going;" "falling a long time;" "deserving encouragement."
6. When choosing and using prepositions, special attention should be given to their meanings as established by our language's idioms and the best practices. "In my actions, I was driven by the belief that I was supporting a just cause;" "He should have learned from those golden principles;" "It is linked to John with the conjunction and;" "Knowing that many people have a strong preference for established usages;" "He was often talked about at Argos;" "They are determined to go;" "The rain has been falling for a long time;" "It is a work worthy of support." These examples can be corrected to, "driven by the belief;" "by those golden principles;" "by the conjunction and;" "preference for;" "often of at Argos;" "to go;" "falling for a long time;" "worthy of support."
7. The preposition to is used before nouns of place, where they follow verbs or participles of motion; as, "I went to Washington." But at is employed after the verb to be; as, "I have been at Washington;" "He has been to New York, to home," &c. are improper. The preposition in is set before countries, cities, and large towns; "He lives in France, in London, in Philadelphia, in Rochester." But before single houses, and cities and villages which are in distant countries, at is commonly used; as, "He lives at Park-place;" "She resides at Vincennes." People in the northern states may say, "They live in New Orleans, or, at New Orleans."
7. The preposition to is used before place nouns that follow verbs or participles of motion, like, "I went to Washington." However, at is used after the verb to be; for example, "I have been at Washington." Saying "He has been to New York, to home," etc., is incorrect. The preposition in is used before countries, cities, and large towns; for instance, "He lives in France, in London, in Philadelphia, in Rochester." But for specific houses, and cities and villages in distant countries, at is typically used; like, "He lives at Park-place;" "She resides at Vincennes." People in the northern states might say, "They live in New Orleans, or, at New Orleans."
8. Passive agents to verbs in the infinitive mood, should not be employed as active agents. The following are solecisms: "This house to let;" "Horses and carriages to let;" "Congress has much business to perform this session;" because the agents, house, horses and carriages, and business, which are really passive, are, according to these constructions, rendered as active. The expressions should be, "This house to be let;" "Horses and carriages to be let;" "much business to be performed."
8. Passive agents in the infinitive mood shouldn’t be used as active agents. The following are mistakes: "This house to let;" "Horses and carriages to let;" "Congress has a lot of business to perform this session;" because the agents, house, horses, and carriages, and business, which are actually passive, are presented as active in these constructions. The correct expressions should be, "This house to be let;" "Horses and carriages to be let;" "a lot of business to be performed."
9. AMBIGUITY.—"Nothing is more to be desired than wisdom." Not literally correct, for wisdom is certainly more to be desired than nothing; but, as a figurative expression, it is well established and unexceptionable.
9. AMBIGUITY.—"Nothing is more desirable than wisdom." It's not literally correct, because wisdom is definitely more desirable than nothing; however, as a figurative expression, it's well-established and acceptable.
"A crow is a large black bird:"—a large, black—bird.
"A crow is a large black bird:"—a large, black—bird.
"I saw a horse—fly through the window:"—I saw a horsefly.
"I saw a horse—fly through the window:"—I saw a horsefly.
"I saw a ship gliding under full sail through a spy glass." I saw, through a spy glass, a ship gliding under full sail.
"I saw, through a spyglass, a ship gliding with full sails."
"One may see how the world goes with half an eye." One may see with half an eye, how the world goes.
"One can see how the world works with just half an eye." One can see with half an eye how the world goes.
"A great stone, that I happened to find, after a long search, by the sea shore, served me for an anchor." This arrangement of the members and circumstances of this sentence, confines the speaker's search to the sea shore; whereas, he meant, "A large stone, which, after a long search, I happened to find by the sea shore, served me for an anchor."
"A large stone that I found after a long search by the seaside served as my anchor." This way of structuring the sentence limits the speaker's search to the seaside; however, he intended to say, "A large stone that, after a long search, I happened to find by the seaside, served as my anchor."
"I shall only notice those called personal pronouns." I shall notice only those called personal pronouns.
"I will only mention those that are called personal pronouns." I will notice only those called personal pronouns.
10. TAUTOLOGY.—Avoid words which add no thing to the sense; such as, "Now extant, free gratis, slow mope, cold snow, a hot sun, a flowing stream, a dull blockhead, wise sages." "I am just going to go there;" I am about to go.
10. TAUTOLOGY.—Avoid words that don't add anything to the meaning; for example, "Now existing, free of charge, slow shuffle, cold snow, a hot sun, a flowing stream, a dull fool, wise scholars." "I am just going to go there;" I am about to leave.
11. ABSURDITIES AND IMPROPRIETIES.—"I can learn him many things."
11. ABSURDITIES AND IMPROPRIETIES.—"I can teach him a lot of things."
It ought to be, "I can teach him." To learn, is to acquire or receive information; to teach, means to communicate it.
It should be, "I can teach him." To learn is to acquire or receive information; to teach means to communicate it.
"I don't think it is so." You do think, that it is not so.
"I don't think that's the case." You believe it isn't the case.
Ever, always. "I have ever been of this mind." I have always been. Ever and always are not synonymous. Ever refers to one indefinite period of time; as, "If he ever become rich:" always means at all times.
Ever, always. "I have always thought this way." I have always been. Ever and always are not the same. Ever refers to one indefinite period of time; for example, "If he ever becomes rich:" always means at all times.
Excuse, pardon. The former signifies to release from an obligation which refers to the future; the latter, to forgive a neglect or crime that is past. "Excuse me for neglecting to call yesterday:" pardon me.
Excuse, pardon. The former means to free someone from a future obligation; the latter means to forgive a mistake or wrongdoing that has already happened. "Excuse me for not calling yesterday:" pardon me.
Remember, recollect. We remember a thing which we retain in our mind; we recollect it, when, though having gone from the mind, we have power to call it back.
Remember, think back. We remember something that we keep in our minds; we recollect it, when, although it has slipped our minds, we are able to bring it back.
Defect, deficiency. A thing which is incomplete in any of its parts, is defective; a total absence of the thing, is a deficiency.
Defect, deficiency. Something that is lacking in any of its parts is defective; a complete lack of the thing is a deficiency.
This subject will be resumed in the appendix to this work.
This topic will be discussed again in the appendix of this work.
CORRECTIONS IN ORTHOGRAPHY.
From among those words which are often erroneously spelled, the following are selected and corrected according to Johnson, and to Cobb's Dictionary.
From the list of words that are often misspelled, the following have been selected and corrected according to Johnson and Cobb's Dictionary.
INCORRECT. | CORRECT. |
Abridgement | Abridgment |
abscision | abcission |
achievment | achievement |
adze | addice |
agriculturalist | agriculturist |
ancle | ankle |
attornies | attorneys |
baise | baize |
bason | basin |
bass | base |
bombazin | bombasin |
boose | bouse |
boult | bolt |
buccaneer | bucanier |
burthen | burden |
bye | by |
calimanco | calamanco |
camblet | camlet |
camphire | camphor |
canvas | canvass |
carcase | carcass |
centinel | sentinel |
chace | chase |
chalibeate | chalybeate |
chamelion | chameleon |
chimist | chemist |
chimistry | chemistry |
cholic | colic |
chuse | choose |
cimetar | cimeter |
clench | clinch |
cloke | cloak |
cobler | cobbler |
chimnies | chimneys |
chesnut | chestnut |
clue | clew |
connection | connexion |
corset | corslet |
cypher | cipher |
cyphering | ciphering |
dactyl | dactyle |
develope | develop |
dipthong | diphthong |
dispatch | despatch |
doat | dote |
drouth | drought |
embitter | imbitter |
embody | imbody |
enquire | inquire |
enquirer | inquirer |
enquiry | inquiry |
ensnare | insnare |
enterprize | enterprise |
enthral | inthrall |
entrench | intrench |
entrenchment | intrenchment |
entrust | intrust |
enwrap | inwrap |
epaulette | epaulet |
etherial | ethereal |
faggot | fagot |
fasset | faucet |
fellon | felon |
fie | fy |
germ | germe |
goslin | gosling |
gimblet | gimlet |
grey | gray |
halloe | halloo |
highth | height |
hindrance | hinderance |
honied | honeyed |
impale | empale |
inclose | enclose |
inclosure | enclosure |
indict | endict |
indictment | endictment |
indorse | endorse |
indorsement | endorsement |
instructor | instructer |
insure | ensure |
insurance | ensurance |
judgement | judgment |
laquey | lackey |
laste | last |
licence | license |
loth | loath |
lothsome | loathsome |
malcontent | malecontent |
maneuver | manoeuvre |
merchandize | merchandise |
misprison | misprision |
monies | moneys |
monied | moneyed |
negociate | negotiate |
negociation | negotiation |
noviciate | novitiate |
ouse | ooze |
opake | opaque |
paroxism | paroxysm |
partizan | partisan |
patronize | patronise |
phrenzy | phrensy |
pinchers | pincers |
plow | plough |
poney | pony |
potatoe | potato |
quere | query |
recognize | recognise |
reindeer | raindeer |
reinforce | re-enforce |
restive | restiff |
ribbon | riband |
rince | rinse |
sadler | saddler |
sallad | salad |
sceptic | skeptic |
sceptical | skeptical |
scepticism | skepticism |
segar | cigar |
seignor | seignior |
serjeant | sergeant |
shoar | shore |
soothe | sooth |
staunch | stanch |
streight | straight |
suitor | suiter |
sythe | scythe |
tatler | tattler |
thresh | thrash |
thwak | thwack |
tipler | tippler |
tranquility | tranquillity |
tripthong | triphthong |
trissyllable | trisyllable |
valice | valise |
vallies | valleys |
vise | vice |
vollies | volleys |
waggon | wagon |
warrantee | warranty |
whoopingcough | hoopingcough |
woe | wo |
yeast | yest |
CORRECTIONS IN ORTHOEPY.
The following words being often erroneously pronounced by polite people, as well as by the vulgar, their correction, in this place, agreeably to Cobb's Dictionary, it is presumed, will be useful to many. Some of the mispronunciations given are provincial.
The following words are often mispronounced by polite people, as well as by everyday folks, so correcting them here, according to Cobb's Dictionary, should be helpful to many. Some of the mispronunciations listed are provincial.
1 2 3 4 1 4 1 4 1 3 5 Fate, far, fall, fat--me, met--pine, pin--no, nor, not, 6 1 4 7 34 37 move--tube, tub, bull--oil--found---thin--THIS, ORTHOGRAPHY. IMPROPER. PRONOUNCED. 4 1 4 4 Again a-gane' a-gen' 4 1 4 4 Against a-ganste' a-genst 4 1 4 1 Ally al'le al'li' 1 2 Are are ar 4 4 1 1 Azure azh'ur a'zhure 1 1 Bade bade bad 1 11 Beard bard beerd 4 11 4 Been ben or been bin 22 11 Bleat blaat bleet 1 34 Boil bile boil 4 4 5 4 Bonnet bun'net bon'nit 2 66 Brooch brotsh brootsh 4 3 4 4 Canal ka-nawl' ka-nal' 4 4 Catch ketsh katsh 4 1 3 1 Causeway kros'wa kawz'wa 4 4 1 4 Chalice kal'is tshal'is 4 1 Chasten tshas'tn tshase'sn 4 1 4 1 Chimney tshim'ble tshim'ne 3 1 Chine tshime tshine 34 1 Choir koir kwire 4 4 1 1 Clevy klev'is klev've 4 4 Clinch klensh klinsh 5 4 5 4 Column kol'yum kol'lum 5 4 4 4 Combat kom'bat kum'bat 5 1 5 4 Comma kom'me kom'ma 1 4 3 4 Coquet ko-kwet' ko-ket' 3 1 Corps korps kore 4 4 4 4 Cover kiv'ur kuv'ur 11 4 Deaf deef def 1 4 4 1 1 4 Decisive de-sis'iv de-si'siv 1 5 1 1 Depot de'pot de-po' 4 1 1 1 1 Depute dep'u-tize de-pute' 4 1 1 1 1 4 Deputed dep'u-tizd de-pu'ted 1 1 1 1 Design de-zine' de-sine' 4 4 Dint dent dint 1 5 4 Docile do'slle dos'sil 4 4 4 4 Disgust dis-gust' diz-gust' 4 1 4 1 Dismay dis-ma' diz-ma' 4 1 4 1 Disown dis-one' diz-one' 1 4 Dost dost dust 1 4 Doth doth duth 66 4 Does dooz duz 11 1 Drain dreen drane 37 37 Drought drouth drout 37 4 37 Drowned dround'ed dround 4 1 4 4 Ductile duk'tile duk'til 1 4 Edge aje edje 1 1 4 Either i'THur e'THur 4 4 4 4 English eng'lish ing'glish 1 1 1 1 Era e're e'ra 1 1 Ere ere are 1 4 Fasten fas'tn fas'sn 4 7 11 7 Fearful fer'ful feer'ful 4 4 4 1 Figure fig'gur fig'ure 4 11 Fiend fend feend 4 4 First fust furst 34 1 1 1 1 Foliage foil'aje fo'le-aje 3 4 3 1 Fortune for'tshun for'tshune 3 4 3 1 Fortnight fort'nit fort'nite 37 37 4 Fountain foun'tn foun'tin 4 4 4 1 Fracture frak'tshur frak'tshure 1 4 1 4 Fragrance frag'ranse fra'granse 1 1 1 4 Futile fu'tile fu'til 4 4 4 4 Gather geTH'ur gaTH'ur 4 4 Get git get 4 4 Girth gurt gerth 66 1 Goal gool gole 1 1 4 1 4 Going gone or go'in go'ing 66 1 Gold goold gold 66 4 Gum goom gum 1 4 4 Grudge be-gretsh' grudje 4 4 4 4 Gypsum gip'sum jip'sum 4 4 Has hez haz 1 4 Have have hav 11 4 Heard heerd herd 4 4 2 Hearth hurth or hath harth 4 4 Hiss siss hiss 1 34 Hoist histe hoist 4 1 1 1 Homely hum'ble home'le 4 66 Hoof huf hoof 3 4 5 4 Hostler haws'lur os'lur 4 4 Humble hum'bl um'bl 11 4 4 4 Jesting jeest'in jest'ing 4 4 Kettle kit'tl ket'tl 4 4 4 1 Lecture lek'tshur lek'tshure 4 4 1 1 Leisure lezh'ur le'zhure 4 4 1 4 Lever lev'er le'vur 4 4 Lid led lid 1 5 1 4 Lilach la'lok li'lak 66 1 Loam loom lome 1 66 Loo lu loo 1 1 4 1 Maintain mane-tane' men-tane' 1 4 1 4 Matron mat'run ma'trun 1 1 4 1 Mermaid mare'made mer'made 37 37 Mountain moun'tn moun'tin 1 4 1 1 Nature na'tshur na'tshure 1 4 1 4 Neither ni'THur ne'THur 1 11 1 1 Oblige o-bleeje' o-blije' 1 11 5 1 Oblique o-bleek' ob-like' 5 5 Of of ov 1 34 Oil ile oil 5 4 1 1 1 Only on'le or un'le one'le 1 4 4 4 Panther pane'tur pan'thur 4 4 1 4 Parent par'ent pa'rent 2 4 2 4 Partner pard'nur part'nur 2 4 4 1 Pasture pas'tshur pas'tshure 4 4 1 4 Patron pat'run pa'trun 4 4 4 4 Pincers pinsh'urz pin'surz 4 4 Pith peth pith 11 1 Plait pleet plate 1 1 4 Poem pome po'em 1 34 Point pinte point 5 4 4 Pother poTH'ur puTH'ur 4 4 1 4 Precept pres'sept pre'sept 1 1 4 4 Preface pre'fase pref'fas 1 1 4 1 Prelude pre'lude prel'ude 1 4 5 4 Process pro'ses pros'ses 1 4 5 4 Product pro'dukt prod'ukt 1 4 5 4 Progress pro'gres prog'res 1 1 1 11 Profile pro'file pro-feel' 4 4 4 4 Pumpion pungk'in pump'yun 4 7 Put put (verb) put 1 34 Quoit kwate kwoit 1 1 4 1 Rapine ra'pine rap'in 1 11 Rear rare reer 4 1 4 4 Reptile rep'tile rep'til 4 4 Rid red rid 1 1 Rind rine rind 4 4 Rinse rense rinse 5 4 5 4 Rosin roz'um roz'in 87 1 66 11 Routine rou tene roo-teen' 4 66 Roof ruff roof 4 4 1 4 Sacred sak'red sa'kred 1 4 Said sade sed 4 4 Sat set sat 1 4 Says saze sez 2 1 Scarce skarse skarse 4 1 4 1 Schedule sked'ule sed'jule 4 4 Shut shet shut 4 4 Since sense sinse 4 11 Sleek slik sleek 4 4 1 4 Sliver sliv'vur sli'vur 3 7 1 7 Slothful slawth'ful sloth'ful 4 66 Soot sut soot 4 4 1 2 Spikenard spig'nut spike'nard 1 34 Spoil spile spoil 4 4 11 2 Steelyard stil'yurdz steel'yard 5 4 Stamp stomp stamp 4 4 Stint stent stint 1 1 Sword sword sord 1 5 4 4 Synod si'nod sin'ud 1 1 4 1 Therefore THare'fore THer'fore 4 4 Thill fil thil 1 66 To to too 37 66 Tour tour toor 4 4 Treble trib'bl treb'bl 1 3 1 4 Towards to-wardz' to'urdz 5 1 1 1 Trophy trof'fe tro'fe 1 1 1 1 Tuesday tshuz'de tuze'de 4 4 4 1 Verdure vur'jur ver'jure 1 4 4 11 Vizier vi'zhur viz'yeer 5 4 5 1 Volume vol'lum vol'yume 1 4 Were ware wer 1 1 Yea ya ye 4 4 Yes yes yis 11 33 4 Yest yeest or eest yest 4 4 Yet yit yet 1 66 You yu yoo 1 66 Your yure yoor 1 66 Youth yuth yooth 1 4 1 4 1 1 1 4 Ague and fever fe'vurn-a'gur a'gu-and fe'vur 3 4 1 4 4 1 Alternate awl-ter'nate al-ter'nate 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 Annunciate an-nun'shate an-nun'she-ate 4 1 4 4 1 4 Andiron hand'i-urn and'i-urn 4 1 1 4 4 1 11 Antipodes an'te-podz an-tip'o-deez 4 4 4 4 1 4 Apparent ap-par'ent ap-pa'rent 2 1 4 4 2 3 4 1 Architecture artsh'e-tek-tshur ar'-ke-tek-tshure 4 4 4 4 4 4 Assumption as-sump'shun as-sum'shun 3 4 4 1 3 4 4 1 Auxiliary awks-il'a-re awg-zil'ya-re 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 Certiorari sash-ur-ar'ur ser-she-o-ra'ri 4 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 Christianity kris-tshan'e-te kris-tshe-an'e-te 4 4 1 4 4 4 Clandestine klan-des'tine klan-des'tin 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 Coadjutor ko-ad'ju-tur ko-ad-ju'tur 5 4 1 4 5 4 1 4 Compendium kom-pen'de-um kom-pen'je-um 5 4 1 1 4 1 Connoisseur kon-nis-sure' ko-nes-sare' 1 1 4 4 1 4 Courteous kore'te-us kur'tshe-us 4 4 4 4 4 4 Coverlet kuv'ur-lid kuv'ur-let 37 4 1 37 4 4 Cowardice kou'urd-ise kou'urd-is 1 4 4 1 4 4 Decrepit de-krip'id de-krep'it 4 5 1 1 5 1 Demonstrate dem'on-strate de-mon'strate 1 4 4 4 4 1 4 1 1 4 Desideratum de-sid-er-at'um de-sid-e-ra'tum 1 4 1 1 4 Diamond di'mund di'a-mund 4 4 4 1 4 1 4 Discrepance dis-krep'an-se dis'kre-panse 4 4 1 4 4 4 Disfranchise dis-fran'tschize dis-fran'tschiz 4 5 4 4 5 4 Dishonest dis-on'est diz-on'est 4 3 4 4 3 4 Disorder dis-or'dur diz-or'dur 1 4 4 1 1 4 1 1 Electrify e-lek'tur-ize e-lek'tre-fi 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Emaciate e-ma'shate e-ma'she-ate 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 Expatiate eks-pa'shate eks-pa'she-ate 4 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 Expiatory eks-pi'a-to-re eks'pe-a-tur-re 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 Extempore eks-tem'pore eks-tem'po-re 4 1 1 4 1 4 Feminine fem'e-nine fem'e-nin 4 4 1 1 4 1 Frequently frek'went-le fre'kwent-le 4 1 1 4 1 4 Genuine jen'u-ine jen'u-in 2 11 2 1 4 Guardian gar-deen' gyar'de-an 4 4 4 4 4 4 Gymnastic gim-nas'tik jim-nas'tik 4 1 1 4 4 1 66 4 Hallelujah hal-le-lu'ja hal-le-loo'ya 5 4 4 5 3 4 Hospital hos'pit-al os'pe-tal 1 4 4 1 4 4 Humorous hu'mur-us yu'mur-us 1 1 1 1 4 Idea i-de' i-de'a 4 1 4 4 4 1 3 4 Ignoramus ig-no-ram'us ig-no-ra'mus 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 4 Indecorous in-dek'o-rus in-de-ko'rus 4 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 Irradiate ir-rad'e-ate ir-ra'de-ate 4 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 Literati lit-er-at'i lit-er-a'ti 1 1 4 4 1 4 Maintenance mane-tane'anse men-'te-nanse 4 1 1 4 1 4 Masculine mas'ku-line mas'ku-lin 4 4 1 mur'kan-tile } 4 4 11 } 4 4 4 Mercantile mur-kan-teel'} mer'kan-til 4 4 4 } mur-kan'til } 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Meliorate me-li'o-rate me'le-o-rate 1 4 1 4 5 4 1 4 Molestation mo-les-ta'shun mol-es-ta'shun 1 1 4 1 1 4 Museum mu'ze-um mu-ze'um 1 4 4 4 4 4 National na'shun-al nash'un-al 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 1 Nomenclature no-men'kla-ture nom-en-kla'tshure 5 1 4 5 1 4 4 Nominative nom'e-tiv nom'e-na-tiv 5 5 1 4 5 4 4 4 Obstreperous ob-strop'pu-lus ob-strep'er-us 5 2 1 5 1 1 Octavo ok-ta'vo ok-ta'vo 5 1 1 1 5 4 4 1 Oratory or'a-to-re or'a-tur-re 1 4 1 4 4 1 Parentage pa'rent-aje par'ent-aje 2 4 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 Partiality par-shal'le-te par-she-al'le-te 1 4 1 4 4 4 Patronage pa'trun-aje pat'run-ije 4 1 2 1 1 2 Patriarch pat're-ark pa'tre-ark 4 1 4 1 1 4 Patriot pat're-ut pa'tre-ut 4 1 4 4 1 1 4 4 Patriotism pat're-ut-izm pa'tre-ut-izm 1 5 1 4 1 5 1 4 Philologist fi-lol'lo-jist fe-lol'lo-jist 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 Philosophy fi-los'o-fe fe-los'o-fe 1 1 5 1 4 4 1 5 1 4 Philosophical fi-lo-sof'ik-al fil-o-zof'e-kal 1 4 4 1 4 4 Plagiarism pla'ga-rizm pla'ja-rizm 5 4 5 4 Possess pos-ses' poz-zes' 5 4 1 5 4 1 Possessive pos-ses'siv poz-zes'siv 5 4 4 5 4 4 Possession pos-sesh'un poz-zesh'un 1 4 4 4 1 4 4 Preventive pre-vent'a-tiv pre-vent'iv 1 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 Pronunciation pro-nun-se-a'shun pro-nun-she-a'shun 1 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 Propitiation pro-pis-e-a'shun pro-pish-e-a'shun 5 1 1 5 1 1 Prophecy prov'e-si (noun) prof'e-se (noun) 5 1 1 5 1 5 Prophesy prov'e-si (verb) prof'e-si (verb) 1 1 1 1 1 Ratio ra'sho ra'she-o 1 4 4 4 4 4 Rational ra'shun-al rash'un-al 1 4 4 1 4 4 Sacrament sa'kra-ment sak'ra-ment 1 1 1 4 1 1 Sacrifice sa'kre-fize, sak're-fize 4 or (fis) 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Stereotype ster'o-tipe ste're-o-tipe 1 4 1 4 1 4 4 Stupendous stu-pen'du-us, stu-pen'dus 1 4 stu-pen'jus 1 5 1 1 4 1 4 Synonyme se-non'e-me sin'o-nim 4 4 4 4 1 4 Transparent trans-par'ent trans-pa'rent 4 4 4 1 4 1 4 1 Transparency trans-par'en-se trans-pa'ren-se 1 4 1 4 1 4 4 Tremendous tre-men'du-us, tre-men'dus 1 4 1 tre-men'jus 4 4 4 4 1 4 Verbatim ver-bat'im ver-ba'tim 5 2 1 5 1 1 Volcano vol-ka'no vol-ka'no 4 1 4 11 Whiffletree hwip'pl-tre hwif'fl-tree
1 2 3 4 1 4 1 4 1 3 5 Fate, far, fall, fat--me, met--pine, pin--no, nor, not, 6 1 4 7 34 37 move--tube, tub, bull--oil--found---thin--THIS, ORTHOGRAPHY. IMPROPER. PRONOUNCED. 4 1 4 4 Again a-gane' a-gen' 4 1 4 4 Against a-ganste' a-genst 4 1 4 1 Ally al'le al'li' 1 2 Are are ar 4 4 1 1 Azure azh'ur a'zhure 1 1 Bade bade bad 1 11 Beard bard beerd 4 11 4 Been ben or been bin 22 11 Bleat blaat bleet 1 34 Boil bile boil 4 4 5 4 Bonnet bun'net bon'nit 2 66 Brooch brotsh brootsh 4 3 4 4 Canal ka-nawl' ka-nal' 4 4 Catch ketsh katsh 4 1 3 1 Causeway kros'wa kawz'wa 4 4 1 4 Chalice kal'is tshal'is 4 1 Chasten tshas'tn tshase'sn 4 1 4 1 Chimney tshim'ble tshim'ne 3 1 Chine tshime tshine 34 1 Choir koir kwire 4 4 1 1 Clevy klev'is klev've 4 4 Clinch klensh klinsh 5 4 5 4 Column kol'yum kol'lum 5 4 4 4 Combat kom'bat kum'bat 5 1 5 4 Comma kom'me kom'ma 1 4 3 4 Coquet ko-kwet' ko-ket' 3 1 Corps korps kore 4 4 4 4 Cover kiv'ur kuv'ur 11 4 Deaf deef def 1 4 4 1 1 4 Decisive de-sis'iv de-si'siv 1 5 1 1 Depot de'pot de-po' 4 1 1 1 1 Depute dep'u-tize de-pute' 4 1 1 1 1 4 Deputed dep'u-tizd de-pu'ted 1 1 1 1 Design de-zine' de-sine' 4 4 Dint dent dint 1 5 4 Docile do'slle dos'sil 4 4 4 4 Disgust dis-gust' diz-gust' 4 1 4 1 Dismay dis-ma' diz-ma' 4 1 4 1 Disown dis-one' diz-one' 1 4 Dost dost dust 1 4 Doth doth duth 66 4 Does dooz duz 11 1 Drain dreen drane 37 37 Drought drouth drout 37 4 37 Drowned dround'ed dround 4 1 4 4 Ductile duk'tile duk'til 1 4 Edge aje edje 1 1 4 Either i'THur e'THur 4 4 4 4 English eng'lish ing'glish 1 1 1 1 Era e're e'ra 1 1 Ere ere are 1 4 Fasten fas'tn fas'sn 4 7 11 7 Fearful fer'ful feer'ful 4 4 4 1 Figure fig'gur fig'ure 4 11 Fiend fend feend 4 4 First fust furst 34 1 1 1 1 Foliage foil'aje fo'le-aje 3 4 3 1 Fortune for'tshun for'tshune 3 4 3 1 Fortnight fort'nit fort'nite 37 37 4 Fountain foun'tn foun'tin 4 4 4 1 Fracture frak'tshur frak'tshure 1 4 1 4 Fragrance frag'ranse fra'granse 1 1 1 4 Futile fu'tile fu'til 4 4 4 4 Gather geTH'ur gaTH'ur 4 4 Get git get 4 4 Girth gurt gerth 66 1 Goal gool gole 1 1 4 1 4 Going gone or go'in go'ing 66 1 Gold goold gold 66 4 Gum goom gum 1 4 4 Grudge be-gretsh' grudje 4 4 4 4 Gypsum gip'sum jip'sum 4 4 Has hez haz 1 4 Have have hav 11 4 Heard heerd herd 4 4 2 Hearth hurth or hath harth 4 4 Hiss siss hiss 1 34 Hoist histe hoist 4 1 1 1 Homely hum'ble home'le 4 66 Hoof huf hoof 3 4 5 4 Hostler haws'lur os'lur 4 4 Humble hum'bl um'bl 11 4 4 4 Jesting jeest'in jest'ing 4 4 Kettle kit'tl ket'tl 4 4 4 1 Lecture lek'tshur lek'tshure 4 4 1 1 Leisure lezh'ur le'zhure 4 4 1 4 Lever lev'er le'vur 4 4 Lid led lid 1 5 1 4 Lilach la'lok li'lak 66 1 Loam loom lome 1 66 Loo lu loo 1 1 4 1 Maintain mane-tane' men-tane' 1 4 1 4 Matron mat'run ma'trun 1 1 4 1 Mermaid mare'made mer'made 37 37 Mountain moun'tn moun'tin 1 4 1 1 Nature na'tshur na'tshure 1 4 1 4 Neither ni'THur ne'THur 1 11 1 1 Oblige o-bleeje' o-blije' 1 11 5 1 Oblique o-bleek' ob-like' 5 5 Of of ov 1 34 Oil ile oil 5 4 1 1 1 Only on'le or un'le one'le 1 4 4 4 Panther pane'tur pan'thur 4 4 1 4 Parent par'ent pa'rent 2 4 2 4 Partner pard'nur part'nur 2 4 4 1 Pasture pas'tshur pas'tshure 4 4 1 4 Patron pat'run pa'trun 4 4 4 4 Pincers pinsh'urz pin'surz 4 4 Pith peth pith 11 1 Plait pleet plate 1 1 4 Poem pome po'em 1 34 Point pinte point 5 4 4 Pother poTH'ur puTH'ur 4 4 1 4 Precept pres'sept pre'sept 1 1 4 4 Preface pre'fase pref'fas 1 1 4 1 Prelude pre'lude prel'ude 1 4 5 4 Process pro'ses pros'ses 1 4 5 4 Product pro'dukt prod'ukt 1 4 5 4 Progress pro'gres prog'res 1 1 1 11 Profile pro'file pro-feel' 4 4 4 4 Pumpion pungk'in pump'yun 4 7 Put put (verb) put 1 34 Quoit kwate kwoit 1 1 4 1 Rapine ra'pine rap'in 1 11 Rear rare reer 4 1 4 4 Reptile rep'tile rep'til 4 4 Rid red rid 1 1 Rind rine rind 4 4 Rinse rense rinse 5 4 5 4 Rosin roz'um roz'in 87 1 66 11 Routine rou tene roo-teen' 4 66 Roof ruff roof 4 4 1 4 Sacred sak'red sa'kred 1 4 Said sade sed 4 4 Sat set sat 1 4 Says saze sez 2 1 Scarce skarse skarse 4 1 4 1 Schedule sked'ule sed'jule 4 4 Shut shet shut 4 4 Since sense sinse 4 11 Sleek slik sleek 4 4 1 4 Sliver sliv'vur sli'vur 3 7 1 7 Slothful slawth'ful sloth'ful 4 66 Soot sut soot 4 4 1 2 Spikenard spig'nut spike'nard 1 34 Spoil spile spoil 4 4 11 2 Steelyard stil'yurdz steel'yard 5 4 Stamp stomp stamp 4 4 Stint stent stint 1 1 Sword sword sord 1 5 4 4 Synod si'nod sin'ud 1 1 4 1 Therefore THare'fore THer'fore 4 4 Thill fil thil 1 66 To to too 37 66 Tour tour toor 4 4 Treble trib'bl treb'bl 1 3 1 4 Towards to-wardz' to'urdz 5 1 1 1 Trophy trof'fe tro'fe 1 1 1 1 Tuesday tshuz'de tuze'de 4 4 4 1 Verdure vur'jur ver'jure 1 4 4 11 Vizier vi'zhur viz'yeer 5 4 5 1 Volume vol'lum vol'yume 1 4 Were ware wer 1 1 Yea ya ye 4 4 Yes yes yis 11 33 4 Yest yeest or eest yest 4 4 Yet yit yet 1 66 You yu yoo 1 66 Your yure yoor 1 66 Youth yuth yooth 1 4 1 4 1 1 1 4 Ague and fever fe'vurn-a'gur a'gu-and fe'vur 3 4 1 4 4 1 Alternate awl-ter'nate al-ter'nate 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 Annunciate an-nun'shate an-nun'she-ate 4 1 4 4 1 4 Andiron hand'i-urn and'i-urn 4 1 1 4 4 1 11 Antipodes an'te-podz an-tip'o-deez 4 4 4 4 1 4 Apparent ap-par'ent ap-pa'rent 2 1 4 4 2 3 4 1 Architecture artsh'e-tek-tshur ar'-ke-tek-tshure 4 4 4 4 4 4 Assumption as-sump'shun as-sum'shun 3 4 4 1 3 4 4 1 Auxiliary awks-il'a-re awg-zil'ya-re 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 Certiorari sash-ur-ar'ur ser-she-o-ra'ri 4 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 Christianity kris-tshan'e-te kris-tshe-an'e-te 4 4 1 4 4 4 Clandestine klan-des'tine klan-des'tin 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 Coadjutor ko-ad'ju-tur ko-ad-ju'tur 5 4 1 4 5 4 1 4 Compendium kom-pen'de-um kom-pen'je-um 5 4 1 1 4 1 Connoisseur kon-nis-sure' ko-nes-sare' 1 1 4 4 1 4 Courteous kore'te-us kur'tshe-us 4 4 4 4 4 4 Coverlet kuv'ur-lid kuv'ur-let 37 4 1 37 4 4 Cowardice kou'urd-ise kou'urd-is 1 4 4 1 4 4 Decrepit de-krip'id de-krep'it 4 5 1 1 5 1 Demonstrate dem'on-strate de-mon'strate 1 4 4 4 4 1 4 1 1 4 Desideratum de-sid-er-at'um de-sid-e-ra'tum 1 4 1 1 4 Diamond di'mund di'a-mund 4 4 4 1 4 1 4 Discrepance dis-krep'an-se dis'kre-panse 4 4 1 4 4 4 Disfranchise dis-fran'tschize dis-fran'tschiz 4 5 4 4 5 4 Dishonest dis-on'est diz-on'est 4 3 4 4 3 4 Disorder dis-or'dur diz-or'dur 1 4 4 1 1 4 1 1 Electrify e-lek'tur-ize e-lek'tre-fi 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Emaciate e-ma'shate e-ma'she-ate 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 Expatiate eks-pa'shate eks-pa'she-ate 4 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 Expiatory eks-pi'a-to-re eks'pe-a-tur-re 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 Extempore eks-tem'pore eks-tem'po-re 4 1 1 4 1 4 Feminine fem'e-nine fem'e-nin 4 4 1 1 4 1 Frequently frek'went-le fre'kwent-le 4 1 1 4 1 4 Genuine jen'u-ine jen'u-in 2 11 2 1 4 Guardian gar-deen' gyar'de-an 4 4 4 4 4 4 Gymnastic gim-nas'tik jim-nas'tik 4 1 1 4 4 1 66 4 Hallelujah hal-le-lu'ja hal-le-loo'ya 5 4 4 5 3 4 Hospital hos'pit-al os'pe-tal 1 4 4 1 4 4 Humorous hu'mur-us yu'mur-us 1 1 1 1 4 Idea i-de' i-de'a 4 1 4 4 4 1 3 4 Ignoramus ig-no-ram'us ig-no-ra'mus 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 4 Indecorous in-dek'o-rus in-de-ko'rus 4 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 Irradiate ir-rad'e-ate ir-ra'de-ate 4 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 Literati lit-er-at'i lit-er-a'ti 1 1 4 4 1 4 Maintenance mane-tane'anse men-'te-nanse 4 1 1 4 1 4 Masculine mas'ku-line mas'ku-lin 4 4 1 mur'kan-tile } 4 4 11 } 4 4 4 Mercantile mur-kan-teel'} mer'kan-til 4 4 4 } mur-kan'til } 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Meliorate me-li'o-rate me'le-o-rate 1 4 1 4 5 4 1 4 Molestation mo-les-ta'shun mol-es-ta'shun 1 1 4 1 1 4 Museum mu'ze-um mu-ze'um 1 4 4 4 4 4 National na'shun-al nash'un-al 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 1 Nomenclature no-men'kla-ture nom-en-kla'tshure 5 1 4 5 1 4 4 Nominative nom'e-tiv nom'e-na-tiv 5 5 1 4 5 4 4 4 Obstreperous ob-strop'pu-lus ob-strep'er-us 5 2 1 5 1 1 Octavo ok-ta'vo ok-ta'vo 5 1 1 1 5 4 4 1 Oratory or'a-to-re or'a-tur-re 1 4 1 4 4 1 Parentage pa'rent-aje par'ent-aje 2 4 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 Partiality par-shal'le-te par-she-al'le-te 1 4 1 4 4 4 Patronage pa'trun-aje pat'run-ije 4 1 2 1 1 2 Patriarch pat're-ark pa'tre-ark 4 1 4 1 1 4 Patriot pat're-ut pa'tre-ut 4 1 4 4 1 1 4 4 Patriotism pat're-ut-izm pa'tre-ut-izm 1 5 1 4 1 5 1 4 Philologist fi-lol'lo-jist fe-lol'lo-jist 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 Philosophy fi-los'o-fe fe-los'o-fe 1 1 5 1 4 4 1 5 1 4 Philosophical fi-lo-sof'ik-al fil-o-zof'e-kal 1 4 4 1 4 4 Plagiarism pla'ga-rizm pla'ja-rizm 5 4 5 4 Possess pos-ses' poz-zes' 5 4 1 5 4 1 Possessive pos-ses'siv poz-zes'siv 5 4 4 5 4 4 Possession pos-sesh'un poz-zesh'un 1 4 4 4 1 4 4 Preventive pre-vent'a-tiv pre-vent'iv 1 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 Pronunciation pro-nun-se-a'shun pro-nun-she-a'shun 1 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 Propitiation pro-pis-e-a'shun pro-pish-e-a'shun 5 1 1 5 1 1 Prophecy prov'e-si (noun) prof'e-se (noun) 5 1 1 5 1 5 Prophesy prov'e-si (verb) prof'e-si (verb) 1 1 1 1 1 Ratio ra'sho ra'she-o 1 4 4 4 4 4 Rational ra'shun-al rash'un-al 1 4 4 1 4 4 Sacrament sa'kra-ment sak'ra-ment 1 1 1 4 1 1 Sacrifice sa'kre-fize, sak're-fize 4 or (fis) 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Stereotype ster'o-tipe ste're-o-tipe 1 4 1 4 1 4 4 Stupendous stu-pen'du-us, stu-pen'dus 1 4 stu-pen'jus 1 5 1 1 4 1 4 Synonyme se-non'e-me sin'o-nim 4 4 4 4 1 4 Transparent trans-par'ent trans-pa'rent 4 4 4 1 4 1 4 1 Transparency trans-par'en-se trans-pa'ren-se 1 4 1 4 1 4 4 Tremendous tre-men'du-us, tre-men'dus 1 4 1 tre-men'jus 4 4 4 4 1 4 Verbatim ver-bat'im ver-ba'tim 5 2 1 5 1 1 Volcano vol-ka'no vol-ka'no 4 1 4 11 Whiffletree hwip'pl-tre hwif'fl-tree
NOTE 1.—When the words learned, blessed, loved, &c. are used as participial adjectives, the termination ed should generally be pronounced as a separate syllable; as, "A learn-ed man; The bless-ed Redeemer;" but when they are employed as verbs, the ed is contracted in pronunciation; as, "He learn'd his lesson; They are lov'd; I have walk'd."
NOTE 1.—When the words learned, blessed, loved, etc. are used as participial adjectives, the ending ed should generally be pronounced as a separate syllable; as in, "A learn-ed man; The bless-ed Redeemer;" but when they are used as verbs, the ed is pronounced as a single syllable; as in, "He learn'd his lesson; They are lov'd; I have walk'd."
2. The accent of the following words falls on those syllables expressed in the italic characters: Eu ro pe an, hy me ne al, Ce sa re a, co ad ju tor, ep i cu re an, in ter est ed, in ter est ing, rep a ra ble, rec og nise, leg is la ture, ob li ga to ry, in com pa ra ble, ir rep a ra ble, in ex o ra ble. In a large class of words, the vowels a, e, and ai, should be pronounced like long a in late; such as, fare, rare, there, their, where, air, chair, compare, declare, &c. In the words person, perfect, mercy, interpret, determine, and the like, the vowel e before r, is often erroneously sounded like short u. Its proper sound is that of e in met, pet, imperative.
2. The emphasis in the following words is on the syllables highlighted in italic: Eu ro pe an, hy me ne al, Ce sa re a, co ad ju tor, ep i cu re an, in ter est ed, in ter est ing, rep a ra ble, rec og nise, leg is la ture, ob li ga to ry, in com pa ra ble, ir rep a ra ble, in ex o ra ble. In many words, the vowels a, e, and ai, should be pronounced like the long a in late; for example, fare, rare, there, their, where, air, chair, compare, declare, etc. In the words person, perfect, mercy, interpret, determine, and similar ones, the vowel e before r is often incorrectly pronounced like a short u. Its correct sound is like e in met, pet, imperative.
3. With respect to the pronunciation of the words sky, kind, guide, &c. it appears that a mistake extensively prevails. It is believed that their common pronunciation by the vulgar, is the correct one, and agreeable to the pronunciation intended by Mr. John Walker. The proper diphthongal sounds in
3. When it comes to the pronunciation of the words sky, kind, guide, etc., it seems that a widespread mistake exists. Many people believe that the way the average person pronounces them is the correct way and matches the pronunciation intended by Mr. John Walker. The proper diphthong sounds in
11 1 1 skei, kyind, gyide,
ski, kind, guide
are adopted by the common mass, and perverted by those who, in their unnatural and affected pronunciation of these words, say,
are embraced by the general public, and twisted by those who, in their unnatural and affected way of pronouncing these words, say,
1 1 1 1 1 1 ske-i; ke-inde, ge-ide.
1 1 1 1 1 1 ske-i; ke-inde, ge-ide.
This latter mode of pronouncing them in two syllables, is as incorrect and ridiculous as to pronounce the words boil, toil, in two syllables; thus,
This way of pronouncing them with two syllables is just as incorrect and ridiculous as saying the words boil and toil with two syllables; so,
3 4 3 4 bo-il, to-il.
bo-il, to-il.
4. My, wind. When my is contrasted with thy, his, her, your, &c, it is pronounced,
4. My, wind. When my is compared to thy, his, her, your, etc., it's pronounced,
1 mi:
mi
in all other situations, it is pronounced,
in all other situations, it is pronounced,
1 me;
me;
as, "My [me] son, give ear to my [me] counsel." When wind ends a line in poetry, and is made to rhyme with mind, bind, kind, &c. it is pronounced,
as, "My [me] son, listen to my [me] advice." When wind ends a line in poetry and rhymes with mind, bind, kind, etc., it is pronounced,
1 wind;
breeze
but, in other situations, it is pronounced,
but, in other situations, it is pronounced,
4 wind.
wind.
PROVINCIALISMS.
CONTRACTIONS, VULGARISMS, AND OTHER IMPROPRIETIES.
As each of the following provincialisms and vulgarisms, has its locality in some one section or other of our country, it is hoped that these corrections will be found useful in the districts to which the various phrases respectively belong.
As each of the following regional slang and informal expressions is specific to certain areas of our country, we hope these corrections will be helpful in the regions to which the different phrases belong.
IMPROPER. | CORRECT. |
Aint | Are not |
haint | have not |
taint | 'tis not |
haint | are not |
maint | may not |
wont | will not |
wer'nt | were not |
waunt | was not |
woodent | would not |
mussent | must not |
izzent | is not |
wazzent | was not |
hezzent | has not |
doozzent | does not |
tizzent | 'tis not |
whool | who will |
don't | |
can't | |
i'll | |
'tis |
COMMON IN NEW ENGLAND OR NEW YORK.
COMMON IN NEW ENGLAND OR NEW YORK.
4 Akst askt 4 4 ben bin 4 2 hul hole 4 1 hum home 4 1 stun stone 66 4 dooz duz 2 4 glass glass 2 4 mass mass 2 4 brass brass 2 4 pass pass 3 2 flawnt flant 4 4 hiz'zn hiz 37 37 4 hou'zn houz'iz 1 4 1 4 an'shent ane'tshent 1 4 1 1 an'jel ane'jel 4 4 1 4 dan'jur dane'jur 4 4 1 4 stran'jur strane'jur 2 4 1 4 tscham'bur tshame'bur 1 4 1 1 na'tur na'tshure 4 4 4 4 1 4 nat'ur-el natsh'u-ral 3 4 3 1 for'tin for'tshune 3 1 1 3 1 1 for'tew-nate for'tshu-nate 4 1 4 1 vur'tew ver'tshu 4 1 4 4 1 4 vur'tew-us ver'tshu-us 1 1 4 4 1 4 ak'tew-el ak'tschu-al 4 1 1 4 1 1 ed'ew-kate ed'ju-kate 4 4 2 4 faTH'ur fa'THur heft weight stoop porch stent task helve handle muss disorder dump unload scup swing shay gig or chaise cutter one-horse sleigh staddle sapling foxy reddish suple spry or supple
4 Akst askt 4 4 ben bin 4 2 hul hole 4 1 hum home 4 1 stun stone 66 4 dooz duz 2 4 glass glass 2 4 mass mass 2 4 brass brass 2 4 pass pass 3 2 flawnt flant 4 4 hiz'zn hiz 37 37 4 hou'zn houz'iz 1 4 1 4 an'shent ane'tshent 1 4 1 1 an'jel ane'jel 4 4 1 4 dan'jur dane'jur 4 4 1 4 stran'jur strane'jur 2 4 1 4 tscham'bur tshame'bur 1 4 1 1 na'tur na'tshure 4 4 4 4 1 4 nat'ur-el natsh'u-ral 3 4 3 1 for'tin for'tshune 3 1 1 3 1 1 for'tew-nate for'tshu-nate 4 1 4 1 vur'tew ver'tshu 4 1 4 4 1 4 vur'tew-us ver'tshu-us 1 1 4 4 1 4 ak'tew-el ak'tschu-al 4 1 1 4 1 1 ed'ew-kate ed'ju-kate 4 4 2 4 faTH'ur fa'THur heft weight stoop porch stent task helve handle muss disorder dump unload scup swing shay gig or chaise cutter one-horse sleigh staddle sapling foxy reddish suple spry or supple
IN PENNSYLVANIA.
Strenth | strength |
lenth | length |
brenth | breadth |
ort | ought |
nan | what |
wisht | wish |
wunst | once |
ouch | oh |
cheer | chair |
spook | ghost |
furnentz | opposite |
wanity | vanity |
in wain | in vain |
ornary | ordinary |
for by | to spare |
we bit | small piece |
disremember | do not remember |
IRISH.
Irish.
66 1 Door dore 66 1 floor flore 5 4 ond and 5 55 loss looz 66 1 koorse korse 66 1 soorse sorse 4 66 till too 4 7 put put 4 7 fut fut 4 66 4 54 a-koont' ak-kount' 4 4 7 4 pul'pit pul'pit 1 4 3 pare'sun par'sn IMPROPER. CORRECT. MD. VA. KY. MISS. &c. 2 1 THar THare 2 1 whar hware 2 1 bar [bear] bare 2 4 war wer 37 1 mout mite [might] 1 1 4 gwine go'ing 4 4 4 shet or shut rid 1 5 1 1 4 4 tote or fotch kar're, fetsh, or bring 1 4 hop'd helpt 4 66 2 4 4 ca-hoot' part'nur-ship 3 66 5 mar'bl moov off
66 1 Door door 66 1 floor floor 5 4 ond and 5 55 loss loss 66 1 koorse course 66 1 soorse source 4 66 till till 4 7 put put 4 7 fut fut 4 66 4 54 a-koont' account 4 4 7 4 pul'pit pulpit 1 4 3 pare'sun parson IMPROPER. CORRECT. MD. VA. KY. MISS. &c. 2 1 THar There 2 1 whar where 2 1 bar [bear] bare 2 4 war were 37 1 mout might 1 1 4 gwine going 4 4 4 shet or shut shut 1 5 1 1 4 4 tote or fotch carry, fetch, or bring 1 4 hop'd helped 4 66 2 4 4 ca-hoot' partnership 3 66 5 mar'bl move off
NOTE, Clever, pretty, ugly, curious, expect, guess, and reckon, though correct English words, have, among the common people of New England and New York, a provincial application and meaning. With them, a clever man, is one of a gentle and obliging disposition; instead of, a man of distinguished talents and profound acquirements. Pretty and ugly, they apply to the disposition of a person, instead of, to his external appearance. In these states, one will often hear, "I guess it rains," when the speaker knows this to be a fact, and, therefore, guessing is uncalled for. "I expect I can go;" or, "I reckon I can;" instead of, "I suppose or presume." In New England, a clergyman is often called a minister, in New York, a priest, and south of N.Y. a parson. The last is preferable.
NOTE, Clever, pretty, ugly, curious, expect, guess, and reckon, while they are correct English words, have specific meanings and uses among the average people of New England and New York. For them, a clever man is someone who is kind and helpful rather than someone with exceptional talents and knowledge. They use pretty and ugly to describe a person's character instead of their looks. In these states, you will often hear, "I guess it rains," when the speaker already knows it is true, making the use of guess unnecessary. You'll also hear, "I expect I can go," or, "I reckon I can," instead of "I suppose" or "presume." In New England, a clergyman is often referred to as a minister, in New York as a priest, and in the areas south of New York as a parson. The last term is preferred.
NEW ENGLAND OR NEW YORK. | CORRECTED. |
I be goin. He lives to hum. | I am going. He lives at home. |
Hese ben to hum this two weeks. | He has been at home these 2 weeks. |
You haddent ought to do it. Yes had ought. | You ought not to do it. Certainly I ought. |
Taint no better than hizzen. | 'Tis no better than his. |
Izzent that are line writ well? | Is not that line well written? |
Tizzent no better than this ere. | It is no better, or it is not any better than his. |
The keows be gone to hum, neow, and I'mer goin arter um. | The cows are gone home, and I am going after them. |
He'll be here, derights, and, bring yourn and thairn. | He will here, directly, and bring yours and theirs. |
He touched the stun which I shew him, an di guess it made him sithe, for twas cissing hot. | He touched the stone which I showed him and it made him sigh, for it was hissing hot. |
Run, Thanel, and cut a staddle, for to make a lever on. Ize jest agoneter go, daddy. | Go, Nathaniel, and cut a sapling, to make a lever of. I was about to go, or intending to go immediately, father. |
Where shell I dump my cart, square? Dump it yender. Whats the heft of your load? | Where shall I unload my cart? Yonder. What is the weight of your load? |
When ju git hum from Hafford? A fortnit ago. You diddent, did ye? Ju see my Danel, whose sot up a tarvern there? No. Hede gone afore I got there. O, the pesky criter! Hele soon be up a stump. | When did you return from Hartford? A fortnight ago. It is possible! Did you see my son Daniel, who has opened a public house there? No. He had left before I arrived there. O, the paltry fellow! He will soon come to naught. |
My frinds supurb mansion is delightfully sitewated on a nate-eral mound of considerable hithe. It hez a long stoop in front; but it is furder from the city than I'de like my hum. | My friend's superb mansion is delightfully situated on a natural mound of considerable height. It has a long porch in front; but it is farther from the city than I would like to reside. |
I know'd the gal was drownded, and I tell'd the inquisitdoners, that ize nither geestin nor jokin about it; but if they'd permit me to give em my ideze, they'd obleege me. So I parsevered, and carried my pinte. You don't say so. Be you from Barkshire? I be. Neow I swan! if I aint clean beat. | I knew the girl had been drowned, and I told the jury of inquest, that I was not jesting about it; but, by permitting me to give them my view of the subject, they would oblige me. So, I persevered, and gained my point. Indeed! Are you from Berkshire? I am. Really! I am surprised. |
You baint from the Jarseys, be ye? Yes. Gosh! then I guess you kneow heow to tend tarvern. | Are you from New Jersey? Yes, Then I presume you know how to tend a tavern. |
IN PENNSYLVANIA. | CORRECTED |
I seen him. Have you saw him? Yes, I have saw him wunst; and that was before you seed him. | I saw him. Have you seen him? Yes, once; and that was before you saw him. |
I done my task. Have you did yours? No, but I be to do it. | I have done my task. Have you done yours? No, but I must. |
I be to be there. He know'd me. | I shall be there; or, I must be there. He knew me. |
Leave me be, for Ime afear'd. | Let me be, for I am afraid. |
I never took notice to it. | I never took notice of it: or, better thus, I never noticed it. |
I wish I haddent did it; howsumever, I don't keer: they cant skeer me. | I wish I had not done it: however, I disregard them. They cannot scare me. |
Give me them there books. | Give me those books. |
He ort to go; so he ort. | He ought to go, really. |
No he orten. | He ought not. |
Dont scrouge me. | Don't crowd me. |
I diddent go to do it. | I did not intend to do it. |
Aint that a good hand write? | Is not that beautiful writing? |
Nan? I know'd what he meant, but I never let on. | What? I knew what he meant, but I kept that to myself. |
It is a long mile to town. Ah! I thought 'twas unle a short mile. | It is a little over a mile to town. Ah! I supposed it to be less than a mile. |
IRISH. | CORRECTED. |
Not here the day; he went till Pittsburg. | He is not here to-day. He went to Pittsburg. |
Let us be after pairsing a wee bit. | Let us parse a little. |
Where did you loss it? | Where did you lose it? |
MD. VA. KY. OR MISS. | CORRECTED. |
Carry the horse to water. | Lead the horse to water; or, water the horse. |
Tote the wood to the river. | Carry the wood to the river. |
Have you focht the water? | Have you fetched, or brought, the water? |
I've made 200 bushels of corn this year. | I have raised 200 bushels of corn this year. |
He has run against a snag. | He has got into difficulty. |
Is that your plunder, stranger? | Is that your baggage, sir? |
He will soon come of that habit. | He will soon overcome, or get rid of, that habit. |
I war thar, and I seen his boat was loadend too heavy. | I was there, and I saw that his boat was too heavily laden, or loaded. |
Whar you gwine. | Where are you going? |
Hese in cohoot with me. | He is in partnership with me. |
Did you get shet of your tobacca? | Did you get rid, or dispose of, your tobacco? |
Who hoped you to sell it? | Who helped you to sell it? |
PROSODY.
PROSODY treats of the modulations of the voice according to the usages of the language we speak, and the sentiments we wish to express: hence, in its most extensive sense, it comprises all the laws of elocution.
PROSODY discusses the variations in voice based on the language we use and the feelings we want to convey; therefore, in its broadest sense, it includes all the rules of speaking.
Prosody is commonly divided into two parts: the first teaches the true pronunciation of words, comprising accent, quantity, emphasis, pause, and tone; and the second, the laws of versification.
Prosody is usually split into two parts: the first focuses on the correct pronunciation of words, including accent, quantity, emphasis, pause, and tone; and the second covers the rules of versification.
Accent. Accent is the laying of a peculiar stress of the voice on a particular letter or syllable in a word, that it may be better heard than the rest, or distinguished from them; as, in the word presúme, the stress of the voice must be on the letter u and the second syllable, sume, which syllable takes the accent.
Accent. Accent is the emphasis placed on a specific letter or syllable in a word so that it stands out more than the others; for example, in the word presúme, the emphasis is on the letter u in the second syllable, sume, which is where the accent falls.
Every word of more syllables than one, has one accented syllable. For the sake of euphony or distinctness in a long word, we frequently give a secondary accent to another syllable besides the one which takes the principal accent; as, 'tes ti mo' ni'al, a ban'don 'ing.
Every word with more than one syllable has one accented syllable. To make long words sound better or clearer, we often add a secondary accent to another syllable besides the one that gets the main accent; for example, 'tes ti mo' ni'al, a ban'don 'ing.
Quantity. The quantity of a syllable is that time which is occupied in pronouncing it. It is considered as long or short.
Quantity. The quantity of a syllable is the time it takes to pronounce it. It is regarded as either long or short.
A vowel or syllable is long, when the accent is on the vowel; which causes it to be slowly joined in pronunciation with the following letters; as, "Fāll, bāle, mōōd, hōūse, fēature."
A vowel or syllable is long when the emphasis is on the vowel, which causes it to be pronounced more slowly with the following letters; for example, "fall, bale, mood, house, feature."
A syllable is short, when the accent is on the consonant; which causes the vowel to be quickly joined to the succeeding letter; "as, ănt, bŏnnĕt, hŭngĕr."
A syllable is short when the stress is on the consonant, which makes the vowel quickly connect to the next letter; "like, ănt, bŏnnĕt, hŭngĕr."
A long syllable generally requires double the time of a short one in pronouncing it; thus, "māte" and "nōte" should be pronounced as slowly again as "măt" and "nŏt."
A long syllable usually takes twice as long to pronounce as a short one; therefore, "māte" and "nōte" should be pronounced just as slowly as "măt" and "nŏt."
Emphasis. By emphasis is meant a stronger and fuller sound of the voice, by which we distinguish some word or words on which we design to lay particular stress, and to show how they affect the rest of the sentence. Sometimes the emphatic words must be distinguished by a particular tone of voice, as well as by a greater stress.
Emphasis. Emphasis refers to a stronger and more pronounced sound of the voice that helps us highlight certain words we want to stress, showing how they impact the rest of the sentence. Sometimes, the emphasized words need to be marked by a specific tone of voice, in addition to being spoken with greater intensity.
Emphasis will be more fully explained under the head of Elocution.
Emphasis will be explained in more detail under Elocution.
Pauses. Pauses or rests, in speaking and reading, are a total cessation of the voice during a perceptible, and, in many cases, a measurable space of time.
Pauses. Pauses or breaks in speaking and reading are complete stops in the voice for a noticeable, and often measurable, amount of time.
Tones. Tones are different both from emphasis and pauses; consisting in the modulation of the voice, or the notes or variations of sound which we employ in the expression of our sentiments.
Tones. Tones are distinct from emphasis and pauses; they involve the modulation of the voice, or the notes and variations of sound that we use to express our feelings.
Emphasis affects particular words and phrases; but tones affect sentences, paragraphs, and sometimes a whole discourse.
Emphasis impacts specific words and phrases, but tones influence sentences, paragraphs, and sometimes an entire conversation.
PUNCTUATION.
PUNCTUATION is the art of dividing written composition into sentences or parts of sentences, by points or stops, in order to mark the different pauses which the sense and an accurate pronunciation require.
PUNCTUATION is the skill of breaking up written text into sentences or parts of sentences, using points or stops, to indicate the various pauses needed for meaning and clear pronunciation.
The Comma represents the shortest pause; the Semicolon, a pause double that of the comma; the Colon, double that of the semicolon; and the Period, double that of the colon.
The Comma indicates the shortest pause; the Semicolon represents a pause that's twice as long as the comma; the Colon signifies a pause double that of the semicolon; and the Period marks a pause double that of the colon.
Punctuation is a modern art. The ancients were entirely unacquainted with the use of points; and wrote, not only without any distinction of members and periods, but also without any distinction of words. This custom continued till the year 360 before Christ. How the ancients read their works, written in this manner, it is not easy to conceive. After the practice of joining words together had ceased, notes of distinction were placed at the end of every word. This practice continued a considerable time.
Punctuation is a modern art. The ancients didn't know how to use punctuation marks and wrote without separating their sentences or even their words. This way of writing lasted until 360 BC. It's hard to imagine how the ancients read their works written like this. Once they stopped running words together, they started putting marks at the end of every word for distinction. This practice went on for quite a while.
As it appears that the present usage of points did not take place while manuscripts and monumental inscriptions were the only known methods of conveying knowledge, we must conclude, that it was introduced with the art of printing. The introduction was, however, gradual: all the points did not appear at once. The colon, semicolon, and note of admiration, were produced some time after the others. The whole set, as they are now used, became established, when learning and refinement had made considerable progress.
Since it seems that the current use of punctuation didn't develop when manuscripts and monumental inscriptions were the only ways to share information, we can conclude that it was introduced with the invention of printing. However, this was a gradual process: all the punctuation marks didn't appear at once. The colon, semicolon, and exclamation mark came along some time later. The entire set, as we use them today, became established as education and culture advanced significantly.
As the rules of punctuation are founded altogether on the grammatical construction of sentences, their application pre-supposes, on the part of the student, a knowledge of Syntax. Although they admit of exceptions, and require a continual exercise of judgment and literary taste in applying them properly, they are of great utility, and justly merit our particular attention.
As the rules of punctuation are based entirely on the grammatical structure of sentences, using them effectively requires the student to have a good understanding of syntax. While there are exceptions and they need constant judgment and a sense of style to apply correctly, they are very helpful and definitely deserve our attention.
The great importance of acquiring a thorough knowledge of punctuation, and of attending strictly to the application of its rules, is established by the single fact, that the meaning of a sentence is often totally perverted by the omission or misapplication of points. To illustrate the correctness of this remark, numerous example might be selected. The following border on the ridiculous: "Mr. Jared Hurton having gone to sea his wife, desires the prayers of this church:" "Tryon, who escaped from the jail on Friday last, is 22 years of age, has sandy hair, light eyes, thin visage, with a short nose turned up about six feet high, &c." Corrected; "Mr. Jared Hurton having gone to sea, his wife desires the prayers of this church;" "thin visage, with a short nose turned up, about six feet high, &c."
The importance of having a solid understanding of punctuation and strictly following its rules is highlighted by the fact that the meaning of a sentence can be completely changed by the lack or incorrect use of punctuation. To demonstrate this point, many examples could be chosen. The following ones are almost laughable: "Mr. Jared Hurton having gone to sea his wife, desires the prayers of this church:" "Tryon, who escaped from the jail on Friday last, is 22 years of age, has sandy hair, light eyes, thin face, with a short nose turned up about six feet high, &c." Corrected; "Mr. Jared Hurton having gone to sea, his wife desires the prayers of this church;" "thin face, with a short nose turned up, about six feet high, &c."
Before one enters upon the study of punctuation, it is necessary for him to understand what is meant by an adjunct, a simple sentence, and a compound sentence.
Before diving into the study of punctuation, it's important to understand what is meant by an adjunct, a simple sentence, and a compound sentence.
An adjunct or imperfect phrase contains no assertion, or does not amount to a proposition or sentence; as, "Therefore;" "studious of praise;" "in the pursuit of commerce."—For the definition of a sentence, and a compound sentence, turn to page 119.
An adjunct or imperfect phrase doesn’t make a statement, or it’s not a full proposition or sentence; for example, "Therefore;" "studious of praise;" "in the pursuit of commerce."—For the definition of a sentence, and a compound sentence, turn to page 119.
When two or more adjuncts are connected with the verb in the same manner, and by the same preposition or conjunction, the sentence is compound, and may be resolved into as many simple ones as there are adjuncts; as, "They have sacrificed their health and fortune, at the shrine of vanity, pride, and extravagance." But when the adjuncts are connected with the verb in a different manner, the sentence is simple; as, "Grass of an excellent quality, is produced in great abundance in the northern regions of our country."
When two or more modifiers are linked to the verb in the same way, using the same preposition or conjunction, the sentence is compound and can be broken down into as many simple sentences as there are modifiers; for example, "They have sacrificed their health and fortune at the shrine of vanity, pride, and extravagance." However, when the modifiers are connected to the verb in a different way, the sentence is simple; for instance, "Grass of an excellent quality is produced in great abundance in the northern regions of our country."
COMMA.
RULE 1. The members of a simple sentence should not, in general, be separated by a comma; as, "Every part of matter swarms with living creatures."
RULE 1. The parts of a simple sentence generally shouldn't be separated by a comma; for example, "Every part of matter swarms with living creatures."
Exercises in Punctuation.—Idleness is the great fomenter of all corruptions in the human heart. The friend of order has made half his way to virtue. All finery is a sign of littleness.
Exercises in Punctuation.—Being idle is the main cause of all the problems in the human heart. A person who values order is already halfway to being virtuous. Showing off with fancy things is a sign of being shallow.
RULE 2. When a simple sentence is long, and the nominative is accompanied with an inseparable adjunct of importance, it may admit a comma immediately before the verb; as, "The good taste of the present age, has not allowed us to neglect the cultivation of the English language;" "Too many of the pretended friendships of youth, are mere combinations in pleasure."
RULE 2. When a simple sentence is long, and the subject comes with an important inseparable addition, you can place a comma right before the verb; for example, "The good taste of the present age has not allowed us to neglect the cultivation of the English language;" "Too many of the pretended friendships of youth are just combinations for pleasure."
Exercises.—The indulgence of a harsh disposition is the introduction to future misery. To be totally indifferent to praise or censure is a real defect in character. The intermixture of evil in human society serves to exercise the suffering graces and virtues of the good.
Exercises.—Being overly harsh only sets the stage for future unhappiness. Completely ignoring praise or criticism is a genuine flaw in character. The presence of evil in society challenges the compassionate traits and virtues of good people.
RULE 3. When the connexion of the different parts of a simple sentence, is interrupted by an adjunct of importance, the adjunct must be distinguished by a comma before and after it; as, "His work is, in many respects, very imperfect. It is, therefore, not much approved." But when these interruptions are slight and unimportant, it is better to omit the comma; as, "Flattery is certainly pernicious;" "There is surely a pleasure in beneficence."
RULE 3. When the connection of different parts of a simple sentence is interrupted by an important addition, you should set off the addition with a comma before and after it; for example, "His work is, in many respects, very imperfect. It is, therefore, not much approved." However, if these interruptions are minor and not crucial, it’s better to leave out the comma; as in, "Flattery is certainly harmful;" "There is surely a pleasure in being generous."
Exercises.—Charity like the sun brightens all its objects. Gentleness is in truth the great avenue to mutual enjoyment. You too have your failings. Humility and knowledge with poor apparel excel pride and ignorance under costly attire. The best men often experience disappointments. Advice should be seasonably administered. No assumed behavior can always hide the real character.
Exercises.—Charity is like the sun; it brightens everything it touches. Kindness is truly the key to enjoying each other. You have your flaws too. Humility and knowledge, even in humble clothing, are better than pride and ignorance dressed in expensive clothes. Even the best people often face disappointments. Advice should be given at the right time. No fake persona can completely conceal a person's true character.
RULE 4. The nominative case independent, and nouns in apposition when accompanied with adjuncts, must be distinguished by commas; as, "My son, give me thy heart;" "Dear Sir, I write to express my gratitude for your many kindnesses;" "I am obliged to you, my friends, for your many favors;" "Paul, the apostle, of the Gentiles, was eminent for his zeal and knowledge;" "The butterfly, child of the summer, flutters in the sun."
RULE 4. Independent nominative cases and nouns in apposition with additional information must be set off with commas; for example, "My son, give me your heart;" "Dear Sir, I'm writing to express my gratitude for your many kindnesses;" "I appreciate you, my friends, for your many favors;" "Paul, the apostle to the Gentiles, was known for his zeal and knowledge;" "The butterfly, child of summer, flutters in the sun."
But if two nouns in apposition are unattended with adjuncts, or if they form only a proper name, they should not be separated; as, "Paul the apostle, suffered martyrdom;" "The statesman Jefferson, wrote the declaration of Independence."
But if two nouns in apposition don’t have additional modifiers, or if they only make up a proper name, they shouldn’t be separated; for example, "Paul the apostle suffered martyrdom;" "The statesman Jefferson wrote the Declaration of Independence."
Exercises.—Lord thou hast been our dwelling place in all generations. Continue my dear child to make virtue thy chief study. Canst thou expect thou betrayer of innocence to escape the hand of vengeance? Death the king of terrors chose a prime minister. Hope the balm of life sooths us under every misfortune. Confucius the great Chinese philosopher was eminently good as well as wise. The patriarch Joseph is an illustrious example of true piety.
Exercises.—Lord, you have been our home in every generation. My dear child, continue to make virtue your main focus. Can you expect, you who betray innocence, to avoid the consequences? Death, the ultimate terror, chose a prime minister. Hope, the comfort of life, helps us through every misfortune. Confucius, the great Chinese philosopher, was not only wise but also truly good. The patriarch Joseph is a shining example of true piety.
RULE 5. The nominative case absolute and the infinitive mood absolute with their adjuncts, a participle with words depending on it, and, generally, any imperfect phrase which may be resolved into a simple sentence, must be separated from the rest of the sentence by commas; as, "His father dying, he succeeded to the estate;" "To confess the truth, I was in fault;" "The king, approving the plan, put it in execution;" "He, having finished his academical course, has returned home, to prosecute his professional studies."
RULE 5. The nominative absolute and the infinitive absolute, along with their modifiers, a participle and its dependent words, and generally any incomplete phrase that can be turned into a simple sentence, should be set off from the rest of the sentence by commas; for example, "His father dying, he inherited the estate;" "To tell the truth, I was at fault;" "The king, approving the plan, carried it out;" "He, having completed his studies, has returned home, to continue his professional training."
Exercises.—Peace of mind being secured we may smile at misfortune. To enjoy present pleasure he sacrificed his future ease and reputation. His talents formed for great enterprises could not fail of rendering him conspicuous. The path of piety and virtue pursued with a firm and constant spirit will assuredly lead to happiness. All mankind compose one family assembled under the eye of one common Father.
Exercises.—Once we have peace of mind, we can laugh in the face of misfortune. To enjoy the pleasures of the moment, he gave up his future comfort and reputation. His talents, meant for significant achievements, were bound to make him stand out. Following the path of piety and virtue with determination will definitely lead to happiness. All of humanity is one family gathered under the watchful eye of one common Father.
RULE 6. A compound sentence must be resolved into simple ones by placing commas between its members; as, "The decay, the waste, and the dissolution of a plant, may affect our spirits, and suggest a train of serious reflections."
RULE 6. A compound sentence must be broken down into simple sentences by adding commas between its parts; for example, "The decay, the waste, and the dissolution of a plant may affect our spirits and lead to a series of serious reflections."
Three or more nouns, verbs, adjectives, participles, or adverbs, connected by conjunctions, expressed or understood, must be separated by commas; as, "The husband, wife,[11] and children,[12] suffered extremely;" "In a letter, we may advise, exhort, comfort, request, and discuss;" "David was a brave, wise, and pious man;" "A man, fearing, serving, and loving his Creator, lives for a noble purpose;" "Success generally depends on acting prudently, steadily, and vigorously, in what we undertake."
Three or more nouns, verbs, adjectives, participles, or adverbs, connected by conjunctions, whether expressed or implied, should be separated by commas; for example, "The husband, wife,[11] and children,[12] suffered greatly;" "In a letter, we may advise, encourage, comfort, request, and discuss;" "David was a brave, wise, and devout man;" "A man who fears, serves, and loves his Creator lives with a noble purpose;" "Success usually depends on acting wisely, consistently, and energetically in whatever we pursue."
Two or more nouns, verbs, adjectives, participles, or adverbs, occurring in the same construction, with their conjunctions understood, must be separated by commas; as, "Reason, virtue, answer one great aim;" "Virtue supports in adversity, moderates in prosperity;" "Plain, honest truth, needs no artificial covering;" "We are fearfully, wonderfully framed."
Two or more nouns, verbs, adjectives, participles, or adverbs that appear in the same construction, with their conjunctions implied, must be separated by commas; for example, "Reason, virtue, answer one great aim;" "Virtue supports in tough times, moderates in good times;" "Plain, honest truth, needs no fake covering;" "We are fearfully, wonderfully made."
Exercises.—We have no reason to complain of the lot of man nor of the mutability of the world. Sensuality contaminates the body depresses the understanding deadens the moral feelings of the heart and degrades man from his rank in creation.
Exercises.—We have no reason to complain about human existence or the changing nature of the world. Sensuality taints the body, clouds the mind, dulls the moral feelings of the heart, and lowers humanity from its place in creation.
Self-conceit presumption and obstinacy blast the prospects of many a youth. He is alternately supported by his father his uncle and his elder brother. The man of virtue and honor will be trusted relied upon and esteemed. Conscious guilt renders one mean-spirited timorous and base. An upright mind will never be at a loss to discern what is just and true lovely honest and of good report. Habits of reading writing and thinking are the indispensable qualifications of a good student. The great business of life is to be employed in doing justly loving mercy and talking humbly with our Creator. To live soberly righteously and piously comprehends the whole of our duty.
Self-importance, arrogance, and stubbornness ruin the chances of many young people. He is supported at different times by his father, his uncle, and his older brother. A person of integrity and honor will be trusted, relied on, and respected. Feelings of guilt make someone small-minded, fearful, and unworthy. A principled mind will always know how to recognize what is right and true, beautiful, honest, and commendable. The habits of reading, writing, and thinking are essential for a good student. The main goal of life is to focus on doing what is right, showing compassion, and communicating humbly with our Creator. Living soberly, righteously, and devoutly covers all of our responsibilities.
In our health life possessions connexions pleasures there are causes of decay imperceptibly working. Deliberate slowly execute promptly. An idle trifling society is near akin to such as is corrupting. This unhappy person had been seriously affectionately admonished but in vain.
In our health, relationships, and pleasures, there are hidden causes of decline at work. Think carefully before acting. A lazy, trivial society is closely related to one that is corrupt. This unfortunate person had been thoughtfully and affectionately warned, but it did no good.
RULE 7. Comparative sentences whose members are short, and sentences connected with relative pronouns the meaning of whose antecedents is restricted or limited to a particular sense, should not be separated by a comma; as, "Wisdom is better than riches;" "No preacher is so successful as thee;" "He accepted what I had rejected;" "Self-denial is the sacrifice which virtue must make;" "Subtract from many modern poets all that may be found in Shakspeare, and trash will remain;" "Give it to the man whom you most esteem." In this last example, the assertion is not of "man in general," but of "the man whom you most esteem."
RULE 7. For comparative sentences that are short, and sentences connected with relative pronouns where the meaning of the antecedents is specific or limited to a certain sense, do not use a comma; for example, "Wisdom is better than wealth;" "No preacher is as successful as you;" "He accepted what I had turned down;" "Self-denial is the sacrifice that virtue must make;" "If you take away from many modern poets everything that you can find in Shakespeare, only junk will be left;" "Give it to the man whom you respect the most." In this last example, the statement is not about "man in general," but specifically about "the man whom you respect the most."
But when the antecedent is used in a general sense, a comma is properly inserted before the relative; as, "Man, who is born of a woman, is of few days and full of trouble;" "There is no charm in the female sex, which can supply the place of virtue."
But when the antecedent is used in a general sense, a comma should be placed before the relative; for example, "Man, who is born of a woman, is of few days and full of trouble;" "There is no charm in the female sex, that can replace virtue."
This rule is equally applicable to constructions in which the relative is understood; as, "Value duly the privileges you enjoy;" that is, "privileges which you enjoy."
This rule also applies to constructions where the relative is implied; for example, "Value the privileges you enjoy," which means "privileges that you enjoy."
Exercises.—How much better it is to get wisdom than gold! The friendships of the world can exist no longer than interest cements them. Eat what is set before you. They who excite envy will easily incur censure. A man who is of a detracting spirit will misconstrue the most innocent words that can be put together. Many of the evils which occasion our complaints of the world are wholly imaginary.
Exercises.—How much better it is to gain wisdom than wealth! The friendships in the world last only as long as they are based on mutual benefit. Eat what is offered to you. Those who stir up jealousy will quickly face criticism. A person with a critical attitude will misinterpret the most innocent things that can be said. Many of the problems that lead us to complain about the world are completely imaginary.
The gentle mind is like the smooth stream which reflects every object in its just proportion and in its fairest colors. In that unaffected civility which springs from a gentle mind there is an incomparable charm. The Lord whom I serve is eternal. This is the man we saw yesterday.
The gentle mind is like a calm stream that reflects everything in its true proportions and in its best light. That natural politeness that comes from a gentle mind has an unmatched charm. The Lord I serve is eternal. This is the man we saw yesterday.
RULE 8. When two words of the same sort, are connected by a conjunction expressed, they must not be separated; as, "Libertines call religion, bigotry or superstition;" "True worth is modest and retired;" "The study of natural history, expands and elevates the mind;" "Some men sin deliberately and presumptuously." When words are connected in pairs, the pairs only should be separated; as, "There is a natural difference between merit and demerit, virtue and vice, wisdom and folly;" "Whether we eat or drink, labor or sleep, we should be temperate."
RULE 8. When two words of the same type are connected by a stated conjunction, they should not be separated; for example, "Libertines call religion, bigotry or superstition;" "True worth is modest and humble;" "The study of natural history expands and elevates the mind;" "Some people sin deliberately and presumptuously." When words are connected in pairs, only the pairs should be separated; as in, "There is a natural difference between merit and demerit, virtue and vice, wisdom and folly;" "Whether we eat or drink, work or sleep, we should be moderate."
But if the parts connected by a conjunction are not short, they may be separated by a comma; as, "Romances may be said to be miserable rhapsodies, or dangerous incentives to evil."
But if the parts connected by a conjunction are not short, they may be separated by a comma; as, "Romances can be seen as miserable rhapsodies, or dangerous temptations to evil."
Exercises.—Idleness brings forward and nourishes many bad passions. True friendship will at all times avoid a rough or careless behavior. Health and peace a moderate fortune and a few friends sum up all the undoubted articles of temporal felicity. Truth is fair and artless simple and sincere uniform and consistent. Intemperance destroys the strength of our bodies and the vigor of our minds.
Exercises.—Being idle encourages and feeds many bad habits. Real friendship will always steer clear of rude or thoughtless actions. Good health, peace, a reasonable amount of wealth, and a few friends cover all the essential elements of worldly happiness. Truth is beautiful and genuine—simple, sincere, consistent, and dependable. Excess destroys the strength of our bodies and the energy of our minds.
RULE 9. Where the verb of a simple member is understood, a comma may, in some instances, be inserted; as, "From law arises security; from security, curiosity; from curiosity, knowledge." But in others, it is better to omit the comma; "No station is so high, no power so great, no character so unblemished, as to exempt men from the attacks of rashness, malice, and envy."
RULE 9. When the verb in a simple phrase is implied, a comma can sometimes be added; as in, "From law comes security; from security, curiosity; from curiosity, knowledge." However, in other cases, it's better to skip the comma; "No position is so elevated, no power so immense, no character so flawless, that it protects people from the assaults of recklessness, malice, and jealousy."
Exercises.—As a companion he was severe and satirical; as a friend captious and dangerous. If the spring put forth no blossoms in summer there will be no beauty and in autumn no fruit. So if youth be trifled away without improvement manhood will be contemptible and old age miserable.
Exercises.—As a companion, he was harsh and sarcastic; as a friend, critical and risky. If spring doesn’t produce any blossoms in summer, there will be no beauty and no fruit in autumn. Similarly, if youth is wasted without growth, adulthood will be looked down upon and old age will be filled with regret.
RULE 10. When a simple member stands as the object of a preceding verb, and its verb may be changed into the infinitive mood, the comma is generally omitted; as, "I suppose he is at rest;" changed, "I suppose him to be at rest."
RULE 10. When a simple member serves as the object of a previous verb, and its verb can be turned into the infinitive form, the comma is usually left out; for example, "I suppose he is at rest;" changes to "I suppose him to be at rest."
But when the verb to be is followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, which, by transposition, may be made the nominative case to it, the verb to be is generally separated from the infinitive by a comma; as, "The most obvious remedy is, to withdraw from all associations with bad men;" "The first and most obvious remedy against the infection, is, to withdraw from all associations with bad men."
But when the verb to be is followed by a verb in the infinitive form, which can be changed to act as the subject for it, a comma is usually placed between the verb to be and the infinitive; for example, "The most obvious remedy is, to withdraw from all associations with bad men;" "The first and most obvious remedy against the infection is, to withdraw from all associations with bad men."
Exercises.—They believed he was dead. He did not know that I was the man. I knew she was still alive. The greatest misery is to be condemned by our own hearts. The greatest misery that we can endure is to be condemned by our own hearts.
Exercises.—They thought he was dead. He didn't realize I was the man. I knew she was still alive. The worst suffering is to be judged by our own hearts. The greatest pain we can experience is to be judged by our own hearts.
NOTES.
1. When a conjunction is separated by a phrase or member from the member to which it belongs, such intervening phrase appears to require a comma at each extremity; as, "They set out early, and, before the close of the day, arrived at the destined place." This rule, however, is not generally followed by our best writers; as, "If thou seek the Lord, he will be found of thee; but if thou forsake him, he will cast thee off for ever;" "But if the parts connected are not short, a comma may be inserted."
1. When a conjunction is separated by a phrase or element from the part it's connecting, that intervening phrase usually requires a comma at both ends; for example, "They set out early, and, before the end of the day, arrived at their destination." However, this rule isn't typically followed by our best writers; as in, "If you seek the Lord, he will be found by you; but if you turn away from him, he will reject you forever;" "But if the connected parts aren't short, a comma can be added."
2. Several verbs succeeding each other in the infinitive mood, and having a common dependance, may be divided by commas; as, "To relieve the indigent, to comfort the afflicted, to protect the innocent, to reward the deserving, are humane and noble employments."
2. Several verbs in the infinitive form that follow each other and share a common dependence can be separated by commas; for example, "To relieve the needy, to comfort the troubled, to protect the innocent, to reward the deserving, are humane and noble tasks."
3. A remarkable expression, or a short observation, somewhat in the form of a quotation, may be properly marked with a comma; as, "It hurts a man's pride to say, I do not know;" "Plutarch calls lying, the vice of slaves."
3. A notable expression, or a brief comment, similar to a quote, can be properly followed by a comma; for example, "It hurts a man's pride to say, I do not know;" "Plutarch calls lying, the vice of slaves."
4. When words are placed in opposition to each other, or with some marked variety, they must be distinguished by a comma; as,
4. When words are placed against each other, or with some noticeable variety, they must be separated by a comma; as,
"Good men, in this frail, imperfect state, are often found, not only in union with, but in opposition to, the views and conduct of each other."
"Good people, in this fragile, flawed state, are often seen not only in agreement with but also in disagreement to each other's views and actions."
Sometimes when the word with which the last preposition agrees, is single, the comma may be omitted; as, "Many states were in alliance with, and under the protection of Rome."
Sometimes when the word that the last preposition agrees with is singular, the comma can be left out; for example, "Many states were in alliance with and under the protection of Rome."
The same rule and restrictions apply, when two or more nouns refer to the same preposition; as, "He was composed both under the threatening, and at the approach, of a cruel and lingering death;" "He was not only the king, but the father of his people."
The same rules and restrictions apply when two or more nouns refer to the same preposition; for example, "He was composed both under the threatening and at the approach of a cruel and lingering death;" "He was not only the king but also the father of his people."
5. The words, "as, thus, nay, so, hence, again, first, secondly, formerly, now, lastly, once more, above all, on the contrary, in the next place, in short," and all other words and phrases of a similar kind, must generally be separated from the context by a comma; as, "Remember thy best friend; formerly, the supporter of thy infancy; now, the guardian of thy youth;" "He feared want; hence, he overvalued riches;" "So, if youth be trifled away," &c. "Again, we must, have food and clothing;" "Finally, let us conclude."
5. The words "as, thus, no, so, therefore, again, first, second, previously, now, finally, once more, above all, on the other hand, next, in brief," and all other similar words and phrases should generally be set off from the context with a comma; as, "Remember your best friend; previously, the supporter of your childhood; now, the protector of your youth;" "He feared poverty; therefore, he overvalued wealth;" "So, if youth is wasted," &c. "Again, we need food and clothing;" "Finally, let us wrap up."
The foregoing rules and examples are sufficient, it is presumed, to suggest to the learner, in all ordinary instances, the proper place for inserting the comma; but in applying these rules, great regard must be paid to the length and meaning of the clauses, and the proportion which they bear to one another.
The rules and examples provided are expected to help the learner find the right spot for commas in most cases. However, it's important to consider the length and meaning of the clauses, as well as how they relate to each other, when applying these rules.
SEMICOLON.
The semicolon is used for dividing a compound sentence into two or more parts, not so closely connected as those which are separated by a comma, nor yet so little dependant on each other, as those which are distinguished by a colon.
The semicolon is used to divide a compound sentence into two or more parts that aren’t as closely connected as those separated by a comma, but aren’t so independent from each other as those distinguished by a colon.
RULE 1. When the preceding member of the sentence does not of itself give complete sense, but depends on the following clause, and sometimes when the sense of that member would be complete without the concluding one, the semicolon is used; as in the following examples: "As the desire of approbation, when it works according to reason, improves the amiable part of our species; so, nothing is more destructive to them, when it is governed by vanity and folly;" "The wise man is happy, when he gains his own approbation; the fool, when he gains the applause of those around him;" "Straws swim upon the surface; but pearls lie at the bottom."
RULE 1. When the first part of a sentence doesn’t fully make sense on its own and relies on the following clause, and sometimes even when the first part could stand alone without the last clause, a semicolon is used; as in these examples: "The desire for approval, when it aligns with reason, enhances the best qualities of our kind; however, nothing is more harmful to them when it's driven by vanity and foolishness;" "The wise person is happy when they earn their own approval; the fool is happy when they receive applause from others;" "Straws float on the surface; but pearls rest at the bottom."
Exercises.—The path of truth is a plain and safe path that of falsehood a perplexing maze. Heaven is the region of gentleness and friendship hell of fierceness and animosity. As there is a worldly happiness which God perceives to be no other than disguised misery as there are worldly honors which in his estimation are reproach so there is a worldly wisdom which in his sight is foolishness.
Exercises.—The path of truth is clear and secure, while the path of falsehood is a complicated maze. Heaven is a place of kindness and friendship, while hell is a place of cruelty and hostility. Just as there is a worldly happiness that God sees as nothing more than hidden misery, and worldly honors that He views as disgraceful, there is also a worldly wisdom that He considers foolishness.
RULE 2. When an example is introduced to illustrate a rule or proposition, the semicolon may be used before the conjunction as; as in the following instance: Prepositions govern the objective case; as, "She gave the book to him."
RULE 2. When an example is given to illustrate a rule or proposition, a semicolon can be used before the conjunction as; as in this example: Prepositions govern the objective case; as, "She gave the book to him."
NOTE. In instances like the foregoing, many respectable punctuists employ the colon, instead of the semicolon.
NOTE. In cases like the ones mentioned above, many respected punctuation experts use a colon instead of a semicolon.
COLON.
The Colon is used to divide a sentence into two or more parts less connected than those which are separated by a semicolon; but not so independent as separate, distinct sentences.
The colon is used to split a sentence into two or more parts that are less connected than those separated by a semicolon, but not as independent as separate, distinct sentences.
RULE 1. When a member of a sentence is complete in itself, but followed by some supplemental remark, or farther illustration of the subject, the colon may be properly employed; as, "Nature felt her inability to extricate herself from the consequences of guilt: the gospel revealed the plan of divine interposition and aid." "Great works are performed, not by strength, but by perseverance: yonder palace was raised by single stones; yet you see its height and spaciousness."
RULE 1. When a part of a sentence stands alone but is followed by an additional comment or further explanation of the topic, a colon can be used; for example, "Nature recognized her inability to escape the consequences of guilt: the gospel showed the plan for divine intervention and support." "Great achievements are made not by strength, but by persistence: that palace was built stone by stone; yet you can see its height and spaciousness."
Exercises.—The three great enemies to tranquillity are vice superstition and idleness vice which poisons and disturbs the mind with bad passions superstition which fills it with imaginary terrors idleness which loads it with tediousness and disgust.
Exercises.—The three main enemies of peace are bad behavior, superstition, and laziness. Bad behavior poisons and disturbs the mind with negative feelings; superstition fills it with imaginary fears; and laziness weighs it down with boredom and frustration.
When we look forward into the year which is beginning what do we behold there? All my brethren is a blank to our view a dark unknown presents itself.
When we look ahead to the year that's starting, what do we see? All my friends, it looks blank to us, and a dark unknown lies ahead.
RULE 2. When a semicolon has preceded, or more than one, and a still greater pause is necessary, in order to mark the connecting or concluding sentiment, the colon should be applied; as, "A divine legislator, uttering his voice from heaven; an almighty governor, stretching forth his arm to punish or reward; informing us of perpetual rest prepared for the righteous hereafter, and of indignation and wrath awaiting the wicked: these are the considerations which overawe the world, which support integrity, and check guilt."
RULE 2. When there’s a semicolon before, or more than one, and a bigger pause is needed to highlight the connection or final thought, a colon should be used; for example, "A divine legislator, speaking from heaven; an all-powerful governor, reaching out His hand to punish or reward; informing us of the eternal rest prepared for the righteous in the future, and of the anger and wrath waiting for the wicked: these are the ideas that intimidate the world, uphold integrity, and restrain wrongdoing."
PERIOD.
When a sentence is complete, and so independent as not to be connected with the one which follows it, a period should be inserted at its close; as, "Fear God." "Honor the patriot." "Respect virtue."
When a sentence is complete and stands alone without being connected to the following one, a period should be placed at the end; for example, "Fear God." "Honor the patriot." "Respect virtue."
In the use of many of the pauses, there is a diversity of practice among our best writers and grammarians. Compound sentences connected by conjunctions, are sometimes divided by the period; as, "Recreations, though they may be of an innocent kind, require steady government to keep them within a due and limited province. But such as are of an irregular and vicious nature, are not to be governed, but to be banished from every well-regulated mind."
In using many of the pauses, there's a variety of practices among our best writers and grammarians. Compound sentences joined by conjunctions are sometimes separated by a period; for example, "Recreations, even if they are of an innocent kind, require steady guidance to keep them within a proper and limited scope. However, those that are irregular and harmful should not be managed but rather removed from every well-regulated mind."
The period should follow every abbreviated word; as, "A.D. N.B. U.S. Va. Md. Viz. Col. Mr."
The period should come after every abbreviated word, like "A.D. N.B. U.S. Va. Md. Viz. Col. Mr."
DASH.
The Dash, though often used improperly by hasty and incoherent writers, may be introduced with propriety, where the sentence breaks off abruptly; where a significant pause is required; or where there is an unexpected turn in the sentiment; as, "If thou art he, so much respected once—but, oh! how fallen! how degraded!" "If acting conformably to the will of our Creator;—if promoting the welfare of mankind around us;—if securing our own happiness;—are objects of the highest moment: then we are loudly called upon to cultivate and extend the great interests of religion and virtue."
The dash, though often misused by rushed and unclear writers, can be used correctly when a sentence suddenly stops, when a significant pause is needed, or when there’s an unexpected shift in thought; for example, “If you are the one so respected once—but, oh! how fallen! how degraded!” “If acting according to the will of our Creator;—if promoting the well-being of those around us;—if ensuring our own happiness;—are the most important goals: then we are strongly urged to nurture and expand the great interests of religion and virtue.”
A dash following a stop, denotes that the pause is to be greater than if the stop were alone; and when used by itself, requires a pause of such length as the sense only can determine.
A dash after a stop indicates that the pause should be longer than it would be with just the stop. When used by itself, it requires a pause that only the context can determine.
INTERROGATORY POINT.
The note of interrogation is used at the end of an interrogative sentence; as, "Who adorned the heavens with such exquisite beauty?"
The question mark is used at the end of a question; for example, "Who decorated the skies with such beautiful elegance?"
NOTE. The interrogative point should not be employed in cases where it is only said, that a question has been asked; as, "The Cyprians asked me, why I wept."
NOTE. The question mark shouldn't be used in situations where it's simply stated that a question was asked; for example, "The Cyprians asked me why I was crying."
EXCLAMATORY POINT.
The note of exclamation is applied to expressions of sudden emotion, surprise, joy, grief, &c. and sometimes to invocations and addresses; as, "How much vanity in the pursuits of men!" "What is more amiable than virtue!" "My friend! this conduct amazes me!" "Hear me, O Lord! for thy loving kindness is great!"
The exclamation mark is used for sudden emotions, surprise, joy, sadness, etc., and sometimes for calls and addresses, like, "How much vanity is in what people chase!" "What's more admirable than virtue?" "My friend! This behavior astonishes me!" "Listen to me, O Lord! Your kindness is immense!"
PARENTHESIS.
A parenthesis is a clause containing some useful remark, which may be omitted without injuring the grammatical construction; as, "To gain a posthumous reputation, is to save a few letters (for what is a name besides?) from oblivion."
A parenthesis is a clause that includes a helpful comment, which can be left out without affecting the grammatical structure; for example, "To earn a posthumous reputation is to preserve a few letters (because what is a name anyway?) from being forgotten."
NOTE. The parenthesis generally denotes a moderate depression of the voice; and, as the parenthetical marks do not supply the place of a point, the clause should be accompanied with every stop which the sense would require, if the parenthetical characters were not used. It ought to terminate with the same kind of point which the member has that precedes it; as "He loves nobly, (I speak of friendship,) who is not jealous when, he has partners of love."
NOTE. The parentheses typically indicate a slight drop in the voice; and since the parenthetical marks don't take the place of punctuation, the clause should include all the stops that the meaning would need if the parentheses weren't used. It should end with the same type of punctuation as the part that comes before it, like in "He loves nobly, (I mean friendship,) who isn't jealous when he has partners in love."
Parentheses, however, containing interrogations or exclamations, form an exception to this rule; as, "If I grant his request, (and who could refuse it?) I shall secure his esteem and attachment."
Parentheses, however, containing questions or exclamations, are an exception to this rule; as in, "If I grant his request, (and who could refuse it?) I’ll earn his respect and loyalty."
APOSTROPHE AND QUOTATION.
The Apostrophe is used to abbreviate a word, and also to mark the possessive case of a noun; as, "'tis, for it is; tho,' for though; o'er, for over;" "A man's poverty."
The apostrophe is used to shorten a word and to indicate possession for nouns, like "'tis" for "it is," "tho'" for "though," and "o'er" for "over;" "A man's poverty."
A Quotation marks a sentence taken in the author's own language; as, "The proper study of mankind is man."
A quotation marks a sentence that uses the author's own words; for example, "The proper study of mankind is man."
When an author represents a person as speaking, the language of that person should be designated by a quotation; as, At my coming in, he said, "You and the physician are come too late." A quotation contained within another, should be distinguished by two single commas; as, "Always remember this ancient maxim 'Know thyself.'"
When an author shows a character speaking, their words should be marked with quotes; for example, Upon my arrival, he said, "You and the doctor have arrived too late." A quote inside another quote should be indicated with two single quotes; for instance, "Always remember this old saying 'Know thyself.'"
DIRECTIONS FOR USING CAPITAL LETTERS.
It is proper to begin with a capital,
It is proper to begin with a capital,
1. The first word of every sentence.
1. The first word of every sentence.
2. Proper names, the appellations of the Deity, &c.; as, "James, Cincinnati, the Andes, Huron;" "God, Jehovah, the Almighty the Supreme Being, Providence, the Holy Spirit."
2. Proper names, the names of God, etc.; like, "James, Cincinnati, the Andes, Huron;" "God, Jehovah, the Almighty, the Supreme Being, Providence, the Holy Spirit."
3. Adjectives derived from proper names, the titles of books, nouns which are used as the subject of discourse, the pronoun I and the interjection O, and every line in poetry; as, "American, Grecian, English, French; Irving's Sketch Book, Percival's Poems; I write; Hear, O earth!"
3. Adjectives that come from proper names, titles of books, nouns that are the main topic of discussion, the pronoun I, and the interjection O, as well as every line in poetry; for example, "American, Grecian, English, French; Irving's Sketch Book, Percival's Poems; I write; Listen, O earth!"
APPENDIX.
VERSIFICATION.
POETRY is the language of passion, or of enlivened imagination.
POETRY is the language of passion or vibrant imagination.
VERSIFICATION, in English, is the harmonious arrangement of a particular number and variety of accented and unaccented syllables, according to particular laws.
VERSIFICATION, in English, is the balanced arrangement of a specific number and types of stressed and unstressed syllables, following specific rules.
RHYME is the correspondence of the sound of the last syllable in one line, to the sound of the last syllable in another; as,
RHYME is when the last syllable's sound in one line matches the last syllable's sound in another; for example,
BLANK VERSE consists in poetical thoughts expressed in regular numbers, but without the correspondence of sound at the end of the lines which constitutes rhyme.
BLANK VERSE is made up of poetic ideas expressed in a consistent meter, but it doesn't have the rhyming sound at the end of the lines that defines rhyme.
POETICAL FEET consist in a particular arrangement and connexion of a number of accented and unaccented syllables.
POETICAL FEET involve a specific arrangement and connection of a series of stressed and unstressed syllables.
They are called feet, because it is by their aid that the voice, as it were, steps along through the verse in a measured pace.
They are called feet because they help the voice, in a way, move through the verse at a steady rhythm.
All poetical feet consist either of two, or of three syllables; and are reducible to eight kinds; four of two syllables, and four of three, as follows:
All poetic feet are made up of either two or three syllables and can be categorized into eight types: four with two syllables and four with three, as follows:
DISSYLLABLE. | TRISYLLABLE. |
A Trochee - ̆ | A Dactyle - ̆ ̆ |
An Iambus ̆ - | An Amphibrach ̆ - ̆ |
A Spondee - - | An Anapaest ̆ ̆ - |
A Pyrrhic ̆ ̆ | A Tribrach ̆ ̆ ̆ |
A Trochee has the first syllable accented, and the last unaccented; as, Hātefŭl, péttish:
A trochee has the first syllable stressed and the last one unstressed; for example, hateful, pettish:
Rēstlĕss mōrtăls tōil fŏr nāught.
Restless mortals toil for nothing.
An Iambus has the first syllable unaccented, and the last accented; as, Bĕtrāy, consíst:
An iamb is a metrical foot that has the first syllable unstressed and the second syllable stressed; for example, beTRAY, conSIST:
Thĕ sēas shăll wāste, thĕ skīes ĭn smōke dĕcāy.
Thĕ sēas shăll wāste, thĕ skīes ĭn smōke dĕcāy.
A Dactyle has the first syllable accented, and the two latter unaccented; as, Lābŏrĕr, póssible:
A Dactyl has the first syllable stressed, and the last two unstressed; as in, Lābŏrĕr, póssible:
Frōm thĕ lŏw plēasŭres ŏf thīs făllĕn nātŭre.
Frōm the low pleasures of this fallen nature.
An Anapaest has the first two syllables unaccented, and the last accented; as, Cŏntrăvēne, acquiésce:
An anapest has the first two syllables unaccented and the last syllable accented; as in con-trá-vene, ac-qui-ésce:
ăt thĕ clōse ŏf thĕ dāy whĕn thĕ hāmlĕt ĭs stīll.
ăt thĕ clōse ŏf thĕ dāy whĕn thĕ hāmlĕt ĭs stīll.
A Spondee; as, The pāle mōōn: a Pyrrhic; as, ŏn thĕ tall tree: an Amphibrach; as, Dēlightfūl: a Tribrach; as, Numērăblĕ.
A Spondee; as, The pale moon: a Pyrrhic; as, on the tall tree: an Amphibrach; as, Delightful: a Tribrach; as, Numberable.
RHETORIC.
GRAMMAR instructs us how to express our thoughts correctly.
GRAMMAR teaches us how to express our thoughts accurately.
RHETORIC teaches us to express them with force and elegance.
RHETORIC teaches us to express them powerfully and elegantly.
The former is generally confined to the correct application of words in constructing single sentences. The latter treats of the proper choice of words, of the happiest method of constructing sentences, of their most advantageous arrangement in forming a discourse, and of the various kinds and qualities of composition. The principles of rhetoric are principally based on those unfolded and illustrated in the science of grammar. Hence, an acquaintance with the latter, and, indeed, with the liberal arts, is a prerequisite to the study of rhetoric and belles-lettres.
The first is usually limited to using words correctly in creating individual sentences. The second focuses on choosing the right words, the best way to build sentences, how to arrange them effectively in a discussion, and the different types and styles of writing. The principles of rhetoric are mainly derived from those explained and demonstrated in the study of grammar. Therefore, being familiar with grammar and, in fact, with the liberal arts, is essential before studying rhetoric and fine writing.
COMPOSITION.
It may be laid down as a maxim of eternal truth, that good sense is the foundation of all good writing. One who understands a subject well, will scarcely write ill upon it.
It can be said as a timeless truth that common sense is the basis of all good writing. Someone who truly understands a topic well will hardly write poorly about it.
Rhetoric, or the art of persuasion, requires in a writer, the union of good sense, and a lively and chaste imagination. It is, then, her province to teach him to embellish his thoughts with elegant and appropriate language, vivid imagery, and an agreeable variety of expression. It ought to be his aim,
Rhetoric, or the art of persuasion, requires a writer to have a combination of good sense and a lively, refined imagination. It is, therefore, her responsibility to teach him to enhance his thoughts with elegant and suitable language, vivid imagery, and a pleasing variety of expression. He should aim to,
STYLE.—PERSPICUITY AND PRECISION.
STYLE is the peculiar manner in which we express our conceptions by means of language. It is a picture of the ideas which rise in our minds, and of the order in which they are produced.
STYLE is the unique way we communicate our thoughts using language. It's a reflection of the ideas that emerge in our minds and the sequence in which they come to us.
The qualities of a good style, may be ranked under two heads. perspicuity and ornament.
The qualities of a good style can be categorized into two main areas: clarity and beauty.
PERSPICUITY, which is considered the fundamental quality of a good style, claims attention, first, to single words and phrases; and, secondly, to the construction of sentences. When considered with respect to words and phrases, it requires these three qualities, purity, propriety, and precision.
PERSPICUITY, seen as the essential quality of good writing, focuses on two main aspects: first, individual words and phrases; and second, the structure of sentences. When it comes to words and phrases, it demands three qualities: purity, propriety, and precision.
Purity of language consists in the use of such words and such constructions as belong to the language which we speak, in opposition to words and phrases belonging to other languages, or which are obsolete or new-coined, or employed without proper authority.
Purity of language means using words and structures that are part of the language we speak, as opposed to using words and phrases from other languages, or those that are outdated, newly created, or used without proper authorization.
Propriety is the choice of those words which the best usage has appropriated to the ideas which we intend to express by them. It implies their correct and judicious application, in opposition to low expressions, and to words and phrases which would be less significant of the ideas which we wish to convey. It is the union of purity and propriety, which renders style graceful and perspicuous.
Propriety is the selection of words that the best usage has assigned to the ideas we want to express. It involves their accurate and thoughtful application, as opposed to informal expressions and words or phrases that would be less meaningful for the ideas we wish to communicate. It is the combination of clarity and appropriateness that makes style elegant and clear.
Precision, from præcidere, to cut off, signifies retrenching all superfluities, and pruning the expression in such a manner as to exhibit neither more nor less than an exact copy of the ideas intended to be conveyed.
Precision, from præcidere, to cut off, means removing all unnecessary parts and refining the expression to show exactly what is intended without adding or leaving out anything.
STRUCTURE OF SENTENCES.
A proper construction of sentences is of so great importance in every species of composition, that we cannot be too strict or minute in our attention to it.
A proper construction of sentences is extremely important in every type of writing, so we can't be too strict or detailed in our attention to it.
Elegance of style requires us generally to avoid, many short or long sentences in succession; a monotonous correspondence of one member to another; and the commencing of a piece, section, or paragraph, with a long sentence.
Elegance of style generally means we should avoid using too many short or long sentences one after the other; having a dull similarity between each part; and starting a piece, section, or paragraph with a long sentence.
The qualities most essential to a perfect sentence, are Unity, Clearness, Strength, and Harmony.
The qualities most essential to a perfect sentence are Unity, Clearness, Strength, and Harmony.
UNITY is an indispensable property of a correct sentence. A sentence implies an arrangement of words in which only one proposition is expressed. It may, indeed, consist of parts; but these parts ought to be so closely bound together, as to make on the mind the impression, not of many objects, but of only one. In order to preserve this unity, the following rules may be useful.
UNITY is an essential quality of a well-formed sentence. A sentence should have a structure where only one idea is expressed. It can contain different parts; however, these parts need to be connected closely enough to give the impression of one single idea, not multiple ones. To maintain this unity, the following rules can be helpful.
1. In the course of the sentence, the scene should be changed as little as possible. In every sentence there is some leading or governing word, which, if possible, ought to be continued so from the beginning to the end of it. The following sentence is not constructed according to this rule: "After we came to anchor, they put me on shore, where I was saluted by all my friends, who received me with the greatest kindness." In this sentence, though the objects are sufficiently connected, yet, by shifting so frequently the place and the person, the vessel, the shore, we, they, I and who, they appear in so disunited a view, that the mind is led to wander for the sense. The sentence is restored to its proper unity by constructing it thus: "Having come to anchor, I was put on shore, where I was saluted by all my friends, who received me with the greatest kindness."
1. During the sentence, the scene should change as little as possible. Every sentence has a main or guiding word that, if possible, should be consistent from beginning to end. The following sentence does not follow this rule: "After we came to anchor, they put me on shore, where I was saluted by all my friends, who received me with the greatest kindness." In this sentence, even though the elements are connected, the frequent shifts in the location and the person—vessel, shore, we, they, I, and who—make it feel disjointed, causing the reader's mind to wander for meaning. The sentence is brought back to its proper unity by restructuring it like this: "Having come to anchor, I was put on shore, where I was saluted by all my friends, who received me with the greatest kindness."
2. Never crowd into one sentence things which have so little connexion, that they would bear to be divided into two or more sentences. The violation of this rule produces so unfavorable an effect, that it is safer to err rather by too many short sentences, than by one that is overloaded and confused.
2. Never force unrelated ideas into one sentence when they could be clearly expressed in two or more sentences. Breaking this rule creates such a negative impact that it's better to err on the side of using too many short sentences instead of creating one that is cluttered and confusing.
3. Avoid all unnecessary parentheses.
3. Avoid unnecessary parentheses.
CLEARNESS. Ambiguity, which is opposed to clearness, may arise from a bad choice, or a bad arrangement of words.
CLEARNESS. Ambiguity, which is the opposite of clarity, can come from poor word choice or a confusing arrangement of words.
A leading rule in the arrangement of sentences, is, that those words or members most nearly related, should be placed in the sentence as near to each other as possible, so as thereby to make their mutual relation clearly appear. This rule ought to be observed,
A key principle in structuring sentences is that words or elements that are closely related should be placed as close to each other as possible in the sentence to make their connection clear. This principle should be followed,
1. In the position of adverbs. "By greatness," says Mr. Addison, "I do not only mean the bulk of any single object, but the largeness of a whole view." The improper situation of the adverb only, in this sentence, renders it a limitation of the verb mean, whereas the author intended to have it qualify the phrase, a single object; thus, "By greatness, I do not mean the bulk of any single object only, but the largeness of a whole view."
1. In the position of adverbs. "By greatness," says Mr. Addison, "I don't just mean the size of a single object, but the overall extent of a whole view." The incorrect placement of the adverb only in this sentence makes it a limitation of the verb mean, while the author actually intended it to modify the phrase a single object; so it should read, "By greatness, I do not mean the size of any single object only, but the overall extent of a whole view."
2. In the position of phrases and members. "Are these designs which any man who is born a Briton, in any circumstances, in any situation, ought to be ashamed or afraid to avow?" Corrected: "Are these designs which any man who is born a Briton, ought to be ashamed or afraid, in any circumstances, in any situation, to avow?"
2. In the position of phrases and members. "Are these designs which any man who is born a Briton, in any circumstances, in any situation, ought to be ashamed or afraid to avow?" Corrected: "Are these designs which any man who is born a Briton, ought to be ashamed or afraid, in any circumstances, in any situation, to avow?"
3. In the position of pronouns. The reference of a pronoun to its noun, should always be so clear that we cannot possibly mistake it: otherwise the noun ought to be repeated. "It is folly to pretend to arm ourselves against the accidents of life, by heaping up treasures, which nothing can protect us against but the good providence of our Heavenly Father." Which, in this sentence, grammatically refers to treasures; and this would convert the whole period into nonsense. The sentence should have been thus constructed, "It is folly to pretend, by heaping up treasures, to arm ourselves against the accidents of life, against which nothing can protect us but the good providence of our Heavenly Father."
3. In the position of pronouns. The connection between a pronoun and its noun should always be so clear that we cannot possibly mistake it: otherwise, the noun should be repeated. "It is foolish to think we can defend ourselves against life's uncertainties by accumulating wealth, which nothing can protect us from except the good providence of our Heavenly Father." Which in this sentence grammatically refers to treasures; and this would make the whole statement nonsensical. The sentence should have been constructed like this: "It is foolish to think that by accumulating wealth, we can defend ourselves against the uncertainties of life, against which nothing can protect us but the good providence of our Heavenly Father."
STRENGTH. By the strength of a sentence is meant such an arrangement of its several words and members, as exhibits the sense to the best advantage, and gives every word and member its due weight and force.
STRENGTH. By the strength of a sentence, we mean an arrangement of its various words and components that presents the meaning most effectively, giving each word and component its appropriate weight and impact.
1. The first rule for promoting the strength of a sentence, is, to take from it all redundant words and members. Whatever can be easily supplied in the mind, should generally be omitted; thus, "Content with deserving a triumph, he refused the honor of it," is better than to say, "Being content with deserving a triumph." &c. "They returned back again to the same city from whence they came forth." If we expunge from this snort sentence five which are were expletives, it will be much more neat and forcible thus, "They returned to the city whence they came." But we should be cautious of pruning so closely as to give a hardness and dryness to the style. Some leaves must be left to shelter and adorn the fruit.
1. The first rule for strengthening a sentence is to remove all unnecessary words. Anything that can be easily understood without stating it should generally be left out. For example, "Content with deserving a triumph, he refused the honor of it" is better than saying, "Being content with deserving a triumph." Similarly, "They returned back again to the same city from whence they came forth." If we take out the five redundant words in this short sentence, it becomes much clearer and stronger: "They returned to the city whence they came." However, we should be careful not to cut so much that the style becomes stiff and dry. Some extra words are needed to enhance and beautify the message.
2. Particular attention to the use of copulatives, relatives, and all the particles employed for transition and connexion, is required. In compositions of an elevated character, the relative should generally be inserted. An injudicious repetition of and enfeebles style; but when enumerating objects which we wish to have appear as distinct from each other as possible, it may be repeated with peculiar advantage; thus, "Such a man may fall a victim to power; but truth, and reason, and liberty, would fall with him."
2. Pay special attention to the use of linking words, relative clauses, and all the transition and connection words used. In serious writing, the relative should usually be included. Using and too often can weaken your style; however, when listing items that we want to emphasize as distinct from each other, repeating it can be especially effective; for example, "Such a man may become a victim of power; but truth, and reason, and liberty would fall with him."
3. Dispose of the capital word or words in that part of the sentence in which they will make the most striking impression.
3. Place the capital word or words in the part of the sentence where they will have the biggest impact.
4. Cause the members of a sentence to go on rising in their importance one above another. In a sentence of two members, the longer should generally be the concluding one.
4. Make the parts of a sentence increase in importance one after another. In a sentence with two parts, the longer one should usually be the last.
5. Avoid concluding a sentence with an adverb, a preposition, or any inconsiderable word, unless it be emphatical.
5. Avoid ending a sentence with an adverb, a preposition, or any insignificant word, unless it’s for emphasis.
6. Where two things are compared or contrasted with each other, a resemblance in the language and construction should be observed.
6. When comparing or contrasting two things, there should be a similarity in the language and structure used.
FIGURES OF SPEECH.
Figures of Speech may be described as that language which is prompted either by the imagination, or by the passions. They generally imply some departure from simplicity of expression; and exhibit ideas in a manner more vivid and impressive, than could be done by plain language. Figures have been commonly divided into two great classes; Figures of Words, and Figures of Thought.
Figures of Speech can be described as language that is inspired either by imagination or emotions. They usually involve a departure from simple expression and present ideas in a way that is more vivid and impactful than plain language. Figures are generally divided into two main categories: Figures of Words and Figures of Thought.
Figures of Words are called Tropes, and consist in a word's being employed to signify something that is different from its original meaning; so that by altering the word, we destroy the figure.
Figures of Words are called Tropes, and involve using a word to mean something different from its original meaning; if we change the word, we lose the figure.
When we say of a person, that he has a fine taste in wines, the word taste is used in its common, literal sense; but when we say, he has a fine taste for painting, poetry, or music, we use the word figuratively. "A good man enjoys comfort in the midst of adversity," is simple language; but when it is said, "To the upright there ariseth light in darkness," the same sentiment is expressed in a figurative style, light is put in the place of comfort, and darkness is used to suggest the idea of adversity.
When we say that someone has a good taste in wines, we use the word taste in its usual, literal sense; but when we say they have a refined taste for painting, poetry, or music, we use the word in a figurative way. "A decent person finds comfort during tough times" is straightforward language; but when we say, "To the honest, there arises light in darkness," the same idea is conveyed in a figurative style, where light represents comfort, and darkness suggests adversity.
The following are the most important figures:
The following are the key figures:
1. A METAPHOR is founded on the resemblance which one object bears to another; or, it is a comparison in an abridged form.
1. A METAPHOR is based on the similarity between one object and another; it’s a brief comparison.
When I say of some great minister, "That he upholds the state like a pillar which supports the weight of a whole edifice," I fairly make a comparison; but when I say of such a minister, "That he is the pillar of the state," the word pillar becomes a metaphor. In the latter construction, the comparison between the minister and a pillar, is made in the mind; but it is expressed without any of the words that denote comparison.
When I say of some great minister, "He upholds the state like a pillar that supports the weight of a whole building," I'm making a clear comparison; but when I say of such a minister, "He is the pillar of the state," the word pillar turns into a metaphor. In the latter case, the comparison between the minister and a pillar is created in our minds, but it's stated without any of the words that indicate comparison.
Metaphors abound in all writings. In the scriptures they may be found in vast variety. Thus, our blessed Lord is called a vine, a lamb, a lion, &c.; and men, according to their different dispositions, are styled wolves, sheep, dogs, serpents, vipers, &c.
Metaphors are everywhere in writing. In the scriptures, they appear in many forms. For example, our blessed Lord is referred to as a vine, a lamb, a lion, etc.; and people, based on their different personalities, are called wolves, sheep, dogs, serpents, vipers, etc.
Washington Irving, in speaking of the degraded state of the American Aborigines who linger on the borders of the "white settlements," employs the following beautiful metaphor: "The proud pillar of their independence has been shaken down, and the whole moral fabric lies in ruins."
Washington Irving, talking about the poor condition of the Native Americans who hang around the edges of the "white settlements," uses this beautiful metaphor: "The proud pillar of their independence has been knocked down, and the entire moral fabric is in ruins."
2. AN ALLEGORY may be regarded as a metaphor continued; or it is several metaphors so connected together in sense, as frequently to form a kind of parable or fable. It differs from a single metaphor, in the same manner that a cluster on the vine differs from a single grape.
2. AN ALLEGORY can be seen as an extended metaphor; or it consists of several metaphors linked together in meaning, often creating a sort of parable or fable. It differs from a single metaphor just like a bunch of grapes on a vine differs from an individual grape.
The following is a fine example of an allegory, taken from the 60th psalm; wherein the people of Israel are represented under the image of a vine. "Thou hast brought a vine out of Egypt: thou hast cast out the heathen and planted it. Thou preparedst room before it; and didst cause it to take deep root, and it filled the land. The hills were covered with the shadow of it, and the boughs thereof were like the goodly cedars. She sent out her boughs into the sea, and her branches into the river."
The following is a great example of an allegory, taken from the 60th psalm, where the people of Israel are depicted as a vine. "You brought a vine out of Egypt; you drove out the foreigners and planted it. You made space for it; and it took deep root and filled the land. The hills were shaded by it, and its branches were like the beautiful cedars. It extended its branches toward the sea and its limbs toward the river."
3. A SIMILE or COMPARISON is when the resemblance between two objects, whether real or imaginary, is expressed in form.
3. A SIMILE or COMPARISON is when the similarity between two objects, whether they are real or imaginary, is shown in form.
Thus, we use a simile, when we say, "The actions of princes are like those great rivers, the course of which every one beholds, but their springs have been seen by few." "As the mountains are round about Jerusalem, so the Lord is round about his people." "The music of Caryl was like the memory of joys that are past, pleasant and mournful to the soul." "Our Indians are like those wild plants which thrive best in the shade, but which wither when exposed to the influence of the sun."
Thus, we use a simile when we say, "The actions of rulers are like those great rivers that everyone can see, but few have witnessed their sources." "Just as the mountains surround Jerusalem, so the Lord surrounds His people." "Caryl's music was like the memory of past joys, both beautiful and sad for the soul." "Our Indigenous people are like wild plants that thrive best in the shade but wither when exposed to the sun."
4. A METONYMY is where the cause is put for the effect, or the effect for the cause; the container for the thing contained; or the sign for the thing signified.
4. A METONYMY is when the cause is used for the effect, or the effect for the cause; the container is used for the thing inside it; or the sign is used for what it represents.
When we say, "They read Milton," the cause is put for the effect, meaning "Milton's works." "Gray hairs should be respected;" here the effect is put for the cause; meaning by "gray hairs," old age, which produces gray hairs. In the phrase, "The kettle boils," the container is substituted for the thing contained. "He addressed the chair;" that is, the person in the chair.
When we say, "They read Milton," we're referring to his works. "Gray hairs should be respected;" here, the effect is used to represent the cause, meaning by "gray hairs," we mean old age, which leads to gray hairs. In the phrase, "The kettle boils," the container is used instead of what it holds. "He addressed the chair;" which means the person in the chair.
5. A SYNECDOCHE OR COMPREHENSION. When the whole is put for a part, or a part for the whole; a genus for a species, or a species for a genus; in general, when any thing less, or any thing more, is put for the precise object meant, the figure is called a Synecdoche.
5. A SYNECDOCHE OR COMPREHENSION. When the whole is used to represent a part, or a part to represent the whole; a general category for a specific instance, or a specific instance for a general category; in general, when something smaller or something larger is used to refer to the exact thing intended, this figure is called a Synecdoche.
Thus, "A fleet of twenty sail, instead of, ships." "The horse is a noble animal;" "The dog is a faithful creature:" here an individual is put for the species. We sometimes use the "head" for the person, and the "waves" for the sea. In like manner, an attribute may be pat for a subject; as "Youth" for the young, the "deep" for the sea.
Thus, "A fleet of twenty sails, instead of ships." "The horse is a noble animal;" "The dog is a loyal creature:" here, an individual represents the species. We sometimes use "head" for person, and "waves" for the sea. Similarly, an attribute can stand for a subject; like "Youth" for the young, and "deep" for the sea.
6. PERSONIFICATION or PROSOPOPOEIA is that figure by which we attribute life and action to inanimate objects. When we say, "The ground thirsts for rain," or, "the earth smiles with plenty;" when we speak of "ambition's being restless," or, "a disease's being deceitful;" such expressions show the facility, with which the mind can accommodate the properties of living creatures to things that are inanimate.
6. PERSONIFICATION or PROSOPOPOEIA is the figure of speech where we give life and actions to non-living things. When we say, "The ground thirsts for rain," or, "the earth smiles with abundance;" when we talk about "ambition being restless," or, "a disease being deceitful;" these expressions show how easily the mind can apply the traits of living beings to inanimate objects.
The following are fine examples of this figure:
The following are great examples of this figure:
7. AN APOSTROPHE is an address to some person, either absent or dead, as if he were present and listening to us. The address is frequently made to a personified object; as, "Death is swallowed up in victory. O death! where is thy sting? O grave! where is thy victory?"
7. AN APOSTROPHE is an address to someone, either absent or deceased, as if they were present and listening to us. The address is often directed at a personified object; for example, "Death is swallowed up in victory. O death! where is your sting? O grave! where is your victory?"
"Weep on the rock of roaring winds, O maid of Inistore; bend thy fair head over the waves, thou fairer than the ghost of the hills, when it moves in a sun-beam at noon over the silence of Morveu."
"Weep on the rock of howling winds, O girl of Inistore; lean your lovely head over the waves, you who are more beautiful than the spirit of the hills, when it moves in a sunbeam at noon over the stillness of Morveu."
8. ANTITHESIS. Comparison is founded on the resemblance, antithesis, on the contrast or opposition, of two objects.
8. ANTITHESIS. Comparison is based on similarity, while antithesis is based on the contrast or opposition between two objects.
Example. "If you wish to enrich a person, study not to increase his stores, but to diminish his desires."
Example. "If you want to enrich someone, focus not on increasing their wealth, but on reducing their desires."
9. HYPERBOLE or EXAGGERATION consists in magnifying an object beyond its natural bounds. "As swift as the wind; as white as the snow; as slow as a snail;" and the like, are extravagant hyperboles.
9. HYPERBOLE or EXAGGERATION is about making something seem bigger or more extreme than it really is. "As fast as the wind; as white as snow; as slow as a snail;" and similar phrases are examples of over-the-top hyperbole.
"I saw their chief, tall as a rock of ice; his spear, the blasted fir; his shield, the rising moon; he sat on the shore, like a cloud of mist on the bills."
"I saw their leader, tall as a glacier; his spear, the withered fir tree; his shield, the glowing moon; he sat on the shore, like a fog hovering over the hills."
10. VISION is produced, when, in relating something that is past, we use the present tense, and describe it as actually, passing before our eyes.
10. VISION happens when, talking about something from the past, we use the present tense and describe it as if it’s actually unfolding right before our eyes.
11. INTERROGATION. The literal use of an interrogation, is to ask a question; but when men are strongly moved, whatever they would affirm or deny with great earnestness, they naturally put in the form of a question.
11. INTERROGATION. The literal meaning of an interrogation is to ask a question; however, when people are very passionate, whatever they strongly affirm or deny tends to come out as a question.
Thus Balaam expressed himself to Balak: "The Lord is not man, that he should lie, nor the son of man, that he should repeat. Hath he said it? and shall he not do it? Hath he spoken it? and shall he not make it good?" "Hast thou an arm like God? or canst thou thunder with a voice like him?"
Thus Balaam said to Balak: "The Lord is not a human being, so He doesn't lie, nor is He a mere mortal who changes His mind. Has He said something? Will He not do it? Has He spoken? Will He not make it happen?" "Do you have an arm like God? Or can you thunder with a voice like His?"
12. EXCLAMATIONS are the effect of strong emotions, such a surprise, admiration, joy, grief, and the like.
12. EXCLAMATIONS are expressions of strong emotions, such as surprise, admiration, joy, grief, and similar feelings.
"O that I had in the wilderness a lodging place of way-faring men!" "O that I had wings like a dove! for then would I fly away, and be at rest!"
"O, how I wish I had a place to stay in the wilderness for travelers!" "O, how I wish I had wings like a dove! Then I would fly away and find peace!"
13. IRONY is expressing ourselves in a manner contrary to our thoughts; not with a view to deceive, but to add force to our remarks. We can reprove one for his negligence, by saying, "You have taken great care, indeed."
13. IRONY is expressing ourselves in a way that contrasts with our actual thoughts; not to deceive, but to emphasize our remarks. We can criticize someone for their negligence by saying, "You've really taken great care, haven't you?"
The prophet Elijah adopted this figure, when he challenged the priests of Baal to prove the truth of their deity. "He mocked them, and said. Cry aloud for he is a god: either he is talking, or he is pursuing, or he is on a journey, or, peradventure, he sleepeth, and must be waked."
The prophet Elijah took on this role when he challenged the priests of Baal to prove that their god was real. "He mocked them and said, 'Shout louder, for he is a god; maybe he is deep in thought, or busy, or on a trip, or perhaps he is sleeping and needs to be awakened.'"
14. AMPLIFICATION or CLIMAX consists in heightening all the circumstances of an object or action, which we desire to place in a strong light.
14. AMPLIFICATION or CLIMAX involves emphasizing all the details of an object or action that we want to highlight.
Cicero gives a lively instance of this figure, when he says, "It is a crime to put a Roman citizen in bonds: it is the height of guilt to scourge him; little less than parricide to put him to death: what name, then, shall I give to the act of crucifying him?"
Cicero provides a vivid example of this point when he says, "It's a crime to put a Roman citizen in chains: it's the worst kind of wrongdoing to whip him; nearly just as bad as killing your own father to execute him: so what term should I use for the act of crucifying him?"
KEY.
Corrections of the False Syntax arranged under the Rules and Notes.
RULE 4. Frequent commission of sin hardens men in it. Great pains have been taken, &c.—is seldom found. The sincere are, &c.—is happy. What avail, &c.—Disappointments sink—the renewal of hope gives, &c.—is without limit, has been conferred upon us.—Thou canst not heal—but thou mayst do, &c.—consists the happiness, &c.—Who touchedst, or didst touch Isaiah's hallowed lips with fire.
RULE 4. Frequently committing sin hardens people to it. Great efforts have been made, &c.—is rarely seen. The sincere are, &c.—is joyful. What does it matter, &c.—Disappointments weigh down—the renewal of hope brings, &c.—is limitless, has been given to us.—You cannot heal—but you can do, &c.—consists the happiness, &c.—Who touched, or did touch Isaiah's sacred lips with fire.
Note 1. And wilt thou never be to Heaven resigned?—And who had great abilities, &c.
Note 1. And would you never accept your fate in Heaven?—And who had great abilities, etc.
Note 2. Are peace and honor.—was controversy.
Are peace and honor? — controversy.
RULE 7. Them that you visited.—him that was mentioned.—he who preached repentance, &c.—they who died.—he who succeeded.
RULE 7. Them that you visited.—him that was mentioned.—he who preached repentance, etc.—they who died.—he who succeeded.
RULE 8. Time and tide wait, &c.—remove mountains.—are both uncertain.—dwell with, &c.—affect the mind, &c.—What signify the counsel and care, &c.—are now perished.—Why are whiteness and coldness, &c.—bind them continually, &c.—render their possessor, &c.—There are error and discrepance—which show, &c.
RULE 8. Time and tide wait, &c.—remove mountains.—are both uncertain.—dwell with, &c.—affect the mind, &c.—What does the advice and concern, &c.—are now gone.—Why are brightness and coldness, &c.—bind them constantly, &c.—render their owner, &c.—There are mistakes and discrepancies—which show, &c.
RULE 9. Is the same in idea.—is in the porphyry.—is remarkable, &c.—which moves merely as it is moved.—affects us, &c.—Man's happiness or misery is, in a great measure, &c.—for it may be, &c.—was blameworthy.
RULE 9. Is the same concept.—is in the porphyry.—is notable, &c.—which moves only as it is moved.—affects us, &c.—A person's happiness or misery is, to a large extent, &c.—because it might be, &c.—was blameworthy.
RULE 10. The nation is powerful.—The fleet was seen, &c.—The church has, &c.—is, or ought to be, the object, &c.—it is feeble.
RULE 10. The nation is powerful.—The fleet was seen, etc.—The church has, etc.—is, or should be, the object, etc.—it is weak.
RULE 11. My people do, &c.—The multitude eagerly pursue pleasure as their, &c.—were divided in their sentiments, and they have referred, &c.—The people rejoice—give them sorrow.
RULE 11. My people do, etc.—The crowd eagerly chases pleasure as their, etc.—were divided in their opinions, and they have chosen, etc.—The people celebrate—bring them grief.
RULE 12. Homer's works are, &c.—Asa's heart. James Hart's book.
RULE 12. Homer's works are, etc.—Asa's heart. James Hart's book.
Note 1. It was the men, women, and children's lot, &c. or, It was the lot of the men, women, and children.—Peter, John, and Andrew's, &c.
Note 1. It was the men, women, and children's share, etc. or, It was the share of the men, women, and children.—Peter, John, and Andrew's, etc.
Note 2. This is Campbell the poet's production; or, The production of Campbell, &c.—The silk was purchased at Brown's the mercer and haberdasher.
Note 2. This is Campbell the poet's work; or, The work of Campbell, etc.—The silk was bought at Brown's, the fabric store and accessories shop.
Note 4. The pupil's composing, &c.—rule's being observed.—of the president's neglecting to lay it before the council.
Note 4. The student's composing, etc.—rules being followed.—of the president's failure to present it to the council.
RULE 13. Of his audience.—put it on Jacob.—sprinkle them—and they shall, &c.—of his reputation.
RULE 13. Of his audience.—put it on Jacob.—sprinkle them—and they shall, &c.—of his reputation.
Note. You were blamed; you were worthy.—where were you?—how fat were you?
Note. You were blamed; you were worthy.—where were you?—how much did you weigh?
RULE 14. Who hast been, &c.—who is the sixth that has lost his life by this means.
RULE 14. Who has been, &c.—who is the sixth that has lost his life by this means.
Who all my sense confinedst; or, didst confine.
Who all my senses confined?
Note. And who broughtest him forth out of Ur.
Note. And who brought him out of Ur.
RULE 15, Who shall be sent, &c.—This is the man who, &c.
RULE 15, Who shall be sent, &c.—This is the person who, &c.
RULE 16. They to whom much is given, &c.—with whom you associate &c.—whom I greatly respect, &c.—whom we ought to love, and to whom, &c—They whom conscience, &c.—With whom did you walk?—Whom did you see?—To whom did you give the book?
RULE 16. They to whom much is given, etc.—with whom you associate etc.—whom I greatly respect, etc.—whom we ought to love, and to whom, etc.—They whom conscience, etc.—With whom did you walk?—Whom did you see?—To whom did you give the book?
RULE 17. Who gave John those books? We.—him who lives in Pearl street—My brother and he.—She and I.
RULE 17. Who gave John those books? We.—him who lives on Pearl Street—My brother and him.—She and me.
RULE 18: Note 2. Thirty tuns.—twenty feet—one hundred fathoms.
RULE 18: Note 2. Thirty tuns.—twenty feet—one hundred fathoms.
Note 6. He bought a pair of new shoes—piece of elegant furniture.—pair of fine horses—tract of poor land.
Note 6. He bought a pair of new shoes—a piece of elegant furniture—a pair of fine horses—a tract of poor land.
Note 7. Are still more difficult to be comprehended.—most doubtful, or precarious way, &c.—This model comes nearer perfection than any I, &c.
Note 7. Are still more difficult to understand.—most questionable, or unstable way, &c.—This model is closer to perfection than any I, &c.
RULE 19: Note. That sort.—these two hours.—This kind, &c.—He saw one person, or more than one, enter the garden.
RULE 19: Note. That type.—these two hours.—This sort, &c.—He saw one person, or more than one, enter the garden.
Note 2. Better than himself.—is so small.—his station may be, is bound by the laws.
Note 2. Better than himself.—is so small.—his station may be, is bound by the laws.
Note 3. On each side, &c.—took each his censer.
Note 3. On each side, etc.—took each his censer.
RULE 20. Whom did they, &c.—They whom opulence,—whom luxury, &c.—Him and them we know, &c.—Her that is negligent, &c.—my brother and me &c.—Whom did they send, &c.—Them whom he, &c.
RULE 20. Whom did they, etc.—They whom wealth, —whom luxury, etc.—Him and them we know, etc.—Her who is careless, etc.—my brother and me etc.—Whom did they send, etc.—Them whom he, etc.
RULE 21. It is I.—If I were he.—it is he, indeed.—Whom do you, &c.—Who do men say, &c.—and who say ye, &c.—whom do you imagine it to have been?—it was I; but you knew that it was he.
RULE 21. It is I.—If I were him.—It is him, indeed.—Whom do you, etc.—Who do people say, etc.—and who do you say, etc.—whom do you think it was?—It was I; but you knew it was he.
RULE 25. Bid him come—durst not do it.—Hear him read, &c.—makes us approve and reject, &c.—better to live—than to outlive, &c.—to wrestle.
RULE 25. Ask him to come—dare not do it.—Listen to him read, etc.—makes us approve and reject, etc.—better to live—than to outlive, etc.—to wrestle.
RULE 26: Note. The taking of pains: or, without taking pains, &c.—The changing of times,—the removing and setting up of kings.
RULE 26: Note. The effort involved: or, without making an effort, &c.—The changing of eras,—the displacement and establishment of rulers.
RULE 28: Note 3. He did me—I had written—he came home.—befallen my cousin—he would have gone.—already risen.—is begun.—is spoken.—would have written—had they written, &c.
RULE 28: Note 3. He did what I wrote—he came home.—happened to my cousin—he would have gone.—already risen.—has started.—is talked about.—would have written—had they written, & etc.
RULE 29: Note 1. It cannot, therefore, be, &c.—he was not often pleasing.—should never be separated.—We may live happily, &c.
RULE 29: Note 1. It can't, therefore, be, &c.—he was not often enjoyable.—should never be apart.—We can live happily, &c.
RULE 30: Note. I don't know any thing; or, I know nothing, &c.—I did not see anybody; or, I saw nobody, &c.—Nothing ever affects her.—and take no shape or semblance, &c.—There can be nothing, &c.—Neither precept nor discipline is so forcible as example.
RULE 30: Note. I don't know anything; or, I know nothing, etc.—I didn't see anyone; or, I saw nobody, etc.—Nothing ever affects her.—and take no shape or form, etc.—There can be nothing, etc.—Neither rule nor training is as powerful as example.
RULE 31. For himself.—among themselves.—with whom he is, &c.—With whom did, &c.—From whom did you receive instruction?
RULE 31. For himself.—among themselves.—with whom he is, &c.—With whom did, &c.—From whom did you receive instruction?
RULE 33. My brother and he, &c.—You and I, &c. He and I—John and he, &c.—Between you and me, &c.
RULE 33. My brother and him, &c.—You and me, &c. He and I—John and him, &c.—Between you and me, &c.
RULE 34. And entreat me, &c.—and acting differently, &c.
RULE 34. And beg me, &c.—and behaving differently, &c.
Note 1. But he may return—but he will write no more.
Note 1. But he might come back—but he won’t write anymore.
Note 2. Unless it rain.—If he acquire riches, &c.
Note 2. Unless it rains.—If he acquires riches, &c.
RULE 35. Than I—as well as he, than they.—but he.—but he and I.—but them who had gone astray.
RULE 35. Than I—as well as he, than they.—but he.—but he and I.—but them who had gone astray.
Promiscuous Examples.—Him who is from eternity, &c.—depends all the happiness,—which exists, &c.—the enemies whom, &c.—Is it I or he whom you requested?—Though great have been,—sincerely acknowledge.—There was, in the metropolis.—exercising our memories.—was consumed.—Affluence may give—but it will not.—of this world often choke.—Them that honor,—and they that despise.—I intended to call last week.—the fields look fresh and gay.—very neatly, finely woven paper.—where I saw Gen. Andrew Jackson, him who.—Take the first two,—last three.—thirty feet high.—a union,—a hypothesis.—I have seen him to whom you wrote, he would have come back, or returned.—understands the nature,—he rejects.—If thou study,—thou wilt become.—is not properly attended to.—He knew.—therefore, to have done it,—than the title.—very independently.—duty to do.—my friend's entering.—is the best specimen, or it comes nearer perfection than any, &c.—blow them, will go, &c.—Each of those two authors has his merit.—Reason's whole,—lie in.—strikes the mind,—than if the parts had been adjusted,—with perfect symmetry.
Promiscuous Examples.—He who is eternal, &c.—depends all the happiness,—which exists, &c.—the enemies whom, &c.—Is it I or he whom you asked for?—Though great have been,—sincerely acknowledge.—There was, in the city.—exercising our memories.—was consumed.—Wealth may give—but it will not.—of this world often choke.—Those that honor,—and those that despise.—I intended to call last week.—the fields look fresh and bright.—very neatly, finely woven paper.—where I saw Gen. Andrew Jackson, him who.—Take the first two,—last three.—thirty feet high.—a union,—a hypothesis.—I have seen him to whom you wrote, he would have come back, or returned.—understands the nature,—he rejects.—If you study,—you will become.—is not properly attended to.—He knew.—therefore, to have done it,—than the title.—very independently.—duty to do.—my friend's entrance.—is the best example, or it comes closer to perfection than any, &c.—blow them, will go, &c.—Each of those two authors has his merit.—Reason's whole,—lie in.—strikes the mind,—than if the parts had been adjusted,—with perfect symmetry.
Satire does not carry in it.—composes the triangle.—persons' opportunities were ever.—It has been reported.—should never be.—situation in which.—is thoroughly versed in his.—are the soul,—follows little.—An army presents.—are the duties of a christian.—happier than he.—always have inclined, and which always will incline him to offend.—which require great.—Them that honor me, will I.—has opinions peculiar to itself.—that it may be said he attained monarchical.—hast permitted,—wilt deliver.—was formerly propagated.—the measure is,—unworthy your.—were faithless.—After I had visited.—nor shall I, consent.—Yesterday I intended to walk out, but was.—make or are thirteen,—leave three.—If he go,—make the eighth time that he will have visited.—is nobler.—was possessed, or that ever can be.—one great edifice,—smaller ones.—honesty is.—it to be.—will follow me,—I shall dwell.—is gone astray.—he could, not have done.—feeling a propensity.
Satire doesn’t carry in it. — composes the triangle. — persons' opportunities were ever. — It has been reported. — should never be. — situation in which. — is thoroughly versed in his. — are the soul, — follows little. — An army presents. — are the duties of a Christian. — happier than he. — always have inclined, and which always will incline him to offend. — which require great. — Those that honor me, will I. — has opinions unique to itself. — that it may be said he attained monarchical. — hast permitted, — wilt deliver. — was formerly propagated. — the measure is, — unworthy your. — were faithless. — After I had visited. — nor shall I, consent. — Yesterday I intended to walk out, but was. — make or are thirteen, — leave three. — If he goes, — make the eighth time that he will have visited. — is nobler. — was possessed, or that ever can be. — one great edifice, — smaller ones. — honesty is. — it to be. — will follow me, — I shall dwell. — is gone astray. — he could not have done. — feeling a tendency.
PUNCTUATION.
COMMA.
Corrections of the Exercises in Punctuation.
RULE 1. Idleness is the great fomenter of all corruptions in the human heart. The friend of order has made half his way to virtue. All finery is a sign of littleness.
RULE 1. Laziness is the biggest cause of all the corruption in the human heart. A person who values order is halfway to being virtuous. All extravagance is a sign of pettiness.
RULE 2. The indulgence of a harsh disposition, is the introduction to future misery. To be totally indifferent to praise or censure, is a real defect in character. The intermixture of evil in human society, serves to exercise the suffering graces and virtues of the good.
RULE 2. Having a harsh personality leads to future unhappiness. Being completely unconcerned about praise or criticism is a genuine flaw in one's character. The presence of evil in society helps to strengthen the compassionate qualities and virtues of good people.
RULE 3. Charity, like the sun, brightens all its objects. Gentleness is, in truth, the great avenue to mutual enjoyment. You, too, have your failings. Humility and knowledge, with poor apparel, excel pride and ignorance, under costly attire. The best men often experience disappointments. Advice should be seasonably administered. No assumed behavior can always hide the real character.
RULE 3. Charity, like the sun, illuminates everything around it. Kindness is, in fact, the key to shared happiness. You have your flaws as well. Humility and knowledge, even when dressed modestly, are better than pride and ignorance in expensive clothing. The best people often face disappointments. Advice should be given at the right time. No fake attitude can consistently conceal one's true nature.
RULE 4. Lord, thou hast been our dwelling place in all generations. Continue, my dear child, to make virtue thy chief study. Canst thou expect, thou betrayer of innocence, to escape the hand of vengeance? Death, the king of terrors, chose a prime minister. Hope, the balm of life, sooths us under every misfortune. Confucius, the great Chinese philosopher, was eminently good, as well as wise. The patriarch Joseph is an illustrious example of true piety.
RULE 4. Lord, you have been our home in every generation. Keep at it, my dear child, and make virtue your main focus. Can you really expect, you betrayer of innocence, to avoid the consequences? Death, the ultimate fear, selected a prime minister. Hope, the comfort of life, reassures us in every struggle. Confucius, the great Chinese philosopher, was not only wise but also incredibly good. The patriarch Joseph is a shining example of true faith.
RULE 5. Peace of mind being secured, we may smile at misfortune. To enjoy present pleasure, he sacrificed his future ease and reputation. His talents, formed for great enterprises, could not fail of rendering him conspicuous. The path of piety and virtue, pursued with a firm and constant spirit, will assuredly lead to happiness. All mankind compose one family, assembled under the eye of one common Father.
RULE 5. With peace of mind in place, we can smile at setbacks. To enjoy the pleasures of the moment, he gave up his future comfort and reputation. His talents, destined for great things, were bound to make him stand out. The path of faith and virtue, followed with determination and consistency, will definitely lead to happiness. All humanity is one family, gathered under the watchful eye of one common Father.
KEY TO THE EXERCISES.
RULE 6. We have no reason to complain of the lot of man, nor of the mutability of the world. Sensuality contaminates the body, depresses the understanding, deadens the moral feelings of the heart, and degrades man from his rank in creation.
RULE 6. We have no reason to complain about the human condition or the nature of the world. Sensuality taints the body, weakens our understanding, dulls our moral feelings, and lowers humanity's place in creation.
Self-conceit, presumption, and obstinacy, blast the prospect of many a youth. He is alternately supported by his father, his uncle, and his elder brother. The man of virtue and honor, will be trusted, relied upon, and esteemed. Conscious guilt renders one mean-spirited, timorous, and base. An upright mind will never be at a loss to discern what is just and true, lovely, honest, and of good report. Habits of reading, writing, and thinking, are the indispensable qualifications of a good student. The great business of life is, to be employed in doing justly, loving mercy, and walking humbly with our God. To live soberly, righteously, and piously, comprehends the whole of our duty.
Self-importance, arrogance, and stubbornness ruin the future for many young people. He is supported at different times by his father, uncle, and older brother. A person of integrity and honor will gain trust, reliance, and respect. Feelings of guilt make a person small-minded, fearful, and low. A moral mind will always recognize what is right and true, beautiful, honest, and commendable. Reading, writing, and thinking skills are essential for a good student. The main purpose of life is to act justly, show mercy, and walk humbly with our God. To live wisely, fairly, and with reverence covers all our responsibilities.
In our health, life, possessions, connexions, pleasures, there are causes of decay imperceptibly working. Deliberate slowly, execute promptly. An idle, trifling society, is near akin to such as is corrupting. This unhappy person had been seriously, affectionately admonished, but in vain.
In our health, life, belongings, connections, and pleasures, there are hidden causes of decline at work. Think carefully, act quickly. A lazy, superficial society is closely related to one that is decaying. This unfortunate person had been sincerely and lovingly warned, but it was all for nothing.
RULE 7. How much better it is to get wisdom than gold. The friendships of the world can exist no longer than interest cements them. Eat what is set before you. They who excite envy, will easily incur censure. A man who is of a detracting spirit, will misconstrue the most innocent words that can be put together. Many of the evils which occasion our complaints of the world, are wholly imaginary.
RULE 7. How much better it is to gain wisdom than gold. The friendships in this world last only as long as there's something to gain from them. Eat what is offered to you. Those who spark envy will easily draw criticism. A person with a negative attitude will twist even the most innocent words you could say. Many of the problems we complain about in the world are completely imaginary.
The gentle mind is like the smooth stream, which reflects every object in its just proportion, and in its fairest colors. In that unaffected civility which springs from a gentle mind, there is an incomparable charm. The Lord, whom I serve, is eternal. This, is the man we saw yesterday.
The gentle mind is like a smooth stream, reflecting everything in its true proportions and most beautiful colors. That natural politeness from a gentle mind has an unmatched charm. The Lord I serve is eternal. This is the man we saw yesterday.
RULE 8. Idleness brings forward and nourishes many bad passions. True friendship will, at all times, avoid a rough or careless behavior. Health and peace, a moderate fortune, and a few friends, sum up all the undoubted articles of temporal felicity. Truth is fair and artless, simple and sincere, uniform and consistent. Intemperance destroys the strength of our bodies and the vigor of our minds.
RULE 8. Being idle creates and fuels many negative feelings. True friendship will always steer clear of rude or careless behavior. Good health, peace of mind, a comfortable financial situation, and a few good friends represent all the undeniable elements of real happiness. Truth is straightforward, genuine, simple, and consistent. Excessive indulgence weakens our bodies and diminishes our mental energy.
RULE 9. As a companion, he was severe and satirical; as a friend, captious and dangerous. If the spring put forth no blossoms, in summer there will be no beauty, and in autumn, no fruit. So, if youth be trifled away without improvement, manhood will be contemptible, and old age, miserable.
RULE 9. As a companion, he was harsh and sarcastic; as a friend, critical and risky. If spring doesn’t produce any blossoms, there will be no beauty in summer, and no fruit in autumn. Similarly, if youth is wasted without growth, manhood will be looked down upon, and old age will be filled with regret.
RULE 10. They believed he was dead. He did not know that I was the man. I knew she was still alive. The greatest misery is, to be condemned by our own hearts. The greatest misery that we can endure, is, to be condemned by our own hearts.
RULE 10. They thought he was dead. He didn’t know that I was the one. I knew she was still alive. The worst pain is being judged by our own hearts. The worst pain we can experience is being judged by our own hearts.
SEMICOLON.
RULE 1. The path of truth is a plain and safe path; that of falsehood is a perplexing maze. Heaven is the region of gentleness and friendship; hell, of fierceness and animosity. As there is a worldly happiness, which God perceives to be no other than disguised misery; as there are worldly honors, which, in his estimation, are a reproach; so, there is a worldly wisdom, which, in his sight, is foolishness.
RULE 1. The path of truth is clear and safe; the path of falsehood is a confusing maze. Heaven is a place of kindness and friendship; hell, a place of anger and hostility. Just as there is a worldly happiness that God sees as nothing more than hidden misery, and worldly honors that He considers a disgrace, there is also a worldly wisdom that He views as foolishness.
COLON.
RULE 1. The three great enemies to tranquillity, are vice, superstition, and idleness: vice, which poisons and disturbs the mind with bad passions; superstition, which fills it with imaginary terrors; idleness, which loads it with tediousness and disgust.
RULE 1. The three main enemies of peace are bad habits, superstition, and laziness: bad habits, which poison and disturb the mind with negative emotions; superstition, which fills it with made-up fears; laziness, which weighs it down with boredom and frustration.
FOOTNOTES.
[1] The word thing, from the Saxon verb thingian, to think, is almost unlimited in its meaning. It may be applied to every animal and creature in the universe. By the term creature, I mean that which has been created; as, a dog, water, dirt. This word is also frequently applied to actions; as, "To get drunk is a beastly thing." In this phrase, it signifies neither animal nor creature; but it denotes merely an action; therefore this action is the thing.
[1] The word thing, stemming from the Saxon verb thingian, meaning to think, has a nearly limitless range of meanings. It can refer to any animal or entity in the universe. When I say creature, I mean anything that has been created, like a dog, water, or dirt. This word is also often used to describe actions; for example, "Getting drunk is a terrible thing." In this context, it doesn't refer to an animal or entity; it simply represents an action, so that action is the thing.
[2] Genii, imaginary spirits: geniuses, persons of great mental abilities.
[2] Genii, imaginary spirits: geniuses, people with exceptional mental skills.
[3] Indexes, when pointers or tables of contents are meant: indices, when referring to algebraic quantities.
[3] Indexes refer to pointers or tables of contents; indices refer to algebraic quantities.
[4] In the note next preceding, it is asserted, that my, thy, his, her, our your, and their, are personal pronouns. What can more clearly demonstrate the correctness of that assertion, than this latter construction of the word theirs? All admit, that, in the construction, "The faith of them," the word them, is a personal pronoun: and for this conclusive reason:—it represents a noun understood. What, then, is their, in the phrase, "their faith?" Is it not obvious, that, if them is a personal pronoun, their must be, also? for the latter represents the same noun as the former.
[4] In the previous note, it was stated that my, your, his, her, our, and their are personal pronouns. What could better prove the accuracy of that statement than this recent use of the word theirs? Everyone agrees that in the phrase "the faith of them," the word them is a personal pronoun; and the reason is clear: it represents an understood noun. So, what is their in the phrase "their faith?" Isn’t it clear that if them is a personal pronoun, then their must be too? Because the latter refers to the same noun as the former.
[5] The second person singular of do, when used as a principal verb, is spelled with an e; thus, "What thou doest, do quickly;" but when employed as an auxiliary, the e should be omitted; as, "Dost thou not behold a rock with its head of heath?"
[5] The second person singular of do, when used as a main verb, is spelled with an e; so, "What you do, do quickly;" but when used as an auxiliary, the e should be dropped; as in, "Dost you not see a rock with its head of heath?"
[6] The men were drunk; i.e. inebriated. The toasts were drank.
[6] The men were drunk; that is, intoxicated. The toasts were consumed.
[7] Gotten is nearly obsolete. Its compound forgotten, is still in good use.
[7] "Gotten" is almost outdated. Its compound form "forgotten" is still widely used.
[8] Ridden is nearly obsolete.
Ridden is almost obsolete.
[9] Sang and sank should not be used in familiar style.
[9] "Sang" and "sank" shouldn't be used in casual writing.
[10] Spitten is nearly obsolete.
Spitten is almost obsolete.
[11] The correctness and importance of this rule appear to be so obvious, as to render it not a little surprising, that any writer, possessing the least degree of rhetorical taste, should reject it. I am bold to affirm, that it is observed by every correct reader and speaker; and yet, strange as it may seem, it is generally violated by those printers who punctuate by the ear, and all others who are influenced by their pernicious example; thus, "The head, the heart and the hands, should be constantly and actively employed in doing good." Why do they not omit the comma where the conjunction is understood? It would be doing no greater violence to the principles of elocution; thus, "The head the heart and the hands, should be, &c." or thus, "The head the heart, and the hands, should be employed," &c. Who does not perceive that the latter pause, where the conjunction is expressed, is as necessary as the former, where the conjunction is understood? And, since this is the case, what fair objection can be made to the following method of punctuation? "The head, the heart, and the hands, should be constantly and actively employed in doing good;" "She is a woman, gentle, sensible, well-educated, and religious."
[11] The correctness and importance of this rule seem so obvious that it’s surprising any writer with even a bit of rhetorical sense would reject it. I boldly state that every proper reader and speaker follows it; yet, oddly enough, it’s often ignored by those printers who punctuate based on how things sound, along with anyone else influenced by their harmful example. For instance, "The head, the heart and the hands, should be constantly and actively employed in doing good." Why don’t they drop the comma where the conjunction is implied? It wouldn’t be more harmful to elocution principles; for example, "The head the heart and the hands, should be, &c." or "The head the heart, and the hands, should be employed," &c. Who doesn’t see that the pause in the second case, where the conjunction is stated, is just as necessary as the pause in the first case, where it’s implied? So, if this is true, what reasonable objection can be raised against the following punctuation method? "The head, the heart, and the hands, should be constantly and actively employed in doing good;" "She is a woman, gentle, sensible, well-educated, and religious."
[12] As a considerable pause in pronunciation is necessary between the last noun and the verb, a comma should be inserted to denote it; but as no pause is allowable between the last adjective and the noun, or between the last adverb and the verb, the comma, in such instances, is properly omitted; thus, "David was a brave, wise, and pious man."
[12] Since a noticeable pause in speech is needed between the last noun and the verb, a comma should be added to indicate this; however, no pause should occur between the last adjective and the noun, or between the last adverb and the verb, so in these cases, the comma is appropriately left out. For example, "David was a brave, wise, and pious man."
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!